Table of Contents

 

 

UNITED STATES

SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION

Washington, D.C. 20549

 

 

FORM 10-K

 

 

FOR ANNUAL AND TRANSITION REPORTS

PURSUANT TO SECTIONS 13 OR 15(d) OF THE

SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934

 

x ANNUAL REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934

For the fiscal year ended December 31, 2009

OR

 

¨ TRANSITION REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934

For the transition period from                     to                     

Commission file number 0-17089

 

 

BOSTON PRIVATE FINANCIAL HOLDINGS, INC.

(Exact name of registrant as specified in its charter)

 

 

 

Commonwealth of Massachusetts   04-2976299

(State or other jurisdiction of

incorporation or organization)

 

(I.R.S. Employer

Identification Number)

Ten Post Office Square

Boston, Massachusetts

  02109
(Address of principal executive offices)   (Zip Code)

(Registrant’s telephone number, including area code): (617) 912-1900

Securities registered pursuant to Section 12(b) of the Act:

 

Title of Each Class

 

Name of Each Exchange on Which Registered

Common Stock

  The NASDAQ Stock Market LLC

Securities registered pursuant to Section 12(g) of the Act:

None

 

 

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant is a well-known seasoned issuer, as defined in Rule 405 of the Securities Act.    Yes   ¨     No   x

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant is not required to file reports pursuant to Section 13 or Section 15(d) of the Securities Act.    Yes   ¨     No   x

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant (1) has filed all reports required to be filed by Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to file such reports), and (2) has been subject to such filing requirements for the past 90 days.    Yes   x     No   ¨

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant has submitted electronically and posted on its corporate Web site, if any, every Interactive Data File required to be submitted and posted pursuant to Rule 405 of Regulation S-T during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to submit and post such files).    Yes   ¨     No   ¨

Indicate by check mark if disclosure of delinquent filers pursuant to Item 405 of Regulation S-K is not contained herein, and will not be contained, to the best of registrant’s knowledge, in definitive proxy or information statements incorporated by reference in Part III of this Form 10-K or any amendment to this Form 10-K.   ¨

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant is a large accelerated filer, an accelerated filer, a non-accelerated filer, or a smaller reporting company.

 

  Large accelerated filer  ¨         Accelerated filer  x       

Non-accelerated filer  ¨     

(Do not check if a Smaller reporting company)

  Smaller reporting company ¨     

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant is a shell company (as defined in Rule 12b-2 of the Exchange Act.)    Yes   ¨     No   x

The aggregate market value of the voting and non-voting common equity held by non-affiliates of the registrant, computed by reference to the last reported sales price on the NASDAQ Global Select Market on June 30, 2009 was $303,734,767.

The number of shares of the registrant’s common stock outstanding on March 5, 2010 was 68,792,790.

Documents Incorporated by Reference:

Portions of the registrant’s proxy statement for the Company’s 2010 Annual Meeting of Stockholders are incorporated by reference in Item 5 of Part II and Items 10, 11, 12, 13, and 14 of Part III.

 

 

 


Table of Contents

TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

PART I

     

ITEM 1

   BUSINESS    1
  

I.      General

   1
  

II.     Reportable Segments

   1
  

III.   Regulatory Considerations

   4
  

IV.   Taxation

   16
  

V.    Internet Address

   17

ITEM 1A

   RISK FACTORS    17

ITEM 1B

   UNRESOLVED STAFF COMMENTS    27

ITEM 2

   PROPERTIES    27

ITEM 3

   LEGAL PROCEEDINGS    27

ITEM 4

   (RESERVED)    27

PART II

     

ITEM 5

  

MARKET FOR REGISTRANT’S COMMON EQUITY, RELATED STOCKHOLDER MATTERS AND ISSUER REPURCHASES OF EQUITY SECURITIES

   28
  

I.      Market for Common Stock

   28
  

II.     Dividends

   28
  

III.   Securities Authorized for Issuance Under Equity Compensation Plans

   29
  

IV.   Recent Sales of Unregistered Securities

   29
  

V.    Issuer Repurchases

   29
  

VI.   Performance Graph

   30

ITEM 6

   SELECTED FINANCIAL DATA    31

ITEM 7

  

MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

   33
   Executive Summary    33
  

Private Banking

   34
  

Investment Management

   35
  

Wealth Advisory

   36
   Critical Accounting Policies    37
   Results of Operations    41
  

Net Interest Income and Margin

   41
  

Rate-Volume Analysis

   42
  

Condensed Consolidated Statement of Operations and Discussion

   45
   Financial Condition    49
  

Condensed Consolidated Balance Sheet and Discussion

   49
   Loan Portfolio and Credit Quality    53
   Liquidity    61
  

Consolidated cash flow comparison for the years ended December 31, 2009 and 2008

   63
  

Consolidated cash flow comparison for the years ended December 31, 2008 and 2007

   64
   Capital Resources    64
   Contractual Obligations    65
   Off-Balance Sheet Arrangements    65
   Impact of Accounting Estimates    66
   Impact of Inflation and Changing Prices    66
   Recent Accounting Pronouncements    66

ITEM 7A

   QUANTITATIVE AND QUALITATIVE DISCLOSURES ABOUT MARKET RISK    67

ITEM 8

   FINANCIAL STATEMENTS AND SUPPLEMENTARY DATA    71

ITEM 9

  

CHANGES IN AND DISAGREEMENTS WITH ACCOUNTANTS ON ACCOUNTING AND FINANCIAL DISCLOSURE

   148

ITEM 9A

   CONTROLS AND PROCEDURES    148

ITEM 9B

   OTHER INFORMATION    149

PART III

     

ITEM 10

   DIRECTORS, EXECUTIVE OFFICERS AND CORPORATE GOVERNANCE    150

ITEM 11

   EXECUTIVE COMPENSATION    150

ITEM 12

  

SECURITY OWNERSHIP OF CERTAIN BENEFICIAL OWNERS AND MANAGEMENT AND RELATED STOCKHOLDER MATTERS

   150

ITEM 13

  

CERTAIN RELATIONSHIPS, RELATED TRANSACTIONS AND DIRECTOR INDEPENDENCE

   150

ITEM 14

   PRINCIPAL ACCOUNTANT FEES AND SERVICES    150

PART IV

     

ITEM 15

   EXHIBITS AND FINANCIAL STATEMENT SCHEDULES    150
   SIGNATURES    155
   EXHIBITS   
   CERTIFICATIONS   

 

i


Table of Contents

The discussions set forth below and elsewhere herein may contain statements that may be considered forward-looking statements within the meaning of Section 27A of the Securities Act of 1933, as amended (the “Securities Act”), and Section 21E of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended (the “Exchange Act”). All statements, other than statements of historical facts, including statements regarding our strategy, effectiveness of investment programs, evaluations of future interest rate trends and liquidity, expectations as to growth in assets, deposits and results of operations, success of acquisitions, future operations, market position, financial position, and the impact on our results of market conditions and prevailing and future interest rates and prospects, plans and objectives of management are forward-looking statements.

Actual results, performance or achievements could differ materially from those contemplated, expressed or implied by the forward-looking statements contained or incorporated by reference in this document. Important factors that could cause actual results to differ materially from our forward-looking statements are set forth in Part II, Item 7, “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations” and Item 1A, “Risk Factors.” Forward-looking statements are based on the current assumptions and beliefs of management and are only expectations of future results. Our actual results could differ materially from those projected in the forward-looking statements as a result of, among other factors, adverse conditions in the capital and debt markets, and the impact of such conditions on our private banking, asset management and investment advisory activities; changes in interest rates; competitive pressures from other financial institutions; the effects of a continuing deterioration in general economic conditions on a national basis or in the local markets in which we operate, including changes which adversely affect borrowers’ ability to service and repay our loans; changes in loan defaults and charge-off rates; changes in the value of securities and other assets; the adequacy of loan loss reserves or deposit levels necessitating increased borrowing to fund loans and investments; the passing of adverse government regulation; the risk that goodwill and intangibles recorded in our financial statements will become impaired; risks related to the identification and implementation of acquisitions and changes in assumptions used in making such forward-looking statements. This is not an exhaustive list and as a result of variations in any of these factors actual results may differ materially from any forward-looking statements.

Forward-looking statements speak only as of the date they are made. You should not place undue reliance on these forward-looking statements. We will not update forward-looking statements to reflect facts, assumptions, circumstances or events which have changed after a forward-looking statement was made.

 

ii


Table of Contents

PART I

ITEM 1. BUSINESS

I. General

Boston Private Financial Holdings, Inc. (the “Company” or “BPFH”) was incorporated on September 2, 1987, under the laws of The Commonwealth of Massachusetts. On July 1, 1988, the Company registered with the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System (the “FRB”) as a bank holding company under the Bank Holding Company Act of 1956, as amended (the “BHCA”), and became the parent holding company of Boston Private Bank & Trust Company (“Boston Private Bank”), a trust company chartered by The Commonwealth of Massachusetts and insured by the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation (the “FDIC”). In addition to Boston Private Bank, the Company has three other consolidated Private Banking affiliate partners, two consolidated Investment Management affiliate partners, and three consolidated Wealth Advisory affiliate partners. The Company conducts substantially all of its business through its three reportable segments, Private Banking, Investment Management, and Wealth Advisory. The parent company (Boston Private Financial Holdings Inc.) (the “Holding Company”) includes the operations of the Holding Company and equity in earnings of the equity method investees. All significant intercompany accounts and transactions have been eliminated in consolidation.

As of December 31, 2009 the Company holds approximately 45% equity interest in Coldstream Holdings, Inc. (“Coldstream”). Coldstream is the parent of Coldstream Capital Management, Inc. (“Coldstream Capital”), a registered investment adviser, and Coldstream Securities, Inc., a registered broker dealer. Coldstream’s financial results are accounted for using the equity method, and are included in other assets. For segment reporting purposes, the equity in earnings of Coldstream is included with the Holding Company’s results.

In 2009 the Company divested its interest in Westfield Capital Management Company, LP, formerly known as Westfield Capital Management Company, LLC (“Westfield”), Gibraltar Private Bank & Trust Company (“Gibraltar”), RINET Company, LLC (“RINET”), Sand Hill Advisors, LLC (“Sand Hill”), and Boston Private Value Investors, Inc. (“BPVI”). Both Westfield and BPVI were previously included in the Investment Management segment, RINET and Sand Hill were previously included in the Wealth Advisory segment and Gibraltar was previously included in the Private Banking segment. As a result of these divestitures, the results of operations and the gain/ (loss) on sale related to each are now included in “Net loss from discontinued operations” in the consolidated statement of operations for current and prior periods. In addition, the assets and liabilities of the divested companies have been reflected as assets and liabilities of discontinued operations in the accompanying consolidated balance sheets for periods prior to the divestiture.

For further details relating to the Company’s divestitures, see Part II, Item 8, “Financial Statements and Supplementary Data—Note 2: Divestitures and Acquisitions.”

II. Reportable Segments

The Company’s Segment CEOs manage the segments and have full authority and responsibility for the performance and the allocation of resources within their respective segments. The Segment CEOs report to the Company’s CEO and President who are the Company’s Chief Operating Decision Makers (“CODMs”). There is currently one Segment CEO for the Private Banking segment, and one Segment CEO who is responsible for both the Wealth Advisory and Investment Management segments. The Company also has Segment Controllers who provide direct financial support to the affiliate partners and the Segment CEOs.

The Company’s operating business model provides that the affiliate partners are given operating autonomy. Under the current management structure, day to day activities of the individual affiliates continue to be directed by the Affiliate CEOs. The Segment CEOs have authority with respect to the allocation of capital within their segments, management oversight responsibility, performance assessments, and overall authority and accountability for all of the affiliates within their segment. The Segment CEOs communicate with the Affiliate CEOs within their segment regarding profit and loss responsibility, strategic planning, priority setting and other matters.

 

1


Table of Contents

The Company CFO and the Segment Controllers review the affiliate company financial detail with the relevant Segment CEOs. The Segment CEOs and the Company CFO then review the overall segment results with the CODMs on a quarterly basis. In addition, the Segment CEOs are fully responsible for the execution of the annual budget at the affiliate level, and aggregated industry segment results are then reported to the CODMs.

The Company’s approach to the wealth management market is to create a financial umbrella that helps to preserve, grow, and transfer assets over the financial lifetime of a client through three financial disciplines: private banking, investment management and wealth advisory. Each reportable segment reflects the services provided by the Company to a distinct segment of the wealth management markets as described below.

Private Banking

The Private Banking segment has four consolidated affiliate partners, including Boston Private Bank, chartered by The Commonwealth of Massachusetts; Borel Private Bank & Trust Company (“Borel”) and First Private Bank & Trust (“FPB”), both California state chartered banks; and Charter Bank (“Charter”), a Washington state chartered bank; all of which are insured by the FDIC (together, the “Banks”). The Banks pursue private banking and community-oriented business strategies in their operating regions. The Banks are principally engaged in providing banking, commercial banking, and a variety of other fiduciary services including investment management, advisory, and administrative services to high net worth individuals, their families, small and medium-sized businesses and professionals. In addition, the Banks offer their clients a broad range of deposit and lending products. The specific mix of products, services and clientele can vary from affiliate to affiliate. The Banks are located in New England, Northern California, Southern California, and the Pacific Northwest.

Investment Management

The Investment Management segment has two consolidated affiliate partners, including Dalton, Greiner, Hartman, Maher & Co., LLC (“DGHM”), a registered investment adviser, and Anchor Capital Holdings, LLC (“Anchor”), which is the parent company of Anchor Capital Advisors LLC (“Anchor Capital Advisors”) and Anchor/ Russell Capital Advisors LLC (“Anchor Russell”), both of which are registered investment advisers (together, DGHM and Anchor are referred to as “the Investment Managers”). The Investment Managers serve the needs of pension funds, endowments, trusts, foundations and select institutions, mutual funds and high net worth individuals and their families throughout the United States (“U.S.”) and abroad. The Investment Managers specialize in value-driven equity portfolios with products across the capitalization spectrum. The specific mix of products, services and clientele varies between affiliates. The Investment Managers are located in New England and New York, with one affiliate administrative office in South Florida.

Wealth Advisory

The Wealth Advisory segment has three consolidated affiliate partners, including KLS Professional Advisors Group, LLC (“KLS”), Bingham, Osborn & Scarborough, LLC (“BOS”), and Davidson Trust Company (“DTC”), all of which are registered investment advisers, with the exception of DTC, and wealth management firms (together, the “Wealth Advisors”). The Wealth Advisors provide comprehensive, planning-based financial strategies to high net worth individuals and their families, and non-profit institutions. The firms offer fee-only financial planning, tax planning and preparation, estate and insurance planning, retirement planning, charitable planning and intergenerational giving planning. The Wealth Advisors manage investments covering a wide range of asset classes for both taxable and tax-exempt portfolios. The Wealth Advisors are located in New York, Northern California, and Pennsylvania.

For revenue, net income, assets, and other financial information for each of the Company’s reportable segments, see Part II, Item 8, “Financial Statements and Supplementary Data—Note 4: Reportable Segments.”

 

2


Table of Contents

Competition

The Company operates in the highly competitive wealth management marketplace. The Company believes its regional presence enables it to provide better access to decision makers and more customized personal service for its clients.

In the Company’s private banking business, the ability of the Banks to attract loans and deposits may be limited by their small size relative to some of their competitors. The Banks maintain a smaller staff and have fewer financial and other resources than larger institutions with which they compete in their market areas. In particular, in attempting to attract deposits and originate loans, the Banks encounter competition from other institutions, including larger national and suburban-based commercial banking organizations, savings banks, credit unions, and other financial institutions and nonbank financial service companies. The principal methods of competition include the level of loan interest rates charged to borrowers, interest rates paid on deposits, range of services provided and the quality of these services. To compete effectively, the Banks rely substantially on local promotional activity, personal contacts by officers, directors, and employees, personalized service and their reputation within the communities they serve.

In this competitive environment, the Banks may be unable to attract sufficient and high quality loans in order to continue their loan growth, which may adversely affect the Banks’ results of operations and financial condition, including the level of their non-performing assets. The Banks’ competitors include several major financial companies whose greater resources may afford them a marketplace advantage by enabling them to maintain numerous banking locations and mount extensive promotional and advertising campaigns. The Banks’ current commercial borrowing customers may develop needs for credit facilities larger than the Banks can accommodate. Moreover, under the Gramm-Leach-Bliley Act of 1999 (the “GLBA”), securities firms, insurance companies and other financial services providers that elect to become financial holding companies may acquire banks and other financial institutions. The GLBA has significantly changed the competitive environment in which the Company and its subsidiaries conduct business. (See “Supervision and Regulation of the Banks”, below.) The financial services industry is also likely to become more competitive as further technological advances enable more companies to provide financial services. These technological advances may diminish the importance of depository institutions and other financial intermediaries in the transfer of funds among parties.

The reportable segments’ ability to attract investment management and trust business may be inhibited by the relatively short history and record of performance at each affiliate. The Company’s principal competitors with respect to investment management and trust services are primarily commercial banks and trust companies, mutual fund companies, investment advisory firms, stock brokerage firms, other financial companies and law firms. Many of BPFH’s competitors have greater resources than its individual affiliates or the Company on a consolidated basis. Competition can impact revenue and current and future fee structures.

The Company believes that its ability to compete effectively with other firms is dependent upon its products, level of investment performance and client service, as well as the marketing and distribution of the investment products. Moreover, BPFH’s ability to retain investment management clients may be impaired by the fact that investment management contracts are typically short-term in nature, allowing clients to withdraw funds from accounts under management, generally at their sole discretion. There can be no assurance that BPFH will be able to achieve favorable investment performance and retain its existing clients.

In the wealth advisory industry, BPFH competes with a wide variety of firms including national and regional financial services firms, accounting firms, trust companies, and law firms. Many of these companies have greater resources and broader product lines, and may already have relationships with BPFH’s clients in related product areas. The Company believes that the ability of its wealth advisory affiliates to compete effectively with other firms is dependent upon the quality and level of service, personal relationships, and investment performance. There can be no assurance that the Company’s Wealth Advisors will be able to retain their existing clients, expand existing relationships, or add new clients.

 

3


Table of Contents

Employees

At December 31, 2009, the Company had 859 employees. The Company’s employees are not subject to a collective bargaining agreement, and the Company believes its employee relations are good.

III. Regulatory Considerations

Supervision and Regulation

In addition to the generally applicable state and federal laws governing businesses and employers, the Company is further subject to federal and state laws and regulations applicable to depository institutions, investment advisers, and their parent companies. Virtually all aspects of the Company’s operations are subject to specific requirements or restrictions and general regulatory oversight. State and federal banking laws have as their principal objective the safety and soundness of depository institutions, the federal deposit insurance system, and the protection of depositors, rather than the protection of stockholders of a bank or its parent company. Many of the Company’s affiliates are also subject to regulation under federal and state securities laws as described below under “Government Regulation of Other Activities.”

Set forth below is a summary description of certain laws and regulations that relate to the supervision and regulation of BPFH and its affiliate partners. In response to the deterioration of the financial markets in 2008, comprehensive financial regulatory reform proposals are pending in both the U.S. House of Representatives and the U.S. Senate which may be adopted in whole or in part in 2010. These proposals would restructure the regulatory regime for financial institutions and impose significant additional requirements and restrictions on banks and bank holding companies. To the extent the following material describes statutory or regulatory provisions, it is qualified in its entirety by reference to the particular statute or regulation.

Certain Restrictions on Activities and Operations of BPFH

BPFH is a bank holding company registered with the FRB under the BHCA. As such, BPFH and its non-bank subsidiaries are subject to the supervision, examination, and reporting requirements of the BHCA and the regulations of the FRB. BPFH is also a bank holding company for purposes of (i) the laws of The Commonwealth of Massachusetts, and subject to the jurisdiction of the Massachusetts Board of Bank Incorporation (the “BBI”) and the Massachusetts Commissioner of Banks (the “Commissioner”), (ii) the laws of the State of California, and subject to the jurisdiction of the California Department of Financial Institutions (the “CDFI”) and (iii) the laws of the State of Washington, and subject to the jurisdiction of the Washington State Department of Financial Institutions (the “WDFI”). BPFH has not elected financial holding company (“FHC”) status under the BHCA and, accordingly, may not engage in “certain financial activities,” such as merchant banking, that are only authorized under the BHCA for bank holding companies that have elected FHC status.

The FRB has the authority to issue orders to bank holding companies to cease and desist from unsafe or unsound banking practices and violations of conditions imposed by, or violations of agreements with, the FRB. The FRB is also empowered, among other things, to assess civil money penalties against companies or individuals who violate BHCA orders or, among other things, regulations thereunder, to order termination of nonbanking activities of bank holding companies, and to order termination of ownership and control of a nonbanking subsidiary by a bank holding company.

BHCA: Activities and Other Limitations. The BHCA prohibits a bank holding company from acquiring substantially all the assets of a bank or acquiring direct or indirect ownership or control of more than 5% of the voting shares of any bank, or increasing such ownership or control of any bank, or merging or consolidating with any bank holding company without prior approval of the FRB. The Riegle-Neal Interstate Banking and Branching Efficiency Act of 1994 (“Riegle-Neal”) permits adequately or well capitalized and adequately or well managed bank holding companies, as determined by the FRB, to acquire banks in any state, subject to certain deposit concentration limits and other conditions. Riegle-Neal also generally authorizes the interstate merger of banks. In addition, among other things, Riegle-Neal permits banks and federal savings associations to establish new branches on an interstate basis provided that the law of the host state specifically authorizes such action.

 

4


Table of Contents

Unless a bank holding company becomes a financial holding company under the GLBA (as discussed below), the BHCA prohibits a bank holding company from acquiring a direct or indirect interest in or control of more than 5% of the voting shares of any company that is not a bank or a bank holding company. In addition, the BHCA prohibits engaging directly or indirectly in activities other than those of banking, managing or controlling banks or furnishing services to its subsidiary banks. However, a bank holding company may engage in and may own shares of companies engaged in certain activities that the FRB determines to be so closely related to banking or managing and controlling banks so as to be a proper incident thereto. In making such determinations, the FRB is required to weigh the expected benefit to the public, including such factors as greater convenience, increased competition or gains in efficiency, against the possible adverse effects, such as undue concentration of resources, decreased or unfair competition, conflicts of interests or unsafe or unsound banking practices. As discussed more fully below, Massachusetts law imposes certain approval requirements with respect to acquisitions by a bank holding company of certain banking institutions and to the merger of bank holding companies.

Capital Requirements. The FRB has adopted guidelines which it uses in assessing the adequacy of capital when examining and supervising a bank holding company and in analyzing applications upon which it acts. The FRB’s capital adequacy guidelines generally require bank holding companies to maintain total capital of at least 8% of total risk-adjusted assets and off-balance sheet items, with at least 50% of that amount consisting of Tier I or core capital and the remaining amount consisting of Tier II or supplementary capital. Tier I capital for bank holding companies generally consists of the sum of common stockholders’ equity, perpetual preferred stock and trust preferred securities (both subject to certain limitations and in the case of the latter to specific limitations on the kind and amount of such securities which may be included as Tier I capital), and minority interests in the equity accounts of consolidated subsidiaries, less goodwill and other non-qualifying intangible assets. Tier II capital generally consists of hybrid capital instruments, perpetual debt and mandatory convertible debt securities; perpetual preferred stock and trust preferred securities, to the extent it is not eligible to be included as Tier I capital; term subordinated debt and intermediate-term preferred stock; and, subject to limitations, general allowances for loan losses. Assets are adjusted under the risk-based guidelines to take into account different risk characteristics.

In addition to the risk-based capital requirements, the FRB requires bank holding companies to maintain a minimum leverage capital ratio of Tier I capital (defined by reference to the risk-based capital guidelines) to its average total consolidated assets (the “Leverage Ratio”) of at least 3.0% to be classified as “adequately capitalized” and of at least 5.0% to be classified as “well-capitalized.” Total consolidated average assets for this purpose does not include, for example, goodwill and any other intangible assets, unrealized gains or losses on investments and investments that the FRB determines should be deducted from Tier I capital. The 3% Leverage Ratio requirement is the minimum for the top-rated bank holding companies without any supervisory, financial or operational weaknesses or deficiencies or those which are not experiencing or anticipating significant growth. Bank holding companies with supervisory, financial, operational or managerial weaknesses, as well as bank holding companies that are anticipating or experiencing significant growth, are often required to maintain capital ratios above the minimum levels. Finally, the FRB has also imposed certain capital requirements applicable to certain nonbanking activities, including adjustments in connection with off-balance sheet items. BPFH’s Leverage Ratio as of December 31, 2009 was 11.62%.

U.S. bank regulatory authorities and international bank supervisory organizations, principally the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision (the “Basel Committee”), continue to consider changes to the risk-based capital adequacy framework which ultimately could affect the appropriate capital guidelines to which BPFH and the Banks are subject. The federal banking agencies issued a final rule entitled “Risk-Based Capital Standards: Advanced Capital Adequacy Framework—Basel II” (“Basel II”) which became effective on April 1, 2008 and “core banks” (“core banks” are the approximately 15 largest U.S. bank holding companies) were required to adopt a board-approved plan to implement Basel II by October 1, 2008. Basel II will result in significant changes to the risk-based capital standards for core banks subject to Basel II and other banks that elect to use such rules to calculate their risk-based capital requirements. Furthermore, it is possible that Basel II will be revised to reflect new proposals from the Basel Committee. In addition, in connection with Basel II, the federal banking agencies

 

5


Table of Contents

published a joint notice of proposed rulemaking entitled “Risk-Based Capital Guidelines; Capital Adequacy Guidelines: Standardized Framework” on July 29, 2008 (the “Standardized Approach Proposal”). The Standardized Approach Proposal would provide all non-core banks with an optional framework, based upon the standardized approach under the international Basel II Accord, for calculating their risk-based capital requirements. It is possible, however, that the Standardized Approach Proposal may never be adopted by the federal banking agencies. BPFH and the Banks do not currently expect to calculate their capital ratios under Basel II or in accordance with the Standardized Approach Proposal. Accordingly, BPFH is not yet in a position to determine the effect of such rules on its risk capital requirements.

Troubled Asset Relief Program (“TARP”). In 2008, the U.S. Department of the Treasury (the “Treasury”) instituted the TARP in response to adverse economic conditions in the financial markets, particularly the inability of creditworthy borrowers to obtain credit. Under the TARP, the Treasury developed the Capital Purchase Program (“CPP”), whereby it purchased non-voting senior preferred shares of participating financial institutions. Under the CPP, the Company sold $154 million of Series C Fixed Rate Cumulative Perpetual Preferred Stock (the “Series C Preferred”) to the Treasury in November of 2008 by entering into the Capital Purchase Program Securities Purchase Agreement (the “CPP Securities Purchase Agreement”). The Series C Preferred will pay cumulative dividends at a rate of five percent per year for the first five years and will reset to a rate of nine percent per year after the fifth year. Subject to consultation with the FRB, the Series C Preferred may be redeemed without regard to whether the Company has replaced such funds from any other source and without being subject to any waiting period. For as long as any Series C Preferred are outstanding, no dividend may be declared or paid on any junior preferred shares, preferred shares ranking pari passu with the Series C Preferred, or common shares unless all of the accrued and unpaid dividends for the cumulative Series C Preferred are fully paid. Dividends may be declared on pari passu preferred shares on a pro rata basis with Series C Preferred. The Company may not repurchase or redeem any junior preferred shares, preferred shares ranking pari passu with the Series C Preferred or common shares unless all the accrued and unpaid dividends for the Series C Preferred are fully paid.

As discussed above, the consent of the Treasury will be required for any increase in common stock dividends for the first three years, unless prior to the end of three years the Series C Preferred have been redeemed in full or the Treasury has transferred all of the Series C Preferred to third parties. The consent of the Treasury will also be required for any share repurchases, other than repurchases of the Series C Preferred or junior preferred shares or common shares in connection with any benefit plan in the ordinary course of business consistent with past practice, for the first three years, unless prior to the end of three years the Series C Preferred have been redeemed in full or the Treasury has transferred all of the Series C Preferred to third parties. No repurchases of junior preferred shares, preferred shares ranking pari passu with the Series C Preferred or common shares will be allowed if such repurchase is prohibited by a restriction on dividends.

In conjunction with the purchase of Series C Preferred, the Treasury also received warrants to purchase common stock with an aggregate market price equal to 15 percent of its investment in the Series C Preferred (the “TARP warrants”). The exercise price on the TARP warrants is $8.00. The TARP warrants have a term of 10 years and are freely transferrable and immediately exercisable, in whole or in part.

Because of its participation in the CPP, and for so long as such participation continues, the Company will be subject to stringent executive compensation and corporate governance rules and limitations for the period during which Treasury holds Series C Preferred. These standards and limitations include: (i) prohibiting the Company and its subsidiaries from paying or accruing any bonus, retention award or incentive compensation to any of the five most highly compensated employees of the Company or its subsidiaries (other than certain qualifying awards of restricted stock or restricted stock units); (ii) ensuring that incentive compensation for senior executives and employees does not encourage the taking of unnecessary and excessive risks that threaten the value of the financial institution through periodic risk reviews and assessments with the Company’s compensation committee and senior risk officers; (iii) requiring a “clawback” of any bonus or incentive compensation paid to a senior executive officer or one of the next twenty most highly compensated employees of

 

6


Table of Contents

the Company or its subsidiaries based on materially inaccurate financial statements or other materially inaccurate performance metric criteria; (iv) prohibiting the financial institution from making any golden parachute payment to a senior executive officer or one of the next five most highly compensated employees of the Company or its subsidiaries (generally, any severance payments or payments due to a change in control); (v) agreeing not to deduct for tax purposes executive compensation in excess of $500,000 for each senior executive officer, (vi) requiring an annual disclosure of any perquisites with a value in excess of $25,000 to certain employees; (vii) prohibiting the payment of any reimbursement for taxes owed with respect to any compensation, or “gross up,” paid to a senior executive officer or one of the next twenty most highly compensated employees of the Company or its subsidiaries; (viii) the adoption of a luxury expenditure policy; and (ix) including a non-binding “say-on-pay” resolution within the Company’s annual Proxy Statement, approving the compensation of the senior executive officers described in the Proxy Statement. As used above, the term senior executive officer means, for each year, the chief executive officer, chief financial officer, plus the next three most highly compensated executive officers identified in the Company’s annual Proxy Statement. The limitation on accrual or payment of bonuses does not apply to any payment required to be paid under certain valid employment contracts executed on or before February 11, 2009 which is paid in accordance to its terms. The Company and its senior executive officers have granted the Treasury a waiver releasing the Treasury from any claims that the Company or such officer may otherwise have as a result of the issuance of any regulation which modifies the terms of benefits plans, arrangements and agreements to eliminate any provisions that would not be in compliance with these executive compensation and corporate governance standards. Finally, the Company’s chief executive officer and chief financial officer must each certify as to compliance with all applicable compensation and governance rules on an annual basis and the Company’s compensation committee must provide a written narrative disclosure describing the review process noted in (ii), above, and certify as to its completion of this review.

Importantly, the CPP Securities Purchase Agreement may be unilaterally amended by the Treasury. Accordingly, the Company or the Banks may be subject to further restrictions or obligations as a result of their participation in the CPP. On January 13, 2010 the Company redeemed $50 million of its outstanding Series C Preferred stock, however, all restrictions listed above will continue to apply until the Company redeems the entire amount of the Series C Preferred issuance.

Limitations on Acquisitions of Common Stock. The Change in Bank Control Act prohibits a person or group of persons from acquiring “control” of a bank holding company unless the FRB has been notified and has not objected to the transaction. Under a rebuttable presumption established by the FRB, the acquisition of 10% or more of a class of voting securities of a bank holding company, such as BPFH, with a class of securities registered under Section 12 of the Exchange Act, would, under the circumstances set forth in the presumption, constitute the acquisition of control of a bank holding company. Massachusetts law, California law and Washington law also impose certain limitations on the ability of persons and entities to acquire control of banking institutions and their parent companies.

In addition, any company would be required to obtain the approval of the FRB under the BHCA before acquiring 25% (5% in the case of an acquirer that is a bank holding company) or more, or otherwise obtaining control or a controlling influence over a bank holding company. In 2008, the FRB released guidance on minority investments in banks that relaxed the presumption of control for investments of greater than 10% of a class of outstanding voting securities of a bank holding company in certain instances discussed in the guidance. In 2008, BP Holdco, L.P., a company controlled by The Carlyle Group, became the largest stockholder of BPFH, owning a 9.98% interest in the Company. The Carlyle Group’s investment is subject to certain restrictions under the terms of the investment agreement with BPFH. Under the agreement, the Carlyle Group cannot convert its non-voting preferred stock or exercise its warrants if as a result it would own more than 9.99% of the Company’s outstanding common stock.

Support of Subsidiary Institutions and Liability of Commonly Controlled Depository Institutions. Under FRB policy, BPFH is expected to act as a source of financial and managerial strength for, and commit its resources to, supporting the Banks during periods of financial stress or adversity. This support may be required at

 

7


Table of Contents

times when BPFH may not be inclined to provide it. In addition, any capital loans by a bank holding company to any of its bank subsidiaries are subordinate to the payment of deposits and to certain other indebtedness. In the event of a bank holding company’s bankruptcy, any commitment by the bank holding company to a federal bank regulatory agency to maintain the capital of a bank subsidiary will be assumed by the bankruptcy trustee and entitled to a priority of payment.

Depository institutions insured by the FDIC, such as the Banks, can be held liable for any loss incurred by, or reasonably expected to be incurred by, the FDIC in connection with the default of a commonly controlled FDIC-insured depository institution or any assistance provided by the FDIC to any commonly controlled FDIC-insured depository institution “in danger of default.” “Default” is defined generally as the appointment of a conservator or receiver, and “in danger of default” is defined generally as the existence of certain conditions indicating that a default is likely to occur in the absence of supervisory assistance. The FDIC’s claim for damages is superior to claims of stockholders of the insured depository institution or its holding company, but is subordinate to claims of depositors, secured creditors, and holders of subordinated debt (other than affiliates) of the commonly controlled insured depository institution. The Banks are subject to these cross-guarantee provisions. As a result, any loss suffered by the FDIC in respect of any of the Banks would likely result in assertion of the cross-guarantee provisions, the assessment of estimated losses against the other Banks, and a potential loss of BPFH’s investments in the Banks.

Massachusetts Law. As a bank holding company for purposes of Massachusetts law, BPFH has registered with the Commissioner and is obligated to make reports to the Commissioner. Further, as a Massachusetts bank holding company, BPFH may not acquire all or substantially all of the assets of a banking institution, merge or consolidate with another bank holding company or acquire direct or indirect ownership or control of any voting stock in any other banking institution if it will own or control more than 5% thereof without the prior consent of the BBI. As a general matter, however, the Commissioner does not rule upon or regulate the activities in which bank holding companies or their non-bank subsidiaries engage.

California Law. BPFH is also a bank holding company within the meaning of Section 3700 of the California Financial Code. As such, BPFH and its subsidiaries are subject to examination by, and may be required to file reports with, the CDFI.

Washington Law. BPFH is also a bank holding company within the meaning of Chapter 30.04 of the Revised Code of Washington. As such, BPFH and its subsidiaries are subject to examination by, and may be required to file reports with, the WDFI.

Cash Dividends. The FRB has the authority to prohibit bank holding companies from paying dividends if such payment is deemed to be an unsafe or unsound practice. The FRB has indicated generally that it may be an unsafe or unsound practice for bank holding companies to pay dividends unless the bank holding company’s net income over the preceding year is sufficient to fund the dividends and the expected rate of earnings retention is consistent with the organization’s capital needs, asset quality and overall financial condition. FRB policy further provides that a bank holding company should not maintain a level of cash dividends to its stockholders that places undue pressure on the capital of bank subsidiaries, or that can be funded only through additional borrowings or other arrangements that may undermine the bank holding company’s ability to serve as a source of strength to bank subsidiaries. The FDIC may also regulate the amount of dividends payable by the subsidiary banks. Further, as discussed above, in late 2008 the Company received funds from the Treasury under the TARP-CPP, which subjects the Company to certain restrictions on increases in, or payments of, cash dividends. The inability of the Banks to pay dividends may have an adverse affect on the Company.

Regulation of the Banks

The Banks are subject to the extensive supervision and regulation of various federal and state authorities, which include the FDIC, the CDFI, the WDFI, and the Commissioner. Each of the Banks is subject to numerous state and federal statutes and regulations that affect its business, activities, and operations, and each is supervised

 

8


Table of Contents

and examined by one or more federal or state bank regulatory agencies. Each of the Banks is required to file ongoing reports on their financial condition and other business activities with these various regulatory agencies and are also required to obtain the approval from the regulatory authorities prior to entering into certain transactions, including mergers with, or acquisitions of, other financial institutions. As FDIC-insured institutions, the Banks are also subject to certain requirements applicable to all insured depository institutions.

FDIC Insurance Premiums. The Banks pay deposit insurance premiums to the FDIC based on an assessment rate established by the FDIC. For most banks and savings associations, including the Banks, effective April 1, 2009 FDIC rates depend upon a combination of CAMELS component ratings, capital ratios, and, if applicable, the level of brokered deposits. CAMELS ratings reflect the applicable bank regulatory agency’s evaluation of the financial institution’s capital, asset quality, management, earnings, liquidity and sensitivity to risk. To determine the actual deposits insurance premiums, our Banks compute the amount based on insurable deposits and the applicable assessment rate for that individual bank. In 2009, the aggregate FDIC Insurance expense for the Banks was $9.7 million, which included a charge of $2.5 million for the special assessment. Future expenses will be based on deposit levels, assessment rates, CAMELS ratings, and whether there are any future special assessments by the FDIC.

In November 2009, the FDIC issued a final rule that mandated that insured depository institutions prepay their quarterly risk-based assessments to the FDIC for the fourth quarter of 2009 and for all of 2010, 2011, and 2012 on December 30, 2009. Each institution, including the Banks, recorded the entire amount of its prepayment as an asset (a prepaid expense). The prepaid assessments bear a zero-percent risk weight for risk-based capital purposes. The prepaid assessment base for the Banks was calculated using their third quarter 2009 assessment rate (using their CAMELS rating on that date). That assessment base will be adjusted quarterly with an estimated 5 percent annual growth in the assessment base through the end of 2012. The prepaid assessment rate for the fourth quarter of 2009 and for 2010 was based on the Banks’ total base assessment rate for the third quarter of 2009, adjusted as if the assessment rate in effect on September 30, 2009 had been in effect for the entire third quarter. Further, the prepaid assessment rate for 2011 and 2012 is equal to the adjusted third quarter 2009 total base assessment rate plus 3 basis points. As of December 31, 2009, and each quarter thereafter, the Banks recorded and will record an expense for their regular quarterly assessment for the quarter and a corresponding credit to the prepaid assessment until the asset is exhausted. The FDIC will not refund or collect additional prepaid assessments because of a decrease or growth in deposits over the next three years. However, should the prepaid assessment not be exhausted after collection of the amount due on June 30, 2013, the remaining amount of the prepayment will be returned to the applicable institution. In 2008, the level of FDIC deposit insurance was temporarily increased from $100,000 to $250,000 per depositor and the increased level of insurance coverage will remain in effect through December 31, 2013.

The FDIC has the power to adjust deposit insurance assessment rates at any time. We cannot predict whether, as a result of the adverse change in U.S. economic conditions and, in particular, declines in the value of real estate in certain markets served by the Banks, the FDIC will in the future further increase deposit insurance assessment levels.

Temporary Liquidity Guarantee Program. On November 21, 2008 the Board of Directors of the FDIC adopted a Final Rule relating to the Temporary Liquidity Guarantee Program (“TLGP”). The TLGP is part of a coordinated effort by the FDIC, the U.S. Department of the Treasury, and the FRB to address unprecedented disruptions in the credit markets and the resultant inability of financial institutions to fund themselves and make loans to creditworthy borrowers. The TLGP provided two limited guarantee programs: the Debt Guarantee Program and the Transaction Account Guarantee Program (“TAGP”). The coverage under the TAGP, if banks elected to participate, insured in full certain noninterest-bearing transaction accounts and NOW accounts by the FDIC until December 31, 2009. Our Banks elected to participate in the TAGP but not the Debt Guarantee Program. The Banks were required to pay an additional ten basis point deposit insurance assessment on any deposit amount in excess of $250,000 that was covered by the TAGP.

 

9


Table of Contents

In 2009, to assure an orderly phase out of the TAGP, the FDIC announced an optional extension of the TAGP for six months until June 30, 2010. Each insured depository institution that participates in the extended TAGP is subject to increased fees during the six month extension period for the FDIC’s guarantee of qualifying accounts. The additional fee that applies during the six month extension period increases from ten basis points to either 15, 20, or 25 basis points depending on the entity’s risk category. Our Banks have all elected to participate in the extension of the TAGP.

Capital Requirements . The FDIC has promulgated regulations and adopted a statement of policy regarding the capital adequacy of state-chartered banks, which, like the Banks, are not members of the Federal Reserve System. These requirements are substantially similar to those adopted by the FRB regarding bank holding companies, as described above.

Moreover, the federal banking agencies have promulgated substantially similar regulations to implement the system of prompt corrective action established by Section 38 of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act (“FDIA”). Under the regulations, a bank generally shall be deemed to be:

 

   

“well capitalized” if it has a total risk-based capital ratio of 10.0% or greater, has a Tier I risk-based capital ratio of 6.0% or more, has a leverage ratio of 5.0% or greater and is not subject to any written agreement, order or capital directive or prompt corrective action directive;

 

   

“adequately capitalized” if it has a total risk-based capital ratio of 8.0% or greater, a Tier I risk-based capital ratio of 4.0% or more, and a leverage ratio of 4.0% or greater (3.0% under certain circumstances) and does not meet the definition of a “well capitalized bank;”

 

   

“undercapitalized” if it has a total risk-based capital ratio that is less than 8.0%, a Tier I risk-based capital ratio that is less than 4.0% or a leverage ratio that is less than 4.0% (3.0% under certain circumstances);

 

   

“significantly undercapitalized” if it has a total risk-based capital ratio that is less than 6.0%, a Tier I risk-based capital ratio that is less than 3.0% or a leverage ratio that is less than 3.0%; and

 

   

“critically undercapitalized” if it has a ratio of tangible equity to total assets that is equal to or less than 2.0%.

An institution generally must file a written capital restoration plan which meets specified requirements with an appropriate FDIC regional director within 45 days of the date that the institution receives notice or is deemed to have notice that it is undercapitalized, significantly undercapitalized or critically undercapitalized. An institution, which is required to submit a capital restoration plan, must concurrently submit a performance guaranty by each company that controls the institution. A critically undercapitalized institution generally is to be placed in conservatorship or receivership within 90 days unless the FDIC formally determines that forbearance from such action would better protect the Deposit Insurance Fund.

Immediately upon becoming undercapitalized, an institution becomes subject to the prompt corrective action provisions of Section 38 of the FDIA, that for example, (i) restrict payment of capital distributions and management fees, (ii) require that the FDIC monitor the condition of the institution and its efforts to restore its capital, (iii) require submission of a capital restoration plan, (iv) restrict the growth of the institution’s assets and (v) require prior regulatory approval of certain expansion proposals.

At December 31, 2009, each of the Banks, except for the Company’s Southern California and Pacific Northwest subsidiaries, was deemed to be a well capitalized institution for the above purposes. Regulators may raise capital requirements applicable to banking organizations above current levels. We are unable to predict whether higher capital requirements will be imposed and, if so, at what levels and on what schedules. Therefore, we cannot predict what effect such higher requirements may have on us. As discussed above, the Banks would be required to remain well-capitalized institutions at all times if we elected to be treated as a FHC.

 

10


Table of Contents

The Company’s Southern California and Pacific Northwest subsidiaries were considered adequately capitalized as of December 31, 2009 and remain adequately capitalized as of the date of this Report. Although the Company and all of the Banks within the segment maintain capital at levels that would otherwise be considered “well capitalized” under the applicable regulations, for supervisory reasons, the Southern California and Pacific Northwest banks, and therefore the Company, are not deemed “well capitalized.”

Brokered Deposits. Section 29 of the FDIA and FDIC regulations generally limit the ability of an insured depository institution to accept, renew or roll over any brokered deposit unless the institution’s capital category is “well capitalized” or, with the FDIC’s approval, “adequately capitalized.” These restrictions have not in the past had a material impact on the operations of the Banks. Under amendments to FDIC regulations effective in 2009, depository institutions, other than those in the lowest risk category, that have brokered deposits in excess of 10% of total deposits will be subject to increased FDIC deposit insurance premium assessments. Under an amendment to the FDIC regulations effective in 2010, depository institutions considered “adequately capitalized” that need FDIC approval to accept, renew or roll over any brokered deposits are subject to additional restrictions on the interest rate they may pay on deposits.

Activities and Investments of Insured State-Chartered Banks. Section 24 of the FDIA generally limits the investment activities of FDIC-insured, state-chartered banks, (including Boston Private Bank, Borel, FPB, and Charter), when acting as principal to those that are permissible for national banks. In 1999, the FDIC revised its regulations implementing Section 24 of the FDIA to ease the ability of FDIC-insured state-chartered banks to engage in certain activities not permissible for national banks, and to expedite FDIC review of bank applications and notices to engage in such activities.

Further, the GLBA permits national banks and state banks, to the extent permitted under state law, to engage through “financial subsidiaries” in certain new activities which are permissible for subsidiaries of a FHC. Further, it expressly preserves the ability of national banks and state banks to retain all existing subsidiaries. In order to form a financial subsidiary, a national bank or state bank must be well capitalized, and such banks would be subject to certain capital deduction, risk management and affiliate transaction rules, among other things. Also, the FDIC’s final rules governing the establishment of financial subsidiaries adopt the position that activities that a national bank could engage in only through a financial subsidiary, such as securities underwriting, may be conducted only in a financial subsidiary by a state nonmember bank. However, activities that a national bank could not engage in through a financial subsidiary, such as real estate development or investment, continue to be governed by the FDIC’s standard activities rules. Moreover, to mirror the FRB’s actions with respect to state member banks, the final rules provide that a state bank subsidiary that engages only in activities that the bank could engage in directly (regardless of the nature of the activities) will not be deemed to be a financial subsidiary.

Transactions with Affiliates. Under Sections 23A and 23B of the Federal Reserve Act and Regulation W promulgated thereunder, there are various legal restrictions on the extent to which a bank holding company, such as BPFH, and its non-bank subsidiaries may borrow, obtain credit from or otherwise engage in “covered transactions” with its FDIC insured depository institution subsidiaries. Such borrowings and other covered transactions by an insured depository institution subsidiary (and its subsidiaries) with its non-depository institution affiliates are limited to the following amounts:

 

   

in the case of one such affiliate, the aggregate amount of covered transactions of the insured depository institution and its subsidiaries cannot exceed 10% of the capital stock and surplus of the insured depository institution; and

 

   

in the case of all affiliates, the aggregate amount of covered transactions of the insured depository institution and its subsidiaries cannot exceed 20% of the capital stock and surplus of the insured depository institution.

“Covered transactions” are defined by statute for these purposes to include a loan or extension of credit to an affiliate, a purchase of or investment in securities issued by an affiliate, a purchase of assets from an affiliate unless

 

11


Table of Contents

exempted by the FRB, the acceptance of securities issued by an affiliate as collateral for a loan or extension of credit to any person or company, or the issuance of a guarantee, acceptance, or letter of credit on behalf of an affiliate. Covered transactions are also subject to certain collateral security requirements.

Lending Restrictions. Federal law limits a bank’s authority to extend credit to its directors, executive officers and 10% stockholders, as well as to entities controlled by such persons. Among other things, extensions of credit to insiders are required to be made on terms that are substantially the same as, and follow credit underwriting procedures that are not less stringent than, those prevailing for comparable transactions with unaffiliated persons. Also, the terms of such extensions of credit may not involve more than the normal risk of repayment or present other unfavorable features and may not exceed certain limitations on the amount of credit extended to such persons, individually and in the aggregate, which limits are based, in part, on the amount of the bank’s capital.

A bank holding company and its subsidiaries are subject to prohibitions on certain tying arrangements. These institutions are prohibited, subject to some exceptions, from extending credit to or offering any other service, or fixing or varying the consideration for such extension of credit or service, on the condition that the customer obtain some additional service from the institution or its affiliates or not obtain services of a competitor of the institution.

Consumer Protection Laws. The Company is subject to a number of federal and state laws designed to protect consumers and prohibit unfair or deceptive business practices. These laws include the Equal Credit Opportunity Act, Fair Housing Act, Home Ownership Protection Act, Fair Credit Reporting Act, as amended by the Fair and Accurate Credit Transactions Act of 2003 (“FACT Act”), GLBA, Truth in Lending Act, Community Reinvestment Act (the “CRA”), the Home Mortgage Disclosure Act, Real Estate Settlement Procedures Act, National Flood Insurance Act and various state law counterparts. These laws and regulations mandate certain disclosure requirements and regulate the manner in which financial institutions must interact with customers when taking deposits, making loans, collecting loans and providing other services. Failure to comply with these laws and regulations can subject financial institutions to enforcement actions, fines and other penalties.

Community Reinvestment Act. The CRA requires the FDIC to evaluate the Banks’ performance in helping to meet the credit needs of their entire communities, including low and moderate-income neighborhoods, consistent with their safe and sound banking operations, and to take this record into consideration when evaluating certain applications. The CRA does not establish specific lending requirements or programs for financial institutions, nor does it limit an institution’s discretion to develop the type of products and services that it believes are best suited to its particular community, consistent with the purposes of the CRA. Massachusetts has also enacted a similar statute that requires the Commissioner to evaluate the performance of the Banks, such as Boston Private Bank, in helping to meet the credit needs of its entire community and to take that record into account in considering certain applications.

The FDIC’s CRA regulations are generally based upon objective criteria of the performance of institutions under three key assessment tests: (i) a lending test, to evaluate the institution’s record of making loans in its service areas; (ii) an investment test, to evaluate the institution’s record of investing in community development projects, affordable housing, and programs benefiting low or moderate income individuals and businesses; and (iii) a service test, to evaluate the institution’s delivery of services through its branches, ATMs, and other offices. Each of the Banks currently has either a “satisfactory” or “outstanding” CRA rating. In 2005, the federal banking agencies adopted less burdensome CRA requirements for “intermediate—small banks,” which are banks with $250 million or more, but less than $1 billion in total assets in either of the two prior calendar years (adjusted annually for inflation), including the Southern California and Pacific Northwest subsidiaries. Under these new requirements, such banks are examined using only two tests, a Lending Test and a new Community Development Test, and are relieved of certain data collection and reporting requirements.

Customer Information Security. The FDIC and other bank regulatory agencies have adopted final guidelines for establishing standards for safeguarding nonpublic personal information about customers. These guidelines implement provisions of the GLBA. Specifically, the Information Security Guidelines established by the GLBA

 

12


Table of Contents

require each financial institution, under the supervision and ongoing oversight of its Board of Directors or an appropriate committee thereof, to develop, implement and maintain a comprehensive written information security program designed to ensure the security and confidentiality of customer information (as defined under GLBA), to protect against anticipated threats or hazards to the security or integrity of such information; and to protect against unauthorized access to or use of such information that could result in substantial harm or inconvenience to any customer. The federal banking regulators have issued guidance for banks on response programs for unauthorized access to customer information. This guidance, among other things, requires notice to be sent to customers whose “sensitive information” has been compromised if unauthorized use of this information is “reasonably possible.” Most of the states, including the states where the Company maintains banking operations, have enacted legislation concerning breaches of data security and the duties of the Banks in response to a data breach. Congress continues to consider federal legislation that would require consumer notice of data security breaches. In addition, Massachusetts has promulgated data security regulations, that became effective March 1, 2010, with respect to personal information of Massachusetts residents.

Identity Theft Red Flags. The federal banking agencies jointly issued final rules and guidelines in 2007 implementing Section 114 of the FACT Act and final rules implementing Section 315 of the FACT Act. The rules implementing Section 114 require each financial institution or creditor to develop and implement a written Identity Theft Prevention Program (the “Program”) to detect, prevent, and mitigate identity theft in connection with the opening of certain accounts or certain existing accounts. In addition, the federal banking agencies issued guidelines to assist financial institutions and creditors in the formulation and maintenance of a Program that satisfies the requirements of the rules. The rules implementing Section 114 also require credit and debit card issuers to assess the validity of notifications of changes of address under certain circumstances. Additionally, the federal banking agencies issued joint rules, that became effective in 2008, under Section 315 that provide guidance regarding reasonable policies and procedures that a user of consumer reports must employ when a consumer reporting agency sends the user a notice of address discrepancy.

Privacy. The GLBA requires financial institutions to implement policies and procedures regarding the disclosure of nonpublic personal information about consumers to nonaffiliated third parties. In general, the statute requires financial institutions to explain to consumers their policies and procedures regarding the disclosure of such nonpublic personal information, and, except as otherwise required or permitted by law, financial institutions are prohibited from disclosing such information except as provided in their policies and procedures. The Banks are required to provide notice to their customers on an annual basis disclosing their policies and procedures on the sharing of nonpublic personal information. In December 2009, the federal banking agencies promulgated regulations that incorporate a two-page model form that financial institutions may use to satisfy their privacy disclosure obligations under GLBA. These regulations are effective in January 2011.

Anti-Money Laundering and the Bank Secrecy Act. Under the Bank Secrecy Act (“BSA”), a financial institution, is required to have systems in place to detect certain transactions, based on the size and nature of the transaction. Financial institutions are generally required to report to the United States Treasury any cash transactions involving more than $10,000. In addition, financial institutions are required to file suspicious activity reports for transactions that involve more than $5,000 and which the financial institution knows, suspects or has reason to suspect involves illegal funds, is designed to evade the requirements of the BSA or has no lawful purpose. The USA PATRIOT Act of 2001 (the “PATRIOT Act”), which amended the BSA, is designed to deny terrorists and others the ability to obtain anonymous access to the U.S. financial system. The PATRIOT Act has significant implications for financial institutions and businesses of other types involved in the transfer of money. The PATRIOT Act, together with the implementing regulations of various federal regulatory agencies, has caused financial institutions, such as the Banks, to adopt and implement additional policies or amend existing policies and procedures with respect to, among other things, anti-money laundering compliance, suspicious activity, currency transaction reporting, customer identity verification and customer risk analysis. In evaluating an application under Section 3 of the BHCA to acquire a bank or an application under the Bank Merger Act to merge banks or affect a purchase of assets and assumption of deposits and other liabilities, the applicable federal banking regulator must consider the anti-money laundering compliance record of both the applicant and the

 

13


Table of Contents

target. In 2006, final regulations under the PATRIOT Act were issued requiring financial institutions, including the Banks, to take additional steps to monitor their correspondent banking and private banking relationships as well as their relationships with “shell banks.”

OFAC. The United States has imposed economic sanctions that affect transactions with designated foreign countries, nationals and others. These sanctions, which are administered by the Treasury Office of Foreign Assets Control (“OFAC”), take many different forms. Generally, however, they contain one or more of the following elements: (i) restrictions on trade with or investment in a sanctioned country, including prohibitions against direct or indirect imports from and exports to a sanctioned country and prohibitions on “U.S. persons” engaging in financial transactions relating to making investments in, or providing investment-related advice or assistance to, a sanctioned country; and (ii) a blocking of assets in which the government or specially designated nationals of the sanctioned country have an interest, by prohibiting transfers of property subject to U.S. jurisdiction (including property in the possession or control of U.S. persons). Blocked assets (for example, property and bank deposits) cannot be paid out, withdrawn, set off or transferred in any manner without a license from OFAC. Failure to comply with these sanctions could have serious legal and reputational consequences for the Company.

FDIC Restrictions on Bank Dividends. The FDIC has the authority to use its enforcement powers to prohibit a bank from paying dividends if, in its opinion, the payment of dividends would constitute an unsafe or unsound practice. Federal law also prohibits the payment of dividends by a bank that will result in the bank failing to meet its applicable capital requirements on a pro forma basis. In addition, currently the Company’s Southern California subsidiary may not pay cash dividends without the prior written approval of the FDIC and the CDFI, and the Company’s Pacific Northwest subsidiary may not pay cash dividends without the prior written approval of the FDIC and the WDFI.

Massachusetts Law—Dividends. Under Massachusetts law the board of directors of a trust company, such as our New England subsidiary, may declare from “net profits” cash dividends no more often than quarterly, provided that there is no impairment to the trust company’s capital stock. Moreover, prior Commissioner approval is required if the total of all dividends declared by a trust company in any calendar year would exceed the total of its net profits for that year combined with its retained net profits for the previous two years, less any required transfer to surplus or a fund for the retirement of any preferred stock.

Washington Law—Dividends. Under Washington law a bank may not declare or pay any dividend greater than its retained earnings without approval from the director of the WDFI. As noted above, currently the Company’s Pacific Northwest subsidiary may not declare or pay cash dividends without prior written consent of the WDFI.

California Law-Dividends . Under California law a bank may declare dividends out of funds legally available for such purpose. Under the California Financial Code, funds available for cash dividends are restricted to the lesser of: (i) the bank’s retained earnings; or (ii) the bank’s net income for its last three fiscal years (less any distributions to stockholders made during such period). With the prior approval of the CDFI, cash dividends may also be paid out of the greater of: (a) the bank’s retained earnings; (b) net income for the bank’s last preceding fiscal year; or (c) net income or the bank’s current fiscal year. If the CDFI determines that the stockholders’ equity of the bank paying the dividend is not adequate or that the payment of the dividend would be unsafe or unsound for the bank, the CDFI may order the bank not to pay the dividend. As noted above, currently the Company’s Southern California subsidiary may not declare or pay cash dividends without the prior written approval of the CDFI.

Possible Effects of Federal and State Restrictions and Limits on Dividends. The foregoing federal and state restrictions and limits on dividends paid by the Banks to BPFH may restrict BPFH’s ability to pay dividends to its stockholders. We cannot predict future dividend payments by our Banks at this time.

Regulatory Enforcement Authority. The enforcement powers available to federal banking regulators include, among other things, the ability to assess civil money penalties, to issue cease and desist or removal orders to terminate insurance of deposits, to issues directives to increase capital, to issues formal or informal agreements,

 

14


Table of Contents

to impose a conservator or place the bank into receivership, and to initiate injunctive actions against banking organizations and institution-affiliated parties, as defined. In general, these enforcement actions may be initiated for violations of law and regulations and unsafe or unsound practices. Other actions or inactions may provide the basis for enforcement action, including misleading or untimely reports filed with regulatory authorities. Under certain circumstances, federal and state law requires public disclosure and reports of certain criminal offenses and also final formal enforcement actions by the federal banking agencies.

Securities Law Issues. The GLBA also amended the federal securities laws to eliminate the blanket exceptions that banks traditionally have had from the definition of “broker,” “dealer” and “investment adviser” under the Exchange Act. The GLBA provided 11 exceptions from the definition of “broker” in Section 3(a)(4) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 (the “Exchange Act”) that permit banks not to register as broker-dealers with the Securities and Exchange Commission (the “SEC”) to effect securities transactions under certain conditions. Regulation R, which was issued jointly by the SEC and the FRB, implements certain of these exceptions. The Banks’ compliance with Regulation R became mandatory in the fourth quarter of 2008.

Regulation of Nondepository Trust Companies

BPFH indirectly owns a 70.1% interest in DTC. DTC is a Pennsylvania non-depository trust company that is subject to regulation by the Pennsylvania Department of Banking. DTC must maintain total equity capital and liquid assets in the amount of $2 million. DTC is prohibited from paying cash dividends or making other capital distributions that would cause DTC’s total equity capital or liquid assets to be less than $2 million.

Government Policies and Legislative and Regulatory Proposals

The operations of the Banks are generally affected by the economic, fiscal, and monetary policies of the U.S. and its agencies and regulatory authorities, particularly the FRB which regulates the money supply of the U.S., reserve requirements against deposits, the discount rate on FRB borrowings and related matters, and which conducts open-market operations in U.S. government securities. The fiscal and economic policies of various governmental entities and the monetary policies of the FRB have a direct effect on the availability, growth, and distribution of bank loans, investments, and deposits. In late 2008 and 2009, because of economic turmoil in the credit markets, a sharp decline in real estate values and general economic recessionary conditions, Congress, the Treasury and the FRB took significant steps, including the TARP discussed above, to stabilize U.S. economic conditions, credit markets and individual financial institutions.

In addition, various proposals to change the laws and regulations governing the operations and taxation of, and deposit insurance premiums paid by, federally and state-chartered banks and other financial institutions are from time to time pending in Congress and in state legislatures as well as before the FRB, the FDIC and other federal and state bank regulatory authorities. The likelihood of any additional major changes in the future, and the impact any such changes might have on our banking subsidiaries are not possible to determine.

Government Regulation of Other Activities

Virtually all aspects of the Company’s Investment Management and Wealth Advisory businesses are subject to extensive regulation. Certain subsidiaries of the Company are registered with the SEC as investment advisers under the Investment Advisers Act of 1940, as amended (the “Investment Advisers Act”). As an investment adviser, each is subject to the provisions of the Investment Advisers Act and the SEC’s regulations promulgated thereunder. The Investment Advisers Act imposes numerous obligations on registered investment advisers, including fiduciary, recordkeeping, operational, and disclosure obligations. Certain subsidiaries of the Company are also subject to regulation under the securities laws and fiduciary laws of certain states. Each of the mutual funds for which the Investment Managers act as sub-adviser is registered with the SEC under the Investment Company Act of 1940, as amended (the “1940 Act”). Shares of each such fund are registered with the SEC under the Securities Act, and the shares of each fund are qualified for sale (or exempt from such qualification) under the laws of each state and the District of Columbia to the extent such shares are sold in any of such jurisdictions.

 

15


Table of Contents

The Company is also subject to the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974 (“ERISA”), and to regulations promulgated thereunder, insofar as it is a “fiduciary” under ERISA with respect to certain of its clients. ERISA and the applicable provisions of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended (the “Code”) impose certain duties on persons who are fiduciaries under ERISA, and prohibit certain transactions by the fiduciaries (and certain other related parties) to such plans.

As sub-adviser to registered investment companies, the Investment Managers are subject to requirements under the 1940 Act and the SEC’s regulations promulgated thereunder. Under the Investment Advisers Act, every investment advisory contract between a registered investment adviser and its clients must provide that it may not be assigned by the investment adviser without the consent of the client. In addition, under the 1940 Act, each contract with a registered investment company must provide that it terminates upon its assignment. Under both the Investment Advisers Act and the 1940 Act, an investment advisory contract is deemed to have been assigned in the case of a direct “assignment” of the contract as well as in the case of a sale, directly or indirectly, of a “controlling block” of the adviser’s voting securities. Such an assignment may be deemed to take place when a firm is acquired by the Company.

The foregoing laws and regulations generally grant supervisory agencies and bodies broad administrative powers, including the power to limit or restrict certain subsidiaries of the Company from conducting their business in the event that they fail to comply with such laws and regulations. Possible sanctions that may be imposed in the event of such noncompliance include the suspension of individual employees, limitations on the business activities for specified periods of time, revocation of registration as an investment adviser, commodity trading adviser and/or other registrations, and other censures and fines.

IV. Taxation

Federal Taxation

The Company and its incorporated affiliate partners are subject to federal income taxation generally applicable to corporations under the Code. In addition, the Banks are subject to Subchapter H of the Code, which provides specific rules for the treatment of securities, reserves for loan losses, and any common trust funds.

The Company and its incorporated affiliate partners are members of an affiliated group of corporations within the meaning of Section 1504 of the Code and file a consolidated federal income tax return. Some of the advantages of filing a consolidated tax return include the avoidance of tax on intercompany distributions and the ability to offset operating and capital losses of one company against operating income and capital gains of another company.

The Company’s taxable income includes the taxable income or loss from its subsidiaries that are limited liability companies.

State and Local Taxation

The Company and its affiliates are subject to the tax rate established in the state in which they perform their operations. Substantially all of the Company’s taxable income is derived from the following jurisdictions: Massachusetts, California, New York, and the City of New York.

The Massachusetts tax rate is 10.50% on taxable income apportioned to Massachusetts. Massachusetts’ taxable income is defined as federal taxable income subject to certain modifications. The Company believes these modifications allow for a deduction for 95% of dividends received from stock in which the entity owns 15% or more of the voting stock of the institution paying the dividend and to allow deductions for certain expenses allocated to federally tax exempt obligations. Combined reporting was not permitted under Massachusetts statutes for financial institutions for 2008 and prior years but is required starting in 2009. The tax rate will decrease to 10.0% for 2010, 9.5% for 2011 and 9.0% for 2012 and beyond.

 

16


Table of Contents

The California tax rate is 8.84% for corporations that are not financial institutions and 10.84% for financial institutions. The California tax is on California taxable income, which is defined as federal taxable income subject to certain modifications. Such modifications are not significant with respect to the Company’s California taxable income.

The New York state tax rate is 7.1% on taxable income apportioned to New York, plus a surcharge for business operations in the Metropolitan Commuter Transportation district.

The New York City tax rate is 9.0% on taxable income apportioned to New York City.

V. Internet Address

The Company’s Internet address is www.bostonprivate.com. The Company makes available on or through its Internet website, without charge, its annual reports on Form 10-K, quarterly reports on Form 10-Q, and current reports on Form 8-K and amendments to those reports filed or furnished pursuant to Section 13(a) or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended, as soon as reasonably practicable after such reports are electronically filed with, or furnished to, the SEC. The Company’s reports filed with, or furnished to, the SEC are also available at the SEC’s website at www.sec.gov. The quarterly earnings release conference call can also be accessed from the Company’s website. Press releases are also maintained on the Company’s website. Information on our website is not incorporated by reference into this document and should not be considered part of this Report.

 

ITEM 1A. RISK FACTORS

Before deciding to invest in us or deciding to maintain or increase your investment, you should carefully consider the risks described below, in addition to the other information contained in this report and in our other filings with the SEC. The risks and uncertainties described below and in our other filings are not the only ones facing us. Additional risks and uncertainties not presently known to us or that we currently deem immaterial may also affect our business. If any of these known or unknown risks or uncertainties actually occurs, our business, financial condition and results of operations could be seriously harmed. In that event, the market price for our common stock could decline and you may lose your investment.

Recent market volatility has impacted and may continue to impact our business.

The performance of our business has been and may continue to be affected by many factors including the recent volatility in the credit, mortgage and housing markets, the markets for securities relating to mortgages or housing, and with respect to financial institutions generally. Government action may also affect the business performance of our Company. Given the unprecedented nature of this volatility, we cannot predict what impact, if any, this volatility will have on our business which will subsequently affect the price of our common stock.

Market conditions and other factors have affected and may continue to affect the value of our common stock.

The trading price of the shares of our common stock will depend on many factors, which may change from time to time, including recent market volatility and:

 

   

conditions in the credit, mortgage and housing markets, the markets for securities relating to mortgages or housing, and developments with respect to financial institutions generally;

 

   

interest rates;

 

   

the market for similar securities;

 

   

government action or regulation;

 

   

general economic conditions or conditions in the financial markets;

 

17


Table of Contents
   

our past and future dividend practices; and

 

   

our financial condition, performance, creditworthiness and prospects.

As a result of changes in any of the foregoing factors, the shares of common stock that an investor purchases may trade at a price lower than that at which they were purchased.

The market price and trading volume of our common stock may be volatile.

The market price of our common stock may be volatile. In addition, the trading volume in our common stock may fluctuate and cause significant price variations to occur. We cannot assure you that the market price of our common stock will not fluctuate or decline significantly in the future. A significant decrease in the market price of our common stock could be considered a triggering event for goodwill impairment testing under Financial Accounting Standards Board (“FASB”) Accounting Standards Codification (“ASC”) No. 350, Intangibles—Goodwill and Other .

Some of the factors that could negatively affect our share price or result in fluctuations in the price or trading volume of our common stock include:

 

   

quarterly variations in our operating results or the quality of our assets;

 

   

operating results that vary from the expectations of management, securities analysts and investors;

 

   

changes in expectations as to our future financial performance;

 

   

announcements of innovations, new products, strategic developments, significant contracts, acquisitions and other material events by us or our competitors;

 

   

the operating and securities price performance of other companies that investors believe are comparable to us;

 

   

future sales of our equity or equity-related securities; and

 

   

changes in global financial markets and global economies and general market conditions, such as interest or foreign exchange rates, stock, commodity or real estate valuations or volatility.

If we are required to write down goodwill and other intangible assets, our financial condition and results of operations would be negatively affected.

When we acquire a business, a substantial portion of the purchase price of the acquisition could be allocated to goodwill and other identifiable intangible assets. The amount of the purchase price which is allocated to goodwill is determined by the excess of the purchase price over the net identifiable assets acquired. At December 31, 2009, our goodwill and other identifiable intangible assets were approximately $150.1 million. Under current accounting standards, if we determine goodwill or intangible assets are impaired, we will be required to write down the value of these assets. We conduct an annual review to determine whether goodwill and other identifiable intangible assets are impaired.

Our goodwill and intangible assets are tested for impairment annually in the fourth quarter at the reporting unit level. In addition, an impairment test could be triggered between annual testing dates if an event occurs or circumstances change that would more likely than not reduce the fair value below the carrying amount. Examples of those events or circumstances include the following:

 

   

significant adverse change in business climate;

 

   

significant decrease in stock price and/or market capitalization;

 

   

significant unanticipated loss of clients/assets under management;

 

   

loss of key personnel;

 

   

sustained periods of poor investment performance;

 

   

significant loss of deposits or loans;

 

18


Table of Contents
   

significant reductions in profitability;

 

   

significant changes in loan credit quality;

 

   

potential sale or disposal of an affiliate; and

 

   

adverse action or assessment by a regulator.

We have taken impairment charges at various times in 2007, 2008 and 2009. We cannot assure you that we will not be required to take further impairment charges in the future. Any impairment charge would have a negative effect on our stockholders’ equity and financial results.

In connection with our acquisitions and divestitures, and to the extent that we acquire or divest other companies in the future, our business may be negatively impacted by certain risks inherent in such transactions.

At this time, we do not intend to make acquisitions or further divestitures of other private banking, investment management, and wealth advisory companies in the foreseeable future. With respect to our past acquisitions, our business may be negatively impacted by certain risks inherent in such acquisitions. These risks include, but are not limited to, the following:

 

   

the risk that we may lose key clients or employees of the acquired business as a result of the change of ownership to us;

 

   

the risk that the acquired business will not perform in accordance with our expectations;

 

   

the risk that difficulties will arise in connection with the integration of the operations of the acquired business with the operations of our private banking, investment management, or wealth advisory businesses, particularly to the extent we are entering new geographic markets;

 

   

the risk that we will need to make significant investments in infrastructure, controls, staff, emergency backup facilities or other critical business functions that become strained by our growth;

 

   

the risk that management will divert its attention from other aspects of our business;

 

   

the risk associated with entering into geographic and product markets in which we have limited or no direct prior experience;

 

   

the risk that we may assume potential liabilities of the acquired company as a result of the acquisition; and

 

   

the risk that an acquisition will dilute our earnings per share, in both the short and long term, or that it will reduce our tangible capital ratios.

With respect to our past divestitures, our business may be negatively impacted by the risk that our business reputation may be adversely impacted or the risk that a divestiture will not have the anticipated positive impact on our consolidated balance sheets, consolidated statements of operations, and consolidated statements of cash flows.

Our deferred tax assets may not ultimately be realized or our tax positions may be subject to challenge by the IRS.

Our deferred tax assets may provide significant future tax savings to the Company. Our use of these deferred tax benefits may depend on a number of factors including the ability of the Company to generate significant future taxable income; the character of that income (ordinary versus capital); the absence of a future ownership change of the Company that could limit or eliminate the tax benefits; the acceptance by the taxing authorities of the positions taken on our tax returns as to the amount and timing of our income and expenses; and future changes in laws or regulations relating to tax deductions and net operating losses.

We assess the likelihood that deferred tax assets will be realizable based on future taxable income and, if necessary, establish a valuation allowance for those deferred tax assets determined to not likely be realizable. Management judgment is required in determining the appropriate recognition of deferred tax

 

19


Table of Contents

assets and liabilities, including projections of future taxable income, as well as the character of that income. There can be no absolute assurance however, that the net deferred assets will ultimately be realized.

We utilize a decentralized management structure, which may affect our ability to manage and control our subsidiaries.

Our subsidiaries have localized management teams. This decentralized structure gives the subsidiaries control over the day-to-day management of their business, including credit decisions, the selection of personnel, the pricing of loans and deposits, marketing decisions and the strategy in handling problem loans. This structure may affect our ability to manage and control our subsidiaries and implement corporate or enterprise-wide strategy and procedures at the subsidiary level.

We may be unable to attract and retain key personnel.

Our success depends, in large part, on our ability to attract and retain key personnel. Competition for the best people can be intense and we may not be able to hire or retain the key personnel that we depend upon for success. The unexpected loss of services of one or more of our key personnel could have a material adverse impact on our business because of their skills, knowledge of the markets in which we operate, years of industry experience and the difficulty of promptly finding qualified replacement personnel. Further, as described below, we are currently participating in the Treasury’s Capital Purchase Program. As a result, the Company is subject to certain limitations on executive compensation that could limit our ability to attract and retain key executive management personnel.

Competition in the local banking industry may impair our ability to attract and retain banking customers at current levels.

Competition in the local banking industry coupled with our relatively small size may limit the ability of our private banking affiliate partners to attract and retain banking customers.

In particular, the Banks’ competitors include several major financial companies whose greater resources may afford them a marketplace advantage by enabling them to maintain numerous banking locations and mount extensive promotional and advertising campaigns. Additionally, banks and other financial institutions with larger capitalization and financial intermediaries not subject to bank regulatory restrictions have larger lending limits and are able to serve the credit and investment needs of larger customers. Areas of competition include interest rates for loans and deposits, efforts to obtain deposits, and range and quality of services provided. Our Banks also face competition from out-of-state financial intermediaries which have opened low-end production offices or which solicit deposits in their respective market areas.

Because our Banks maintain smaller staffs and have fewer financial and other resources than larger institutions with which they compete, they may be limited in their ability to attract customers. In addition, some of the Banks’ current commercial banking customers may seek alternative banking sources as they develop needs for credit facilities larger than our Banks can accommodate.

If our Banks are unable to attract and retain banking customers, they may be unable to continue their loan growth and their results of operations and financial condition may otherwise be negatively impacted.

Fluctuations in interest rates may negatively impact our banking business.

Fluctuations in interest rates may negatively impact the business of our Banks. Our Banks’ main source of income from operations is net interest income, which is equal to the difference between the interest income received on interest-bearing assets (usually loans and investment securities) and the interest expense incurred in connection with interest-bearing liabilities (usually deposits and borrowings). These rates are highly sensitive to many factors beyond our control, including general economic conditions, both domestic and foreign, and the monetary and fiscal policies of various governmental and regulatory authorities. Our Banks’ net interest income can be affected significantly by changes in market interest rates. Changes in relative interest rates may reduce our Banks’ net interest income as the difference between interest income and interest expense decreases. As a result, our Banks have adopted asset and liability management policies

 

20


Table of Contents

to minimize the potential adverse effects of changes in interest rates on net interest income, primarily by altering the mix and maturity of loans, investments funding sources, and derivatives. However, even with these policies in place, a change in interest rates can impact our results of operations or financial condition.

An increase in interest rates could also have a negative impact on our Banks’ results of operations by reducing the ability of borrowers to repay their current loan obligations, which could not only result in increased loan defaults, foreclosures and write-offs, but also necessitate further increases to the Banks’ allowances for loan losses. Fluctuations in interest rates, in certain circumstances, may also lead to high levels of loan prepayments, which may also have an adverse impact on our net interest income.

Our cost of funds for banking operations may increase as a result of general economic conditions, interest rates and competitive pressures.

Our Banks have traditionally obtained funds principally through deposits and through borrowings. As a general matter, deposits are a cheaper source of funds than borrowings, because interest rates paid for deposits are typically less than interest rates charged for borrowings. Historically and in comparison to commercial banking averages, our Banks have had a higher percentage of their time deposits in denominations of $100,000 or more. Within the banking industry, the amounts of such deposits are generally considered more likely to fluctuate than deposits of smaller denominations. If, as a result of general economic conditions, market interest rates, competitive pressures or otherwise, the value of deposits at our Banks decreases relative to their overall banking operations, our Banks may have to rely more heavily on borrowings as a source of funds in the future.

Defaults in the repayment of loans may require additional loan loss reserves and negatively impact our business.

A borrower’s default on its obligations under one or more of the Banks’ loans may result in lost principal and interest income and increased operating expenses as a result of the allocation of management time and resources to the collection and work-out of the loan.

In certain situations, where collection efforts are unsuccessful or acceptable work-out arrangements cannot be reached, our Banks may have to write-off the loan in whole or in part. In such situations, the Banks may acquire real estate or other assets, if any, which secure the loan through foreclosure or other similar available remedies. In such cases, the amount owed under the defaulted loan often exceeds the value of the assets acquired.

Our Banks’ management periodically makes a determination of an allowance for loan losses based on available information, including the quality of their loan portfolio, certain economic conditions, and the value of the underlying collateral and the level of its non-accruing and criticized loans. We rely on our loan quality reviews, our experience and our evaluation of economic conditions, among other factors, in determining the amount of provision required for the allowance for loan losses. Provisions to this allowance result in an expense for the period. If, as a result of general economic conditions, previously incorrect assumptions, or an increase in defaulted loans, management determines that additional increases in the allowance for loan losses are necessary, the Banks will incur additional expenses.

If it is determined that a Bank should sell certain loans or a portfolio of loans, we are required to classify those loans as “held for sale” which requires us to carry such loans at the lower of cost or market. If we decide to sell loans at a time when the fair value of those loans is less than their carrying value, the adjustment will result in a loss. We may from time to time decide to sell particular loans or groups of loans, and the required adjustment could negatively affect our financial condition or results of operations.

In addition, bank regulatory agencies periodically review our Banks’ allowances for loan losses and the values they attribute to real estate acquired through foreclosure or other similar remedies. Such regulatory agencies may require the Banks to adjust their determination of the value for these items. These adjustments could negatively impact our results of operations or financial condition.

 

21


Table of Contents

A downturn in local economies or real estate markets could negatively impact our banking business.

A downturn in the local economies or real estate markets could negatively impact our banking business. Primarily, our Banks serve individuals and smaller businesses located in four geographic regions: New England, Northern California, Southern California, and the Pacific Northwest. The ability of the Banks’ customers to repay their loans is impacted by the economic conditions in these areas.

The Banks’ commercial loans are generally concentrated in the following customer groups:

 

   

real estate developers and investors;

 

   

financial service providers;

 

   

technology companies;

 

   

manufacturing and communications companies;

 

   

professional service providers;

 

   

general commercial and industrial companies; and

 

   

individuals.

Our Banks’ commercial loans, with limited exceptions, are secured by real estate (usually income producing residential and commercial properties), marketable securities or corporate assets (usually accounts receivable, equipment or inventory). Substantially all of our Banks’ residential mortgage and home equity loans are secured by residential property. Consequently, our Banks’ abilities to continue to originate real estate loans may be impaired by adverse changes in local and regional economic conditions in the real estate markets, or by acts of nature, including earthquakes, hurricanes and flooding. Due to the concentration of real estate collateral in the geographic regions in which we operate, these events could have a material adverse impact on the ability of our Banks’ borrowers to repay their loans and affect the value of the collateral securing these loans.

Collectively, our Banks have a sizable exposure to Commercial Real Estate, particularly in Northern California and New England, and industry analysts have predicted that this specific class of commercial loans may suffer elevated losses across the banking industry.

Environmental liability associated with commercial lending could result in losses.

In the course of business, our Banks may acquire, through foreclosure, properties securing loans they have originated or purchased which are in default. Particularly in commercial real estate lending, there is a risk that hazardous substances could be discovered on these properties. In this event, we, or our Banks, might be required to remove these substances from the affected properties at our sole cost and expense. The cost of this removal could substantially exceed the value of affected properties. We may not have adequate remedies against the prior owner or other responsible parties and could find it difficult or impossible to sell the affected properties. These events could have a material adverse effect on our business, results of operations and financial condition.

Prepayments of loans may negatively impact our business.

Generally, our Banks’ customers may prepay the principal amount of their outstanding loans at any time. The speed at which such prepayments occur, as well as the size of such prepayments, are within our customers’ discretion. If customers prepay the principal amount of their loans, and we are unable to lend those funds to other borrowers or invest the funds at the same or higher interest rates, our interest income will be reduced. A significant reduction in interest income could have a negative impact on our results of operations and financial condition.

 

22


Table of Contents

Our banking business is highly regulated, which could limit or restrict our activities and impose financial requirements or limitations on the conduct of our business.

Bank holding companies and banks operate in a highly regulated environment and are subject to supervision and examination by federal and state regulatory agencies. We are subject to the BHCA and to regulation and supervision by the Federal Reserve Board. Our Banks are subject to regulation and supervision by their respective federal and state regulatory agencies, which currently include the Massachusetts Commissioner of Banks, the California Department of Financial Institutions, the Washington State Department of Financial Institutions and the FDIC.

Federal and state laws and regulations govern numerous matters including changes in the ownership or control of banks and bank holding companies, maintenance of adequate capital and the financial condition of a financial institution, permissible types, amounts and terms of extensions of credit and investments, permissible nonbanking activities, the level of reserves against deposits and restrictions on dividend payments. The FDIC, the California Department of Financial Institutions, the Washington State Department of Financial Institutions, and the Massachusetts Commissioner of Banks possess the power to issue cease and desist orders to prevent or remedy unsafe or unsound practices or violations of law by banks subject to their regulation, and the Federal Reserve Board possesses similar powers with respect to bank holding companies. These and other restrictions limit the manner in which our Banks and we may conduct business and obtain financing.

We are participating in the Treasury’s CPP, which was developed as part of the TARP. On November 21, 2008, we issued and sold shares of our Series C Preferred, together with the TARP warrants, to the Treasury. In accordance with the terms of the CPP Securities Purchase Agreement with the Treasury with respect to the issuance of the Series C Preferred, our ability to declare or pay dividends or distributions on, or purchase, redeem or otherwise acquire for consideration, shares of our common and preferred stock will be subject to restrictions until the earlier of (a) the third anniversary of the date of issuance of the Series C Preferred and (b) the date on which the Series C Preferred has been redeemed in whole or Treasury has transferred all of the Series C Preferred to third parties. Participation in this Program also imposes certain other limits, including limits relating to executive compensation which could impact our ability to attract and retain key personnel. In addition, the Treasury has the ability to unilaterally amend the terms of the CPP, and may impose additional restrictions or obligations on the Company that could have a negative impact. Our banking business is also affected by the monetary policies of the Federal Reserve Board. Changes in monetary or legislative policies may affect the interest rates our Banks must offer to attract deposits and the interest rates they must charge on their loans, as well as the manner in which they offer deposits and make loans. These monetary policies have had, and are expected to continue to have, significant effects on the operating results of depository institutions generally, including our Banks.

The recent increase in FDIC deposit insurance premiums will increase our non-interest expense.

On December 16, 2008, the FDIC adopted a final rule, which took effect on January 1, 2009, increasing the deposit insurance assessment rate by seven cents per $100 of deposits. On February 27, 2009, the FDIC adopted another final rule, effective as of April 1, 2009, that, among other things, changed the way that the FDIC’s assessment system differentiates for risk and makes corresponding changes to assessment rates. As a result, our base assessment rate increased on April 1, 2009. In addition, in May 2009, the FDIC imposed a special assessment on all insured institutions. The special assessment amounted to 5 basis points on each institution’s assets minus Tier 1 capital as of June 30, 2009, subject to a maximum equal to 10 basis points times the institution’s assessment base. The Banks’ special assessment in the aggregate amounted to $2.5 million. The increase in our deposit insurance premiums will result in an increase in our non-interest expense.

The value of our investment in FHLB stock may be reduced.

The Company’s affiliate Banks are members of the Federal Home Loan Bank (“FHLB”) in the Boston, San Francisco, and Seattle districts (the “FHLBs”). The FHLBs have advised their members that they are focusing on preserving capital in response to ongoing market volatility and, accordingly, there will be little

 

23


Table of Contents

or no dividend payout in near term quarterly periods. Further, moratoriums have been placed on excess stock repurchases at some of the FHLBs. The Boston FHLB and Seattle FHLB had net losses in 2009. The FHLBs had other-than-temporary impairment charges in 2009 due to decreases in the estimated fair values of private-label mortgage-backed securities they own. If these losses and impairment charges continue, depending upon the severity and the impact on the FHLBs capital position, they could possibly put into question whether the FHLB stock owned by the Company was impaired. The FHLBs have stated that they expect and intend to hold their private-label mortgage-backed securities to maturity. The Company will continue to monitor its investment in FHLB stock.

We may not be able to attract and retain investment management and wealth advisory clients at current levels.

Due to intense competition, our investment management and wealth advisory subsidiaries may not be able to attract and retain clients at current levels. Competition is especially strong in our geographic market areas, because there are numerous well-established and successful investment management and wealth advisory firms in these areas. Many of our competitors have greater resources than we have.

Our ability to successfully attract and retain investment management and wealth advisory clients is dependent upon our ability to compete with competitors’ investment products, level of investment performance, client services and marketing and distribution capabilities. If we are not successful, our results of operations and financial condition may be negatively impacted.

For example, during the years ended December 31, 2009 and 2008, approximately 32% and 38%, respectively, of our segment revenues were derived from investment management and trust fees and wealth advisory contracts. Investment management contracts are typically terminable upon less than 30 days’ notice. Most of our investment management clients may withdraw funds from accounts under management generally in their sole discretion. Wealth advisory client contracts must typically be renewed on an annual basis and are terminable upon relatively short notice. The combined financial performance of our investment management and wealth advisory affiliate partners is a significant factor in our overall results of operations and financial condition.

Our investment management business is highly dependent on people to produce investment returns and to solicit and retain clients.

We rely on our investment managers to produce investment returns. We believe that investment performance is one of the most important factors for the growth of our assets under management. Poor investment performance could impair our revenues and growth because existing clients might withdraw funds in favor of better performing products, which would result in lower investment management fees or our ability to attract funds from existing and new clients might diminish.

The market for investment managers is extremely competitive and is increasingly characterized by frequent movement of investment managers among different firms. In addition, our individual investment managers often have regular direct contact with particular clients, which can lead to a strong client relationship based on the client’s trust in that individual manager. The loss of a key investment manager could jeopardize our relationships with our clients and lead to the loss of client accounts. Losses of such accounts could have a material adverse effect on our results of operations and financial condition.

In addition to the risk of loss of key investment managers, our investment management business is dependent on the integrity of our asset managers and our employees. If an asset manager or employee were to misappropriate any client funds, the reputation of our asset management business could be negatively affected, which may result in the loss of accounts and have a material adverse effect on our results of operations and financial condition.

 

24


Table of Contents

Our investment management business may be negatively impacted by changes in economic and market conditions.

Our investment management business may be negatively impacted by changes in general economic and market conditions because the performance of such business is directly affected by conditions in the financial and securities markets. The financial markets and businesses operating in the securities industry are highly volatile (meaning that performance results can vary greatly within short periods of time) and are directly affected by, among other factors, domestic and foreign economic conditions and general trends in business and finance, all of which are beyond our control. We cannot assure you that broad market performance will be favorable in the future. The world financial and securities markets will likely continue to experience significant volatility as a result of, among other things, world economic and political conditions. Declines in the financial markets or a lack of sustained growth may result in a corresponding decline in our performance and may adversely affect the assets that we manage.

In addition, our management contracts generally provide for fees payable for investment management services based on the market value of assets under management, although there are a portion of our contracts that provide for the payment of fees based on investment performance in addition to a base fee. Because most contracts provide for a fee based on market values of securities, fluctuations in securities prices may have a material adverse effect on our results of operations and financial condition.

Our investment management and wealth advisory businesses are highly regulated, and the regulators have the ability to limit or restrict our activities and impose fines or suspensions on the conduct of our business.

Our investment management and wealth advisory businesses are highly regulated, primarily at the federal level. The failure of any of our subsidiaries that provide investment management and wealth advisory services to comply with applicable laws or regulations could result in fines, suspensions of individual employees or other sanctions including revocation of such subsidiary’s registration as an investment adviser.

All of our investment managers and wealth advisory affiliate partners, except DTC, are registered investment advisers under the Investment Advisers Act. The Investment Advisers Act imposes numerous obligations on registered investment advisers, including fiduciary, record keeping, operational and disclosure obligations. These subsidiaries, as investment advisers, are also subject to regulation under the federal and state securities laws and the fiduciary laws of certain states. In addition, the affiliate partners acting as sub-advisers to mutual funds are subject to certain provisions and regulations of the Investment Company Act of 1940.

We are also subject to the provisions and regulations of ERISA to the extent that we act as a “fiduciary” under ERISA with respect to certain of our clients. ERISA and the applicable provisions of the federal tax laws, impose a number of duties on persons who are fiduciaries under ERISA and prohibit certain transactions involving the assets of each ERISA plan which is a client, as well as certain transactions by the fiduciaries (and certain other related parties) to such plans.

In addition, applicable law provides that all investment contracts with mutual fund clients may be terminated by the clients, without penalty, upon no more than 60 days notice. Investment contracts with institutional and other clients are typically terminable by the client, also without penalty, upon 30 days notice.

Also, Coldstream Securities, Inc., a wholly-owned subsidiary of Coldstream Holdings, Inc., as a registered broker-dealer, is subject to extensive regulation under federal and state laws, as well as the rules promulgated by the Financial Industry Regulatory Authority.

Changes in these laws or regulations could have a material adverse impact on our profitability and mode of operations.

 

25


Table of Contents

We are a holding company and depend on our subsidiaries for dividends, distributions and other payments.

We are a separate and distinct legal entity from our banking and nonbanking subsidiaries and depend on dividends, distributions and other payments from our banking and nonbanking subsidiaries to fund dividend payments on our common and preferred stock and to fund all payments on our other obligations. Many of our subsidiaries are subject to laws that authorize regulatory bodies to block or reduce the flow of funds from those subsidiaries to us. Regulatory action of that kind could impede access to funds we need to make payments on our obligations or dividend payments. Additionally, if our subsidiaries’ earnings are not sufficient to make dividend payments to us while maintaining adequate capital levels, we may not be able to make dividend payments to our common and preferred stockholders. Furthermore, our right to participate in a distribution of assets upon a subsidiary’s liquidation or reorganization is subject to the prior claims of the subsidiary’s creditors.

Our stockholders may not receive dividends on the common stock.

Holders of our common stock are entitled to receive dividends only when, as and if declared by our board of directors. Although we have historically declared cash dividends on our common stock, we are not required to do so and our board of directors may reduce or eliminate our common stock dividend in the future. A reduction or elimination of dividends could adversely affect the market price of our common stock. In addition, as noted above, our ability to declare or pay dividends on shares of our common stock is subject to restrictions as a result of our participation in the U.S. Treasury’s TARP Capital Purchase Program.

Future capital offerings may adversely affect the market price of our common stock.

In the future, we may attempt to increase our capital resources or, if our or our banking subsidiaries’ capital ratios fall below the required minimums, we or our banking subsidiaries could be forced to raise additional capital by making additional offerings of debt, common, or preferred equity securities, including medium-term notes, trust preferred securities, senior or subordinated notes and preferred stock. Upon liquidation, holders of our debt securities and shares of preferred stock and lenders with respect to other borrowings will receive distributions of our available assets prior to the holders of our common stock.

Additional equity offerings may dilute the holdings of our existing stockholders or reduce the market price of our common stock, or both. Although holders of our common stock are not entitled to preemptive rights or other protections against dilution, the terms of our Series B Preferred stock do provide for certain anti-dilution adjustments. Because our decision to issue securities in any future offering will depend on market conditions and other factors beyond our control, we cannot predict or estimate the amount, timing or nature of our future offerings.

We cannot assure you that such capital will be available to us on acceptable terms or at all. Our inability to raise sufficient additional capital on acceptable terms when needed could adversely affect our businesses, financial condition and results of operations. Thus, our stockholders bear the risk of our future offerings reducing the market price of our common stock and diluting their stock holdings in us.

Anti-takeover provisions could negatively impact our stockholders.

Provisions of Massachusetts law and provisions of our articles of organization and bylaws could make it more difficult for a third party to acquire control of us or have the effect of discouraging a third party from attempting to acquire control of us. We have a classified board of directors and as such it is subject to the provisions of Massachusetts Business Corporations Act Section 8.06(b), which provides for certain anti-takeover provisions for public companies incorporated in Massachusetts. Additionally, our articles of organization authorize our board of directors to issue preferred stock without stockholder approval and such preferred stock could be issued as a defensive measure in response to a takeover proposal. These provisions could make it more difficult for a third party to acquire us even if an acquisition might be in the best interest of our stockholders.

 

26


Table of Contents

ITEM 1B. UNRESOLVED STAFF COMMENTS

There are no unresolved written comments that were received from the SEC staff 180 days or more before the end of our fiscal year relating to our periodic or current reports under the Exchange Act.

ITEM 2. PROPERTIES

The Company and its subsidiaries conduct operations in leased premises. The Company’s headquarters are located at Ten Post Office Square, Boston, Massachusetts. The premises are generally located in the vicinity of the headquarters for all of the affiliate partners.

Generally, the initial terms of the leases for these properties range from five to fifteen years. Most of the leases also include options to renew at fair market value for periods of five to ten years. In addition to minimum rentals, certain leases include escalation clauses based upon various price indices and include provisions for additional payments to cover taxes.

ITEM 3. LEGAL PROCEEDINGS

Trust Litigation

Beginning in 1984, Borel served as the trustee of a private family trust (the “Trust”) that was the joint owner of a certain real property known as the Guadalupe Oil Field. The field was leased for many years to Union Oil Company of California (d/b/a UNOCAL) for oil and gas production. Significant environmental contamination resulting from UNOCAL’s operations was found on the property in 1994. The subject property was the subject of lengthy litigation brought by certain beneficiaries of the Trust against Borel and others in 1994. In 2002, during the course of that litigation, Borel (as Trustee) sold the property to its former lessee, the Union Oil Company of California (d/b/a UNOCAL) in exchange for cash and a comprehensive indemnity on behalf of the Trust. Litigation with the beneficiaries continued until 2005, when Borel, UNOCAL, and others entered into a comprehensive settlement with all of the beneficiaries, except one, dismissing all of their pending actions in exchange for a payment of cash and other considerations from UNOCAL. Borel paid nothing in the settlement. The dissenting beneficiary attempted to continue the litigation against Borel on his own, acting pro se. The state court dismissed this individual action with prejudice in 2005, whereupon the dissenting beneficiary filed a similar action, again pro se, in the U.S. District Court for the Northern District of California. The federal court dismissed this action with prejudice, and the dissenting beneficiary then unsuccessfully pursued appeals to the Ninth Circuit Court of Appeals and the U.S. Supreme Court. His petition for certiorari was denied in February 2008, concluding the litigation. The 2005 settlement with the other beneficiaries was thereafter consummated. All of the property formerly belonging to the Trust was distributed to separate subtrusts established for each individual beneficiary. Borel is not the trustee of these subtrusts of the litigants. Borel’s petition for termination of the Trust was heard in March 2009. The motion for termination was granted and the order signed on March 18, 2009. Borel was formally discharged as Trustee on June 2, 2009. No further action will be required with respect to this matter.

Other

The Company is also involved in routine legal proceedings occurring in the ordinary course of business. In the opinion of management, final disposition of these proceedings will not have a material adverse effect on the consolidated balance sheets or consolidated statements of operations of the Company.

ITEM 4. (RESERVED)

 

27


Table of Contents

PART II

 

ITEM 5. MARKET FOR REGISTRANT’S COMMON EQUITY, RELATED STOCKHOLDER MATTERS, AND ISSUER PURCHASES OF EQUITY SECURITIES

I. Market for Common Stock

The Company’s common stock, par value $1.00 per share, is traded on the NASDAQ Global Select Market (“NASDAQ”) under the symbol “BPFH.” At March 5, 2010, there were 68,792,790 shares of common stock outstanding. The number of holders of record of the Company’s common stock as of March 5, 2010 was 1,285. The Company believes that the number of beneficial owners of its common stock, as of the record date, was greater. The closing price of the Company’s common stock on March 5, 2010 was $7.34.

The following table sets forth the high and low sale prices for the Company’s common stock for the periods indicated, as reported by NASDAQ:

 

     High    Low

Fiscal year ended December 31, 2009

     

Fourth Quarter

   $ 6.73    $ 4.55

Third Quarter

     7.25      4.13

Second Quarter

     6.94      3.00

First Quarter

     7.07      2.07

Fiscal year ended December 31, 2008

     

Fourth Quarter

   $ 10.66    $ 5.01

Third Quarter

     13.80      4.53

Second Quarter

     11.75      5.63

First Quarter

     27.30      10.15

II. Dividends

The Company presently plans to pay cash dividends on its common stock on a quarterly basis dependent upon the results of operations of the immediately preceding quarters. However, declaration of dividends by the Board of Directors of the Company will depend on a number of factors, including capital requirements, liquidity, regulatory limitations, the Company’s operating results and financial condition and general economic conditions.

The Company is a legal entity separate and distinct from its affiliate partners. These affiliate partners are the principal assets of the Company and, as such, provide the main source of payment of dividends by the Company. As to the payment of dividends, as discussed below, each of the Banks is subject to the laws and regulations of its chartering jurisdiction and to the regulations of its primary federal regulator. If the federal banking regulator determines that a depository institution under its jurisdiction is engaged in or is about to engage in an unsafe or unsound practice, the regulator may require, after notice and hearing, that the institution cease and desist from such practice. Depending on the financial condition of the depository institution, an unsafe or unsound practice could include the payment of dividends. The federal banking agencies have indicated that paying dividends that deplete a depository institution’s capital base to an inadequate level would be an unsafe and unsound banking practice. Under the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation Improvement Act of 1991, a depository institution may not pay any dividend if payment would cause it to become undercapitalized or if it already is undercapitalized. The federal agencies have also issued policy statements that provide that bank holding companies and insured banks should generally only pay dividends out of current operating earnings.

The Company paid dividends on its common stock of $0.04 and $0.22 in 2009 and 2008, respectively.

Under Massachusetts, California, and Washington law, payment of dividends from the Banks may be restricted and limited under certain circumstances. These restrictions on the Banks’ ability to pay dividends to the Company may restrict the ability of the Company to pay dividends to the holders of the common stock. The

 

28


Table of Contents

payment of dividends by BPFH and the Banks may also be affected or limited by other factors, such as the requirement to maintain adequate capital above regulatory guidelines. See Part 1, Item 1, “Business—Regulatory Considerations” for further detail. There are no such comparable statutory restrictions on the Company’s Investment Managers’ and Wealth Advisors’ ability to pay dividends.

On July 22, 2008, the Company announced that it had reduced its dividend to $0.04 per share on an annualized basis. As a result of the Treasury’s purchase of the Company’s Series C Preferred stock on November 21, 2008, the Treasury’s consent shall be required for any increase in common stock dividends per share until the third anniversary of the date of November 21, 2008, unless prior to such date the Series C Preferred is redeemed in whole or the Treasury has transferred all of the Series C Preferred to third parties.

III. Securities Authorized for Issuance Under Equity Compensation Plans

Information regarding securities authorized for issuance under our equity compensation plans, shall be included in the definitive Proxy Statement (the “Proxy Statement”) for the 2010 Annual Meeting of Stockholders to be held on April 29, 2010 and is incorporated herein by reference.

IV. Recent Sales of Unregistered Securities

None.

V. Issuer Repurchases

On November 21, 2008, the Company issued 154,000 shares of Series C Preferred to the Treasury. The Company also issued the Treasury the TARP warrants to purchase 2,887,500 shares of common stock at a price of $8.00 per share. The total consideration received by the Company for this transaction was approximately $154.0 million.

On December 19, 2008, the Company filed a registration statement on Form S-3 with the SEC to register, among other securities, 154,000 shares of the Series C Preferred and the TARP Warrants. The registration statement was declared effective on March 17, 2009.

On January 13, 2010, the Company redeemed $50 million of the Company’s outstanding $154 million in Series C Preferred that was issued to the Treasury in November 2008. The Company paid approximately $50.4 million to the Treasury to repurchase the Series C Preferred, which included payment for accrued and unpaid dividends for the shares.

 

29


Table of Contents

VI. Performance Graph

The Total Return Performance Graph set forth below is a line graph comparing the yearly percentage change in the cumulative total stockholder return on the Company’s common stock, based on the market price of the Company’s common stock, with the total return on companies within the NASDAQ Composite, companies within the SNL $5-$10B Bank Index and companies within the SNL Asset Manager Index. The calculation of cumulative return assumes a $100 investment in the Company’s common stock, the NASDAQ Composite, the SNL $5-$10B Bank Index and the SNL Asset Manager Index on December 31, 2004. It also assumes that all dividends are reinvested during the relevant periods.

LOGO

 

     Year Ending December 31,
     2004    2005    2006    2007    2008    2009

BPFH

   $ 100.00    $ 109.14    $ 102.34    $ 99.52    $ 25.57    $ 21.75

NASDAQ Composite

     100.00      101.37      111.03      121.92      72.49      104.31

SNL Bank $5B-$10B

     100.00      96.89      104.56      83.86      73.57      56.56

SNL Asset Manager

     100.00      127.18      147.49      167.89      79.79      129.44

 

30


Table of Contents

ITEM 6. SELECTED FINANCIAL DATA

The following table represents selected financial data for the five fiscal years ended December 31. The data set forth below does not purport to be complete. It should be read in conjunction with, and is qualified in its entirety by, the more detailed information, including the Company’s Consolidated Financial Statements and related notes, appearing elsewhere herein. All items presented below, for all years presented, have been adjusted for discontinued operations related to the five affiliates divested in 2009.

 

     2009     2008(1)     2007(2)     2006     2005(6)  
           (In thousands, except share data)        

At December 31:

          

Total balance sheet assets

   $ 6,049,265      $ 7,282,835      $ 6,940,829      $ 5,789,015      $ 5,134,219   

Assets of discontinued operations

     —          1,578,170        1,663,893        1,569,078        1,374,007   

Total loans (excluding loans held for sale)

     4,307,040        4,129,081        4,003,291        3,094,276        2,643,057   

Allowance for loan losses

     68,444        64,091        59,933        33,234        29,741   

Cash and investments

     1,387,483        1,132,290        842,335        754,504        838,903   

Goodwill and intangible assets

     150,117        155,051        276,912        244,951        161,232   

Deposits

     4,255,219        3,748,912        3,550,499        3,140,347        2,792,998   

Borrowed funds

     992,034        1,329,898        1,273,945        678,489        661,843   

Total Company’s stockholders’ equity

     651,154        648,676        619,372        595,415        510,969   

Non-performing assets

     106,938        76,828        35,301        8,751        4,998   

Net loans (charged off)/recoveries

     (40,606     (192,485     478        (746     (170

Client assets under management and advisory(3):

          

Private Banking

   $ 3,479,000      $ 3,253,000      $ 3,656,000      $ 3,105,000      $ 2,971,000   

Investment Management

     7,048,000        6,381,000        9,115,000        8,746,000        3,259,000   

Wealth Advisory

     7,161,000        6,235,000        6,412,000        3,727,000        3,140,000   

Inter-company relationships

     (18,000     (16,000     —          (13,000     (26,000
                                        

Total client assets under management and advisory

   $ 17,670,000      $ 15,853,000      $ 19,183,000      $ 15,565,000      $ 9,344,000   
                                        

For The Year Ended December 31:

          

Net interest income

   $ 159,485      $ 150,228      $ 136,993      $ 120,172      $ 114,745   

Provision for loan losses

     44,959        196,643        23,449        4,240        4,890   
                                        

Net interest income/(loss) after provision for loan losses

     114,526        (46,415     113,544        115,932        109,855   

Fees and other income

     126,449        129,449        106,204        83,364        62,275   

Operating expense

     221,259        213,785        184,626        152,840        128,978   

Impairment of goodwill and intangibles

     1,699        133,202        31,780        —          —     
                                        

Income/(loss) from continuing operations before income taxes

     18,017        (263,953     3,342        46,456        43,152   

Income tax expense/ (benefit)

     1,632        (70,737     (6,339     12,431        13,151   
                                        

Net income/(loss) from continuing operations

     16,385        (193,216     9,681        34,025        30,001   
                                        

Net (loss)/income from discontinued operations

     (7,505     (191,209     (1,524     24,047        16,057   
                                        

Less: Net income attributable to noncontrolling interests

     3,649        4,327        3,987        3,699        2,512   
                                        

Net income/(loss) attributable to the Company

   $ 5,231      $ (388,752   $ 4,170      $ 54,373      $ 43,546   
                                        

Per Share Data:

          

Basic (loss)/earnings per share from continuing operations

   $ (0.41   $ (4.85   $ 0.15      $ 0.96      $ 1.02   

Diluted (loss)/earnings per share from continuing operations

   $ (0.41   $ (4.85   $ 0.15      $ 0.85      $ 0.89   

Average basic common shares outstanding

     66,696,977        47,528,418        36,731,621        35,452,880        29,425,157   

Average diluted common shares outstanding

     66,696,977        47,528,418        38,315,330        40,089,380        33,824,717   

Cash dividends per share

   $ 0.04      $ 0.22      $ 0.36      $ 0.32      $ 0.28   

Book value per share(7)

   $ 6.51      $ 7.36      $ 16.53      $ 16.27      $ 14.68   

Selected Operating Ratios:

          

Return on average assets

     0.15     nm        0.13     1.09     1.19

Return on average equity

     1.37     nm        1.39     10.43     12.84

Net interest margin(4)

     3.14     3.18     3.44     3.61     3.80

Total fees and other income/total revenue(5)

     44.22     46.29     43.67     40.96     35.18

Asset Quality Ratios:

          

Non-accrual loans to total loans (excluding loans held for sale)

     2.10     1.55     0.85     0.27     0.19

Non-performing assets to total assets

     1.77     1.05     0.51     0.15     0.10

Allowance for loan losses to total loans (excluding loans held for sale)

     1.59     1.55     1.50     1.07     1.13

Allowance for loan losses to non-accrual loans (excluding loans held for sale)

     0.76        1.00        1.76        4.05        5.95   

Allowance for loan losses to classified loans (excluding loans held for sale)

     0.49        1.01        0.63        1.01        4.00   

Other Ratios:

          

Dividend payout ratio

     nm        nm        nm        37.65     31.46

Total equity to total assets ratio

     10.76     8.91     8.92     10.29     9.95

Tangible common equity to tangible assets ratio(8)

     6.66     5.07     3.15     3.27     3.26

 

31


Table of Contents

 

nm - not meaningful

(1) Earnings for 2008 were reduced by $115.3 million, or $2.43 per share, for the after tax and minority interest impact of impairment charges at FPB, Charter, DGHM and the Holding Company; and by $124.3 million, or $2.61 per share, for the after tax provisions for loan losses. These charges were slightly offset by the gains recognized, net of tax, of $14.2 million, or $0.30 per share, from the repurchase of the Company’s 3% Contingent Convertible Senior Notes due 2027. To determine net of tax amounts, an assumed effective tax rate of approximately 37% is used, except for the non-deductible impairment at the Private Banking affiliates and portions of the impairment at DGHM. For further details see Part II, Item 7, “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations.”
(2) Net income for 2007 was reduced by $18.1 million, or $0.47 per share, for the after tax and minority interest impact of impairment charges at DGHM, and $11.4 million, or $0.30 per share, for the increase in the allowance for loan losses and other adjustments related to the increase in classified loans at FPB described in Part II, Item 7, “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations.” To determine net of tax amounts, an assumed effective tax rate of approximately 37% is used. Return on average assets and return on average equity were also reduced.
(3) The Company changed the accounting for its interest in BOS from the equity method to the consolidation method as a result of the majority interest ownership of BOS in the third quarter of 2007. BOS’s prior period Assets Under Management were not included in the Company’s prior period consolidated balances.
(4) Net interest margin represents net interest income on a fully-taxable equivalent basis as a percent of average interest-earning assets.
(5) Total revenue is defined as net interest income plus fees and other income.
(6) Adjusted to include the impact of stock-based compensation, see Part II, Item 8, “Financial Statements and Supplementary Data—Note 18: Employee Benefits” for additional information.
(7) Book value per share is calculated by reducing the Company’s total equity by the preferred stock balance, then dividing that value by the total common shares outstanding as of the end of that period.
(8) The Company calculates tangible assets by adjusting total assets to exclude goodwill and intangible assets. The Company calculates tangible common equity by adjusting total equity to exclude the equity from the TARP funding of $154 million and goodwill and intangible assets and include the difference between redemption value and value per Accounting Research Bulletin 51, Consolidated Financial Statements (“ARB 51”) for redeemable non-controlling interests. The Company uses certain non-GAAP financial measures, such as the Tangible Common Equity to Tangible Assets ratio, to provide information for investors to effectively analyze financial trends of ongoing business activities, and to enhance comparability with peers across the financial sector. A reconciliation from the Company’s GAAP Total Equity to Total Assets ratio to the Non-GAAP Tangible Common Equity to Tangible Assets ratio is presented below:

 

     2009     2008     2007     2006     2005  

Total balance sheet assets

   $ 6,049,265      $ 7,282,835      $ 6,940,829      $ 5,789,015      $ 5,134,219   

LESS: Goodwill and intangible assets, net(a)

     (150,117     (178,543     (458,238     (460,964     (384,407
                                        

Tangible assets (non-GAAP)

   $ 5,899,148      $ 7,104,292      $ 6,482,591      $ 5,328,051      $ 4,749,812   
                                        

Total Company’s stockholders’ equity

   $ 651,154      $ 648,676      $ 619,372      $ 595,415      $ 510,969   

LESS: Goodwill and intangible assets, net(a)

     (150,117     (178,543     (458,238     (460,964     (384,407

TARP Funding

     (154,000     (154,000     —          —          —     

ADD: Difference between redemption value of non-controlling interests and value under ARB 51

     46,016        43,800        43,091        39,782        28,379   
                                        

Total adjusting items

     (258,101     (288,743     (415,147     (421,182     (356,028
                                        

Tangible Common Equity (non-GAAP)

   $ 393,053      $ 359,933      $ 204,225      $ 174,233      $ 154,941   
                                        

Total Equity/Total Assets

     10.76     8.91     8.92     10.29     9.95

Tangible Common Equity/Tangible Assets (non-GAAP)

     6.66     5.07     3.15     3.27     3.26

 

  (a) Includes goodwill and intangible assets of divested affiliates for years 2008—2005.

 

32


Table of Contents
ITEM 7. MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

Management’s discussion and analysis of financial condition and results of operations should be read in conjunction with the Consolidated Financial Statements, the notes thereto, and other statistical information included in this annual report.

Executive Summary

The Company offers a broad range of wealth management services to high net worth individuals, families, businesses and select institutions through its three reportable segments: Private Banking, Investment Management, and Wealth Advisory. This executive summary provides an overview of the most significant aspects of the operating segments and the Company’s operations in 2009. Details of the matters addressed in this summary are provided elsewhere in this document and, in particular, in the sections immediately following.

In 2009, the Company recorded net income attributable to the Company of $5.2 million, but recorded a loss attributable to common shareholders of $0.52 per diluted share after accounting for non-cash equity charges and preferred dividends. This compares to a net loss attributable to the Company of $388.8 million and a loss attributable to common shareholders of $8.87 per diluted share in 2008. In 2009, the Company recorded net income from continuing operations attributable to the Company of $12.7 million and a loss of $0.41 per diluted share from continuing operations, compared to a net loss from continuing operations attributable to the Company of $197.5 million and a loss of $4.85 per diluted share from continuing operations in 2008. See Part II, Item 8, “Financial Statements and Supplementary Data—Note 1. Basis of Presentation and Summary of Significant Accounting Policies” for further detail on the charges made to arrive to income attributable to the common shareholders. The increase in net income attributable to the Company in 2009 from 2008 was largely due to a decrease in provision for loan losses of $151.7 million, a decrease in goodwill and intangible impairment charges of $131.5 million, and a decrease in losses related to discontinued operations of $183.7 million.

The Company has taken a number of steps in 2009 to increase capital, reduce credit and operating risk, and create financial flexibility in a difficult economic environment. These steps include divesting of five affiliates, repurchasing the remaining convertible debt, and repurchasing a portion of the convertible trust preferred debt.

In 2009, the Company divested its interests in five of its affiliates—Westfield, Gibraltar, RINET, Sand Hill, and BPVI. The results of operations for these affiliates and the gain/ (loss) on sale related to each are included in “Net loss from discontinued operations” in the consolidated statements of operations for current and prior periods. In addition, the assets and liabilities of the divested companies have been reclassified to assets and liabilities of discontinued operations in the accompanying consolidated balance sheets for periods prior to divestiture. The Company recognized an after-tax loss from discontinued operations of $7.5 million, or $0.11 per share. For further detail on the divestitures, refer to Part II, Item 8, “Financial Statements and Supplementary Data—Note 2: Divestitures and Acquisitions.”

In 2009, the Company repurchased the remaining balance of its 3% Contingent Convertible Senior Notes due 2027 (the “Notes”) of $52.4 million and recognized a $0.4 million pretax gain on repurchase. In addition, the Company also repurchased $44.5 million of its publicly traded convertible trust preferred securities issued in 2004 by Boston Private Capital Trust I, a wholly-owned subsidiary of the Company (the “Boston Private Capital Trust I”) and recognized an $18.3 million pretax gain on repurchase. The Company expects these transactions to increase net interest income in future periods due to lower interest expense.

Results for 2009 and 2008 were affected by the economic recession that began in late 2007. The recession and the programs implemented to mitigate its effect have had the following results on the Company’s business: (i) the declining real estate markets continued to affect credit quality at the Banks, leading to higher charge-offs and provision for loan losses in both years as compared to historical values as well as increased costs to manage a large portfolio of problematic loans; (ii) the declining stock market and illiquid credit markets triggered goodwill

 

33


Table of Contents

impairment tests at all affiliates and led to significant impairment charges in late 2008; (iii) government intervention through programs such as the TARP CPP and the TLGP has helped to provide low cost liquidity and stabilize operations in late 2008 and continued into 2009; and (iv) the FDIC raised insurance rates on deposits in early 2009 and later requested banks prepay premiums for 2010, 2011 and 2012 to replenish its funds due to a decrease in its deposit insurance fund reserve ratios to below the minimum.

Private Banking

The following table presents a summary of profits/(losses), revenues and expenses for the Private Banking segment continuing operations for 2009, 2008, and 2007.

 

     As of and for the year ended December 31,    2009 vs. 2008     2008 vs. 2007  
     2009    2008     2007    $ Change     %     $ Change     %  
     (In thousands)  

Net interest income

   $ 169,802    $ 163,767      $ 149,948    $ 6,035      4   $ 13,819      9

Fees and other income:

                

Investment management and trust fees

     20,810      22,303        20,773      (1,493   -7     1,530      7

Other income

     17,711      6,776        9,889      10,935      161     (3,113   -31
                                                  

Total fees and other income

     38,521      29,079        30,662      9,442      32     (1,583   -5
                                                  

Total revenues

     208,323      192,846        180,610      15,477      8     12,236      7
                                                  

Provision for loan losses

     44,959      196,643        23,449      (151,684   -77     173,194      nm   

Expenses:

                

Operating expenses

     144,713      125,019        108,354      19,694      16     16,665      15

Impairment of goodwill and intangibles

     —        91,621        —        (91,621   -100     91,621      nm   
                                                  

Total expenses

     144,713      216,640        108,354      (71,927   -33     108,286      100
                                                  

Income/ (loss) before income taxes

     18,651      (220,437     48,807      239,088      nm        (269,244   nm   
                                                  

Income tax expense/ (benefit)

     4,746      (53,708     14,132      58,454      nm        (67,840   nm   
                                                  

Net income/ (loss) attributable to the Company

   $ 13,905    $ (166,729   $ 34,675    $ 180,634      nm      $ (201,404   nm   
                                                  

Total loans(1)

   $ 4,304,110    $ 4,126,444      $ 3,901,333    $ 177,666      4   $ 225,111      6

Assets

   $ 5,669,645    $ 5,399,691      $ 4,933,439    $ 269,954      5   $ 466,252      9

Deposits(2)

   $ 4,368,780    $ 3,940,454      $ 3,569,718    $ 428,326      11   $ 370,736      10

Assets Under Management

   $ 3,479,000    $ 3,253,000      $ 3,656,000    $ 226,000      7   $ (403,000   -11

 

nm - not meaningful

(1) Loans presented in this table are loans from the Private Banking segment and do not include loans of non-banking affiliates or the Holding Company.
(2) Deposits presented in this table do not include intercompany eliminations related to deposits in the Banks from non-banking affiliates or the Holding Company.

The Company’s Private Banking segment reported net income of $13.9 million in 2009, compared to a net loss of $166.7 million in 2008 and net income of $34.7 million in 2007. The 2009 increase in net income was a result of the following items: lower charge-offs and provision for loan losses, although they remained higher than historical trends; no impairment charge was taken in 2009, compared to the significant 2008 goodwill and intangible asset impairment charge; higher gains on sales of investments as the banks sold more of their investments in 2009 than in 2008; and higher gains on sales of loans and other real estate owned (“OREO”) primarily related to the Southern California non-strategic loans portfolio. These changes were partially offset by increased professional services expenses for legal fees related to loan workouts, including collection costs; increased FDIC insurance assessments due to higher rates, a special assessment, increased deposits and increased thresholds for deposits insured by the FDIC; and increased intangible amortization as the Company accelerated

 

34


Table of Contents

the amortization of core deposit intangibles at some of the Banks to more accurately reflect the runoff of these assets. Additionally, the segment was negatively impacted in 2009 by net interest margin compression. The 2008 decrease in net income was also a result of the increased provision for loan losses, charge-offs, and impairment charge. The 2008 charge-offs and provision were primarily related to the revaluation of the non-strategic loans portfolio in Southern California, while the impairment charges were related to the Southern California and Pacific Northwest banks.

Due to the adverse economic environment, especially in the real estate markets in which the Banks operate, the Company has had lower loan growth in 2009 than in historical years as the economy remained in a recession. Additionally, the Banks have generally reduced or stopped originating construction loans, which have higher associated risk than other loan types. A portion of the increase in loans in 2009 was due to two of the Banks purchasing residential loans.

The changes in Assets Under Management (“AUM”) at the Banks in 2009 and 2008 were largely related to market changes. In 2009, market appreciation of $0.3 billion was slightly offset by $0.1 billion of net outflows. In 2008, market depreciation of $0.7 billion was partially offset by net inflows of $0.3 billion.

Total loans at the Banks increased $177.7 million, or 4%, to $4.3 billion or 76% of total assets at the Banks in 2009 from $4.1 billion or 76% of total assets at the Banks in 2008. A discussion of the Company’s loan portfolio can be found below in Part II, Item 7, “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations: Loan Portfolio and Credit Quality.”

Deposits at the Banks increased $428.3 million, or 11%, to $4.4 billion in 2009 from $3.9 billion in 2008. A discussion of the Company’s deposits can be found below in Part II, Item 7, “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations: Financial Condition.”

Investment Management

The following table presents a summary of profits/(losses), revenues and expenses for the Investment Management segment continuing operations for 2009, 2008, and 2007.

 

     As of and for the year ended December 31,     2009 vs. 2008     2008 vs. 2007  
     2009    2008     2007     $ Change     %     $ Change     %  
     (In thousands)  

Investment management and trust fees

   $ 33,189    $ 45,075      $ 54,015      $ (11,886   -26   $ (8,940   -17

Other income and net interest income

     180      415        590        (235   -57     (175   -30
                                                   

Total revenues

     33,369      45,490        54,605        (12,121   -27     (9,115   -17
                                                   

Expenses:

               

Operating expenses

     28,221      35,026        38,224        (6,805   -19     (3,198   -8

Impairment of goodwill and intangibles

     —        37,659        31,780        (37,659   -100     5,879      nm   
                                                   

Total expenses

     28,221      72,685        70,004        (44,464   -61     2,681      4
                                                   

Income/ (loss) before income taxes

     5,148      (27,195     (15,399     32,343      nm        (11,796   -77
                                                   

Income tax expense/ (benefit)

     2,236      (10,958     (6,561     13,194      nm        (4,397   -67

Noncontrolling interests

     997      1,393        2,054        (396   -28     (661   -32
                                                   

Net income/ (loss) attributable to the Company

   $ 1,915    $ (17,630   $ (10,892   $ 19,545      nm      $ (6,738   -62
                                                   

Assets

   $ 112,497    $ 115,693      $ 156,054      $ (3,196   -3   $ (40,361   -26

Assets Under Management

   $ 7,048,000    $ 6,381,000      $ 9,115,000      $ 667,000      10   $ (2,734,000   -30

 

nm - not meaningful

 

35


Table of Contents

The Company’s Investment Management segment reported net income of $1.9 million in 2009 compared to net losses of $17.6 million and $10.9 million in 2008 and 2007, respectively. Exclusive of the impairment charges, net of tax, of $22.4 million and $18.1 million, recorded in 2008 and 2007 respectively, the Company would have recorded net income in both 2008 and 2007.

Investment management fee revenue decreased 26% from 2008, despite AUM increase of $0.7 billion in 2009 as compared to 2008. Approximately 75% of investment management fee revenue is billed quarterly in advance and based on AUM at the beginning of the quarter; therefore changes in revenue generally lag behind changes in AUM. As a result, the steep market depreciation experienced in 2008, especially in the fourth quarter, had a greater impact on 2009 revenues than on 2008 revenues. Similarly, market appreciation in the fourth quarter of 2009 will have an impact on 2010 revenues.

In 2009, the changes to AUM were impacted by market appreciation of $1.2 billion, which was partially offset by $0.5 billion of net outflows. In 2008, both market depreciation of $2.5 billion and net outflows of $0.2 billion negatively impacted AUM.

Operating expenses, excluding impairment charges, at the Investment Managers decreased both in 2009 and 2008 primarily due to decreased variable compensation related to decreased fee revenue and decreased intangible amortization related to the impairments taken in 2008.

Wealth Advisory

The following table presents a summary of profits/(losses), revenues and expenses for the Wealth Advisory segment continuing operations for 2009, 2008, and 2007.

 

     As of and for the year ended December 31,    2009 vs. 2008     2008 vs. 2007  
     2009    2008    2007    $ Change     %     $ Change     %  
     (In thousands)  

Wealth advisory fees

   $ 34,834    $ 34,644    $ 20,322    $ 190      1   $ 14,322      70

Other income and net interest income

     46      172      279      (126   -73     (107   -38
                                                 

Total revenues

     34,880      34,816      20,601      64      0     14,215      69
                                                 

Expenses:

                 

Operating expenses

     24,156      24,337      13,744      (181   -1     10,593      77

Impairment of goodwill and intangibles

     1,699      —        —        1,699      nm        —        nm   
                                                 

Total expenses

     25,855      24,337      13,744      1,518      6     10,593      77
                                                 

Income before income taxes

     9,025      10,479      6,857      (1,454   -14     3,622      53
                                                 

Income tax expense

     3,573      3,330      2,204      243      7     1,126      51

Noncontrolling interests

     2,652      2,934      1,933      (282   -10     1,001      52
                                                 

Net income attributable to the Company

   $ 2,800    $ 4,215    $ 2,720    $ (1,415   -34   $ 1,495      55
                                                 

Assets

   $ 72,062    $ 78,707    $ 65,133    $ (6,645   -8   $ 13,574      21

Assets Under Management

   $ 7,161,000    $ 6,235,000    $ 6,412,000    $ 926,000      15   $ (177,000   -3

 

nm - not meaningful

The Company’s Wealth Advisory segment reported net income of $2.8 million in 2009, compared to net income of $4.2 million and $2.7 million in 2008 and 2007, respectively. The 2009 impairment charge was related to the 2009 contingent consideration payment made to DTC. For more information on the impairment, see Part II,

 

36


Table of Contents

Item 8, “Financial Statements and Supplementary Data—Note 10: Goodwill and Other Intangible Assets.” Other than the impairment charge, 2009 results were relatively consistent with 2008. Increased revenues and expenses for 2008 compared to 2007 are attributed to the acquisition and consolidation of DTC and BOS.

AUM changes for the Wealth Advisors in 2009 were primarily the result of market appreciation of $0.8 billion and net inflows of $0.1 billion. AUM changes for the Wealth Advisors in 2008 were primarily the result of market depreciation of $1.2 billion, offset by the acquired AUM of DTC of $0.9 billion and net inflows of $0.1 billion.

The Wealth Advisory segment adds profitable fee income to the Company’s revenue base that is more resistant to fluctuations in market conditions in comparison to the Investment Management segment since financial planning fees are usually not tied to the market value of AUM. Asset based fees are driven by the underlying market value changes in AUM.

Critical Accounting Policies

Critical accounting policies are reflective of significant judgments and uncertainties, and could potentially result in materially different results under different assumptions and conditions. The Company believes that its most critical accounting policies upon which its financial condition depends, and which involve the most complex or subjective decisions or assessments are as follows:

Allowance for Loan and Lease Losses

The allowance for loan losses is an estimate of the inherent risk of loss in the loan portfolio as of the consolidated balance sheet date. Management estimates the level of the allowance for loan losses based on all relevant information available. The allowance for loan losses is established through the provision for loan losses, which is a direct charge to earnings. Loan losses are charged to the allowance when management believes that the collectability of the loan principal is unlikely. Recoveries on loans previously charged off are credited to the allowance when received in cash.

The Company’s allowance is accounted for in accordance with guidance issued by various regulatory agencies, including: the Federal Financial Institutions Examination Council Policy Statement on the Allowance for Loan and Lease Losses (December 2006); Securities and Exchange Commission (“SEC”) Staff Accounting Bulletin No. 102, Selected Loan Loss Methodology and Documentation Issues ; ASC 310, Receivables (formerly FAS 114, Accounting by Creditors for Impairment of a Loan ) (“ASC 310”); and ASC 450, Contingencies (Formerly FAS 5, Accounting for Contingencies ).

The allowance consists of three primary components: General Reserves on pass graded loans (loans that pose a normal credit risk) (ASC 450), Allocated Reserves on non-impaired Special Mention and Sub Standard Loans (ASC 450), and the Allocated Reserves on Impaired Loans (ASC 310). The allowance involves a high degree of management judgment and estimates, and results in an acceptable allowance which is reflective of the inherent risk of loss in the loan portfolio at the measurement date.

General Reserves are calculated for each loan pool consisting of pass graded loans segregated by loan type, by applying estimated net loss percentages based upon the Bank’s actual historical net charge-offs and, adjusted as appropriate, on a consistent manner based upon consideration of qualitative factors to arrive at a total loss factor for each loan type. The rationale for qualitative adjustments is to more accurately reflect the current inherent risk of loss in the respective loan types than would be determined through the sole consideration of the Bank’s actual historical net charge-off rates. The numerical factors assigned are based upon observable data, if applicable, as well as management’s analysis and judgment. The qualitative factors considered by the Company include:

 

   

Volume and severity of past due, non-accrual, and adversely graded loans,

 

   

Volume and terms of loans,

 

37


Table of Contents
   

Concentrations of Credit,

 

   

Management’s experience, as well as loan underwriting and loan review policy and procedures, and

 

   

Economic and business conditions impacting the Bank’s loan portfolios, including consideration of collateral values and external factors

Each one of the Banks makes an independent determination of the applicable loss rate for these factors based on their relevant local market conditions, credit quality, and portfolio mix. Each quarter, all of the Banks review the loss factors to determine if there have been any changes in their respective loan portfolios, market conditions, or other risk indicators which would result in a change to the current loss factor.

Allocated Reserves on non-impaired special mention and substandard loans reflect management’s assessment of increased risk of losses associated with adversely graded loans. An allocated reserve is assigned to these pools of loans based upon management’s consideration of the credit attributes of individual loans within each pool of loans, including consideration, of loan to value ratios, past due status, strength and willingness of the guarantors, and other relevant attributes, including the quantitative factors considered for the general reserve as discussed above. These considerations are determined separately for each type of loan. The allocated reserves are a multiple of the general reserve for each respective loan types, with a greater multiple for loans with increased risk (i.e., special-mention loans versus substandard loans).

A loan (usually a larger commercial type loan) is considered impaired in accordance with ASC 310 when, based upon current information and events, it is probable that a creditor will be unable to collect all amounts due according to the contractual terms of the loan agreement. Impairment is measured based on the fair value of the loan, expected future cash flows discounted at the loan’s effective interest rate, or as a practical expedient, the fair value of the collateral if the loan is “collateral dependent.” For collateral dependent loans, appraisals or broker opinions are generally used to determine the fair value. Appraised values may be discounted if conditions warrant, such as the date when the appraisal was performed if collateral values have declined since the date the appraisal was done. All expected costs to liquidate the collateral are considered when determining the net realizable value. If the loan is deemed to be collateral dependent, generally the difference between the book balance (customer balance less any prior charge-offs or customer interest payments applied to principal) and the net realizable value is taken as a partial charge-off through the allowance for loan losses in the current period. If the loan is not determined to be collateral dependent, then a specific allocation is established for the difference between the book balance of the loan and the expected future cash flows discounted at the loan’s effective interest rate. Charge-offs for loans not considered to be collateral dependant are made when appropriate. Impaired Loans are removed from the general loan pools. There may be instances where the loan is considered impaired although based on the net realizable value or the discounted expected future cash flows there is no impairment. In addition, all loans which are classified as troubled debt restructurings (“TDRs”) are considered impaired.

In addition to the three primary components of the allowance for loan losses discussed above (General Reserve, Allocated Reserves on non-impaired special-mention and substandard loans, and the Allocated Reserves on impaired loans), the Company’s affiliate Banks also maintain an insignificant amount of additional allowance for loan losses (the unallocated allowance for loan losses) which primarily relates to a general assessment of the potential variability of applicable qualitative factors subject to a higher degree of variability. The respective qualitative factors, as discussed above, are considered for each respective loan type. Only the assessment of the potential variability of applicable qualitative factors is included in the unallocated allowance for loan losses. The unallocated allowance for loan losses is not considered significant by the Company.

While this evaluation process utilizes historical and other objective information, the classification of loans and the establishment of the allowance for loan losses rely to a great extent on the judgment and experience of management. While management evaluates currently available information in establishing the allowance for loan losses, future adjustments to the allowance may be necessary if economic conditions differ substantially from the assumptions used in making the evaluations. In addition, various regulatory agencies, as an integral part of their

 

38


Table of Contents

examination process, periodically review a financial institution’s allowance for loan losses as well as loan grades/classifications. Such agencies may require the financial institution to recognize additions to the allowance or increases to adversely graded classified loans based on their judgments about information available to them at the time of their examination.

Valuation of Goodwill/Intangible Assets and Analysis for Impairment

The Company allocates the cost of an acquired entity to the assets acquired and liabilities assumed based on their estimated fair values at the date of acquisition. Other intangible assets identified in acquisitions generally consist of advisory contracts, core deposit intangibles, and non-compete agreements. The value attributed to advisory contracts is based on the time period over which they are expected to generate economic benefits. The advisory contracts are generally amortized over 8-15 years depending on the contract. Core deposit intangibles are valued based on the expected longevity of the core deposit accounts and the expected cost savings associated with the use of the existing core deposit base rather than alternative funding sources. The core deposit intangibles are generally amortized over a period of 10-12 years. Non-compete agreements are valued based on the expected receipt of future economic benefits protected by clauses in the non-compete agreements that restrict competitive behavior. Non-compete agreements are amortized over the life of the agreement, generally 2-4 years.

Other intangible assets with definite lives are tested for impairment at the reporting unit level at least annually in the fourth quarter or more frequently when events or circumstances occur that indicate that it is more likely than not that an impairment has occurred. The Company tests other intangible assets with definite lives for impairment by comparing the carrying amount to the sum of the net undiscounted cash flows expected to be generated by the asset whenever events or changes in circumstances indicate that the carrying amount of the asset may not be recoverable. If the carrying amount of the asset exceeds its net undiscounted cash flows, then an impairment loss is recognized for the amount by which the carrying amount exceeds its fair value. The intangible impairment test is performed at the reporting unit level, and each affiliate is considered a reporting unit for goodwill and intangible impairment testing purposes. Intangible assets with an indefinite useful economic life are not amortized, but are subject to impairment testing at the reporting unit on an annual basis, or when events or changes in circumstances indicate that the carrying amounts may be impaired.

The excess of the purchase price for acquisitions over the fair value of the net assets acquired, including other intangible assets, is recorded as goodwill. Goodwill is not amortized but is tested for impairment at the reporting unit level, defined as the affiliate partner level, at least annually in the fourth quarter or more frequently when events or circumstances occur that indicate that it is more likely than not that an impairment has occurred. Goodwill is tested for impairment using a two-step process that begins with an estimation of the fair value of a reporting unit. Goodwill impairment exists when a reporting unit’s carrying value of goodwill exceeds its implied fair value. Significant judgment is applied when goodwill is assessed for impairment. This judgment includes developing cash flow projections, selecting appropriate discount rates, identifying relevant market comparables, incorporating general economic and market conditions, and selecting an appropriate control premium. The selection and weighting of the various fair value techniques may result in a higher or lower fair value. Judgment is applied in determining the weightings that are most representative of fair value.

The first step (“Step 1”) of impairment testing requires a comparison of each reporting unit’s fair value to carrying value to identify potential impairment. The reporting units fall under one of the three segments: Private Banking, Investment Management, and Wealth Advisory.

For the Private Banking segment, the Company utilizes both the income and market approaches to determine fair value. The income approach is based on discounted cash flows derived from assumptions of balance sheet and income statement activity. For the market approach, earnings and market capitalization multiples of comparable public companies are selected and applied to the banking reporting unit’s applicable metrics.

 

39


Table of Contents

For the Investment Management and Wealth Advisory segments, the Company utilizes both the income and market approaches to determine fair value. The income approach is primarily based on discounted cash flows derived from assumptions of income statement activity. For the market approach, earnings and tangible book value multiples of comparable companies are selected and applied to the financial services reporting unit’s applicable metrics.

The aggregate fair values are compared to market capitalization as an assessment of the appropriateness of the fair value measurements. A control premium analysis is performed to determine whether the implied control premium was within range of overall control premiums observed in the market place.

The second step (“Step 2”) of impairment testing is necessary only if a reporting unit’s carrying amount exceeds its fair value. Step 2 compares the implied fair value of the reporting unit goodwill with the carrying amount of the goodwill for the reporting unit. The implied fair value of goodwill is determined in the same manner as goodwill that is recognized in a business combination. Significant judgment and estimates are involved in estimating the fair value of the assets and liabilities of the reporting unit. The excess goodwill is recognized as an impairment loss.

Tax Estimates

The Company accounts for income taxes in accordance with ASC 740, Income Taxes (formerly FAS 109, Accounting for Income Taxes ) (“ASC 740”). The deferred tax assets and/or liabilities are determined by multiplying the differences between the financial reporting and tax reporting basis for assets and liabilities by the enacted tax rates expected to be in effect when such differences are recovered or settled. The effect on deferred taxes for a change in tax rates is recognized in income in the period that includes the enactment date. Valuation allowances on deferred tax assets are estimated based on the Company’s assessment of the realizability of such amounts. Significant management judgment is required in determining the provision for income taxes and, in particular, any valuation allowance recorded against the Company’s deferred tax assets.

In accordance with ASC 740, deferred tax assets are to be reduced by a valuation allowance if, based on the weight of available evidence, it is more likely than not that some portion or all of the deferred tax assets will not be realized. The realization of the tax benefit depends upon the existence of sufficient taxable income within the carry-back and carry-forward periods.

Management considered the following items in evaluating the need for a valuation allowance:

 

   

Earnings in 2009 and a strong earnings history for many years before 2008.

 

   

While for the three years ended December 31, 2009 there has been a cumulative loss, it was caused entirely by the 2008 loss, which was partly comprised of losses attributable to discontinued operations, as well as other losses not considered to be recurring or reflective of prospective earnings. The 2008 loss for continuing operations included the following items: goodwill and intangible impairment charges of $133.2 million and losses on the sale of the non-strategic loans portfolio in Southern California of $160.6 million. These losses will not recur and, as such, will not affect future earnings.

 

   

Deferred tax assets are expected to reverse in periods when there will be taxable income.

 

   

The Company projects future taxable income to be generated by operations.

 

   

No loss of significant customers.

 

   

Certain tax planning strategies are available, such as reducing investments in tax exempt securities.

 

   

The Company has not had any operating loss or tax credit carry-overs expiring unused in recent years. The Company carried back the entire 2008 tax loss and obtained a federal tax refund.

The Company believes that it is more likely than not that the net deferred tax asset will be realized based primarily on the generation of future taxable income. The net deferred tax asset at December 31, 2009 and 2008 is net of a valuation allowance for capital losses. The Company incurred a capital loss from the sale of Gibraltar

 

40


Table of Contents

in 2009 and recognized a potential capital loss on its equity method investment, Coldstream, in 2008. Capital losses are deductible to the extent of offsetting capital gains and the Company does not anticipate that it will generate capital gains in future periods. Therefore, the Company has recorded a valuation allowance on capital losses in excess of capital gains as of December 31, 2009 and 2008.

Results of Operations

Net Interest Income and Margin

Net interest income represents the difference between interest earned, primarily on loans and investments, and interest paid on funding sources, primarily deposits and borrowings. Interest rate spread is the difference of the average rate earned on total interest earning assets and the average rate paid on total interest-bearing liabilities. Net interest margin is the amount of net interest income, on a fully taxable-equivalent (“FTE”) basis, expressed as a percentage of average interest-earning assets. The average rate earned on earning assets is the amount of taxable equivalent interest income expressed as a percentage of average earning assets. The average rate paid on interest-bearing liabilities is equal to interest expense expressed as a percentage of average interest-bearing liabilities. The following table sets forth the composition of the Company’s net interest margin for the years ended December 31, 2009, 2008, and 2007.

 

    Year Ended December 31,  
    2009     2008     2007  
    Average
Balance
  Interest
Earned/
Paid(3)
  Avg.
Rate(3)
    Average
Balance
  Interest
Earned/
Paid(3)
  Avg.
Rate(3)
    Average
Balance
  Interest
Earned/
Paid(3)
  Avg.
Rate(3)
 
    (In thousands)  

ASSETS

                 

Earning assets:

                 

Cash and investments(1)(4)

  $ 1,127,045   $ 30,530   2.71   $ 894,128   $ 35,901   4.02   $ 723,977   $ 35,738   4.94

Loans:(2)(5)

                 

Commercial and construction(1)

    2,609,118     154,358   5.92     2,607,435     172,757   6.63     2,218,840     180,036   8.11

Residential mortgage

    1,370,119     72,214   5.27     1,294,124     72,177   5.58     1,147,124     59,565   5.19

Home equity and other consumer

    206,343     9,321   4.52     154,157     9,888   6.41     102,808     7,836   7.62
                                                     

Total earning assets

    5,312,625     266,423   5.01     4,949,844     290,723   5.87     4,192,749     283,175   6.75
                                                     

Less: Allowance for loan losses

    70,771         66,972         39,710    

Non-interest bearing cash and due from banks

    25,677         53,417         61,478    

Other assets(3)(4)(5)

    688,852         2,066,375         2,107,021    
                             

Total assets

  $ 5,956,383       $ 7,002,664       $ 6,321,538    
                             

LIABILITIES AND STOCKHOLDERS’ EQUITY

                 

Interest-bearing liabilities:

                 

Deposits:

                 

Savings and NOW

  $ 457,280     3,240   0.71   $ 484,182     6,974   1.44   $ 439,419     8,019   1.82

Money market

    1,315,082     19,518   1.48     1,129,668     30,534   2.70     1,319,319     42,429   3.22

Certificates of deposit

    1,525,844     36,114   2.37     1,189,606     44,088   3.71     953,624     45,889   4.81

Borrowed funds

    1,058,249     40,957   3.87     1,440,972     51,572   3.58     945,849     42,830   4.53
                                                     

Total interest-bearing liabilities

    4,356,455     99,829   2.29     4,244,428     133,168   3.14     3,658,211     139,167   3.80
                                                     

Noninterest bearing demand deposits

    846,916         655,030         607,359    

Payables and other liabilities(3)

    62,599         1,420,180         1,424,348    
                             

Total liabilities

    5,265,970         6,319,638         5,689,918    
                             

Redeemable noncontrolling interests

    42,119         50,893         46,562    

Stockholders’ equity

    648,294         632,133         585,058    
                             

Total liabilities, redeemable noncontrolling interests and stockholders’ equity

  $ 5,956,383       $ 7,002,664       $ 6,321,538    
                             

Net interest income, FTE basis

    $ 166,594       $ 157,555       $ 144,008  

Less: FTE adjustment

      7,109         7,327         7,015  
                             

Net interest income

    $ 159,485       $ 150,228       $ 136,993  
                             

Interest rate spread

      2.72       2.73       2.95

Net interest margin

      3.14       3.18       3.44

 

41


Table of Contents

 

(1) Interest income on non-taxable investments and certain loans is presented on a FTE basis using the federal statutory rate of 35% for each year presented.
(2) Loans held for sale are included with loans in the average balance sheets above.
(3) Assets and liabilities of discontinued operations are included in other assets in the average balance sheets above. Interest income, interest expense and average yields exclude discontinued operations.
(4) Unrealized gains and losses on investment securities are included in other assets in the average balance sheets above.
(5) Non-accrual loans are included with other assets in the average balance sheets above. The average balances of non-accrual loans were $78.9 million, $74.7 million, and $15.1 million for the years ended December 31, 2009, 2008, and 2007, respectively.

Rate/Volume Analysis

The following table describes the extent to which changes in interest rates and changes in the volume of interest-earning assets and interest-bearing liabilities have affected the Company’s interest income and interest expense during the periods indicated. Information is provided in each category with respect to (i) changes attributable to changes in volumes (changes in average balance multiplied by prior year average rate) and (ii) changes attributable to changes in rate (change in average interest rate multiplied by prior year average balance). Changes attributable to the combined impact of volumes and rates have been allocated proportionately to separate volume and rate categories.

 

     2009 vs. 2008     2008 vs. 2007  
   Change Due To     Change Due To  
   Rate     Volume     Total     Rate     Volume     Total  
   (In thousands)  

Interest income on interest-earning assets:

            

Cash and investments

   $ (11,478   $ 7,077      $ (4,401   $ (6,340   $ 6,624      $ 284   

Loans:

            

Commercial and construction

     (19,260     109        (19,151     (35,969     28,257        (7,712

Residential mortgage

     (4,081     4,118        37        4,620        7,992        12,612   

Home equity and other consumer loans

     (3,383     2,816        (567     (1,391     3,443        2,052   
                                                

Total interest income

     (38,202     14,120        (24,082     (39,080     46,316        7,236   
                                                

Interest expense on interest-bearing liabilities:

            

Deposits:

            

Savings and NOW

   $ (3,366   $ (368   $ (3,734   $ (1,806   $ 761      $ (1,045

Money market

     (15,425     4,409        (11,016     (6,257     (5,638     (11,895

Certificates of deposit

     (18,459     10,485        (7,974     (11,803     10,002        (1,801

Borrowed funds

     3,936        (14,551     (10,615     (10,323     19,065        8,742   
                                                

Total interest expense

     (33,314     (25     (33,339     (30,189     24,190        (5,999
                                                

Net interest income

   $ (4,888   $ 14,145      $ 9,257      $ (8,891   $ 22,126      $ 13,235   
                                                

Net Interest Income. Net interest income increased 6% from 2008 to 2009, and 10% from 2007 to 2008. The growth in net interest income for 2009 was accomplished through growing the Company’s interest earning assets which were primarily funded by increased deposits. The growth in net interest income for 2008 was accomplished through growing the Company’s interest earning assets, primarily loans, which were funded by additional FHLB borrowings and, to a lesser extent, by deposits. The Company’s net interest margin, on a FTE basis, decreased 4 basis points to 3.14% in 2009 from 3.18% in 2008 and decreased 26 basis points in 2008 from 3.44% in 2007. The decrease in the Company’s net interest margin in 2009 as compared to 2008 is a result of several factors including a higher percentage of the Company’s assets in lower yielding short-term liquid investments, lower rates earned on residential mortgages as adjustable rate mortgages have reset with lower rates, as well as the increase in non-performing loans. These declines in interest income have been partially offset by the higher percentage of interest bearing liabilities that have shifted to lower cost deposits from borrowed funds, as well as by the steep yield curve. The decrease in the Company’s net interest margin in 2008 as compared to 2007 is a result of the increase in non-performing assets in 2008 as well as the compression due to the decline in short-term interest rates.

 

42


Table of Contents

Interest and Dividend Income. Interest and dividend income decreased 8%, from 2008 to 2009, and increased 3% from 2007 to 2008. The 2009 decrease is due primarily to lower rates earned on loans and investments. The 2008 increase is the result of increases in interest income on loans, primarily residential loans, and increases in interest income on investments (taxable investment securities, non-taxable investment securities, mortgage-backed securities, federal funds sold, FHLB dividends, and other).

Interest income on commercial and construction loans decreased in both 2009 and 2008. The 2009 decrease was primarily the result of a 71 basis point decrease in average yield. In 2008, there was a 148 basis point decrease in yield which was partially offset by an 18% increase in the average balance. The average balance of commercial and construction loans in 2009 was fairly flat as compared to 2008 with the increase in commercial loans (real estate and industrial) offsetting the decline in construction and land loans. There were two factors impacting the average balance of construction and land loans; first, at the end of the third quarter of 2008, the Company made a decision to sell the non-strategic construction and land loans at FPB, at the time of transfer to the held for sale category, these non-strategic loans had an approximate book value of $253.0 million. The decline in the average balance in 2009 was impacted by not having these loans on the balance sheet for a full year versus one quarter in 2008. Second, the Banks have either reduced or stopped originating new construction and land loans due to the uncertain economic environment and the additional risk associated with these types of loans. The average balance of commercial loans, primarily real estate and industrial, has increased in 2009 although at a much slower pace than in recent years as the Banks are waiting until their local economic conditions improve as well as many of the Banks’ customers are delevering their own balance sheets. The 2008 increase in the average balance of commercial loans was due to the organic growth of loan portfolios at the Banks and the acquisition of Charter in the third quarter of 2007. The decreases in average yields of commercial and construction loans in 2009 and 2008 were primarily due to the reductions in the Prime rate to which most of the Banks’ commercial, including construction, loans are indexed. The Prime rate has decreased from 8.25% at the beginning of 2007 to 3.25% at the end of 2008, or 500 basis points. There were no changes in the Prime rate in 2009. The rates on the commercial and industrial loans at the New England Bank are indexed to either Prime or the London Interbank Offered Rate (“LIBOR”). The LIBOR rate fluctuates daily and the trend has been a general decline the past three years.

Interest income from residential mortgage loans remained flat in 2009 compared to 2008, and increased 21% in 2008 from 2007. In 2009, a 6% increase in average balance was offset by a 31 basis point decrease in the average yield. The 2008 increase was the result of a 13% increase in average balance and a 39 basis point increase in the average yield. The 2009 decrease in average yield of residential mortgage loans was primarily due to adjustable rate mortgage (“ARM”) loans repricing to lower rates. The decline in U.S. Treasury yields, the index to which the ARMs are typically linked, has decreased the yields on mortgage loans. The increases in the average balances of residential mortgage loans in 2009 and 2008 were due to the organic growth of loan portfolios at the Banks as well as two of the Banks purchasing additional high quality residential mortgage loans. The 2008 increase in the average yield of residential mortgage loans was primarily due to the ARM loans repricing or modifying at higher rates in the earlier half of 2008 or late in 2007 and new originations at higher yields.

Interest income from consumer and other loans decreased 6%, from 2008 to 2009, and increased 26% from 2007 to 2008. The 2009 decrease was the result of a 189 basis point, or 29%, decrease in the average yield offset by a 34% increase in average balance. The 2008 increase was the result of a 50% increase in average balance offset by a 121 basis point decrease in the average yield. The increase in the average balances of consumer and other loans in 2009 and 2008 was due to the organic growth of loan portfolios at the Banks and the acquisition of Charter in the third quarter of 2007. The decrease in the average yields of consumer and other loans in 2009 and 2008 was primarily due to the decreases in the Prime rate during late 2007 and 2008, the rate to which a majority of the home equity loan rates are indexed.

Investment income decreased 14%, from 2008 to 2009 and remained relatively flat from 2007 to 2008. The 2009 decrease was primarily related to a 131 basis point decrease in the average yield, partially offset by a 26% increase in average balance. In 2008, a 24% increase in average balance was offset by a 92 basis point decrease

 

43


Table of Contents

in the average yield. The increase in the average balances of cash and investments in 2009 and 2008 was primarily due to the Banks increasing their liquidity and in some cases, their investment portfolio as well and the acquisition of Charter in the third quarter of 2007. The decline in the average yields of cash and investments in 2009 and 2008 was primarily due to lower yields on short-term liquid investments such as federal funds and interest bearing accounts as well as longer term investments such as bonds. Investment decisions are made based on anticipated liquidity, loan demand, and asset liability management considerations. The FHLBs to which the Banks belong have not declared any dividends in 2009, except for the FHLB of San Francisco, which declared a dividend in the second quarter of 2009. The Southern and Northern California Banks are members of the FHLB of San Francisco. FHLB dividend income for 2009 was less than $0.1 million. FHLB dividend income for 2008 and 2007 was $1.4 million and $1.8 million, respectively. The Company does not anticipate significant dividend income from its FHLB stock in 2010.

Accrual of interest income is discontinued and all interest previously accrued but not collected is reversed against current period interest income when a loan is initially classified as non-accrual. Interest received on non-accrual loans is either applied against principal or reported as interest income according to management’s judgment as to the collectability of principal. Interest income recorded on non-accrual loans for the year ended December 31, 2009 was $3.2 million. If the non-accrual loans had been on accrual status for the full year or, if originated during the year, since origination, interest income would have been $9.0 million.

Interest income recorded on troubled debt restructured loans, where loans are restructured as a concession to borrowers who have experienced financial difficulty, was $0.2 million for the year ended December 31, 2009. If these loans had been performing normally, the Company would have recorded $0.8 million in interest income for the year ended December 31, 2009.

Interest Expense . Interest paid on deposits and borrowings decreased 25%, from 2008 to 2009 and decreased 4% from 2007 to 2008. The decreases were attributable to the decline in the average rates paid on customer deposits and charged on borrowings and the lower average balance of borrowings in 2009, partially offset by the increase in the average balances of deposits in both 2008 and 2009 and borrowings in 2008.

Interest paid on deposits decreased 28% from 2008 to 2009 and 15% from 2007 to 2008. The 2009 decrease was the result of a 113 basis point decrease in the average rate paid, partially offset by an 18% increase in the average balance. The 2008 decrease was the result of a 64 basis point decrease in the average rate paid, partially offset by a 3% increase in the average balance. The decreases in the average rates paid on deposits in 2009 and 2008 were primarily due to the Banks’ ability to lower interest rates on deposits due to the decline in short-term rates since the fourth quarter of 2007. The increases in the average balances of deposits in 2009 were primarily driven by organic growth of the Banks’ core deposits and retail certificates of deposit. The increase in the average balances of deposits in 2008 was primarily related to the increased brokered deposits at the Banks, which generally have higher rates than retail deposits. As a result of increased concern from depositors over the stability of the banking environment in 2008, the Banks experienced a decline in core deposits, checking and money market accounts. The TLGP instituted in the fourth quarter of 2008 helped to stabilize the deposit environment. The TLGP insures all demand deposit checking accounts and certain NOW accounts. The current TLGP, in which all of the Banks elected to participate, expires on June 30, 2010.

Interest paid on borrowings decreased 21% from 2008 to 2009 and increased 20% from 2007 to 2008. The 2009 decrease was the result of a 27% decrease in average balance, partially offset by a 29 basis point increase in the average rate paid. The decrease in average balance of borrowings in 2009 was primarily the result of the Banks repaying FHLB borrowings with lower cost core deposits, the repurchases of convertible debt in the first half of 2009, and the repurchase of a portion of the Company’s Boston Private Capital Trust I in late 2009. The 2009 decrease in the average rate is primarily due to LIBOR, the rate to which some borrowings are indexed, remaining low during 2009. The 2008 increase was the result of a 52% increase in average balance, offset by a 95 basis point decrease in the average rate paid. The increase in the average balance of borrowings in 2008 was primarily due to the additional FHLB borrowings used to fund a portion of the Banks’ loan portfolio growth in

 

44


Table of Contents

excess of deposit growth, borrowings used to fund the Charter acquisition in the third quarter of 2007. The 2008 decrease in the average rate is primarily due to LIBOR, the rate to which some borrowings are indexed, decreasing during the year.

Condensed Consolidated Statement of Operations and Discussion

 

     Year ended December 31,     2009 vs. 2008     2008 vs. 2007  
     2009     2008     2007     $ Change     %     $ Change     %  
     (In thousands, except share data)  

Net interest income

   $ 159,485      $ 150,228      $ 136,993      $ 9,257      6   $ 13,235      10

Fees and other income:

              

Investment management and trust fees

     53,999        67,379        74,789        (13,380   -20     (7,410   -10

Wealth advisory fees

     34,834        34,644        20,322        190      1     14,322      70

Other income

     37,616        27,426        11,093        10,190      37     16,333      nm   
                                                    

Total fees and other income

     126,449        129,449        106,204        (3,000   -2     23,245      22
                                                    

Total revenues

     285,934        279,677        243,197        6,257      2     36,480      15
                                                    

Provision for loan losses

     44,959        196,643        23,449        (151,684   -77     173,194      739

Expenses:

              

Operating expenses

     221,259        213,785        184,626        7,474      3     29,159      16

Impairment of goodwill and intangibles

     1,699        133,202        31,780        (131,503   -99     101,422      nm   
                                                    

Total expenses

     222,958        346,987        216,406        (124,029   -36     130,581      60
                                                    

Income/ (loss) before income taxes

     18,017        (263,953     3,342        281,970      nm        (267,295   nm   
                                                    

Income tax expense/ (benefit)

     1,632        (70,737     (6,339     72,369      nm        (64,398   nm   
                                                    

Net income/ (loss) from continuing operations

     16,385        (193,216     9,681        209,601      nm        (202,897   nm   
                                                    

Net loss from discontinued operations

     (7,505     (191,209     (1,524     183,704      96     (189,685   nm   

LESS: Net income attributable to noncontrolling interests

     3,649        4,327        3,987        (678   -16     340      9
                                                    

Net income/ (loss) attributable to the Company

   $ 5,231      $ (388,752   $ 4,170      $ 393,983      nm      $ (392,922   nm   
                                                    

Adjustments to net income/ (loss) attributable to the Company to arrive at net (loss)/ income attributable to common shareholders

   $ (40,231   $ (33,029   $ —        $ (7,202   -22   $ (33,029   nm   
                                                    

Basic and diluted (loss)/earnings per share from continuing operations

   $ (0.41   $ (4.85   $ 0.15      $ 4.44      92   $ (5.00   nm   

Basic and diluted (loss)/earnings per share attributable to the Company’s common shareholders

   $ (0.52   $ (8.87   $ 0.11      $ 8.35      94   $ (8.98   nm   
                                                    

 

nm - not meaningful

Comparison of Years Ended December 31, 2009, 2008 and 2007

Net Income . The Company reported net income attributable to the Company of $5.2 million in 2009, but recorded a loss of $0.52 per diluted share after accounting for non-cash equity charges and preferred dividends made to arrive at net (loss)/ income attributable to the common shareholder. See Part II, Item 8, “Financial Statements and Supplementary Data—Note 1. Basis of Presentation and Summary of Significant Accounting

 

45


Table of Contents

Policies” for further detail on the charges made to arrive to income attributable to the common shareholder. In 2008, the Company recorded a net loss attributable to the Company of $388.8 million, or $8.87 per diluted share, and in 2007 the Company recorded net income attributable to the Company of $4.2 million or $0.11 per diluted share. The Company’s 2009 earnings from continuing operations were positively impacted by the pretax gains of $0.4 million recognized from the repurchase of Company’s Notes and $18.3 million recognized from the repurchase of a portion of its Boston Private Capital Trust I securities, enabling revenue streams to outpace expense flows and resulting in positive earnings from continuing operations of $16.4 million. The Company’s 2008 earnings from continuing operations were negatively impacted by non-cash impairment charges and high levels of provision for loan losses and losses related to the decision to sell the non-strategic loans portfolio in Southern California, offset by a gain on the repurchase of debt, resulting in a loss from continuing operations of $193.2 million.

Fees and Other Income. Total fees and other income decreased 2% in 2009 compared to 2008 after increasing 22% in 2008 from 2007. The 2009 decrease is attributable to decreased investment management fees which were partially offset by increases in other income, primarily gains on sales of investments, gains on repurchase of debt, and gains on sales of the non-strategic loans portfolio. The 2008 increase is primarily attributable to increases in wealth advisory fees and in other income, primarily gains recorded from the repurchase of the Company’s Notes and gain on sale of investments. These increases were partially offset by decreased investment management and trust fees.

Investment Management and Trust Fees. Investment management and trust fees decreased 20% in 2009 compared to 2008 and decreased 10% in 2008 from 2007. Although AUM at December 31, 2009 for the Banks and Investment Managers increased 9% from 2008 to $10.5 billion, the average quarter-end AUM was 9% lower in 2009 than the 2008 average. AUM as of December 31, 2008 for the Banks and Investment Managers was $9.6 billion, a decrease of 25% compared to 2007. The 2008 decrease in AUM is attributed to market depreciation of $3.2 billion, offset by net inflows of less than $0.1 billion. Investment management and trust fees from the Banks and Investment Managers are typically calculated based on a percentage of AUM. Two of the four Banks and Investment Managers bill quarterly in advance, while the remainder of the Banks and Investment Managers bill in arrears. Investment management fees billed in advance will not reflect subsequent changes in the market value of AUM for that period, while fees billed in arrears will reflect changes in the market value of AUM for that period.

Wealth Advisory Fees . Wealth advisory fees remained relatively flat in 2009 compared to 2008 and increased 70% in 2008 from 2007. The 2008 increase was attributed to the acquisition of DTC and consolidation of BOS. Assets under advisory managed by the Wealth Advisors were $7.2 billion, $6.2 billion, and $6.4 billion as of December 31, 2009, 2008 and 2007 respectively.

Other Income. Other income increased 37% in 2009 compared to 2008 after increasing more than 100% in 2008 from 2007. Other income is comprised of the Gain on repurchase of debt; Gain on sale of investments, net; Gain on sale of loans, net; Gain on sale of non-strategic loans portfolio, net; and Other on the consolidated statements of operations.

Gain on the repurchase of debt for 2009 and 2008 was $18.7 million and $22.5 million, respectively. The 2009 gain is primarily due to the repurchase of $44.5 million of the Company’s Boston Private Capital Trust I securities during the fourth quarter of 2009. The Company used available cash received from certain of its divestiture transactions to repurchase the Boston Private Capital Trust I securities. The Company also repurchased the remaining $52.4 million of its Notes in 2009. The 2008 gain was due to the $235.1 million repurchase of the Company’s Notes in 2008. The Company repurchased its Notes in 2008 using cash received from the repayment of intercompany notes which were previously made to certain Banks with proceeds from the original issuance of the Notes.

Gain on sale of investments, net for 2009 and 2008 was $5.8 million and $2.4 million, respectively. The reported gains were the result of the declining interest rate environment in 2008, which remained low in 2009. The Banks’ investment portfolios, comprised of mainly fixed rate investments, generally increase in fair value

 

46


Table of Contents

when interest rates decline. As a result of monitoring their individual investment portfolios, including liquidity and reinvestment risk, the Banks may periodically decide to sell investments which are designated as available for sale.

Gain/(loss) on sale of non-strategic loans portfolio, net relates to a portfolio of 72 non-strategic construction and land loans in Southern California and a portfolio of approximately $20.5 million in non-strategic leases in the Pacific Northwest that were transferred to held-for-sale in 2008. After adjusting the loans to fair value through a charge-off and corresponding provision for loan losses of $160.6 million, the Company sold 52 of the loans in 2008 for a net gain of $7.7 million, which was offset by loss on revaluation of the remaining 18 loans of $9.5 million at December 31, 2008, and the net loss on sale of leases in the Pacific Northwest of $2.5 million. In 2009, the Company transferred three of the remaining non-strategic loans to OREO, two loans were transferred back to the held to maturity portfolio, five loans were sold, four loans had gains recognized when payments were made, of which three were fully paid off, and one had an additional write down taken, for a 2009 net gain on non-strategic loans held for sale of $2.8 million. At December 31, 2009, there were five loans remaining in the non-strategic loans portfolio.

Other income increased 19% in 2009 compared to 2008 and decreased 34% in 2008 from 2007. Fluctuations in Other income are primarily due to the investment gains and losses from the Company’s Rabbi Trust. The Company’s Rabbi Trust was established to offset the Company’s deferred compensation plan liability. The Company’s deferred compensation plan enables certain executives to elect to defer a portion of their income. The amounts deferred are excluded from the employee’s taxable income and are not deductible by the Company until paid. The employee selects from a limited number of mutual funds and the deferred liability is increased or decreased to correspond to the fair value of these underlying hypothetical mutual fund investments. The increase/decrease in value is recognized as compensation expense/benefit. The Rabbi Trust holds similar assets and approximately mirrors the activity in the hypothetical mutual funds. The increase/decrease in the value of the mutual funds in the Rabbi Trust is recognized in other income/loss.

Provision for Loan Losses . The provision for loan losses is determined as a result of the required level of the allowance for loan losses, estimated by management, which reflects the inherent risk of loss in the loan portfolio as of the balance sheet dates. Net charge-offs were $40.6 million and $192.5 million in 2009 and 2008, respectively, as compared to net recoveries of $0.5 million in 2007. The 2008 provision for loan losses was primarily driven by net charge-offs of $160.6 million to record at fair value a portfolio of non-strategic construction and land loans at FPB upon transfer to the held for sale category.

Most of the 2008 provision was related to FPB’s decision to sell its non-strategic construction and land loan portfolio. At the time of the decision to sell this portfolio, the related loans were transferred to the held for sale category at the then fair value. The fair value of the construction and land loans had deteriorated rapidly as a result of the dramatically slowing real estate market in the Inland Empire of California where most of these loans were located. The effect of this deterioration resulted in very significant charge-offs at the time the loans were transferred to the held for sale category. The charge-offs required a very significant increase to the provision for loan losses to absorb the charges.

Although the provision for loan losses declined in 2009 from 2008, the continued high level of classified loans and net charge-offs has required the provision for loan losses to be higher than historical trends. The continued weakness in the real estate market and general economic conditions in Southern and Northern California and the Pacific Northwest accounted for the majority of the impact to the provision for loan losses.

Expenses. Total expenses decreased 36% in 2009 compared to 2008 and increased 60% in 2008 from 2007. The decrease in 2009 and increase in 2008 is primarily attributed to the goodwill and other identifiable intangible impairment charges taken in 2008. Excluding the goodwill and other identifiable intangible impairment charges, operating expenses increased 3% in 2009 compared to 2008 and increased 16% in 2008 from 2007. The 2009 increase is primarily attributed to the additional FDIC insurance assessments at the Banks and additional legal

 

47


Table of Contents

expenses related to the loan workouts. The 2008 increase is primarily due to the Charter and DTC acquisitions (together “the Acquisitions”), the consolidation of BOS and the warrant expense related to the Company’s private capital raise during the third quarter of 2008.

Salaries and employee benefits, the largest component of operating expenses, decreased 1% in 2009 compared to 2008 after increasing 11% in 2008 from 2007. The decrease in 2009 is primarily related to reduced executive bonuses, reduced commission payments associated with lower investment management fees, and lower stock option expense, offset by higher employee salaries and expenses related to deferred compensation. The increase in 2008 is attributable to the Acquisitions and consolidation of BOS, offset by decreased variable expenses attributable to decreased performance and reductions in the Rabbi Trust deferred compensation amounts.

Professional services increased 7% in 2009 compared to 2008 and increased 59% in 2008 from 2007. The 2009 increase is primarily attributable to increased professional fees associated with loan work out services. If recessionary economic conditions continue, it is likely that the Company will continue to incur increased legal and professional fees associated with loan work out services as compared to historical trends. The 2008 increase is primarily attributable to increased legal and accounting fees and the Acquisitions and consolidation of BOS. Increases in the 2008 legal fees are primarily due to the 2008 re-equitization of Westfield, additional services relating to disclosure requirements based on the Company’s new segment reporting structure, and other corporate legal matters. Increases in the 2008 accounting fees are primarily due to increased audit services and compliance outsourcing.

Impairment of goodwill and identifiable intangibles decreased 99% in 2009 compared to 2008 and was approximately four times more in 2008 than in 2007. The 2009 impairment charge was attributed to the contingent consideration payment made to DTC during the fourth quarter of 2009. The 2008 impairment charges at FPB, Charter, DGHM, and Coldstream resulted from the significant adverse economic environment in 2008, including the declining real estate, credit and equity markets. Please refer to Part II, Item 8, “Financial Statements and Supplementary Data—Note 10: Goodwill and Other Intangible Assets” for a detailed discussion of the triggering events and valuation techniques surrounding the impairments.

FDIC insurance increased in 2009 compared to 2008 as well as in 2008 from 2007. The 2009 increase is primarily due to the special assessment in the second quarter of 2009, higher assessment rates, increased deposits, and the additional cost for the Banks participating in the TLGP. In the second quarter of 2009 there was a $2.5 million special assessment charged by the FDIC. Participating in the TLGP has helped the Banks increase their deposits as customers with balances in excess of the FDIC insurance coverage of $250 thousand can receive 100% FDIC insurance coverage on certain deposit products covered by the TLGP. The mix of deposits and the FDIC’s ratings of the Banks have an effect on the amount of FDIC insurance expense as well. The Company cannot predict whether there will be future special assessments from the FDIC.

Income Tax Expense. The effective tax rate and expense for 2009, 2008 and 2007 are not consistent primarily due to the non-deductibility of a significant amount of goodwill impairment charges that were recorded in 2008 as well as the increases in the proportional amount of tax-exempt income as compared to lower earnings in 2009 and 2007. See Part II, Item 8, “Financial Statements and Supplementary Data—Note 17: Income Taxes” for further details.

Discontinued operations . In 2009, the Company divested its interests in five affiliates—Westfield, Gibraltar, RINET, Sand Hill and BPVI. The Company recorded a pretax gain on sale of these affiliates of $3.1 million and a net loss from discontinued operations of $7.5 million. In 2008 and 2007, the Company recorded net losses from discontinued operations of $191.2 million and $1.5 million, respectively. The 2008 loss was due primarily to goodwill and intangible impairment charges of $153.6 million at Gibraltar and Sand Hill, and $66.0 million in re-equitization charges at Westfield. The 2007 loss was due to losses at Gibraltar related to goodwill impairment charges of $29.1 million, offset by income from operations at the other four divested affiliates of $21.1 million. See Part II, Item 8, “Financial Statements and Supplementary Data—Note 2: Divestitures and Acquisitions” for further details.

 

48


Table of Contents

Financial Condition

Condensed Consolidated Balance Sheets and Discussion

 

     December 31,    Increase/
(decrease)
    %
Change
 
     2009    2008     
     (In thousands)  

Assets:

          

Total cash and investments

   $ 1,387,483    $ 1,132,290    $ 255,193      23

Loans held for sale

     12,714      36,846      (24,132   -65

Total loans

     4,307,040      4,129,081      177,959      4

Less: allowance for loan losses

     68,444      64,091      4,353      7
                            

Net loans

     4,238,596      4,064,990      173,606      4

Goodwill and intangible assets

     150,117      155,051      (4,934   -3

Other assets

     260,355      315,488      (55,133   -17
                            

Assets of continuing operations

     6,049,265      5,704,665      344,600      6

Assets of discontinued operations

     —        1,578,170      (1,578,170   -100
                            

Total assets

   $ 6,049,265    $ 7,282,835    $ (1,233,570   -17
                            

Liabilities and Equity:

          

Deposits

   $ 4,255,219    $ 3,748,912    $ 506,307      14

Total borrowings

     992,034      1,329,898      (337,864   -25

Other liabilities

     99,008      88,647      10,361      12
                            

Liabilities of continuing operations

     5,346,261      5,167,457      178,804      3

Liabilities of discontinued operations

     —        1,416,535      (1,416,535   -100
                            

Total liabilities

     5,346,261      6,583,992      (1,237,731   -19
                            

Redeemable noncontrolling interests

     51,850      50,167      1,683      3

Total Company’s stockholders’ equity

     651,154      648,676      2,478      0
                            

Total liabilities, redeemable noncontrolling interests and stockholders’ equity

   $ 6,049,265    $ 7,282,835    $ (1,233,570   -17
                            

Total Assets. Total assets decreased $1.2 billion, or 17%, to $6.0 billion at December 31, 2009 from $7.3 billion at December 31, 2008. Assets from continuing operations increased $0.3 billion, 6%, to $6.0 billion at December 31, 2009 from $5.7 billion at December 31, 2008. This increase was due to increases in loans and investments, offset by decreased income taxes receivable and deferred and loans held for sale.

Cash and Investments. Total cash and investments (consisting of cash and cash equivalents, investment securities, and stock in the FHLB) increased $255.2 million, or 23%, to $1.4 billion, or 23% of total assets in 2009 from $1.1 billion or 20% of assets from continuing operations in 2008. The increase was primarily due to additional liquidity at the Banks and Holding Company. The additional liquidity at the Banks was the result of deposits growing faster than loans and the Banks not wanting to invest the additional funds in long term investments due to the low interest rate environment and the potential to lose value should rates rise in the short-term. The additional liquidity at the Holding Company was primarily the result of the proceeds received from the divestitures of Westfield, Gibraltar, RINET, Sand Hill, and BPVI.

Investment maturities, principal payments and sales of the Company’s available for sale and held to maturity securities provided $0.7 billion of cash proceeds, and $0.7 billion was deployed on purchases of new investments. The timing of sales and reinvestments is based on various factors, including management’s evaluation of interest rate trends and the Company’s liquidity. The Company’s available for sale investment portfolio carried a total of $13.1 million of unrealized gains and $1.9 million of unrealized losses at December 31, 2009, compared to $15.0 million of unrealized gains and $0.8 million of unrealized losses at December 31, 2008.

 

49


Table of Contents

The Banks’ investment policies require management to maintain a portfolio of securities which will provide liquidity necessary to facilitate funding of loans and to cover deposit fluctuations, and to mitigate the Banks’ overall balance sheet exposure to interest rate risk, while at the same time achieving a satisfactory return on the funds invested. The securities in which the Banks may invest are subject to regulation and are generally limited to securities that are considered “investment grade”. In addition, the Banks have internal investment policies which restrict investments to the following categories: U.S. Treasury securities and obligations of U.S. government agencies; obligations of government sponsored entities; mortgage-backed securities, including securities issued by the Federal National Mortgage Association (“FNMA”), the Government National Mortgage Association (“GNMA”) and the Federal Home Loan Mortgage Corporation (“FHLMC”), securities of states and political subdivisions and corporate debt, all of which must be considered investment grade by a recognized rating service. The credit rating of each security or obligation in the portfolio is monitored and reviewed by each Bank’s portfolio manager and Asset/Liability Management Committee.

At December 31, 2009 and 2008, the amount of investment securities in an unrealized loss position greater than 12 months as well as the total amount of unrealized losses was not significant and was primarily due to movements in interest rates. The Company has no intent to sell any securities in an unrealized loss position at December 31, 2009 and it is not more likely than not that the Company would be forced to sell any of these securities prior to the full recovery of all unrealized loss amounts. Subsequent to December 31, 2009 and through the date of the filing of this Annual Report on Form 10-K, no securities were downgraded to below investment grade. The Company has determined that none of its available for sale or held to maturity investments were other-than-temporarily impaired at December 31, 2009 and 2008. At December 31, 2009 there were no equity or cost method investments, which are included in other assets, that were other-than-temporarily impaired. See Part II, Item 8, “Financial Statements and Supplementary Data—Note 4: Investment Securities” for further information.

The majority of the investments held by the Company are within the Private Banking segment and, at times, the Holding Company. The Investment Managers and Wealth Advisors held approximately $0.4 million in other available for sale securities and approximately $4.0 million in held to maturity securities at December 31, 2009.

The following table summarizes the Company’s carrying value (fair value) of available for sale investments and carrying value (amortized cost) of held to maturity investments at the dates indicated:

 

     December 31,
   2009    2008    2007
     (In thousands)

Available for sale:

        

Mortgage-backed securities(1)

   $ 311,511    $ 281,355    $ 52,992

Government-sponsored entities

     188,394      268,570      326,312

U.S. government and agencies(2)

     184,722      8,574      12,205

Municipal bonds

     184,544      212,943      232,616

Corporate bonds

     15,943      23,233      27,012

Other

     2,918      4,351      2,895
                    

Total available for sale

   $ 888,032    $ 799,026    $ 654,032
                    

Held to maturity:

        

U.S. government and agencies(2)

   $ 4,001    $ 3,999    $ 1,998

Other

     500      500      500
                    

Total held to maturity

   $ 4,501    $ 4,499    $ 2,498
                    

 

(1) Most mortgage-backed securities are guaranteed by Government-sponsored entities or U.S. agencies.
(2) Includes money market mutual fund that invests in U.S. government securities.

 

50


Table of Contents

The following table presents the concentration of securities with any one issuer that exceeds ten percent of stockholders’ equity as of December 31, 2009:

 

     Amortized
Cost
   Fair
Value
     (In thousands)

U.S. Treasury

   $ 182,047    $ 182,059

Government National Mortgage Association

     165,045      169,200

Federal National Mortgage Association

     165,485      166,015

Federal Home Loan Mortgage Corporation

     80,515      81,165

Federal Home Loan Bank

     67,268      67,521
             

Total

   $ 660,360    $ 665,960
             

Loans Held for Sale. Loans held for sale decreased $24.1 million, or 65%, from the prior year to $12.7 million. This decrease was primarily the result of the Company continuing to dispose of its non-strategic loans portfolio in Southern California that was classified as held for sale in the third quarter of 2008. In the normal course of business, the Banks sell a majority of their fixed rate residential loan originations and hold most variable rate loans to mitigate interest rate risk. The Southern California non-strategic loans portfolio held for sale decreased $23.7 million, or 87%, to five loans with a carrying value of $3.6 million at December 31, 2009 from 18 loans with a carrying value of $27.2 million at December 31, 2008. The Company continues to actively market the sale of the remaining loans. The remaining loans held for sale are fixed rate residential real estate loans which are carried at the lower of aggregate cost or fair value. These loans are generally sold on a no recourse and servicing retained basis. Mortgage servicing rights recorded in connection with loans sold are not significant.

Deposits. Total deposits increased $506.3 million, or 14% from prior year to $4.3 billion. The increase in deposits is primarily driven by the organic growth in deposits, primarily retail, at the Banks. The participation by the Banks in the FDIC’s TAGP contributed to the increase. As long as there are no regulatory restrictions, the Banks use wholesale deposits such as brokered certificates of deposit to a limited extent when the rates and availability are more favorable than traditional retail deposits or borrowings from the FHLB.

Deposits are the principal source of the Banks’ funds for use in lending, investments, and liquidity. Certificates of deposits represented approximately 34% and 36% of total deposits at December 31, 2009 and 2008, respectively. See Part II, Item 8, “Financial Statements and Supplementary Data—Note 11: Deposits” for further information.

The following table sets forth the average balances and interest rates paid on the Banks’ deposits:

 

     Year Ended
December 31, 2009
 
   Average
Balance
   Average
Rate
 
     (In thousands)  

Noninterest bearing deposits:

     

Checking accounts

   $ 846,916    0.00

Interest bearing deposits:

     

Savings and NOW

     457,280    0.71

Money market

     1,315,082    1.48

Certificates of deposit under $100,000*

     666,248    1.88

Certificates of deposit of $100,000 or greater

     859,596    2.74
             

Total deposits

   $ 4,145,122    1.78
             

 

* Includes brokered CDs

 

51


Table of Contents

Certificates of deposit in denominations of $100,000 or greater had the following schedule of maturities:

 

     December 31,
     2009    2008
     (In thousands)

Less than 3 months remaining

   $ 556,499    $ 394,352

3 to 6 months remaining

     338,588      235,234

6 to 12 months remaining

     153,102      103,706

More than 12 months remaining

     43,001      17,186
             

Total

   $ 1,091,190    $ 750,478
             

Borrowings. Total borrowings (consisting of securities sold under agreements to repurchase (“repurchase agreements”), FHLB borrowings, junior subordinated debentures and other long-term debt) decreased 25%, to $1.0 billion, or 16% of total assets in 2009 from $1.3 billion or 23% of assets from continuing operations in 2008.

Junior subordinated debentures and other long-term debt decreased $96.9 million, or 33%, to $193.6 million, or 3% of total assets, in 2009 from $290.6 million, or 5% of assets from continuing operations, in 2008. The Company repurchased $52.4 million of its Notes during 2009. As a result of the repurchases, the Company replaced the debt with lower cost funding. The Company also repurchased $44.5 million of its Boston Private Capital Trust I using available cash. In conjunction with the repurchase of the Notes and a portion of the Boston Private Capital Trust I, the Company realized a pretax gain on retirement of debt of $18.7 million for the year ended December 31, 2009.

FHLB borrowings decreased $190.5 million, or 26%, to $555.0 million, or 9% of total assets, in 2009 from $745.5 million, or 13% of assets of continuing operations, in 2008. The decrease in FHLB borrowings at the Banks was due to deposits growing faster than loans at the Banks in 2009. The Banks prefer to fund new loans with liquidity from deposits as the rates paid on deposits are generally lower than rates on borrowings. In times when loans are growing faster than deposits, the Banks may utilize borrowings from the FHLB to fund the excess when alternative funding sources, such as the sale of investments, are not preferable. The Banks may also employ a leverage strategy whereby they pledge existing loans and investments to the FHLBs to increase collateral available to fund future loan demand in excess of deposit growth. In addition, Boston Private Bank may use FHLB borrowings to lock in an interest rate spread over the term of certain commercial loans.

The Banks have established various borrowing arrangements to provide additional sources of liquidity and funding. Management believes that the Banks currently have adequate liquidity available to respond to current demands. As members of a FHLB, the Banks have access to both short and long-term borrowings. As of December 31, 2009, the Banks had $555.0 million of outstanding FHLB borrowings with a weighted average interest rate of 4.17%, compared to $745.5 million of FHLB borrowings outstanding with a weighted average interest rate of 3.58% at December 31, 2008. In addition, the Banks had FHLB borrowings available of $789.3 million. See Part II, Item 8, “Financial Statements and Supplementary Data—Note 12: Federal Home Loan Bank Borrowings” for further information.

The Banks also obtain funds from the sales of securities to institutional investors and deposit customers under repurchase agreements. In 2009, repurchase agreements decreased $50.5 million, or 17%. In a repurchase agreement transaction, the Banks will generally sell an investment security, agreeing to repurchase either the same or a substantially identical security on a specified later date (generally not more than 90 days for institutional investors and overnight for deposit customers) at a price slightly greater than the original sales price. The difference in the sale price and repurchase price is the cost of the use of the proceeds, or interest expense. The investment securities underlying these agreements may be delivered to securities dealers who arrange such transactions as collateral for the repurchase obligation. Repurchase agreements represent a cost competitive

 

52


Table of Contents

funding source for the Banks. However, the Company is subject to the risk that the borrower of the securities may default at maturity and not return the collateral. In order to minimize this potential risk, the Banks generally deal with large, established investment brokerage firms when entering into such transactions with institutional investors, and deal with established deposit customers on overnight transactions. Repurchase transactions are accounted for as financing arrangements rather than as sales of such securities, and the obligation to repurchase such securities is reflected as a liability in the Company’s consolidated balance sheets. At December 31, 2009, the total amount of outstanding repurchase agreements was $243.4 million with a weighted average interest rate of 1.78%, compared to $293.8 million with a weighted average interest rate of 1.15% at December 31, 2008. See Part II, Item 8, “Financial Statements and Supplementary Data—Note 13: Other Short Term Borrowings” for further information.

From time to time the Banks purchase federal funds from the FHLB and other banking institutions to supplement their liquidity positions. The Banks had unused federal fund lines of credit totaling $166.0 million with correspondent institutions to provide them with immediate access to overnight borrowings. At both December 31, 2009 and 2008, the Banks had no outstanding borrowings under these federal funds lines.

The Banks have also negotiated brokered deposit agreements with several institutions that have nationwide distribution capabilities. At December 31, 2009, the Banks had $146.3 million of brokered deposits (net of premiums paid) outstanding under these agreements. See Part II, Item 7, “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations: Liquidity.”

Loan Portfolio and Credit Quality

Loans. Total portfolio loans increased $178.0 million, or 4%, to $4.3 billion or 71% of total assets in 2009 from $4.1 billion, or 72% of assets from continuing operations in 2008. The increase in the loan portfolio was less than in previous years as a result of the economic conditions in the markets the Banks are located as well as commercial clients de-levering their balance sheet. The Banks also shifted away from higher risk construction and land loans to high quality residential loans.

The majority of the Company’s loan portfolio is managed by the Banks. Within the Company’s loan portfolio, $2.9 million at December 31, 2009 and $2.6 million at December 31, 2008, or less than 1% of total loans at both dates, are managed by the Holding Company and a nonbanking affiliate partner. Loans managed by the Holding Company and the nonbanking affiliate partner include loans made to certain principals of DGHM, DTC, Anchor, and BOS at market rates and terms.

The Banks specialize in lending to individuals, real estate investors, and middle market businesses, including corporations, partnerships, associations and nonprofit organizations. Loans made by the Banks to individuals may include residential mortgage loans and mortgage loans on investment and vacation properties to individuals, unsecured and secured personal lines of credit, home equity loans, and overdraft protection. Loans made by the Banks to businesses include commercial construction and mortgage loans, revolving lines of credit, working capital loans, equipment financing, and community lending programs. The types and size of loans the Banks originate are limited by regulatory requirements.

The Banks’ loans are affected by the economic and real estate environments in which they are located. Generally commercial, construction, and land loans are affected more than residential loans in an economic downturn, and this is seen in the current economic downturn. Of the Banks’ loans at December 31, 2009, $2.2 billion were in commercial and $0.3 billion were in construction and land loans, compared to $2.2 billion in commercial and $0.4 billion in construction and land loans at December 31, 2008.

 

53


Table of Contents

Geographic concentration. The Banks primarily serve customers in the geographic region in which they are based. The following table details the Banks’ outstanding loan balance concentrations at December 31, 2009 based on the location of the lender:

 

     Commercial Loans     Construction and
Land Loans
    Residential Mortgage
Loans
    Home Equity and
Other Consumer
Loans
 
   Amount     Percent     Amount    Percent     Amount    Percent     Amount    Percent  
     (In thousands)  

New England

   $ 943,740      43   $ 117,817    37   $ 1,113,842    75   $ 179,792    63

Northern California

     927,074      42     161,839    51     219,394    15     74,192    27

Southern California

     231,684      10     7,719    3     124,212    8     20,947    7

Pacific Northwest

     111,039      5     28,286    9     37,255    2     5,278    2

Eliminations and other, net

     (517   0     —      —          —      —          3,447    1
                                                     

Total

   $ 2,213,020      100   $ 315,661    100   $ 1,494,703    100   $ 283,656    100
                                                     

Loan Portfolio Composition and Maturity. The following table sets forth the Banks’ outstanding loan balances for certain loan categories at the dates indicated and the percent of each category to total loans. The table does not include loans from the Holding Company to certain principals of the Company’s subsidiaries or loans at nonbanking affiliate partners.

 

    2009     2008     2007     2006     2005  
  Amount   Percent     Amount   Percent     Amount   Percent     Amount   Percent     Amount   Percent  
    (In thousands)  

Commercial loans

  $ 2,213,537   51   $ 2,158,052   52   $ 1,979,682   51   $ 1,547,466   50   $ 1,288,638   49

Construction and land loans

    315,661   7     431,717   11     594,920   15     386,906   12     359,464   14

Residential mortgage loans

    1,494,703   35     1,352,881   33     1,211,861   31     1,068,482   35     905,623   34

Home equity and other consumer loans

    280,209   7     183,794   4     114,870   3     87,725   3     88,937   3
                                                           

Subtotal Bank loans

    4,304,110   100     4,126,444   100     3,901,333   100     3,090,579   100     2,642,662   100
                                                           

Less: Allowance for loan losses

    68,444       64,091       59,933       33,234       29,741  
                                       

Net Bank loans

  $ 4,235,666     $ 4,062,353     $ 3,841,400     $ 3,057,345     $ 2,612,921  
                                       

Commercial, Construction and Land Loans. Commercial, construction and land loans include working capital loans, equipment financing, term loans, revolving lines of credit, commercial real estate, and construction and land loans.

Residential Mortgage Loans. While the Banks have no minimum size for their mortgage loans, they concentrate their origination activities in the “Jumbo” segment of the market. This segment consists of loans secured by single-family properties in excess of the amount eligible for purchase by the FNMA, which was $0.4 million at December 31, 2009 for the “General” limit and $0.7 million for the “High-Cost” limit. The majority of the Banks’ residential mortgage loans are ARMs. The type of ARM loans the Banks originate generally have a fixed interest rate for the first 3 to 7 years and then adjust annually based on an index such as the U.S. Treasury yields. ARM loans may negatively impact the Banks’ interest income when they reprice if yields on U.S. Treasuries are low as they were in 2009. If rates reset higher, the Banks could see increased delinquencies if customers’ ability to make payments is impacted by the higher payments. Historically, the Banks have had very low delinquencies and charge-offs on residential loans.

 

54


Table of Contents

While the majority of the Banks’ residential mortgages are originated by the Banks, they occasionally purchase residential mortgages originated elsewhere. Purchasing mortgages is one way the Banks manage the risk levels in their loan portfolios. In 2009, the Banks purchased $79.7 million of residential loans. There were no residential mortgage purchases in 2008.

Home Equity and Other Consumer Loans. Home equity and other consumer loans consist of balances outstanding on home equity loans, consumer loans including personal lines of credit, credit cards and loans arising from overdraft protection extended to individual and business customers. The amount of home equity loans and other consumer loans typically depends on customer demand.

Portfolio mix. During 2009, the Banks had lower loan growth than in recent years as economic conditions have reduced the demand for commercial loans and underwriting standards have become more stringent. Additionally, the Banks have generally reduced or stopped originating construction and land loans. The Banks have made a shift away from higher risk construction and land loans to higher quality residential mortgage loans. This shift in the portfolio mix has affected net interest income as the interest rates on residential mortgage loans are generally lower than rates on commercial, construction and land loans.

The following table discloses the scheduled contractual maturities of loans in the Banks’ portfolios at December 31, 2009. Loans having no stated maturity are reported as due in one year or less. The following table also sets forth the dollar amounts of loans that are scheduled to mature after one year which have fixed or adjustable interest rates.

 

    Commercial,
Construction and
Land Loans
    Residential Mortgage
Loans
    Home Equity and
Other Consumer
Loans
    Total Bank Loans  
    Balance   Percent     Balance   Percent     Balance   Percent     Balance   Percent  
    (In thousands)  

Amounts due:

               

One year or less

  $ 633,233   25   $ 1,103   0   $ 62,105   22   $ 696,441   16

After one through five years

    743,876   29     4,243   0     62,188   22     810,307   19

Beyond five years

    1,152,089   46     1,489,357   100     155,916   56     2,797,362   65
                                               

Total

  $ 2,529,198   100   $ 1,494,703   100   $ 280,209   100   $ 4,304,110   100
                                               

Interest rate terms on amounts due after one year:

               

Fixed

  $ 684,551   36   $ 138,503   9   $ 33,176   15   $ 856,230   24

Adjustable

    1,211,414   64     1,355,097   91     184,928   85     2,751,439   76
                                               

Total

  $ 1,895,965   100   $ 1,493,600   100   $ 218,104   100   $ 3,607,669   100
                                               

Scheduled contractual maturities typically do not reflect the actual maturities of loans. The average maturity of loans is substantially less than their average contractual terms because of prepayments and, in the case of conventional mortgage loans, due on sale clauses, which generally give the Banks the right to declare a loan immediately due and payable in the event, among other things, that the borrower sells the real property subject to the mortgage. The average life of mortgage loans tends to increase when current market rates are substantially higher than rates on existing mortgage loans and decrease when current market rates are substantially lower than rates on existing mortgages (due to refinancing of adjustable-rate and fixed-rate loans at lower rates). Under the latter circumstances, the weighted average yield on loans decreases as higher yielding loans are repaid or refinanced at lower rates. In addition, due to the likelihood that the Banks will, consistent with industry practice, “rollover” a significant portion of commercial real estate and commercial loans at or immediately prior to their maturity by renewing credit on substantially similar or revised terms, the principal repayments actually received

 

55


Table of Contents

by the Banks are anticipated to be significantly less than the amounts contractually due in any particular period. A portion of such loans also may not be repaid due to the borrowers’ inability to satisfy the contractual obligations of the loan.

The interest rates charged on loans vary with the degree of risk, maturity and amount of the loan, and are further subject to competitive pressures, market rates, the availability of funds, and legal and regulatory requirements. At December 31, 2009, approximately 76% of the Banks’ outstanding loans had interest rates that were either floating or adjustable in nature. See Part II, Item 7A, “Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosures about Market Risk—Interest Rate Sensitivity and Market Risk.”

Allowance for Loan Losses. The following table is an analysis of the Banks’ allowances for loan losses for the periods indicated:

 

     Year ended December 31,  
   2009     2008     2007     2006     2005  
     (In thousands)  

Average loans outstanding

   $ 4,185,580      $ 4,055,716      $ 3,468,772      $ 2,863,360      $ 2,455,486   
                                        

Allowance for loan losses, beginning of year

   $ 64,091      $ 59,933      $ 33,234      $ 29,741      $ 25,021   

Charged off loans:

          

Commercial, construction, and land

     (40,596     (192,259     (130     (837     (122

Residential mortgage

     (436     (151     —          —          —     

Home equity and other consumer

     (902     (386     (61     (7     (128
                                        

Total charged-off loans

     (41,934     (192,796     (191     (844     (250
                                        

Recoveries on loans previously charged off:

          

Commercial and construction

     1,248        305        664        82        64   

Residential mortgage

     69        —          —          —          —     

Home equity and other consumer

     11        6        5        16        16   
                                        

Total recoveries

     1,328        311        669        98        80   
                                        

Net loans (charged off)/ recoveries

     (40,606     (192,485     478        (746     (170
                                        

Provision for loan losses

     44,959        196,643        23,449        4,240        4,890   

Addition due to acquisition

     —          —          2,772        —          —     
                                        

Allowance for loan losses, end of year

   $ 68,444      $ 64,091      $ 59,933      $ 33,235      $ 29,741   
                                        

Net loans charged off/ (recovered) to average loans

     0.97     4.75     -0.01     0.03     0.01

Allowance for loan losses to total loans

     1.59     1.55     1.50     1.07     1.13

Allowance for loan losses to nonaccrual loans(1)

     0.76        1.00        1.76        4.05        5.95   

 

(1) Includes loans in the held for sale category that are on non-accrual status.

The allowance for loan losses is formulated based on the judgment and experience of management. See Part II, Item 7, “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Conditions and Results of Operations: Critical Accounting Policies” for details on the Company’s allowance for loan loss policy.

 

56


Table of Contents

The following table represents the allocation of the Banks’ allowance for loan losses and the percent of loans in each category to total loans as of the dates indicated:

 

    December 31,  
  2009     2008     2007     2006     2005  
  Amount   %(1)     Amount   %(1)     Amount   %(1)     Amount   %(1)     Amount   %(1)  
    (In thousands)  

Loan category:

                   

Commercial, construction and land(2)

  $ 59,263   58   $ 47,552   63   $ 43,795   66   $ 25,525   62   $ 21,633   63

Residential mortgage

    5,805   35     7,780   33     6,406   31     5,274   35     3,703   34

Home equity and other consumer(2)

    1,898   7     1,490   4     946   3     689   3     608   3

Unallocated

    1,478       7,269       8,786       1,747       3,797  
                                                           

Total allowance for loan losses

  $ 68,444   100   $ 64,091   100   $ 59,933   100   $ 33,235   100   $ 29,741   100
                                                           

 

(1) Percent refers to the amount of loans in each category as a percent of total loans
(2) The Banks originate unsecured loans and loans secured by cash or marketable securities. These loan types may by classified either as consumer or commercial loans. For purposes of this schedule, the allowance associated with these types of loans are included in Commercial, construction, and land loans.

The increased level of allowance for loan losses, as well as the ratio of the allowance for loan losses to total loans, reflects the higher amount of non-performing and classified loans, particularly in the Northern California region, recent net charge-off trends at a level that is considered higher than the historic norm, and current economic conditions in the Banks’ market areas, partially offset by a smaller required amount of specific reserves on impaired loans, due primarily to charge-offs taken, and the changing mix of the total loan portfolio. An analysis of the risk in the loan portfolio as well as management judgment is used to determine the estimated appropriate amount of the allowance for loan losses. The Company’s affiliate Banks maintain an insignificant amount of unallocated allowance for loan losses in addition to the three primary components of the Company’s allowance for loan losses (General Reserve, Allocated Reserves on non-impaired special-mention and substandard loans, and the Allocated Reserves on impaired loans). The unallocated allowance for loan losses primarily relates to a general assessment of the potential variability of applicable qualitative factors subject to a higher degree of variability. The respective qualitative factors are considered for each respective loan type and only the assessment of the potential variability of applicable qualitative factors is included in the unallocated allowance for loan losses.

In 2009, certain Banking affiliates refined their estimation methodology related to the allocation of the allowance for loan losses to provide for more specific allocation of the allowance. This is the primary reason for the decline in the unallocated portion of the allowance for loan losses as of December 31, 2009 from December 31, 2008. The result was the allocation of the previous unallocated portion of the allowance for loan losses to the specific loan portfolios related to their general assessment of each respective portfolios’ potential variability of applicable qualitative considerations subject to a higher degree of uncertainty. Management does not consider this refinement to the methodology to be significant. The unallocated allowance for loan losses at December 31, 2009 represents only 2.2% of the total allowance for loan losses at that date. See Part II, Item 8, “Financial Statements and Supplementary Data—Note 7: Allowance for Loan Losses” and Part II, Item 7, “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations: Critical Accounting Policies” for further information.

 

57


Table of Contents

The following table presents a summary by geography of loans charged off, net of recoveries, for the periods indicated. The geography assigned to the Private Banking data is based on the location of the lender.

 

     For the year ended December 31,  
   2009     2008     2007     2006     2005  
     (In thousands)  

Net loans (charged off)/ recoveries:

          

New England

   $ (2,495   $ (4,003   $ (51   $ (547   $ (39

Northern California

     (8,387     (407     (33     13        (86

Southern California

     (13,017     (185,904     575        (212     (45

Pacific Northwest

     (16,707     (2,171     (13     —          —     
                                        

Total net loans (charged off)/ recoveries

   $ (40,606   $ (192,485   $ 478      $ (746   $ (170
                                        

Non-performing assets. The Company’s non-performing assets include non-accrual loans, OREO, and repossessed assets. The following table sets forth information regarding non-accrual loans (including loans in the held for sale category), OREO, repossessed assets, loans past due 90 days or more but still accruing, delinquent loans 30-89 days past due as to interest or principal held by the Banks, and troubled debt restructured loans (“TDRs”) at the dates indicated. Reductions in fair values of the collateral for the non-performing assets, if they are collateral dependent, could result in additional future expense depending on the timing and severity of the decline.

 

     December 31,  
   2009     2008     2007     2006     2005  
     (In thousands)  

Loans accounted for on a non-accrual basis(1)

   $ 90,338      $ 63,990      $ 34,115      $ 8,201      $ 4,998   

OREO

     16,600        12,838        711        —          —     

Repossessed assets

     —          —          475        550        —     
                                        

Total non-performing assets

   $ 106,938      $ 76,828      $ 35,301      $ 8,751      $ 4,998   
                                        

Loans past due 90 days or more, but still accruing

   $ —        $ —        $ —        $ 24      $ —     

Delinquent loans 30-89 days past due

   $ 21,194      $ 18,655      $ 18,419      $ 12,436      $ 6,316   

Troubled debt restructured loans(2)

   $ 8,003      $ 1,400      $ —        $ —        $ —     

Non-accrual loans as a % of total loans

     2.10     1.55     0.85     0.27     0.19

Non-performing assets as a % of total assets

     1.77     1.05     0.51     0.15     0.10

Delinquent loans 30-89 days past due as a % of total loans

     0.49     0.45     0.46     0.40     0.24

 

(1) Includes loans in the held for sale category that are on non-accrual status.
(2) Troubled debt restructured loans are a subset of non-accrual loans.

A rollforward of non-accrual loans for the years ended December 31, 2009 and 2008 is presented in the table below:

 

     December 31,  
   2009     2008  
   (In thousands)  

Non-accrual loans, beginning of year(1)

   $ 63,990      $ 34,115   

Transfers in to non-accrual status

     148,249        309,967   

Transfers out to OREO

     (28,344     (14,165

Transfers out to accrual status

     (12,396     (9,346

Charge offs

     (37,309     (192,604

Paid off/ paid down

     (43,852     (63,977
                

Non-accrual loans, end of year(1)

   $ 90,338      $ 63,990   
                

 

(1) Includes loans in the held for sale category that are on non-accrual status.

 

58


Table of Contents

The following tables are a summary of the Private Banking credit quality and concentration data by geography of the lender, based on the location of the lender.

 

     December 31,
2009
   December 31,
2008
     (In thousands)

Non-accrual loans:

     

New England

   $ 8,346    $ 4,098

Northern California

     37,584      6,102

Southern California(1)

     21,953      37,885

Pacific Northwest

     22,455      15,905
             

Total non-accrual loans

   $ 90,338    $ 63,990
             

Loans 30-89 days past due and accruing:

     

New England

   $ 6,658    $ 6,641

Northern California

     6,799      5,080

Southern California

     4,259      6,276

Pacific Northwest

     3,478      658
             

Total loans 30-89 days past due

     21,194      18,655
             

Accruing classified loans:(2)

     

New England

   $ 14,534    $ 2,896

Northern California

     14,768      4,773

Southern California

     8,117      5,474

Pacific Northwest

     15,118      19,063
             

Total accruing classified loans

   $ 52,537    $ 32,206
             

 

(1) Includes loans held for sale of $3.6 million and $27.2 million as of December 31, 2009 and December 31, 2008, respectively.
(2) Accruing classified loans include loans that are classified as substandard but are still accruing interest income. The Banks may classify a loan as substandard where known information about possible credit problems of the related borrowers causes management to have doubts as to the ability of such borrowers to comply with the present repayment terms and which may result in disclosure of such loans as nonperforming at some time in the future.

The following tables are a summary of the Private Banking credit quality and concentration data by loan type. The loan type assigned to the Private Banking credit quality data is based on the purpose of the loan.

 

     December 31,
2009
   December 31,
2008
     (In thousands)

Non-accrual loans:(1)(5)

     

Commercial and industrial(2)

   $ 10,434    $ 6,642

Commercial real estate(2)

     37,111      13,465

Construction and land

     35,406      39,602

Residential mortgage

     7,017      4,254

Home equity and other consumer

     370      27
             

Total non-accrual loans

   $ 90,338    $ 63,990
             

Loans 30-89 days past due and accruing:

     

Commercial and industrial(2)

   $ 6,370    $ 3,243

Commercial real estate(2)

     1,782      7,974

Construction and land

     3,799      658

Residential mortgage

     8,346      6,353

Home equity and other consumer

     897      427
             

Total loans 30-89 days past due

     21,194      18,655
             

Accruing classified loans:(3)

     

Commercial and industrial(2)

   $ 20,884    $ 6,470

Commercial real estate(2)

     25,225      6,755

Construction and land

     6,155      18,971

Residential mortgage

     148      —  

Home equity and other consumer

     125      10
             

Total accruing classified loans

   $ 52,537    $ 32,206
             

 

59


Table of Contents

 

(1) Includes loans held for sale of $3.6 million and $27.2 million as of December 31, 2009 and December 31, 2008, respectively.
(2) Commercial and industrial loans and Commercial real estate loans are included in the Commercial loans line item on the Consolidated Balance Sheets.
(3) Accruing classified loans include loans that are classified as substandard but are still accruing interest income. The Banks may classify a loan as substandard where known information about possible credit problems of the related borrowers causes management to have doubts as to the ability of such borrowers to comply with the present repayment terms and which may result in disclosure of such loans as nonperforming at some time in the future.

The Banks’ policy is to discontinue the accrual of interest on a loan when the collectability of principal or interest is in doubt. When management determines that it is probable that the Bank will not collect all principal and interest on a loan in accordance with the original loan terms, the loan is designated as impaired. Impaired loans are generally included within the balance of non-accrual loans. Impaired loans totaled $83.2 million as of December 31, 2009 as compared to $35.2 million at December 31, 2008. In certain instances, although very infrequent, loans that have become 90 days past due may remain on accrual status if the value of the collateral securing the loan is sufficient to cover principal and interest and the loan is in the process of collection. OREO consists of real estate acquired through foreclosure proceedings and real estate acquired through acceptance of a deed in lieu of foreclosure. In addition, the Company may, under certain circumstances, restructure loans as a concession to borrowers who have experienced financial difficulty. Restructured loans are included in impaired loans. These troubled debt restructurings typically result from the Company’s loss mitigation activities and could include rate reductions, payment extensions, and principal forgiveness.

The Company may, under certain circumstances, restructure loans as a concession to borrowers who have experienced financial difficulty. TDRs are included in impaired loans. These TDRs typically result from the Company’s loss mitigation activities and could include rate reductions, payment extensions, and principal forgiveness. TDRs included in impaired loans totaled $8.0 million and $1.4 million at December 31, 2009 and 2008, respectively. At December 31, 2009, the Company had an immaterial amount of commitments to lend additional funds to debtors for loans whose terms had been modified in a troubled debt restructuring and no commitments at December 31, 2008.

Interest income recorded on non-accrual loans and TDRs and interest income that would have been recorded if the non-accrual loans and TDRs had been on accrual status for the full year or, if originated during the year, since origination are presented in the table below.

 

     Year ended December 31,
       2009    2008    2007    2006    2005
     (In thousands)

Loans accounted for on a non-accrual basis(1)

   $ 90,338    $ 63,990    $ 34,115    $ 8,201    $ 4,998

Interest income recorded during the year on these loans(2)

     3,200      6,130      1,435      287      174

Interest income that would have been recorded on these non-accrual loans during the year if the loans had been performing in accordance with their original terms and had been outstanding for the full year or since origination, if held for part of the year

     9,011      10,165      3,399      741      273

Troubled debt restructured loans(3)

     8,003      1,400      —        —        —  

Interest income recorded on TDRs

     211      38      —        —        —  

Interest income that would have been recorded on TDRs during the year if the loans had been performing in accordance with their original terms and had been outstanding for the full year or since origination, if held for part of the year

     828      81      —        —        —  

 

(1) Includes loans in the held for sale category that are on non-accrual status.
(2) Represents interest income recorded while loans were in a performing status, prior to being placed on non-accrual status.
(3) Troubled debt restructured loans are a subset of non-accrual loans.

 

60


Table of Contents

The Banks continue to evaluate the underlying collateral of each non-performing loan and pursue the collection of interest and principal. Where appropriate, the Banks obtain updated appraisals on the collateral. Please refer to Part II, Item 8, “Financial Statements and Supplementary Data—Note 6: Loans Receivable” for further information on non-performing assets.

Delinquencies. Loans 30-89 days past due increased slightly from year end 2008. The increase in loan delinquencies is primarily due to the continued growth in the Banks’ loan portfolios as well as general economic conditions where the Banks are located. The Company believes most of these loans are adequately secured and the payment performance of these borrowers varies from month to month. Further deterioration in the real estate market where the collateral is located or the local economy could lead to these delinquent loans going to non-accrual status and corresponding downgrade of the credit. Downgrades would generally result in additional provisions for loan losses.

Potential Problem Loans. The Company classifies certain loans as “substandard,” “doubtful,” or “loss” based on criteria consistent with guidelines provided by banking regulators. Potential problem loans consist of classified accruing loans that were less than 90 days past due, but where known information about possible credit problems of the related borrowers causes management to have doubts as to the ability of such borrowers to comply with the present loan repayment terms and which may result in disclosure of such loans as nonperforming at some time in the future. These loans are not included in the disclosure of non-accrual or restructured loans above. Management cannot predict the extent to which economic conditions may worsen or other factors which may impact borrowers and the potential problem loans. Accordingly, there can be no assurance that other loans will not become 90 days or more past due, be placed on non-accrual, become restructured, or require increased allowance coverage and provision for loan losses. The Company has identified approximately $52.5 million in potential problem loans at December 31, 2009, as compared to $32.2 million at December 31, 2008.

Liquidity

Liquidity is defined as the Company’s ability to generate cash adequate to meet its needs for day-to-day operations and material long and short-term commitments. Liquidity risk is the risk of potential loss if the Company were unable to meet its funding requirements at a reasonable cost. The Company manages its liquidity based on demand, commitments, specific events and uncertainties to meet current and future financial obligations of a short-term nature. The Company’s objective in managing liquidity is to respond to the needs of depositors and borrowers as well as to earnings enhancement opportunities in a changing marketplace.

Management is responsible for establishing and monitoring liquidity targets as well as strategies to meet these targets. At December 31, 2009, consolidated cash and cash equivalents and securities available for sale, less securities pledged, amounted to $1.0 billion, or 16% of total assets, as compared to $619.1 million, or 11% of assets from continuing operations at December 31, 2008. In addition, the Company has access to available borrowings through the FHLB totaling $789.3 million as of December 31, 2009. Combined, this liquidity totals $1.8 billion, or 29% of assets and 41% of total deposits as of December 31, 2009.

During the fourth quarter of 2008, the Company received $154.0 million in funding through the U.S. Treasury’s CPP through the issuance of the Series C Preferred and the TARP warrants. The Banks have increased total loans and investments in mortgage backed securities by $215.3 million and $97.5 million, respectively, since receiving the funds. In January 2010, the Company repurchased $50.0 million of its $154.0 million of Series C Preferred originally issued to the U.S. Treasury. Upon repurchase, a proportionate amount of the unamortized discount was accelerated, and will reduce per share income attributable to the common shareholder for the first quarter and for the year 2010. If the Company repurchases additional portions of the Series C Preferred, a proportionate amount of the unamortized discount will be accelerated upon repurchase and will further reduce per share income attributable to the common shareholder in the period of repurchase.

 

61


Table of Contents

Holding Company Liquidity . The Company and several of the Company’s majority-owned affiliate partners hold put and call options that would require the Company to purchase (and the majority-owned affiliate partners to sell) the remaining noncontrolling interests in these companies at the then fair value generally as determined by the respective agreements. These put and call options are discussed in detail in Part II, Item 8, “Financial Statements and Supplementary Data – Note 15: Noncontrolling Interests.” At December 31, 2009, the estimated maximum redemption value for these affiliates related to outstanding put options was approximately $51.9 million, all of which could be redeemed within the next 12 months, and is classified on the consolidated balance sheets as redeemable noncontrolling interests. In January 2010, the Company paid out approximately $29.7 million to KLS pursuant to its put option to require the Company to purchase the remaining 19% interest in KLS along with additional consideration paid for performance targets negotiated in the original agreement with KLS.

The Holding Company’s primary sources of funds are dividends from its affiliate partners, primarily the Investment Managers and Wealth Advisors, access to the capital and debt markets, and private equity investments. Additionally, the Holding Company received contingent consideration related to the divestitures of certain affiliates in 2009, and may receive additional contingent consideration in future years, however divestitures are not ongoing sources of funds for the Holding Company. Dividends from the Banks are limited by various regulatory requirements relating to capital adequacy and retained earnings. See Part II, Item 5, “Market for Registrant’s Common Equity, Related Stockholders Matters, and Issuers Purchases of Equity Securities.”

Although not a significant source of liquidity to the Holding Company, some of the Banks have paid dividends to the Holding Company depending on their profitability and asset growth. If regulatory agencies were to require banks to increase their capital ratios, it may limit the ability of the Banks to pay dividends to the Holding Company and/or limit the amount the Banks could grow.

At December 31, 2009, Holding Company cash, cash equivalents, and securities available for sale amounted to $265.2 million. Management believes that the Company has adequate liquidity to meet its commitments for the foreseeable future, including the payments made in early 2010 to repurchase $50.0 million of its Series C Preferred stock associated with the TARP CPP, and $29.7 million to purchase the additional 19% interest in KLS along with additional consideration paid for performance targets negotiated in the original Agreement with KLS.

The Company is required to pay interest quarterly on its junior subordinated debentures and semi-annually on its long-term debt. The estimated cash outlay for the interest payments in 2010 on the junior subordinated debentures is approximately $10.4 million based on the debt outstanding at December 31, 2009 and estimated interest rates.

The Company presently plans to pay cash dividends on its common stock on a quarterly basis. Based on the current dividend rate and estimated shares outstanding, the Company estimates the amount to be paid out in 2010 for dividends to common stockholders will be approximately $2.8 million. Based on the Company’s preferred stock outstanding after the January 2010 repurchase of $50.0 million of Series C Preferred associated with the TARP CPP and the dividend rate, the Company expects to pay $5.9 million in cash dividends on preferred stock in 2010. The amount of dividends paid on the Series C Preferred would be reduced if the Company repays additional amounts in 2010.

While the Company believes its current and anticipated capital levels are adequate to support its business plan, the capital and credit markets have been experiencing volatility and disruption. In some cases, the markets have produced downward pressure on stock prices and credit availability for certain issuers without regard to those issuers’ underlying financial strength. If current levels of market disruption and volatility continue or worsen, there can be no assurance that the Company will not experience an adverse effect, which may be material, on the Company’s ability to access capital and on the Company’s business, financial condition and results of operations.

 

62


Table of Contents

Bank Liquidity. The Banks are each a member of their regional FHLB, and as such, have access to short and long-term borrowings from those institutions. At December 31, 2009, the Banks had available credit of $789.3 million from the various FHLBs. Liquid assets (i.e., cash and due from banks, federal funds sold, and investment securities available for sale, net of securities pledged) of the Banks totaled $0.8 billion, which equals 14% of the Banks’ total assets and 18% of the Banks’ total deposits. The FHLB can change the advance amounts that banks can utilize based on the bank’s current financial condition as obtained from publicly available data such as FDIC Call Reports. Decreases in the amount of FHLB borrowings available to the Banks would lower their liquidity and possibly limit the Bank’s ability to grow in the short term. Management believes that the Banks have adequate liquidity to meet their commitments for the foreseeable future.

In addition to the above liquidity, the Banks have access to the Federal Reserve Board’s (“FRB’s”) discount window facility, which can provide short-term liquidity as “lender of last resort,” brokered certificates of deposit, and federal funds lines. In October 2009, the FRB reduced the amount of borrowings that would be available under the discount window facility for all banks for various collateral. This reduction requires the Banks to increase the amount of collateral at the FRB to maintain the same level of borrowing capacity. If the Banks did not provide additional collateral, their borrowing capacity would be reduced. This change did not have a material effect on the Banks’ liquidity. The use of non-core funding sources, including brokered deposits and borrowings, by the Banks may be limited by regulatory agencies. Generally, the regulatory agencies prefer that banks rely on core-funding sources for liquidity.

If the Banks were no longer able to utilize the FHLBs for borrowing, collateral currently used for FHLB borrowings could be transferred to other facilities such as the FRB’s discount window. In addition, the Banks could increase their usage of brokered certificates of deposit. Other borrowing arrangements may have higher rates than the FHLB would typically charge.

Consolidated cash flow comparison for the years ended December 31, 2009 and 2008

Net cash provided by operating activities of continuing operations totaled $133.8 million and $42.1 million for the years ended December 31, 2009 and 2008, respectively. Cash flows from operating activities of continuing operations are generally the cash effects of transactions and other events that enter into the determination of net income of continuing operations. Cash provided by operating activities of continuing operations increased $91.6 million from 2008 to 2009 due primarily to proceeds from the sale of loans held for sale, income from continuing operations, excluding the non-cash impairment charge and the additional provision for loan losses, and federal and state tax refunds, offset by increased loans originated for sale.

Net cash used in investing activities of continuing operations totaled $214.6 million and $537.3 million for the years ended December 31, 2009 and 2008, respectively. Investing activities of the Company include loan activities, investment activities and capital expenditures. Cash used in investing activities of continuing operations decreased $322.7 million from 2008 to 2009 and was due primarily to a decrease in cash used by the Banks’ loan activity, lower net purchases of investments for the Banks’ investment portfolios, and offset by the cash received from the sale of discontinued operations and decreased proceeds from the sale of the non-strategic loans portfolio in Southern California.

Net cash provided by financing activities of continuing operations totaled $172.0 million and $601.4 million for the years ended December 31, 2009 and 2008, respectively. Cash provided by financing activities of continuing operations decreased $429.4 million from 2008 to 2009 due primarily to the 2008 issuances of preferred stock, common stock and warrants to purchase common stock. There were reduced financing activities in 2009 compared to 2008, with increased deposits offset by a decrease in FHLB borrowings.

Net cash provided by (used in) operating activities of discontinued operations totaled $111.5 million and ($121.9) million for the years ended December 31, 2009 and 2008, respectively. Net cash provided by investing activities of discontinued operations totaled $39.6 million and $2.2 million for the years ended December 31, 2009 and 2008, respectively. Net cash (used in) provided by financing activities of discontinued operations totaled ($76.1) million and $139.2 million for the years ended December 31, 2009 and 2008, respectively.

 

63


Table of Contents

Consolidated cash flow comparison for the years ended December 31, 2008 and 2007

Net cash provided by operating activities of continuing operations totaled $42.1 million and $50.6 million for the years ended December 31, 2008 and 2007, respectively. Cash flows from operating activities are generally the cash effects of transactions and other events that enter into the determination of net income from continuing operations. Cash provided by operating activities of continuing operations decreased $8.4 million from 2007 to 2008 due primarily to lower proceeds from the sale of loans and an increase in the deferred tax asset, offset by increased income from continuing operations excluding the non-cash impairment charges and additional provision for loan losses.

Net cash used in investing activities of continuing operations totaled $537.3 million and $776.9 million for the years ended December 31, 2008 and 2007, respectively. Investing activities of the Company include loan activities, investment activities and capital expenditures. Cash used in investing activities decreased $239.5 million from 2007 to 2008 due primarily to a decrease in cash used by the Banks’ loan activity, partially offset by increases in purchases for the Banks’ investment portfolio, net of sales maturities and calls, as compared to 2007.

Net cash provided by financing activities of continuing operations totaled $601.4 million and $663.2 million for the years ended December 31, 2008 and 2007, respectively. Cash provided by financing activities decreased $61.8 million from 2007 to 2008 due primarily to the 2008 debt repurchases and the 2007 debt issuances, and slower growth in securities sold under agreements to repurchase, offset by the proceeds from the issuance of the preferred stock, common stock and warrants to purchase common stock.

Net cash (used in) provided by operating activities of discontinued operations totaled ($121.9) million and $58.5 million for the years ended December 31, 2008 and 2007, respectively. Net cash provided by (used in) investing activities of discontinued operations totaled $2.2 million and ($139.7) million for the years ended December 31, 2008 and 2007, respectively. Net cash provided by financing activities of discontinued operations totaled $139.2 million and $95.5 million for the years ended December 31, 2008 and 2007, respectively.

Capital Resources

Total Company’s stockholders’ equity at December 31, 2009 was $651.2 million, compared to $645.2 million at December 31, 2008, an increase of $6.0 million, or 1%. The increase in the Company’s stockholders’ equity was the result of net income, stock issued for deferred acquisition payments, stock compensation, and stock issued in connection with the Company’s employee stock purchase plan, offset by the change in accumulated other comprehensive income and dividends paid to the Company’s preferred and common stockholders.

As a bank holding company, the Company is subject to various regulatory capital requirements administered by federal agencies. Failure to meet minimum capital requirements can result in certain mandatory, and possibly additional discretionary actions by regulators that, if undertaken, could have a material effect on the Company’s financial statements. For example, under capital adequacy guidelines and the regulatory framework for prompt corrective action, the Banks, which are wholly owned subsidiaries of the Company, must each meet specific capital guidelines that involve quantitative measures of each Bank’s assets and certain off-balance sheet items as calculated under regulatory guidelines. The Banks’ respective capital amounts and classifications are also subject to qualitative judgments by the regulators about components, risk weightings, and other factors. Similarly, the Company is also subject to capital requirements administered by the Federal Reserve with respect to certain nonbanking activities, including adjustments in connection with off-balance sheet items.

To be categorized as “well capitalized,” the Company and the Banks must maintain minimum total risk-based, Tier I risk-based, and Tier I leverage ratios as set forth in the following table. In addition, the Company and the Banks cannot be subject to any written agreement, order or capital directive or prompt corrective action to be considered “well capitalized.” See Part II, Item 8, “Financial Statements and Supplementary Data—Note 23: Regulatory Matters” for further detail.

 

64


Table of Contents

Although the Company and all of the Banks within the segment maintain capital at levels that would otherwise be considered “well capitalized” under the applicable regulations, for supervisory reasons, the Southern California and Pacific Northwest banks, and therefore the Company, are not deemed “well capitalized.”

The Company contributed an additional $34.0 million of capital during 2009 to certain of its Bank affiliates, and received a dividend of $10.0 million from one of its Banks. The Company also contributed $18.0 million of capital to Gibraltar prior to divestiture. These capital contributions were made to meet applicable regulatory capital requirements and to increase regulatory capital levels given the economic conditions in the regions in which these affiliate Banks operate and increased uncertainty in the local real estate markets.

Contractual obligations

The schedules below present a detail of the maturities of the Company’s contractual obligations and commitments as of December 31, 2009. See Part II, Item 8, “Financial Statements and Supplementary Data—Notes 12 through 14” for terms of borrowing arrangements and interest rates.

 

     Payments Due by Period
       Total    Less than 1
Year
   1-3
Years
   3-5
Years
   More than 5
Years
     (In thousands)

Federal Home Loan Bank Borrowings

   $ 555,012    $ 158,232    $ 233,079    $ 98,748    $ 64,953

Securities sold under agreements to repurchase

     243,377      190,377      —        53,000      —  

Junior subordinated debentures

     193,645      —        —        —        193,645

Operating lease obligations

     73,297      12,435      23,416      16,995      20,451

Data processing

     5,803      2,626      2,409      768      —  

Bonus and commissions

     4,346      3,278      1,068      —        —  

Other long-term obligations

     1,586      918      443      222      3
                                  

Total contractual obligations at December 31, 2009

   $ 1,077,066    $ 367,866    $ 260,415    $ 169,733    $ 279,052
                                  

The amounts below related to commitments to originate loans, unused lines of credit, and standby letters of credit are at the discretion of the customer and may never actually be drawn upon. The contractual amount of the Company’s financial instruments with off-balance sheet risk are as follows:

 

     Payments Due by Period
   Total    Less than 1
Year
   1-3
Years
   3-5
Years
   More than 5
years
     (In thousands)

Unadvanced portion of loans, unused lines of credit, and commitments to originate loans

   $ 904,331    $ 504,828    $ 160,156    $ 40,330    $ 199,017

Standby letters of credit

     29,432      27,358      1,236      434      404

Forward commitments to sell loans

     30,722      30,722      —        —        —  
                                  

Total commitments at December 31, 2009

   $ 964,485    $ 562,908    $ 161,392    $ 40,764    $ 199,421
                                  

Off-Balance Sheet Arrangements

The Company and its affiliate partners own equity interests in certain limited partnerships and limited liability companies. Most of these are investment vehicles that are managed by the Company’s investment adviser subsidiaries. The Company accounts for these investments under the equity method of accounting so the total amount of assets and liabilities of the investment partnerships are not included in the consolidated financial statements of the Company.

 

65


Table of Contents

Impact of Accounting Estimates

Management of the Company is required to make certain estimates and assumptions during the preparation of consolidated financial statements in accordance with accounting principles generally accepted in the U.S. (“GAAP”). These estimates and assumptions impact the reported amount of assets, liabilities and disclosures of contingent assets and liabilities as of the date of the consolidated financial statements. They also impact the reported amount of net earnings during any period. Actual results could differ from those estimates.

Impact of Inflation and Changing Prices

The consolidated financial statements and related notes thereto presented in Part II, Item 8, “Financial Statements and Supplementary Data,” have been prepared in accordance with GAAP, which require the measurement of financial position and operating results in terms of historical dollars without considering changes in the relative purchasing power of money over time due to inflation.

Unlike many industrial companies, substantially all of the assets and liabilities of the Company are monetary in nature. As a result, interest rates have a more significant impact on the Company’s performance than the general level of inflation. Over short periods of time, interest rates may not necessarily move in the same direction or in the same magnitude as inflation.

Recent Accounting Pronouncements

Effective July 1, 2009, the FASB’s ASC became the single official source of authoritative, nongovernmental GAAP. The historical GAAP hierarchy was eliminated and the ASC became the only level of authoritative GAAP, other than guidance issued by the SEC. The Company’s accounting policies were not affected by the conversion to ASC. However, references to specific accounting standards in the footnotes to the Company’s consolidated financial statements have been changed to refer to the appropriate section of ASC.

Effective January 1, 2009, the Company adopted ASC 805, Business Combinations (formerly FAS Statement 141(R), Business Combinations ), which provides guidance in accounting for business combinations for which the acquisition date is on or after that date. The Statement had no impact on the Company’s financial position or results of operations during 2009. However, the Company’s accounting for future acquisitions, if any, will be significantly impacted by this standard.

Effective January 1, 2009, the Company adopted updates to ASC 260, Earnings Per Share , (formerly FASB Staff Position No. Emerging Issues Task Force 03-6-1, Determining Whether Instruments Granted in Share-Based Payment Transactions Are Participating Securities ) (“ASC 260 updates”), which required unvested share-based payments that contain nonforfeitable rights and dividends or dividend equivalents to be treated as participating securities and be included in the calculation of EPS pursuant to the two-class method. The January 1, 2009 adoption of these ASC 260 updates did not have a material impact on the Corporation’s financial position or results of operations.

In April 2009, the FASB issued updates to ASC 320, Investments—Debt and Equity Securities (formerly FASB Staff Position FAS 115-2 and FAS 124-2, Recognition and Presentation of Other-Than-Temporary Impairments ) “ASC 320 updates” to address concerns about evaluating and recognizing other-than-temporary impairments of investments in debt securities. The ASC 320 updates establish a new method of recognizing and reporting other-than-temporary impairments of debt securities. The ASC 320 update also contains additional disclosure requirements. It was effective for interim and annual periods ending after June 15, 2009, and had no material impact on the Company’s financial position or results of operations for 2009.

In June 2009, the FASB issued updates to ASC 860, Transfers and Servicing (formerly FAS 166, Accounting for Transfers of Financial Assets ) (“ASC 860 updates”). Among other things, the ASC 860 updates amend ASC 860 (formerly FAS 140, Accounting for Transfers and Servicing of Financial Assets and Extinguishments of Liabilities a replacement of FAS 125 ) to remove the concept of a qualifying special purpose

 

66


Table of Contents

entity (“QSPE”) from the prior statement and removes the exception from applying FASB Interpretation No. 46, Consolidation of Variable Interest Entities , to QSPEs. Effective as of January 1, 2010, the ASC 860 updates will not have a material impact on the Company’s financial position or results of operations.

In June 2009, the FASB issued ASC 810, updates to Consolidation , (formerly FAS 167, Amendments to FASB Interpretation No. 46(R), Consolidation of Variable Interest Entities ) (“ASC 810”). These updates require an enterprise to perform an analysis to determine whether the enterprise’s variable interest or interests give it a controlling financial interest in a variable interest entity. It determines whether a reporting entity is required to consolidate another entity based on, among other things, the other entity’s purpose and design and the reporting entity’s ability to direct the activities of the other entity that most significantly impact the other entity’s economic performance. These updates are effective on a prospective basis in fiscal years beginning on or after November 15, 2009, and interim periods within those fiscal years, and will be adopted by the Company in the first quarter of fiscal year 2010. The Company is performing an analysis to determine whether any variable interests give the Company a controlling financial interest in such variable interest entity. The impact of adoption will not be material to the Company’s financial position or results of operations.

ITEM 7A. QUANTITATIVE AND QUALITATIVE DISCLOSURES ABOUT MARKET RISK

Interest Rate Sensitivity and Market Risk

The Company considers interest rate risk to be a significant market risk for the Banks. Interest rate risk is the exposure to adverse changes in the net income of the Company as a result of changes in interest rates. Consistency in the Company’s earnings is related to the effective management of interest rate sensitive assets and liabilities due to changes in interest rates, and on the degree of fluctuation of investment management fee income due to movements in the bond and equity markets.

Fee income from investment management and trust services is not directly dependent on market interest rates and may provide the Company a relatively stable source of income in varying market interest rate environments. However, this fee income is generally based upon the value of assets under management and, therefore, can be significantly affected by changes in the values of equities and bonds. Furthermore, performance fees and partnership income earned by some of the Company’s affiliates, as managers of limited partnerships, are directly dependent upon short-term investment performance that can fluctuate significantly with changes in the capital markets. The Company does not have any trading operations for its own account.

In addition to directly impacting net interest income, changes in the level of interest rates can also affect (i) the amount of loans originated and sold by the Company, (ii) the ability of borrowers to repay adjustable rate loans, (iii) the average maturity of loans and mortgage-backed securities, (iv) the rate of amortization of premiums paid on securities and, (v) the amount of unrealized gains and losses on securities available for sale.

The principal objective of the Banks’ asset and liability management is to maximize profit potential while minimizing the vulnerability of its operations to changes in interest rates by means of managing the ratio of interest rate sensitive assets to interest rate sensitive liabilities within specified maturities or repricing dates. The Banks’ actions in this regard are taken under the guidance of their respective Asset/Liability Committees (“ALCO”), which are comprised of members of senior management. These committees are actively involved in formulating the economic assumptions that the Banks use in their respective financial planning and budgeting processes and establish policies which control and monitor the sources, uses and pricing of funds. The Banks may utilize hedging techniques to reduce interest rate risk. See Part II, Item 8 “Financial Statements and Supplementary Data—Note 8: Derivatives” for additional information.

The ALCOs use both interest rate “gap” sensitivity and interest income simulation analysis to measure inherent risk in the Banks’ balance sheets at a specific point in time. The simulations look forward at one and two year increments with gradual and sustained changes in interest rates of up to 200 basis points, and take into

 

67


Table of Contents

account the repricing, maturity and prepayment characteristics of individual products and investments. The simulation results are reviewed to determine whether the exposure of net interest income to interest rate changes is within the following guidelines: (i) projected net interest income during the first 12 months of the simulation will not be reduced by more than 7% to 10%, dependent on the Bank, and (ii) projected net interest income during the first 24 months of the simulation will not be reduced by more than 10% to 20%, dependent on the Bank. These guidelines are set and monitored at both the ALCO and Board levels. The Banks were in compliance with their applicable guidelines at all times during the year. The ALCOs review the results with regard to the established tolerance levels and recommend appropriate strategies to manage this exposure.

Generally, the Banks hold variable rate mortgage loans. When possible the Banks make use of the secondary mortgage loan market to sell fixed rate mortgages to investors. This provides fee income and reduces interest rate risk. As a hedge against rising interest rates, the Banks may utilize fixed rate borrowings.

As of December 31, 2009, the net interest income simulation indicated that the Banks’ exposure to changing interest rates was within the established tolerance levels described above. While the ALCOs review simulation assumptions to ensure that they reflect historical experience, it should be noted that income simulation may not always prove to be an accurate indicator of interest rate risk because the actual repricing, maturity, and prepayment characteristics of individual products may differ from the estimates used in the simulations. The following table presents the impact of interest rate changes on pro forma net interest income for the Company over a 12 month period:

 

    Twelve months beginning 1/1/10  
    Dollar
Change
    Percent
Change
 
    (In thousands)        

Up 200 basis points

  $ (978   -0.55

Down 100 basis points

  $ 1,107      0.63
    Twelve months beginning 1/1/09  
    Dollar
Change
    Percent
Change
 
    (In thousands)        

Up 200 basis points

  $ (3,336   -1.87

Down 100 basis points

  $ 1,326      0.75

Model Methodologies

 

   

The base model is built as a static balance sheet simulation. Growth and/or contraction are not incorporated into the base model to avoid masking of the inherent interest rate risk in the balance sheet as it stands at a point in time, however, balance sheet adjustments may be incorporated into the model to reflect anticipated changes in certain balance sheet categories.

 

   

The model utilizes the FHLB, LIBOR, and Treasury yield curves in effect as of December 31, 2009. Other market rates used in this analysis include the Prime rate, which was 3.25%, and Fed Funds rate, which ranged from 0.00% to 0.25%, respectively, at December 31, 2009. All interest rate changes are assumed to occur in the first 12 months and remain flat thereafter. Fed Funds and Treasury yields are floored at 0.01% while Prime is floored at 3.00%. All other market rates (LIBOR, FHLB, Brokered CD) are floored at 0.25% to reflect credit spreads. All points on the treasury yield curve increase/decrease congruently.

 

   

Short-term interest rates (e.g. Prime & Fed Funds) are assumed to drive non-maturity deposit (Savings, NOW and money market accounts) pricing. Term deposit (CD, IRA) pricing changes are reflective of changes in the LIBOR swap and/or FHLB yield curves. For rising and falling rate environments, prepayment speeds accelerate/decelerate over a 12 month period and remain flat thereafter.

 

68


Table of Contents

The Banks also use interest rate sensitivity “gap” analysis to provide a general overview of their interest rate risk profile. The effect of interest rate changes on the assets and liabilities of a financial institution may be analyzed by examining the extent to which such assets and liabilities are “interest rate sensitive” and by monitoring an institution’s interest rate sensitivity gap. An asset or liability is said to be interest rate sensitive within a specific time period if it will mature or reprice within that time period. The interest rate sensitivity gap is defined as the difference between interest-earning assets and interest-bearing liabilities maturing or repricing within a given time period. A gap is considered positive when the amount of interest rate sensitive assets exceeds the amount of interest rate sensitive liabilities. A gap is considered negative when the amount of interest rate sensitive liabilities exceeds interest rate sensitive assets. During a period of falling interest rates, a positive gap would tend to adversely affect net interest income, while a negative gap would tend to result in an increase in net income. During a period of rising interest rates, a positive gap would tend to result in an increase in net interest income while a negative gap would tend to affect net interest income adversely.

The Banks have historically sought to maintain a relatively narrow gap position and have, in some instances, foregone investment in higher yielding assets when such investment, in management’s opinion, exposed the Banks to undue interest rate risk. At December 31, 2009, the Company’s overall balance sheet in the short-term was, in theory, liability sensitive. The actual ability to reprice certain interest-bearing liabilities depends on other factors in addition to the movement of interest rates. These factors include competitor’s pricing, the current rate paid on interest-bearing liabilities, and alternative products offered in the financial market place. The Banks do not attempt to perfectly match interest rate sensitive assets and liabilities and will selectively mismatch their assets and liabilities to a controlled degree when they consider such a mismatch both appropriate and prudent. There are a number of relevant time periods in which to measure the gap position, such as at the 30, 60, 90, or 180 day points in the maturity schedule. Management monitors the Banks’ gap position at each of these maturity points, and also tends to focus closely on the gap at the one-year point in making funding decisions. Assumptions based on the historical behavior of deposit rates and balances in relation to changes in interest rates are also incorporated into the repricing schedule. These assumptions are inherently uncertain and, as a result, the repricing schedule cannot precisely measure net interest income or predict the impact of fluctuations in interest rates on net interest income.

 

69


Table of Contents

The repricing schedule for the Company’s interest-earning assets and interest-bearing liabilities is measured on a cumulative basis. The simulation analysis is based on expected cash flows and repricing characteristics, and incorporates market-based assumptions regarding the impact of changing interest rates on the prepayment speeds of certain assets and liabilities. Actual results will differ from simulated results due to timing, magnitude, and frequency of interest rate changes as well as changes in market conditions and management strategies. The following table presents the repricing schedule for the Company’s interest-earning assets and interest-bearing liabilities at December 31, 2009:

 

    Within Three
Months
    Over Three to
Six Months
    Over Six to
Twelve
Months
    Over One
Year to Five
Years
    Over Five
Years
    Total
    (In thousands)

Interest earning assets(1):

           

Interest bearing cash

  $ 416,746      $ 105      $ —        $ —        $ —        $ 416,851

Federal funds sold

    544        —          —          —          —          544

Investment securities

    262,460        63,640        118,672        354,662        93,099        892,533

FHLB stock

    47,490        —          —          —          —          47,490

Loans held for sale

    8,979        167        1,073        1,215        1,280        12,714

Loans—Fixed rate

    60,697        69,261        75,668        456,003        319,033        980,662

Loans—Variable rate

    1,306,023        189,862        292,126        1,241,448        296,919        3,326,378
                                             

Total interest earning assets

  $ 2,102,939      $ 323,035      $ 487,539      $ 2,053,328      $ 710,331      $ 5,677,172
                                             

Interest bearing liabilites(2):

           

Savings and NOW accounts(3)

  $ 507,182      $ —        $ —        $ —        $ —        $ 507,182

Money market accounts

    1,447,811        —          —          —          —          1,447,811

Certificates of deposit under $100,000

    106,655        101,782        63,321        93,767        7,835        373,360

Certificates of deposit $100,000 or more

    556,499        338,588        153,102        35,991        7,010        1,091,190

Securities sold under agreements to repurchase

    190,377        —          —          53,000        —          243,377

FHLB borrowings

    41,109        55,921        68,669        331,566        57,747        555,012

Junior subordinated debentures and other long-term debt

    26,805        —          103,093        —          63,747        193,645
                                             

Total interest bearing liabilities

  $ 2,876,438      $ 496,291      $ 388,185      $ 514,324      $ 136,339      $ 4,411,577
                                             

Net interest sensitivity gap during the period

  $ (773,499   $ (173,256   $ 99,354      $ 1,539,004      $ 573,992      $ 1,265,595

Cumulative gap

  $ (773,499   $ (946,755   $ (847,401   $ 691,603      $ 1,265,595     

Interest-sensitive assets as a percent of interest-sensitive liabilities (cumulative)

    73.11     71.93     77.47     116.18     128.69  

Cumulative gap as a percent of total assets

    -12.79     -15.65     -14.01     11.43     20.92  

 

(1) Adjustable and floating-rate assets are included in the period in which interest rates are next scheduled to adjust rather than in the period in which they are due, and fixed rate loans are included in the periods in which they are scheduled to mature.
(2) Does not include $835.7 million of demand accounts because they are non-interest bearing.
(3) While savings, NOW and money market accounts can be withdrawn any time, management believes they have characteristics that make their effective maturity longer.

The preceding table does not necessarily indicate the impact of general interest rate movements on the Banks’ net interest income because the repricing of various assets and liabilities is discretionary and is subject to competitive and other factors. As a result, assets and liabilities indicated as repricing within the same period may in fact reprice at different times and at different rates.

 

70


Table of Contents

ITEM 8. FINANCIAL STATEMENTS AND SUPPLEMENTARY DATA.

BOSTON PRIVATE FINANCIAL HOLDINGS, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES

CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEETS

 

     December 31,
2009
    December 31,
2008
 
     (In thousands, except share and per share data)  

Assets:

    

Cash and due from banks

   $ 446,916      $ 216,932   

Federal funds sold

     544        64,343   
                

Cash and cash equivalents

     447,460        281,275   

Investment securities:

    

Available for sale (amortized cost of $876,910 and $784,903, respectively)

     888,032        799,026   

Held to maturity (fair value of $4,511 and $4,597 respectively)

     4,501        4,499   
                

Total investment securities

     892,533        803,525   

Loans held for sale

     12,714        36,846   

Loans:

    

Commercial

     2,213,020        2,156,908   

Construction and land

     315,661        431,717   

Residential mortgage

     1,494,703        1,352,881   

Home equity and other consumer loans

     283,656        187,575   
                

Total loans

     4,307,040        4,129,081   

Less: Allowance for loan losses

     68,444        64,091   
                

Net loans

     4,238,596        4,064,990   

Other real estate owned (“OREO”)

     16,600        12,838   

Stock in Federal Home Loan Banks

     47,490        47,490   

Premises and equipment, net

     28,349        28,746   

Goodwill

     108,692        105,090   

Intangible assets, net

     41,425        49,961   

Fees receivable

     7,320        7,179   

Accrued interest receivable

     19,292        21,665   

Income tax receivable and deferred

     52,267        112,426   

Other assets

     136,527        132,634   

Assets of discontinued operations

     —          1,578,170   
                

Total assets

   $ 6,049,265      $ 7,282,835   
                

Liabilities:

    

Deposits

   $ 4,255,219      $ 3,748,912   

Securities sold under agreements to repurchase

     243,377        293,841   

Federal Home Loan Bank borrowings

     555,012        745,472   

Junior subordinated debentures and other long-term debt

     193,645        290,585   

Other liabilities

     99,008        88,647   

Liabilities of discontinued operations

     —          1,416,535   
                

Total liabilities

     5,346,261        6,583,992   
                

Redeemable Noncontrolling Interests

     51,850        50,167   

The Company’s Stockholders’ Equity:

    

Preferred stock, $1.00 par value; authorized: 2,000,000 shares;

    

Series B, issued (contingently convertible): 401 shares at December 31, 2009 and 2008; liquidation value: $100,000 per share

     58,089        33,703   

Series C, issued: 154,000 shares at December 31, 2009 and 2008; liquidation value: $1,000 per share

     146,012        144,642   

Common stock, $1.00 par value; authorized: 170,000,000 shares; issued and outstanding: 68,666,263 shares at December 31, 2009 and 63,874,024 shares at December 31, 2008

     68,666        63,874   

Additional paid-in capital

     629,001        654,903   

Accumulated deficit

     (258,186     (263,417

Accumulated other comprehensive income

     7,572        11,471   
                

Total Company’s stockholders’ equity

     651,154        645,176   
                

Noncontrolling interests

     —          3,500   
                

Total stockholders’ equity

     651,154        648,676   
                

Total liabilities, redeemable noncontrolling interests and stockholders’ equity

   $ 6,049,265      $ 7,282,835   
                

 

See accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements.

 

71


Table of Contents

BOSTON PRIVATE FINANCIAL HOLDINGS, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF OPERATIONS

 

    Year Ended December 31,  
            2009                     2008                     2007          
    (In thousands, except share and per share data)  

Interest and dividend income:

     

Loans

  $ 232,017      $ 251,698      $ 244,746   

Taxable investment securities

    6,566        14,089        13,633   

Non-taxable investment securities

    6,041        7,798        7,809   

Mortgage-backed securities

    13,487        5,951        1,868   

Federal funds sold and other

    1,203        3,860        8,104   
                       

Total interest and dividend income

    259,314        283,396        276,160   
                       

Interest expense:

     

Deposits

    58,872        81,596        96,337   

Federal Home Loan Bank borrowings

    25,324        27,584        19,560   

Junior subordinated debentures and other long-term debt

    12,324        18,158        18,361   

Other short-term borrowings

    3,309        5,830        4,909   
                       

Total interest expense

    99,829        133,168        139,167   
                       

Net interest income

    159,485        150,228        136,993   

Provision for loan losses

    44,959        196,643        23,449   
                       

Net interest income/(loss) after provision for loan losses

    114,526        (46,415     113,544   
                       

Fees and other income:

     

Investment management and trust fees

    53,999        67,379        74,789   

Wealth advisory fees

    34,834        34,644        20,322   

Gain on repurchase of debt

    18,739        22,513        —     

Gain on sale of investments, net

    5,803        2,393        2   

Gain on sale of loans, net

    2,656        433        1,444   

Gain/(loss) on sale of non-strategic loans portfolios, net

    2,811        (4,310     —     

Other

    7,607        6,397        9,647   
                       

Total fees and other income

    126,449        129,449        106,204   
                       

Operating expense:

     

Salaries and employee benefits

    127,707        129,001        116,318   

Occupancy and equipment

    26,818        24,406        22,093   

Professional services

    19,841        18,564        11,694   

Marketing and business development

    6,462        7,606        7,871   

Contract services and data processing

    5,271        5,104        4,249   

Warrant expense

    —          2,233        —     

Amortization of intangibles

    8,289        8,070        9,049   

Impairment of goodwill and intangibles

    1,699        133,202        31,780   

FDIC insurance

    9,746        3,309        1,326   

Other

    17,125        15,492        12,026   
                       

Total operating expense

    222,958        346,987        216,406   
                       

Income/(loss) before income taxes

    18,017        (263,953     3,342   

Income tax expense/(benefit)

    1,632        (70,737     (6,339
                       

Net income/(loss) from continuing operations

    16,385        (193,216     9,681   

Net loss from discontinued operations

    (7,505     (191,209     (1,524
                       

Net income/(loss) before attribution to noncontrolling interests

    8,880        (384,425     8,157   

Less: Net income attributable to noncontrolling interests

    3,649        4,327        3,987   
                       

Net income/(loss) attributable to the Company

  $ 5,231      $ (388,752   $ 4,170   
                       

Adjustments to net income/(loss) attributable to the Company to arrive at net (loss)/income attributable to common shareholders

    (40,231     (33,029     —     
                       

Net (loss)/income attributable to common shareholders for (loss)/earnings per share calculation

  $ (35,000   $ (421,781   $ 4,170   
                       

(Loss)/earnings per share attributable to the Company’s common shareholders:

     

(Loss)/earnings per share from continuing operations:

     

Basic and diluted (loss)/earnings per share

  $ (0.41   $ (4.85   $ 0.15   

Loss per share from discontinued operations:

     

Basic and diluted loss per share

  $ (0.11   $ (4.02   $ (0.04

Net (loss)/earnings per share attributable to the Company’s common shareholders:

     
                       

Basic and diluted (loss)/earnings per share

  $ (0.52   $ (8.87   $ 0.11   
                       

Average basic common shares outstanding

    66,696,977        47,528,418        36,731,621   

Average diluted common shares outstanding

    66,696,977        47,528,418        38,315,330   

 

See accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements.

 

72


Table of Contents

BOSTON PRIVATE FINANCIAL HOLDINGS, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF CHANGES IN STOCKHOLDERS’ EQUITY

 

    Common
Stock
    Preferred
Stock
    Additional
Paid-in
Capital
    Retained
Earnings/
(Accumulated
Deficit)
    Accumulated
Other
Comprehensive
Income/

(Loss)
    Noncontrolling
Interests
  Total  
    (In thousands, except share data)  

Balance at December 31, 2006

  $ 36,590      $ —        $ 385,005      $ 176,111      $ (2,291   $ —     $ 595,415   

Comprehensive Income:

             

Net income attributable to the Company

    —          —          —          4,170        —          —       4,170   

Other comprehensive income, net:

             

Change in unrealized gain on securities available for sale, net

    —          —          —          —          4,401        —       4,401   

Change in unrealized gain on cash flow hedge, net

    —          —          —          —          778        —       778   

Change in unrealized gain on other, net

    —          —          —          —          213        —       213   
                   

Total comprehensive income attributable to the Company, net

                9,562   

Dividends paid to common shareholders: $0.36 per share

    —          —          —          (13,361     —          —       (13,361

Net proceeds from issuance of:

             

1,920,417 shares of common stock

    1,920        —          52,847        —          —          —       54,767   

Issuance of 89,952 shares of incentive stock grants

    90        —          (90     —          —          —       —     

Amortization of incentive stock grants

    —          —          3,205        —          —          —       3,205   

Amortization of stock options and employee stock purchase plan

    —          —          6,781        —          —          —       6,781   

Stock options exercised

    340        —          4,260        —          —          —       4,600   

Excess tax benefit on stock options exercised

    —          —          789        —          —          —       789   

Buyback of 1,470,000 shares of common stock

    (1,470     —          (38,573     —          —          —       (40,043

Other equity adjustments

    —          —          (2,386     43        —          —       (2,343
                                                     

Balance at December 31, 2007

    37,470        —          411,838        166,963        3,101        —       619,372   

Comprehensive Loss:

             

Net loss attributable to the Company

    —          —          —          (388,752     —          —       (388,752

Other comprehensive income/(loss), net:

             

Change in unrealized gain on securities available for sale, net

    —          —          —          —          6,131        —       6,131   

Change in unrealized gain on cash flow hedge, net

    —          —          —          —          2,453        —       2,453   

Change in unrealized loss on other, net

    —          —          —          —          (214     —       (214
                   

Total comprehensive loss attributable to the Company, net

                (380,382

Dividends paid to common shareholders: $0.22 per share

    —          —          (635     (8,180     —          —       (8,815

Dividends paid to preferred shareholders

    —          —          (715     (136     —          —       (851

Net proceeds from issuance of:

             

18,400,000 shares of common stock related to the public offering

    18,400        —          86,480        —          —          —       104,880   

1,068,649 shares of common stock

    1,069        —          13,068        —          —          —       14,137   

351 shares of convertible Series A Preferred stock

    —          22,770        —          —          —          —       22,770   

401 shares of convertible Series B Preferred stock

    —          26,293        —          —          —          —       26,293   

154,000 shares of cumulative non-convertible Series C Preferred stock

    —          144,517        —          —          —          —       144,517   

Conversion of 351 shares of Series A Preferred stock to 6,346,572 shares of common stock

    6,347        (47,413     41,066        —          —          —       —     

(continued)

 

73


Table of Contents

BOSTON PRIVATE FINANCIAL HOLDINGS, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF CHANGES IN STOCKHOLDERS’ EQUITY—(Continued)

 

    Common
Stock
  Preferred
Stock
    Additional
Paid-in
Capital
    Retained
Earnings/
(Accumulated
Deficit)
    Accumulated
Other
Comprehensive
Income/

(Loss)
    Noncontrolling
Interests
    Total  
    (In thousands, except share data)  

Proceeds from issuance of Carlyle warrants

    —       —          19,090        —          —          —          19,090   

Proceeds from issuance of TARP warrants

    —       —          9,328        —          —          —          9,328   

Reclassification of increase in fair value of Carlyle warrants

    —       —          2,233        —          —          —          2,233   

Accretion of the Beneficial Conversion Feature:

             

Series A Preferred stock

    —       24,643        —          (24,643     —          —          —     

Series B Preferred stock

    —       7,410        —          (7,410     —          —          —     

Accretion of discount on Series C Preferred stock

    —       125        —          (125     —          —          —     

Issuance of 327,348 shares of incentive stock grants

    327     —          (327     —          —          —          —     

Amortization of incentive stock grants

    —       —          3,316        —          —          —          3,316   

Amortization of stock options and employee stock purchase plan

    —       —          6,079        —          —          —          6,079   

Westfield re-equitization awards

    —       —          62,500        —          —          —          62,500   

Stock options exercised

    261     —          1,191        —          —          —          1,452   

Other equity adjustments

    —       —          391        (1,134     —          3,500        2,757   
                                                     

Balance at December 31, 2008

    63,874     178,345        654,903        (263,417     11,471        3,500        648,676   

Comprehensive Income:

             

Net income attributable to the Company

    —       —          —          5,231        —          —          5,231   

Other comprehensive income/ (loss), net:

             

Change in unrealized loss on securities available for sale, net

    —       —          —          —          (1,785     —          (1,785

Change in unrealized loss on cash flow hedge, net

    —       —          —          —          (1,283     —          (1,283

Change in unrealized loss on other, net

    —       —          —          —          (831     —          (831
                   

Total comprehensive income attributable to the Company, net

                1,332   

Dividends paid to common shareholders: $0.04 per share

    —       —          (2,688     —          —          —          (2,688

Dividends paid to preferred shareholders

    —       —          (7,862     —          —          —          (7,862

Net proceeds from issuance of: 4,015,744 shares of common stock

    4,016     —          7,378        —          —          —          11,394   

Accretion of Beneficial Conversion Feature on Series B Preferred stock

    —       24,428        (24,428     —          —          —          —     

Accretion of discount on Series C Preferred stock

    —       1,438        (1,438     —          —          —          —     

Issuance of 697,327 shares through incentive stock grants

    697     —          (697     —          —          —          —     

Amortization of incentive stock grants

    —       —          3,273        —          —          —          3,273   

Amortization of stock options and employee stock purchase plan

    —       —          3,670        —          —          —          3,670   

Stock options exercised

    79     —          262        —          —          —          341   

Other equity adjustments

    —       (110     (3,372     —          —          (3,500     (6,982
                                                     

Balance at December 31, 2009

  $ 68,666   $ 204,101      $ 629,001      $ (258,186   $ 7,572      $ —        $ 651,154   
                                                     

 

See accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements.

 

74


Table of Contents

BOSTON PRIVATE FINANCIAL HOLDINGS, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF CASH FLOWS

 

     Year Ended December 31,  
     2009     2008     2007  
     (In thousands)  

Cash flows from operating activities:

      

Net income/(loss) attributable to the Company

   $ 5,231      $ (388,752   $ 4,170   

Adjustments to arrive at net income/(loss) from continuing operations

      

Net income attributable to noncontrolling interests

     3,649        4,327        3,987   

Net pretax (gain)/loss from operating activities of discontinued operations

     (1,574     189,541        (19,067

Net pretax gain on sale of discontinued operations

     (3,082     —          —     

Tax expense from discontinued operations

     12,161        1,668        20,591   
                        

Net income/(loss) from continuing operations

     16,385        (193,216     9,681   
                        

Adjustments to reconcile net income/(loss) from continuing operations to net cash provided by/(used in) operating activities:

      

Depreciation and amortization

     17,904        10,288        9,560   

Net income attributable to noncontrolling interests

     (3,649     (4,327     (3,987

Equity issued as compensation

     6,943        9,395        9,986   

Reclassification of increase in fair value of warrants

     —          2,233        —     

Impairment of goodwill and intangibles

     1,699        133,202        31,780   

Provision for loan losses

     44,959        196,643        23,449   

Loans originated for sale

     (288,880     (118,903     (135,856

Proceeds from sale of loans held for sale

     290,903        104,176        134,116   

Gain on the repurchase of debt

     (18,739     (22,513     —     

Decrease/(increase) in income tax receivable and deferred

     60,159        (73,425     (21,006

Net decrease/(increase) in other operating activities

     6,077        (1,415     (7,171
                        

Net cash provided by operating activities of continuing operations

     133,761        42,138        50,552   

Net cash provided by/(used in) operating activities of discontinued operations

     111,507        (121,877     58,523   
                        

Net cash provided by/(used in) operating activities

     245,268        (79,739     109,075   
                        

Cash flows from investing activities:

      

Investment securities available for sale:

      

Purchases

     (741,073     (3,182,664     (1,453,817

Sales

     304,822        106,112        95   

Maturities, redemptions, and principal payments

     345,766        2,917,449        1,385,979   

Investment securities held to maturity:

      

Purchases

     (8,027     (11,533     (1,997

Maturities and principal payments

     8,026        9,533        1,500   

(Investments)/distributions in trusts, net

     (1,092     995        (1,057

Purchase of Federal Home Loan Banks stock

     —          (17,141     (2,154

Net increase in portfolio loans

     (240,165     (410,303     (666,300

Proceeds from sale of OREO

     24,979        1,013        1,530   

Proceeds from sale and repayments of non-strategic loan portfolio, net of advances

     21,367        58,357        —     

Capital expenditures, net of sale proceeds

     (5,587     (5,106     (9,048

Cash paid for acquisitions, including deferred acquisition obligations, net of cash acquired

     (2,744     (4,017     (31,582

Cash received from sale of discontinued operations, net of cash divested

     79,103        —          —     
                        

Net cash used in investing activities—continuing operations

     (214,625     (537,305     (776,851

Net cash provided by/(used in) investing activities—discontinued operations

     39,626        2,219        (139,720
                        

Net cash used in investing activities

     (174,999     (535,086     (916,571
                        

(continued)

 

75


Table of Contents

BOSTON PRIVATE FINANCIAL HOLDINGS, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF CASH FLOWS—(Continued)

 

     Year Ended December 31,  
     2009     2008     2007  
     (In thousands)  

Cash flows from financing activities:

      

Net increase in deposits

     506,307        198,413        184,134   

Net (decrease)/increase in securities sold under agreements to repurchase and other

     (50,464     25,501        172,150   

Net (decrease)/increase in federal funds purchased

     —          (6,000     6,000   

Net (decrease)/increase in short-term Federal Home Loan Bank borrowings

     (134,300     109,300        25,000   

Advances of long-term Federal Home Loan Bank borrowings

     30,777        223,527        140,965   

Repayments of long-term Federal Home Loan Bank borrowings

     (86,937     (61,327     (101,863

Proceeds from issuance of Notes, net of discount

     —          —          284,625   

Repurchase of debt

     (76,939     (210,941     —     

Share buyback

     —          —          (40,043

Dividends paid to common shareholders

     (2,688     (8,815     (13,361

Dividends paid to preferred shareholders

     (7,862     (851     —     

Excess tax benefit from stock options exercised

     —          —          789   

Proceeds from issuance of preferred stock, net

     —          193,580        —     

Proceeds from issuance of warrants, net

     —          28,418        —     

Proceeds from stock option exercises

     341        1,452        4,600   

Proceeds from issuance of common stock, net

     769        106,431        2,557   

Other equity adjustments

     (6,982     2,757        (2,343
                        

Net cash provided by financing activities—continuing operations

     172,022        601,445        663,210   

Net cash (used in)/provided by financing activities—discontinued operations

     (76,106     139,199        95,515   
                        

Net cash provided by financing activities

     95,916        740,644        758,725   
                        

Net increase/(decrease) in cash and cash equivalents

     166,185        125,819        (48,771

Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year

     281,275        155,456        204,227   
                        

Cash and cash equivalents at end of year

   $ 447,460      $ 281,275      $ 155,456   
                        

Supplementary schedule of non-cash investing and financing activities:

      

Cash paid for interest

   $ 102,126      $ 132,661      $ 135,316   

Cash paid for income taxes, net of (refunds received)

     (76,089     27,633        36,779   

Change in unrealized (loss)/gain on securities available for sale, net of tax

     (1,785     6,131        4,401   

Change in unrealized (loss)/gain on cash flow hedge, net of tax

     (1,283     2,453        778   

Change in unrealized (loss)/gain on other, net of tax

     (831     (214     213   

Non-cash transactions:

      

Loans transferred into other real estate owned from held for sale or portfolio

     28,418        13,365        2,275   

Loans transferred into/(out of) held for sale from/(to) portfolio

     (1,744     93,635        —     

Equity issued for acquisitions, including deferred acquisition obligations

     10,625        12,586        52,210   

 

See accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements.

 

76


Table of Contents

BOSTON PRIVATE FINANCIAL HOLDINGS, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

1. BASIS OF PRESENTATION AND SUMMARY OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES

Boston Private Financial Holdings, Inc. (the “Company” or “BPFH”), is a holding company with three reportable segments, Private Banking, Investment Management, and Wealth Advisory. The Private Banking segment has four consolidated affiliate partners, including Boston Private Bank & Trust Company (“Boston Private Bank”), Borel Private Bank & Trust Company (“Borel”), First Private Bank & Trust (“FPB”), and Charter Bank (“Charter”) (together, the “Banks”). The Investment Management segment has two consolidated affiliate partners, including Dalton, Greiner, Hartman, Maher & Co., LLC (“DGHM”), and Anchor Capital Holdings, LLC (“Anchor”) (together, the “Investment Managers”). The Wealth Advisory segment has three consolidated affiliate partners, including KLS Professional Advisors Group, LLC (“KLS”), Bingham, Osborn & Scarborough, LLC (“BOS”), and Davidson Trust Company (“DTC”) (together, the “Wealth Advisors”). In addition, the Company holds an equity interest in Coldstream Holdings, Inc. (“Coldstream Holdings”) of approximately 45%.

Basis of Presentation

The consolidated financial statements of the Company include the accounts of the Company and its wholly-owned and majority-owned subsidiaries. All significant intercompany accounts and transactions have been eliminated in consolidation, and the portion of income allocated to owners other than the Company is included in “Income attributable to noncontrolling interests” in the consolidated statements of operations. “Redeemable noncontrolling interests” in the consolidated balance sheets reflects the maximum fair value of agreements with other owners. All accounts related to divested affiliates are included within the results of discontinued operations for all periods presented.

The Company applies the equity method of accounting to investments that the Company or its subsidiaries do not hold a majority interest in. The Company includes its proportionate share of earnings of equity method investments within “Other income” on the consolidated statements of operations. Equity method investments, which include the minority interests in Coldstream Holdings, affordable housing partnerships, and other partnership holdings, were $8.9 million at December 31, 2009 and 2008, and included in “Other assets” on the consolidated balance sheets. BOS was included in equity method investments at December 31, 2006, and until it was consolidated in the 3rd quarter of 2007 after BPFH’s ownership increased to 60.9%.

The financial statements are prepared in accordance with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States (“U.S.”) (“GAAP”). Reclassifications of amounts in prior year consolidated financial statements are made whenever necessary to conform to the current year’s presentation.

Use of Estimates

In preparing the consolidated financial statements, management is required to make estimates and assumptions that affect the reported amounts of assets and liabilities as of the date of the balance sheet and revenues and expenses for the period. Actual results could differ from those estimates. Material estimates that are particularly susceptible to change, in the near term, relate to the determination of the allowance for loan losses, evaluation of potential impairment of goodwill and other intangibles, and income taxes. The current economic environment has increased the degree of uncertainty inherent in those estimates and assumptions.

Investment Management and Wealth Advisory Fees

The Company generates fee income from providing investment management and trust services to its clients at the Banks and from providing investment management and wealth advisory services through the Investment Managers and the Wealth Advisors. These fees are generally based upon the value of assets under management

 

77


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

 

and are billed monthly, quarterly, or annually. Asset-based advisory fees are recognized as services are rendered and are based upon a percentage of the market value of client assets managed. Certain wealth advisory fees are not asset-based and are negotiated individually with clients. Any fees collected in advance are deferred and recognized as income over the period earned. Performance-based advisory fees are generally assessed as a percentage of the investment performance realized on a client’s account, generally over an annual period, and are not recognized until any contingencies in the contract that could require the performance fee to be reduced have been eliminated.

Assets under management and advisory (“AUM”) at the Company’s consolidated affiliates totaled $17.7 billion and $15.9 billion at December 31, 2009 and 2008 respectively. These assets are not included in the consolidated financial statements since they are held in a fiduciary or agency capacity and are not assets of the Company.

Significant Group Concentrations of Credit Risk

Most of the Company’s activities are with customers within the New England, Northern and Southern California, and Pacific Northwest regions of the country. The Company does not believe it has any significant concentrations in any one industry, geographic location, or with any one customer. Part II. Item 8. “Financial Statements and Supplementary Data—Note 5: Investment Securities”, highlights the types of securities in which the Company invests, and Part II. Item 8. “Financial Statements and Supplementary Data—Note 6: Loans Receivable”, describes the concentration of the Private Banking loan data based on the location of the lender.

The current economic environment has increased the degree of uncertainty inherent in the value of the collateral for construction and land loans. These loans are considered to be more risky due to the nature of the collateral. The Banks have approximately $315.7 million of construction and land loans at December 31, 2009, which represents 7% of total loans outstanding. Also, the majority of the Banks commercial loans are secured by real estate.

Statement of Cash Flows

For purposes of reporting cash flows, the Company considers cash and due from banks and federal funds sold, all of which have original maturities with 90 days or less, to be cash equivalents.

Cash and Due from Banks

Each Bank is required to maintain average reserve balances in an account with the Federal Reserve Bank based upon a percentage of certain deposits. As of December 31, 2009, the daily amount required to be held in the aggregate for banking affiliates was $16.3 million.

Investment Securities

Investments available for sale are reported at fair value, with unrealized gains and losses credited or charged, net of the estimated tax effect, to accumulated other comprehensive income/(loss). Investments held to maturity are those which the Company has the positive intent and ability to hold to maturity and are reported at amortized cost.

Investments available for sale are carried at estimated fair value. Effective January 1, 2008, the Company adopted the provisions of the Financial Accounting Standards Board (“FASB”) Accounting Standards Codification (“ASC”) 820, Fair Value Measurements and Disclosures (formerly FAS 157, Fair Value Measurements ) (“ASC 820”) a standard issued by the FASB concerning fair value measurements and disclosures

 

78


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

 

with respect to: (i) all financial instruments; and (ii) non-financial instruments accounted for at fair value on a recurring basis, if any. The standard specifies a hierarchy of valuation techniques based on whether the inputs to those techniques are observable or unobservable. Observable inputs reflect market data obtained from independent sources, while unobservable inputs reflect the Company’s market assumptions from a market participant’s perspective.

Premiums and discounts on the investment securities are amortized or accreted into net interest income by the level-yield method. Actual prepayment experience is reviewed periodically and the timing of the accretion and amortization is adjusted accordingly. Gains and losses on the sale of the investments available for sale are recognized at the time of sale on a specific identification basis. Dividend and interest income is recognized when earned.

Net interest income is recorded on the accrual basis adjusted for amortization of premium and accretion of discount.

The Company conducts a periodic review and evaluation of its investment securities to determine if the decline in fair value of any security is deemed to be other-than-temporary. Other-than-temporary impairment losses are recognized on securities when: (i) the holder has an intention to sell the security; (ii) it is more likely than not that the security will be required to be sold prior to recovery; or (iii) the holder does not expect to recover the entire amortized cost basis of the security. Other-than-temporary losses are reflected in earnings as a charge against gain on sale of investments to the extent the impairment is related to credit losses. The amount of the impairment related to other factors is recognized in other comprehensive income. The Company has no intention to sell any securities in an unrealized loss position at December 31, 2009 nor is it more likely than not that the Company would be required to sell such securities prior to the recovery of the unrealized losses. As of December 31, 2009, the Company believes that all impairments of investment securities are temporary in nature. No other-than-temporary impairment losses were recognized in the consolidated statements of operations for the years ended December 31, 2009, 2008 and 2007.

Loans Held for Sale

Loans originated and held for sale in the secondary market are carried at the lower of cost or estimated fair value in the aggregate. Fair value is based on commitments on hand from investors or prevailing market prices. Net unrealized losses, if any, are recognized through a valuation allowance by charges to income. Loans transferred to the held for sale category are carried at the lower of cost or fair value as determined at the individual loan level.

Loans

Loans are carried at the principal amount outstanding, net of deferred loan origination fees and costs, or for purchased loans, net of premium or discount. Loan origination fees, net of related direct incremental loan origination costs and premium or discount on purchased loans, are deferred and recognized into income over the contractual lives of the related loans as an adjustment to the loan yield, using the level-yield method. When a loan is paid-off or sold, the unamortized portion of net fees/cost is recognized into interest income.

Impaired loans are usually commercial loans for which it is probable that the Company will not collect all amounts due according to the contractual terms of the loan agreement, and all loans restructured in a troubled debt restructuring. The measurement of the amount of impairment is determined based upon the present value of the expected future cash flows discounted at the loan’s effective interest rate, except that as a practical expedient, impairment may be determined based upon the observable market price for the loan, or based on the fair value of the collateral if the loan is collateral dependent. Regardless of the measurement method, impairment is measured

 

79


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

 

based on the fair value of the collateral if it is determined that foreclosure is probable. Accrual of interest income is discontinued and all interest previously accrued but not collected is reversed against current period interest income when a loan is initially classified as non-accrual. Interest received on non-accrual loans is either applied against principal or reported as interest income according to management’s judgment as to the collectability of principal.

Reserve for Unfunded Loan Commitments

The Company maintains a reserve for unfunded commitments at a level management believes sufficient to absorb estimated probable losses related to unfunded credit facilities. This reserve is included in Other liabilities in the consolidated balance sheets. Net adjustments to the reserve for unfunded commitments are included in Other operating expense in the consolidated statements of operations.

Restructured Loans

When the Banks, for economic or legal reasons related to a borrower’s financial difficulties, grant a concession to a borrower that it would not otherwise consider, the loan is classified as a restructured loan pursuant to ASC 470, Debt (formerly FAS 15, Accounting by Debtors and Creditors for Troubled Debt Restructurings ). The concession either stems from an agreement between the creditor and the bank or is imposed by law or a court. The concessions may include:

 

   

Reduction of the stated interest rate

 

   

Lower interest rate as compared to a new loan with comparable risk and terms

 

   

Extension of the maturity date

 

   

Reduction in the principal balance owed

 

   

Reduction of accrued interest

All loans whose terms have been modified in a troubled debt restructuring, including both commercial and residential, are evaluated for impairment under ASC 310, Receivables (formerly FAS 114, Accounting by Creditors for Impairment of a Loan ) (“ASC 310”).

Generally, a nonaccrual loan that is restructured remains on nonaccrual for a period of at least six months to demonstrate that the borrower can meet the restructured terms. However, performance prior to the restructuring, or significant events that coincide with the restructuring, are considered when assessing whether the borrower can meet the new terms and may result in the loan being returned to accrual at the time of the restructuring or after a shorter performance period. If the borrower’s ability to meet the revised payment schedule is uncertain, the loan remains classified as a nonaccrual loan.

A loan may be removed from a restructured classification when the loan terms are returned to comparable terms for loans with similar credit risks and after the next calendar year end.

Allowance for Loan and Lease Losses

The allowance for loan losses is an estimate of the inherent risk of loss in the loan portfolio as of the consolidated balance sheet date. Management estimates the level of the allowance for loan losses based on all relevant information available. The allowance for loan losses is established through the provision for loan losses, which is a direct charge to earnings. Loan losses are charged to the allowance when management believes that the collectability of the loan principal is unlikely. Recoveries on loans previously charged off are credited to the allowance when received in cash.

 

80


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

 

The Company’s allowance is accounted for in accordance with guidance issued by various regulatory agencies, including: the Federal Financial Institutions Examination Council Policy Statement on the Allowance for Loan and Lease Losses (December 2006); Securities and Exchange Commission (“SEC”) Staff Accounting Bulletin No. 102, Selected Loan Loss Methodology and Documentation Issues ; ASC 310; and ASC 450, Contingencies (Formerly FAS 5, Accounting for Contingencies ).

The allowance consists of three primary components: General Reserves on pass graded loans (loans that pose a normal credit risk) (ASC 450), Allocated Reserves on non-impaired Special Mention and Sub Standard Loans (ASC 450), and the Allocated Reserves on Impaired Loans (ASC 310). The allowance involves a high degree of management judgment and estimates, and results in an acceptable allowance which is reflective of the inherent risk of loss in the loan portfolio at the measurement date.

General Reserves are calculated for each loan pool consisting of pass graded loans segregated by loan type, by applying estimated net loss percentages based upon the Bank’s actual historical net charge-offs and, adjusted as appropriate, on a consistent manner based upon consideration of qualitative factors to arrive at a total loss factor for each loan type. The rationale for qualitative adjustments is to more accurately reflect the current inherent risk of loss in the respective loan types then would be determined through the sole consideration of the Bank’s actual historical net charge-off rates. The numerical factors assigned are based upon observable data, if applicable, as well as management’s analysis and judgment. The qualitative factors considered by the Company include:

 

   

Volume and severity of past due, non-accrual, and adversely graded loans,

 

   

Volume and terms of loans,

 

   

Concentrations of Credit,

 

   

Management’s experience, as well as loan underwriting and loan review policy and procedures, and

 

   

Economic and business conditions impacting the Bank’s loan portfolio’s, including consideration of collateral values and external factors

Each one of the Banks makes an independent determination of the applicable loss rate for these factors based on their relevant local market conditions, credit quality, and portfolio mix. Each quarter, all of the Banks review the loss factors to determine if there have been any changes in their respective loan portfolios, market conditions, or other risk indicators which would result in a change to the current loss factor.

Allocated Reserves on non-impaired special mention and substandard loans reflect management’s assessment of increased risk of losses associated with adversely graded loans. An allocated reserve is assigned to these pools of loans based upon management’s consideration of the credit attributes of individual loans within each pool of loans, including consideration, of loan to value ratios, past due status, strength and willingness of the guarantors, and other relevant attributes, including the quantitative factors considered for the general reserve as discussed above. These considerations are determined separately for each type of loan. The allocated reserves are a multiple of the general reserve for each respective loan types, with a greater multiple for loans with increased risk (i.e., special-mention loans versus substandard loans).

A loan (usually a larger commercial type loan) is considered impaired in accordance with ASC 310 when, based upon current information and events, it is probable that a creditor will be unable to collect all amounts due according to the contractual terms of the loan agreement. Impairment is measured based on the fair value of the loan, expected future cash flows discounted at the loan’s effective interest rate, or as a practical expedient, the fair value of the collateral if the loan is “collateral dependent.” For collateral dependent loans, appraisals or broker opinions are generally used to determine the fair value. Appraised values may be discounted if conditions

 

81


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

 

warrant, such as the date when the appraisal was performed if collateral values have declined since the date the appraisal was done. All expected costs to liquidate the collateral are considered when determining the net realizable value. If the loan is deemed to be collateral dependent, generally the difference between the book balance (customer balance less any prior charge-offs or customer interest payments applied to principal) and the net realizable value is taken as a partial charge-off through the allowance for loan losses in the current period. If the loan is not determined to be collateral dependent, then a specific allocation is established for the difference between the book balance of the loan and the expected future cash flows discounted at the loan’s effective interest rate. Charge-offs for loans not considered to be collateral dependant are made when appropriate. Impaired Loans are removed from the general loan pools. There may be instances where the loan is considered impaired although based on the net realizable value of underlying collateral or the discounted expected future cash flows there is no impairment. In addition, all loans which are classified as troubled debt restructurings (“TDRs”) are considered impaired.

In addition to the three primary components of the allowance for loan losses discussed above (General Reserve, Allocated Reserves on non-impaired special-mention and substandard loans, and the Allocated Reserves on impaired loans), generally the Company’s affiliate Banks also maintain an insignificant amount of additional allowance for loan losses (the unallocated allowance for loan losses) which primarily relates to a general assessment of the potential variability of applicable qualitative factors subject to a higher degree of variability. The respective qualitative factors, as discussed above, are considered for each respective loan type. Only the assessment of the potential variability of applicable qualitative factors is included in the unallocated allowance for loan losses. The unallocated allowance for loan losses is not considered significant by the Company.

While this evaluation process utilizes historical and other objective information, the classification of loans and the establishment of the allowance for loan losses rely to a great extent on the judgment and experience of management. While management evaluates currently available information in establishing the allowance for loan losses, future adjustments to the allowance may be necessary if economic conditions differ substantially from the assumptions used in making the evaluations. In addition, various regulatory agencies, as an integral part of their examination process, periodically review a financial institution’s allowance for loan losses as well as loan grades/classifications. Such agencies may require the financial institution to recognize additions to the allowance or increases to adversely graded classified loans based on their judgments about information available to them at the time of their examination.

Premises and Equipment

Premises and equipment consists of leasehold improvements, equipment, buildings and land. Equipment consists primarily of computer equipment, art, and furniture and fixtures. Premises and equipment are carried at cost, less accumulated depreciation and amortization. Depreciation and amortization are computed primarily by the straight-line method over the estimated useful lives of the assets, or the terms of the leases, if shorter, for leasehold improvements. The estimated useful lives for leasehold improvements and buildings are 5-15 years and 40 years, respectively. The estimated useful life for furniture and fixtures is 2-10 years and is 3-5 years for computer equipment. The costs of improvements that extend the life of an asset are capitalized, while the cost of repairs and maintenance are expensed as incurred. Neither land nor art are depreciated.

Goodwill and Other Intangible Assets

The Company allocates the cost of an acquired entity to the assets acquired and liabilities assumed based on their estimated fair values at the date of acquisition. Other intangible assets identified in acquisitions generally consist of advisory contracts, core deposit intangibles, and non-compete agreements. The value attributed to advisory contracts is based on the time period over which they are expected to generate economic benefits. The advisory contracts are generally amortized over 8-15 years depending on the contract. Core deposit intangibles

 

82


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

 

are valued based on the expected longevity of the core deposit accounts and the expected cost savings associated with the use of the existing core deposit base rather than alternative funding sources. The core deposit intangibles are generally amortized over a period of 10-12 years. Non-compete agreements are valued based on the expected receipt of future economic benefits protected by clauses in the non-compete agreements that restrict competitive behavior. Non-compete agreements are amortized over the life of the agreement, generally 2-4 years.

Other intangible assets with definite lives are tested for impairment at the reporting unit level at least annually in the fourth quarter or more frequently when events or circumstances occur that indicate that it is more likely than not that an impairment has occurred. The Company tests other intangible assets with definite lives for impairment by comparing the carrying amount to the sum of the net undiscounted cash flows expected to be generated by the asset whenever events or changes in circumstances indicate that the carrying amount of the asset may not be recoverable. If the carrying amount of the asset exceeds its net undiscounted cash flows, then an impairment loss is recognized for the amount by which the carrying amount exceeds its fair value. The intangible impairment test is performed at the reporting unit level, and each affiliate is considered a reporting unit for goodwill and intangible impairment testing purposes. Intangible assets with an indefinite useful economic life are not amortized, but are subject to impairment testing at the reporting unit on an annual basis, or when events or changes in circumstances indicate that the carrying amounts may be impaired.

The excess of the purchase price for acquisitions over the fair value of the net assets acquired, including other intangible assets, is recorded as goodwill. Goodwill is not amortized but is tested for impairment at the reporting unit level, defined as the affiliate partner level, at least annually in the fourth quarter or more frequently when events or circumstances occur that indicate that it is more likely than not that an impairment has occurred. Goodwill is tested for impairment using a two-step process that begins with an estimation of the fair value of a reporting unit. Goodwill impairment exists when a reporting unit’s carrying value of goodwill exceeds its implied fair value. Significant judgment is applied when goodwill is assessed for impairment. This judgment includes developing cash flow projections, selecting appropriate discount rates, identifying relevant market comparables, incorporating general economic and market conditions, and selecting an appropriate control premium. The selection and weighting of the various fair value techniques may result in a higher or lower fair value. Judgment is applied in determining the weightings that are most representative of fair value.

The first step (“Step 1”) of impairment testing requires a comparison of each reporting unit’s fair value to carrying value to identify potential impairment. The reporting units fall under one of the three segments: Private Banking, Investment Management, and Wealth Advisory.

For the Private Banking segment, the Company utilizes both the income and market approaches to determine fair value. The income approach is based on discounted cash flows derived from assumptions of balance sheet and income statement activity. For the market approach, earnings and market capitalization multiples of comparable public companies are selected and applied to the banking reporting unit’s applicable metrics.

For the Investment Management and Wealth Advisory segments, the Company utilizes both the income and market approaches to determine fair value. The income approach is primarily based on discounted cash flows derived from assumptions of income statement activity. For the market approach, earnings and tangible book value multiples of comparable companies are selected and applied to the financial services reporting unit’s applicable metrics.

The aggregate fair values are compared to market capitalization as an assessment of the appropriateness of the fair value measurements. A control premium analysis is performed to determine whether the implied control premium was within range of overall control premiums observed in the market place.

 

83


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

 

The second step (“Step 2”) of impairment testing is necessary only if a reporting unit’s carrying amount exceeds its fair value. Step 2 compares the implied fair value of the reporting unit goodwill with the carrying amount of the goodwill for the reporting unit. The implied fair value of goodwill is determined in the same manner as goodwill that is recognized in a business combination. Significant judgment and estimates are involved in estimating the fair value of the assets and liabilities of the reporting unit. The excess goodwill is recognized as an impairment loss.

Debt Issuance Costs

Debt issuance costs related to the issuance of long-term debt are recorded as an asset. The costs associated with the debt are amortized using the effective yield method over the life of the securities. The Company had approximately $2.1 million and $3.8 million in debt issuance costs at December 31, 2009 and 2008, respectively.

Stock-Based Incentive Plans

At December 31, 2009, the Company has three stock-based incentive compensation plans. These plans encourage and enable the officers, employees, non-employee directors, and other key persons of the Company to acquire an interest in the Company. Under ASC 718, Compensation—Stock Compensation (formerly FAS 123R, Share-Based Payment, Revised 2004 ) (“ASC 718”) the Company applies the fair value recognition provisions using the modified retrospective application method. See Part II. Item 8. “Financial Statements and Supplementary Data—Note 18: Employee Benefits” for more information on stock based compensation.

Derivative Instruments and Hedging Activities

The Company records all derivatives on the balance sheet at fair value. The accounting for changes in the fair value of derivatives depends on the intended use of the derivative and the resulting designation. Derivatives used to hedge exposure to changes in the fair value of an asset, liability, or firm commitment attributable to a particular risk, such as interest rate risk, are considered fair value hedges. Derivatives used to hedge exposure to variability in expected future cash flows, or other types of forecasted transactions, are considered cash flow hedges.

For derivatives designated as cash flow hedges, the effective portion of changes in the fair value of the derivative is initially reported in other comprehensive income/ (loss) (a component of stockholders’ equity), net of tax, and subsequently reclassified to earnings when the hedged transaction affects earnings, and the ineffective portion of changes in the fair value of the derivative is recognized directly in earnings. The Company assesses the effectiveness of each hedging relationship by comparing the changes in cash flows of the derivative hedging instrument with the changes in cash flows of the designated hedged transactions.

For derivatives designated as fair value hedges, changes in the fair value of the derivative are recognized in earnings together with the changes in the fair value of the related hedged item. The net amount, if any, representing hedge ineffectiveness, is reflected in earnings.

Income Taxes

The Company recognizes income taxes under the asset and liability method. Under this method, deferred tax assets and liabilities are established for the future tax consequences attributable to temporary differences between the financial statement carrying amounts of existing assets and liabilities and their respective tax basis and operating loss and tax credit carry forwards. Deferred tax assets and liabilities are measured using enacted tax rates expected to apply to taxable income in the years in which those temporary differences are expected to be recovered or settled.

 

84


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

 

The deferred tax assets and/or liabilities are determined by multiplying the differences between the financial reporting and tax reporting basis for assets and liabilities by the enacted tax rates expected to be in effect when such differences are recovered or settled. The effect on deferred taxes for a change in tax rates is recognized in income in the period that includes the enactment date. Valuation allowances on deferred tax assets are estimated based on the Company’s assessment of the realizability of such amounts. Significant management judgment is required in determining the provision for income taxes and, in particular, any valuation allowance recorded against the Company’s deferred tax assets.

The Company records low-income housing and rehabilitation investment tax credits using the equity method. The equity method recognizes tax credits in the same year they are allowed for tax reporting purposes.

Earnings Per Share (“EPS”)

Basic EPS is computed by dividing net (loss)/ income attributable to common shareholders by the weighted average number of common shares outstanding during the year. Diluted EPS is determined in the same manner as basic EPS except that the number of shares is increased assuming exercise or contingent issuance of the options, warrants or other dilutive securities; and conversion of the convertible trust preferred securities and Series B Non-Cumulative Perpetual Contingent Convertible Preferred Stock (“Series B Preferred”). Additionally, interest expense (net of tax) related to the convertible trust preferred securities, warrant expense, and dividends and accretion related to the preferred stock are added back to net income attributable to common shareholders. The calculation of diluted EPS excludes the potential dilution of common shares and the inclusion of any related expenses if the effect is antidilutive.

 

85


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

 

The following table is a reconciliation of the components of basic and diluted EPS computations for the three years ended December 31:

 

    2009     2008     2007  
  (In thousands, except share and per share data)  

Net income/(loss) from continuing operations

  $ 16,385      $ (193,216   $ 9,681   

Less: Net income attributable to noncontrolling interests

    3,649        4,327        3,987   
                       

Net income/(loss) from continuing operations attributable to the Company

    12,736        (197,543     5,694   
                       

Increase in noncontrolling interests redemption values(1)

    (6,503     —          —     

Accretion of Beneficial Conversion Feature on Series A and B Preferred stock(2)

    (24,428     (32,053     —     

Accretion of discount on Series C Preferred stock(3)

    (1,438     (125     —     

Dividends on preferred securities

    (7,862     (851     —     
                       

Total adjustments to income attributable to common shareholders

    (40,231     (33,029     —     
                       

(Loss)/income from continuing operations attributable to common shareholders

    (27,495     (230,572     5,694   

Net loss from discontinued operations

    (7,505     (191,209     (1,524
                       

Net (loss)/income attributable to common shareholders

  $ (35,000   $ (421,781   $ 4,170   
                       

Weighted average basic common shares outstanding

    66,696,977        47,528,418        36,731,621   

Dilutive effect of:

     

Stock options, stock grants and other

    —          —          1,583,709   
                       

Total dilutive potential common shares

    —          —          1,583,709   
                       

Weighted average diluted common shares outstanding(4)

    66,696,977        47,528,418        38,315,330   
                       

Per share data:

     

Basic and diluted

     

(Loss)/earnings from continuing operations

  $ (0.41   $ (4.85   $ 0.15   

Loss from discontinued operations

    (0.11     (4.02   $ (0.04
                       

Net (loss)/earnings attributable to common shareholders

  $ (0.52   $ (8.87   $ 0.11   
                       

 

(1) See Part II. Item 8. “Financial Statements and Supplementary Data—Note 15: Noncontrolling Interests” for a description of the redemption values related to the redeemable noncontrolling interests. In accordance with ASC 480, Distinguishing Liabilities from Equity (“ASC 480”), an increase in redemption value from period to period reduces income attributable to common shareholders.
(2) See Part II. Item 8. “Financial Statements and Supplementary Data—Note 16: Equity” for description of the preferred securities issued during 2008 that gave rise to the beneficial conversion feature. The beneficial conversion feature is accounted for as a preferred stock dividend and reduces income attributable to common shareholders. The beneficial conversion feature on the Series A Preferred was fully accreted as of September 30, 2008. The beneficial conversion feature on the Series B Preferred was fully accreted as of December 31, 2009.
(3) See Part II. Item 8. “Financial Statements and Supplementary Data—Note 16: Equity” for a description of the Series C Preferred securities issued during 2008 that gave rise to the accretion of the discount at issuance. The accretion of the discount is accounted for as a preferred stock dividend and reduces income attributable to common shareholders.

 

86


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

 

(4) As a result of the anti-dilution, the potential common shares excluded from the diluted EPS computation for the three years ended December 31 are as follows:

 

     2009    2008    2007
   (In thousands)

Potential common shares from:

        

Convertible trust preferred securities

   3,086    3,208    3,184

Exercise or contingent issuance of options or other dilutive securities

   888    1,262    —  

Conversion of the Series A and B Preferred stock

   7,261    4,178    —  

Effect of dilutive warrants

   —      369    —  
              

Total

   11,235    9,017    3,184
              

In addition, if the effect of the conversion of the convertible trust preferred securities would have been dilutive, interest expense, net of tax, related to the convertible trust preferred securities of $2.8 million, $3.0 million and $3.0 million for the years ended December 31, 2009, 2008 and 2007, respectively, would have been added back to net (loss)/ income attributable to common shareholders for diluted EPS computations for the periods presented.

Also, options to purchase approximately 5.3 million shares and 5.4 million shares of common stock were outstanding at December 31, 2009 and December 31, 2008, respectively, but were not included in the computation of diluted EPS or in the above anti-dilution table because the options’ exercise prices were greater than the average market price of the common shares during the year.

Furthermore, warrants to purchase approximately 8.3 million shares of common stock were outstanding at December 31, 2009 and 2008, but were not included in the computation of diluted EPS because the warrants’ exercise prices were greater than the average market price of the common shares during the year.

Recent Accounting Pronouncements

Effective July 1, 2009, the FASB’s ASC became the single official source of authoritative, nongovernmental GAAP. The historical GAAP hierarchy was eliminated and the ASC became the only level of authoritative GAAP, other than guidance issued by the SEC. The Company’s accounting policies were not affected by the conversion to ASC. However, references to specific accounting standards in the footnotes to the Company’s consolidated financial statements have been changed to refer to the appropriate section of ASC.

Effective January 1, 2009, the Company adopted ASC 805, Business Combinations (formerly FAS Statement 141(R), Business Combinations ), which provides guidance in accounting for business combinations for which the acquisition date is on or after that date. The Statement had no impact on the Company’s financial position or results of operations during 2009. However, the Company’s accounting for future acquisitions, if any, will be significantly impacted by this standard.

Effective January 1, 2009, the Company adopted updates to ASC 260, Earnings Per Share , (formerly FASB Staff Position No. Emerging Issues Task Force 03-6-1, Determining Whether Instruments Granted in Share-Based Payment Transactions Are Participating Securities ) (“ASC 260 updates”), which required unvested share-based payments that contain nonforfeitable rights and dividends or dividend equivalents to be treated as participating securities and be included in the calculation of EPS pursuant to the two-class method. The January 1, 2009 adoption of these ASC 260 updates did not have a material impact on the Corporation’s financial position or results of operations.

In April 2009, the FASB issued updates to ASC 320, Investments—Debt and Equity Securities (formerly FASB Staff Position FAS 115-2 and FAS 124-2, Recognition and Presentation of Other-Than-Temporary

 

87


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

 

Impairments ) “ASC 320 updates” to address concerns about evaluating and recognizing other-than-temporary impairments of investments in debt securities. The ASC 320 updates establish a new method of recognizing and reporting other-than-temporary impairments of debt securities. The ASC 320 updates also contain additional disclosure requirements. It was effective for interim and annual periods ending after June 15, 2009, and had no material impact on the Company’s financial position or results of operations for 2009.

In June 2009, the FASB issued updates to ASC 860, Transfers and Servicing (formerly FAS 166, Accounting for Transfers of Financial Assets ) (“ASC 860 updates”). Among other things, the ASC 860 updates amend ASC 860 (formerly FAS 140, Accounting for Transfers and Servicing of Financial Assets and Extinguishments of Liabilities a replacement of FAS 125 ) to remove the concept of a qualifying special purpose entity (“QSPE”) from the prior statement and removes the exception from applying FASB Interpretation No. 46, Consolidation of Variable Interest Entities , to QSPEs. Effective as of January 1, 2010, the ASC 860 updates will not have a material impact on the Company’s financial position or results of operations.

In June 2009, the FASB issued ASC 810, updates to Consolidation , (formerly FAS 167, Amendments to FASB Interpretation No. 46(R), Consolidation of Variable Interest Entities ) (“ASC 810”). These updates require an enterprise to perform an analysis to determine whether the enterprise’s variable interest or interests give it a controlling financial interest in a variable interest entity. It determines whether a reporting entity is required to consolidate another entity based on, among other things, the other entity’s purpose and design and the reporting entity’s ability to direct the activities of the other entity that most significantly impact the other entity’s economic performance. These updates are effective on a prospective basis in fiscal years beginning on or after November 15, 2009, and interim periods within those fiscal years, and will be adopted by the Company in the first quarter of fiscal year 2010. The Company is performing an analysis to determine whether any variable interests give the Company a controlling financial interest in such variable interest entity. The impact of adoption will not be material to the Company’s financial position or results of operations.

2. DIVESTITURES AND ACQUISITIONS

Divestitures

In 2009, the Company divested its interest in Westfield Capital Management Company, LP, formerly known as Westfield Capital Management Company, LLC (“Westfield”), Gibraltar Private Bank & Trust Company (“Gibraltar”), RINET Company, LLC (“RINET”), Sand Hill Advisors, LLC (“Sand Hill”), and in Boston Private Value Investors, Inc. (“BPVI”). Both Westfield and BPVI were previously included in the Investment Management segment, RINET and Sand Hill were previously included in the Wealth Advisory segment and Gibraltar was previously included in the Private Banking segment. As a result of these divestitures, the results of operations and the gain/(loss) on sale related to each are now included in “Net loss from discontinued operations” in the consolidated statements of operations for current and prior years. In addition, the assets and liabilities of the divested companies have been reflected as assets and liabilities of discontinued operations in the accompanying consolidated balance sheets for periods prior to the divestiture. In accordance with ASC 350, Intangibles—Goodwill and Other (“ASC 350”), the goodwill and intangibles, if any, at Westfield, Gibraltar, RINET, Sand Hill, and BPVI were tested for impairment upon divestiture.

On December 14, 2009, the Company divested its interest in Westfield, instead of in 2014 as provided for at the time of the Company’s re-equitization of Westfield on June 30, 2008. Westfield’s expansion of its institutional money management business diverged from the Company’s core strategy of providing wealth management services to high net worth individuals, their families and their businesses. There was no loss upon remeasurement of the investment in Westfield to its fair value. While the Company will continue to have no significant involvement or influence on Westfield, it retains a 12.5% share in Westfield’s revenues (up to an annual maximum of $11.6 million) for eight years, subject to certain conditions. The Company has deferred any gains related to these payments until determinable.

 

88


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

 

On September 17, 2009, the Company divested its interest in Gibraltar. The sale of Gibraltar allowed the Company to exit the South Florida market which continued to experience economic stress with a long-term projected recovery. The Company recorded a $16.3 million pretax intangible impairment charge upon remeasurement of Gibraltar to its fair value. The Company will have no future influence on Gibraltar and does not expect any future operating cash flows from Gibraltar.

On September 16, 2009, the Company divested its interest in RINET. The sale of RINET provided an opportunity for the Company to reallocate resources toward the growth of its other affiliates. There was no loss upon remeasurement of the investment in RINET to its fair value. The Company will have no future influence on RINET and has deferred potential future gains from contingent payments, if any, until determinable.

On June 29, 2009, the Company divested its interest in Sand Hill. As Sand Hill’s business evolved, it created overlap with other affiliates in the Northern California market. There was no loss upon remeasurement of the investment in Sand Hill to its fair value. The Company will have no future influence on Sand Hill and has deferred potential future gains from contingent payments, if any, until determinable.

On April 1, 2009, the Company divested its interest in BPVI. Based on both size and overlap with other affiliates in the New England market, BPVI no longer fit with the Company’s long-term strategy for growth. The Company recorded a $2.1 million pretax intangible impairment charge upon remeasurement of BPVI to its fair value. The Company will have no future influence on BPVI and has deferred potential future gains from contingent payments, if any, until determinable.

The following tables include summary income statement information, reflected as discontinued operations, for the periods presented:

 

     Westfield     Gibraltar     RINET    Sand Hill     BPVI     Total  
   (In thousands)  

2009

             

Revenues(1)

   $ 59,289      $ 38,572      $ 5,471    $ 2,414      $ 909      $ 106,655   
                                               

Pretax income/(loss) from operations

   $ 18,167      $ (16,039   $ 313    $ (735   $ (132   $ 1,574   

Pretax gain/(loss) on sale(2)

     47,967        (44,300     1,909      (172     (2,322     3,082   

Income tax expense/(benefit)

     28,525        (17,469     1,657      (5     (547     12,161   
                                               

Net income/(loss) from discontinued operations

   $ 37,609      $ (42,870   $ 565    $ (902   $ (1,907   $ (7,505
                                               

2008

             

Revenues(1)

   $ 70,520      $ 46,050      $ 9,195    $ 6,358      $ 5,427      $ 137,550   
                                               

Pretax (loss)/ income from operations

   $ (38,671   $ (143,318   $ 1,178    $ (9,779   $ 1,049      $ (189,541

Income tax expense/(benefit)

     11,260        (6,961     495      (3,582     456        1,668   
                                               

Net (loss)/income from discontinued operations

   $ (49,931   $ (136,357   $ 683    $ (6,197   $ 593      $ (191,209
                                               

2007

             

Revenues(1)

   $ 77,028      $ 58,157      $ 9,189    $ 7,341      $ 7,898      $ 159,613   
                                               

Pretax income/(loss) from operations

   $ 32,282      $ (18,089   $ 1,062    $ 1,395      $ 2,417      $ 19,067   

Income tax expense/(benefit)

     14,009        4,552        446      561        1,023        20,591   
                                               

Net income/(loss) from discontinued operations

   $ 18,273      $ (22,641   $ 616    $ 834      $ 1,394      $ (1,524
                                               

 

89


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

 

 

(1) Revenues include net interest income, fees and other income.
(2) Includes pretax intangible and goodwill impairment charges, if any, resulting from the remeasurement of the affiliates’ fair value at the time of divestiture.

Acquisitions

The Company completed one business combination in 2008 and two in 2007. All were accounted for under the purchase method of accounting. The results of operations prior to the date of acquisition are not included in the accompanying consolidated financial statements. Goodwill, investment advisory contracts, non-compete agreements, core deposit intangibles, and other purchase accounting adjustments, if applicable, were recorded upon the completion of each acquisition.

On February 1, 2008, the Company acquired a 70.1% interest in DTC. DTC is a wealth management company chartered as a trust company by the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania and located in the “Main Line” area of Philadelphia. At the closing of the transaction, the Company paid approximately $3.3 million in cash, which represents approximately 50% of the total estimated consideration at closing. The remaining consideration is payable over the next three years contingent upon DTC’s financial performance. These earn-out payments will be paid in 100% cash. Goodwill of approximately $0.5 million, which is expected to be deducted for tax purposes, was recorded as part of the purchase price. The acquisition of DTC provides the Company the opportunity to further expand its business and establishes the Company’s footprint in the growing Philadelphia market. Contingent payments for the DTC transaction are additional costs of the acquisition and will be recorded as goodwill.

On August 1, 2007, BPFH increased its ownership interest in BOS from 49.7% to approximately 60.9%. In conjunction with the transaction, BOS’s financial results beginning August 1, 2007 are included in the Company’s consolidated financial statements. BOS’s operating results for the first seven months of 2007 were accounted for under the equity method of accounting, and are included with other income. The Company increased its ownership in August of 2008 to approximately 70%.

On July 1, 2007, the Company acquired Charter Financial Corporation, the holding company of Charter, a Washington chartered commercial bank, situated in the Puget Sound region. In the transaction, the Company acquired 100% of Charter Financial Corporation’s common stock through the issuance of approximately 1.5 million shares of BPFH common stock valued at $42.5 million and $29.4 million in cash payments to shareholders, including stock options. The purchase price was approximately $77.2 million, which included the trust preferred debt assumed and the Company’s transaction costs.

3. COMPREHENSIVE AND ACCUMULATED OTHER COMPREHENSIVE INCOME/(LOSS)

Comprehensive income/ (loss) represents the change in equity of the Company during a year from transactions and other events and circumstances from non-stockholder sources. It includes all changes in equity during a year except those resulting from investments by stockholders and distributions to stockholders.

 

90


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

 

The Company’s other comprehensive income/(loss) and related tax effect for the years ended December 31, 2009, 2008, and 2007 is as follows:

 

     Other comprehensive income/(loss):  
   Pre-tax     Tax expense/
(benefit)
    Net  
     (In thousands)  

2009

      

Unrealized gain on securities available for sale

   $ 2,802      $ 1,074      $ 1,728   

Less: adjustment for realized gains

     5,803        2,290        3,513   
                        

Net unrealized loss on securities available for sale

     (3,001     (1,216     (1,785
                        

Unrealized loss on cash flow hedge

     (2,614     (929     (1,685

Add: scheduled reclass and other

     674        272        402   
                        

Net unrealized loss on cash flow hedge

     (1,940     (657     (1,283
                        

Unrealized loss on other

     (1,763     (932     (831
                        

Other comprehensive loss

   $ (6,704   $ (2,805   $ (3,899
                        

2008

      

Unrealized gain on securities available for sale

   $ 12,531      $ 4,932      $ 7,599   

Less: Adjustment for realized gains

     2,393        851        1,542   

Adjustment for realized losses of discontinued operations

     (121     (47     (74
                        

Net unrealized loss on securities available for sale

     10,259        4,128        6,131   
                        

Unrealized gain on cash flow hedge

     3,839        1,512        2,327   

Add: scheduled reclass and other

     215        89        126   
                        

Net unrealized gain on cash flow hedge

     4,054        1,601        2,453   
                        

Unrealized loss on other

     (349     (135     (214
                        

Other comprehensive income

   $ 13,964      $ 5,594      $ 8,370   
                        

2007

      

Unrealized gain on securities available for sale

   $ 7,238      $ 2,836      $ 4,402   

Less: adjustment for realized gains

     2        1        1   
                        

Net unrealized loss on securities available for sale

     7,236        2,835        4,401   
                        

Unrealized gain on cash flow hedge

     1,071        398        673   

Add: adjustment for ineffective portion and scheduled reclass

     168        63        105   
                        

Net unrealized gain on cash flow hedge

     1,239        461        778   
                        

Unrealized gain on other

     355        142        213   
                        

Other comprehensive income

   $ 8,830      $ 3,438      $ 5,392   
                        

The following table details the components of the Company’s accumulated other comprehensive income/ (loss) as of December 31:

 

     2009     2008     2007
   (In thousands)

Unrealized gain on securities available for sale, net of tax

   $ 6,854      $ 8,639      $ 2,508

Unrealized gain on cash flow hedge, net of tax

     1,650        2,933        480

Unrealized (loss)/gain on other, net of tax

     (932     (101     113
                      

Accumulated other comprehensive income

   $ 7,572      $ 11,471      $ 3,101
                      

 

91


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

 

4. REPORTABLE SEGMENTS

Management Reporting

The Company has three reportable segments: Private Banking, Investment Management, and Wealth Advisory, and the Parent Company (Boston Private Financial Holdings, Inc.) (“Holding Company”). The financial performance of the Company is managed and evaluated by these three areas. The segments are managed separately as a result of the concentrations in each function.

Description of Reportable Segments

Private Banking

The Private Banking segment has four consolidated affiliate partners, including Boston Private Bank, chartered by The Commonwealth of Massachusetts; Borel and FPB, both California state chartered banks; and Charter, a Washington state chartered bank; all of which are insured by the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation (the “FDIC”). The Banks pursue private banking and community-oriented business strategies in their operating regions. The Banks are principally engaged in providing banking, commercial banking, and a variety of other fiduciary services including investment management, advisory, and administrative services to high net worth individuals, their families, small and medium-sized businesses and professionals. In addition, the Banks offer their clients a broad range of deposit and lending products. The specific mix of products, services and clientele can vary from affiliate to affiliate. The Banks are located in New England, Northern California, Southern California, and the Pacific Northwest.

Investment Management

The Investment Management segment has two consolidated affiliate partners, including DGHM, a registered investment adviser, and Anchor, which is the parent company of Anchor Capital Advisors LLC (“Anchor Capital Advisors”) and Anchor/Russell Capital Advisors LLC (“Anchor Russell”), both of which are registered investment advisers. The Investment Managers serve the needs of pension funds, endowments, trusts, foundations and select institutions, mutual funds and high net worth individuals and their families throughout the U.S. and abroad. The Investment Managers specialize in value-driven equity portfolios with products across the capitalization spectrum. The specific mix of products, services and clientele varies between affiliates. The Investment Managers are located in New England and New York, with one affiliate administrative office in South Florida.

Wealth Advisory

The Wealth Advisory segment has three consolidated affiliate partners, including KLS, BOS, and DTC. KLS and BOS are registered investment advisers, and all three are wealth management firms. The Wealth Advisors provide comprehensive, planning-based financial strategies to high net worth individuals and their families, and non-profit institutions. The firms offer fee-only financial planning, tax planning and preparation, estate and insurance planning, retirement planning, charitable planning and intergenerational giving planning. The Wealth Advisors manage investments covering a wide range of asset classes for both taxable and tax-exempt portfolios. The Wealth Advisors are located in New York, Northern California, and Pennsylvania.

Measurement of Segment Profit and Assets

The accounting policies of the segments are the same as those described in Part II. Item 8. “Financial Statements and Supplementary Data—Note 1: Basis of Presentation and Summary of Significant Accounting Policies”. Revenues, expenses, and assets are recorded by each segment, and separate financial statements are reviewed by their management and the Company’s Segment CEOs.

 

92


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

 

Reconciliation of Reportable Segment Items

The following tables are a reconciliation of revenues, segment profit, assets, and other significant items of reportable segments:

 

    For the year ended December 31,  
    Net interest income     Non-interest income     Total revenues  
  2009     2008     2007     2009     2008     2007     2009     2008     2007  
  (In thousands)     (In thousands)     (In thousands)  

Total Banks

  $ 169,802      $ 163,767      $ 149,948      $ 38,521      $ 29,079      $ 30,662      $ 208,323      $ 192,846      $ 180,610   

Total Investment Managers

    177        394        308        33,192        45,096        54,297        33,369        45,490        54,605   

Total Wealth Advisors

    70        192        279        34,810        34,624        20,322        34,880        34,816        20,601   
                                                                       

Total Segments

    170,049        164,353        150,535        106,523        108,799        105,281        276,572        273,152        255,816   
                                                                       

Holding Company and Eliminations

    (10,564     (14,125     (13,542     19,926        20,650        923        9,362        6,525        (12,619
                                                                       

Total Company

  $ 159,485      $ 150,228      $ 136,993      $ 126,449      $ 129,449      $ 106,204      $ 285,934      $ 279,677      $ 243,197   
                                                                       
    For the year ended December 31,  
    Non-interest expense     Income tax expense/(benefit)     Net income/(loss) from
continuing operations(1)
 
  2009     2008     2007     2009     2008     2007     2009     2008     2007  
  (In thousands)     (In thousands)     (In thousands)  

Total Banks

  $ 144,713      $ 216,640      $ 108,354      $ 4,746      $ (53,708   $ 14,132      $ 13,905      $ (166,729   $ 34,675   

Total Investment Managers

    28,221        72,685        70,004        2,236        (10,958     (6,561     2,912        (16,237     (8,838

Total Wealth Advisors

    25,855        24,337        13,744        3,573        3,330        2,204        5,452        7,149        4,653   
                                                                       

Total Segments

    198,789        313,662        192,102        10,555        (61,336     9,775        22,269        (175,817     30,490   
                                                                       

Holding Company and Eliminations

    24,169        33,325        24,304        (8,923     (9,401     (16,114     (5,884     (17,399     (20,809
                                                                       

Total Company

  $ 222,958      $ 346,987      $ 216,406      $ 1,632      $ (70,737   $ (6,339   $ 16,385      $ (193,216   $ 9,681   
                                                                       
    For the year ended December 31,  
    Net income from continuing operations
attributable to noncontrolling interests
    Net income/(loss) attributable to
the Company(2)
    Amortization of intangibles  
        2009                 2008                 2007           2009     2008     2007     2009     2008     2007  
  (In thousands)     (In thousands)     (In thousands)  

Total Banks

  $ —        $ —        $ —        $ 13,905      $ (166,729   $ 34,675      $ 2,724      $ 1,288      $ 1,246   

Total Investment Managers

    997        1,393        2,054        1,915        (17,630     (10,892     3,955        5,041        6,514   

Total Wealth Advisors

    2,652        2,934        1,933        2,800        4,215        2,720        1,502        1,589        1,035   
                                                                       

Total Segments

    3,649        4,327        3,987        18,620        (180,144     26,503        8,181        7,918        8,795   
                                                                       

Holding Company and Eliminations

    —          —          —          (13,389     (208,608     (22,333     108        152        254   
                                                                       

Total Company

  $ 3,649      $ 4,327      $ 3,987      $ 5,231      $ (388,752   $ 4,170      $ 8,289      $ 8,070      $ 9,049   
                                                                       

 

93


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

 

     As of December 31,
   Assets(3)    AUM(4)
   2009    2008    2007    2009     2008     2007
   (In thousands)    (In millions)

Total Banks

   $ 5,669,645    $ 5,399,691    $ 4,933,439    $ 3,479      $ 3,253      $ 3,656

Total Investment Managers

     112,497      115,693      156,054      7,048        6,381        9,115

Total Wealth Advisors

     72,062      78,707      65,133      7,161        6,235        6,412
                                           

Total Segments

     5,854,204      5,594,091      5,154,626      17,688        15,869        19,183
                                           

Holding Company and Eliminations

     195,061      1,688,744      1,786,203      (18     (16     —  
                                           

Total Company

   $ 6,049,265    $ 7,282,835    $ 6,940,829    $ 17,670      $ 15,853      $ 19,183
                                           

 

(1) Net income/(loss) from continuing operations for the years ended December 31, 2009, 2008, and 2007 were reduced by $1.2 million, $115.3 million, and $18.1 million, respectively, for the impairment of goodwill and intangible assets, net of tax. These decreases were offset by gains on repurchase of debt for the years ended December 31, 2009 and 2008. The Company’s effective tax rates for 2009, 2008, and 2007 are not consistent due to the non-deductibility of a significant amount of goodwill impairment charges that were recorded in 2008 as well as the increases in the proportional amount of tax-exempt income as compared to lower earnings in 2009 and 2007. See Part II, Item 8, “Financial Statements and Supplementary Data—Note 17: Income Taxes” for further details.
(2) Net losses from discontinued operations for the years ended December 31, 2009, 2008, and 2007 of $7.5 million, $191.2 million and $1.5 million, respectively, are included in Holding Company and Eliminations in the calculation of net loss attributable to the Company.
(3) At December 31, 2009, 2008, and 2007, Holding Company and Eliminations assets include assets attributable to discontinued operations of $0, $1.6 billion and $1.7 billion, respectively.
(4) AUM for 2008 includes acquired AUM of DTC of $0.9 billion.

 

94


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

 

5. INVESTMENT SECURITIES

A summary of investment securities follows:

 

     Amortized
Cost
   Unrealized     Fair
Value
      Gains    Losses    
   (In thousands)

At December 31, 2009:

          

Available for sale securities at fair value:

          

Mortgage backed securities(1)

   $ 306,761    $ 5,909    $ (1,159   $ 311,511

Government-sponsored entities

     187,557      1,400      (563     188,394

U.S. government and agencies(2)

     184,719      3      —          184,722

Municipal bonds

     179,008      5,680      (144     184,544

Corporate bonds

     15,961      —        (18     15,943

Other

     2,904      65      (51     2,918
                            

Total

   $ 876,910    $ 13,057    $ (1,935   $ 888,032
                            

Held to maturity securities at amortized cost:

          

U.S. government and agencies

   $ 4,001    $ 10    $ —        $ 4,011

Other

     500      —        —          500
                            

Total

   $ 4,501    $ 10    $ —        $ 4,511
                            

At December 31, 2008:

          

Available for sale securities at fair value:

          

Mortgage backed securities(1)

   $ 276,319    $ 5,589    $ (553   $ 281,355

Government-sponsored entities

     264,708      3,868      (6     268,570

Municipal bonds

     208,084      4,977      (118     212,943

Corporate bonds

     22,826      407      —          23,233

U.S. government and agencies

     8,527      47      —          8,574

Other

     4,439      70      (158     4,351
                            

Total

   $ 784,903    $ 14,958    $ (835   $ 799,026
                            

Held to maturity securities at amortized cost:

          

U.S. government and agencies

   $ 3,999    $ 98    $ —        $ 4,097

Other

     500      —        —          500
                            

Total

   $ 4,499    $ 98    $ —        $ 4,597
                            

 

(1) Most mortgage-backed securities are guaranteed by U.S. agencies or Government-sponsored entities.
(2) Includes money market mutual fund that invests in U.S. government securities.

 

95


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

 

The following table sets forth the maturities of investment securities available for sale, based on contractual maturity, and the weighted average yields of such securities as of and for the year ended December 31, 2009:

 

     Mortgage backed securities(1)     Government sponsored entities(2)  
   Amortized
cost
   Fair value    Weighted
average
yield
    Amortized
cost
   Fair value    Weighted
average
yield
 
   (In thousands)  

Within one year

   $ 763    $ 774    2.92   $ 26,967    $ 27,044    2.71

After one, but within five years

     11,196      11,482    3.49     147,588      148,672    2.33

After five, but within ten years

     11,464      11,695    3.58     13,002      12,678    3.68

Greater than ten years

     283,338      287,560    3.81     —        —      —     
                                        

Total

   $ 306,761    $ 311,511    3.78   $ 187,557    $ 188,394    2.48
                                        

 

     U.S. government and agencies(2)     Municipal bonds(2)  
   Amortized
cost
   Fair value    Weighted
average
yield
    Amortized
cost
   Fair value    Weighted
average
yield(3)
 
   (In thousands)  

Within one year

   $ 178,046    $ 178,048    0.01   $ 19,222    $ 19,452    3.97

After one, but within five years

     —        —      —          117,131      121,644    4.52

After five, but within ten years

     —        —      —          36,907      37,432    4.73

Greater than ten years

     6,673      6,674    3.76     5,748      6,016    5.81
                                        

Total

   $ 184,719    $ 184,722    0.16   $ 179,008    $ 184,544    4.54
                                        

 

     Corporate bonds(2)     Other  
   Amortized
cost
   Fair
value
   Weighted
average
yield
    Amortized
cost
   Fair
value
   Weighted
average
yield
 
   (In thousands)  

Within one year

   $ —      $ —      —        $ 404    $ 412    0.00

After one, but within five years

     —        —      —          2,500      2,506    3.70

After five, but within ten years

     15,961      15,943    2.33     —        —      —     
                                        

Total

   $ 15,961    $ 15,943    2.33   $ 2,904    $ 2,918    3.18
                                        

 

(1) Mortgage backed securities are shown based on their final maturity, but due to prepayments they are expected to have shorter lives.
(2) Certain securities are callable before their final maturity.
(3) Yield shown on a fully taxable equivalent (FTE) basis.

The maturities of investment securities held to maturity, based on contractual maturity, at December 31, 2009 for both U.S. government and agencies, and Other were within one year. The weighted average yields for those security types were 2.88%, and 2.66%, respectively.

The weighted average remaining maturity at December 31, 2009 was 8.54 years for investment securities available for sale and approximately 2 months for investment securities held to maturity. As of December 31, 2009, approximately $207.4 million of investment securities available for sale were callable before maturity. The weighted average yield is calculated based on average amortized cost which does not include the effect of unrealized changes in fair value that are reflected as a component of stockholders’ equity.

 

96


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

 

The following table presents the proceeds from sales, gross realized gains and gross realized losses for securities available for sale that were sold during the following years:

 

     Year ended December 31,  
   2009     2008     2007  
   (In thousands)  

Proceeds from sales

   $ 304,822      $ 106,112      $ 95   

Realized gains

     5,962        2,601        14   

Realized losses

     (159     (208     (12

The following tables set forth information regarding securities at December 31, 2009 and 2008 having temporary impairment, due to the fair values having declined below the amortized cost of the individual securities, and the time period that the investments have been temporarily impaired. There were no investment securities held to maturity in an unrealized loss position at December 31, 2009 or 2008.

 

     Less than 12 months     12 months or longer     Total
       Fair
value
   Unrealized
losses
    Fair
value
   Unrealized
losses
    Fair
value
   Unrealized
losses
    # of
securities
     (In thousands)

December 31, 2009

                 

Available for sale securities

                 

Mortgage backed securities

   $ 89,089    $ (1,128   $ 2,877    $ (31   $ 91,966    $ (1,159   36

Government-sponsored entities

     77,769      (563     —        —          77,769      (563   14

Municipal bonds

     15,206      (144     —        —          15,206      (144   22

Corporate bonds

     15,943      (18     —        —          15,943      (18   4

Other

     —        —          142      (51     142      (51   26
                                                 

Total

   $ 198,007    $ (1,853   $ 3,019    $ (82   $ 201,026    $ (1,935   102
                                                 

All of the mortgage backed and government-sponsored entities securities in the table above had a Moody’s credit rating of AAA. All but two of the municipal bonds in the table above were rated by Moody’s and had credit ratings of at least Aa3, while the remaining two municipal bonds were rated by Standard and Poor’s and had credit ratings of AA-. The corporate bonds in the table above had Moody’s credit ratings of Baa3. The other securities consisted of equity securities. At December 31, 2009, the Company does not consider these investments other-than-temporarily impaired because the decline in fair value on investments is primarily attributed to changes in interest rates and not credit quality.

At December 31, 2009 and 2008, the amount of investment securities in an unrealized loss position greater than 12 months as well as in total was not significant and was primarily due to movements in interest rates. The Company has no intent to sell any securities in an unrealized loss position at December 31, 2009 and it is not more likely than not that the Company would be forced to sell any of these securities prior to the full recovery of all unrealized loss amounts. Subsequent to December 31, 2009 and through the date of the filing of this Annual Report on Form 10-K, no securities were downgraded to below investment grade.

 

97


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

 

       Less than 12 months     12 months or longer     Total
     Fair
value
   Unrealized
losses
    Fair
value
   Unrealized
losses
    Fair
value
   Unrealized
losses
    # of
securities
     (In thousands)

December 31, 2008

                 

Available for sale securities

                 

Mortgage backed securities

   $ 39,731    $ (435   $ 5,984    $ (118   $ 45,715    $ (553   7

Government-sponsored entities

     4,328      (6     —        —          4,328      (6   2

Municipal bonds

     10,260      (118     —        —          10,260      (118   15

Other

     2,112      (52     91      (106     2,203      (158   51
                                                 

Total

   $ 56,431    $ (611   $ 6,075    $ (224   $ 62,506    $ (835   75
                                                 

At December 31, 2008, because the decline in fair value is primarily attributed to changes in interest rates and not credit quality, these investments were not considered other-than-temporarily impaired.

The Company had $20.8 million and $21.2 million in cost method investments included in other assets on the consolidated balance sheets at December 31, 2009 and 2008, respectively. Cost method investments may be temporarily impaired when the fair values decline below the amortized costs of the individual investments. There were no cost method investments with unrealized losses at December 31, 2009 or 2008. The Company invests primarily in low income housing partnerships which generate tax credits. The Company also holds partnership interests in venture capital funds formed to provide financing to small businesses and to promote community development.

The following table presents the concentration of securities with any one issuer that exceeds ten percent of stockholders’ equity as of December 31, 2009:

 

     Amortized cost    Fair value
   (In thousands)

U.S. Treasury

   $ 182,047    $ 182,059

Government National Mortgage Association

     165,045      169,200

Federal National Mortgage Association

     165,485      166,015

Federal Home Loan Mortgage Corporation

     80,515      81,165

Federal Home Loan Bank

     67,268      67,521
             

Total

   $ 660,360    $ 665,960
             

6. LOANS RECEIVABLE

The Banks’ lending activities are conducted principally in New England, Northern and Southern California, and the Pacific Northwest. The Banks originate single and multi-family residential loans, commercial real estate loans, commercial loans, construction and land loans, and home equity and other consumer loans. The Banks also purchase high quality residential mortgage loans as a way to increase volumes more efficiently. Most loans are secured by borrowers’ personal or business assets. The ability of the Banks’ single family residential and consumer borrowers to honor their repayment commitments is generally dependent on the level of overall economic conditions within the Banks’ lending area. Commercial, construction, and land borrowers’ ability to repay is generally dependent upon the health of the economy and the real estate, including construction, sector in particular. Accordingly, the ultimate collectability of a substantial portion of the Banks’ loan portfolio is susceptible to changing conditions in the New England, Northern and Southern California, and the Pacific Northwest economies and real estate markets.

 

98


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

 

Total loans include deferred loan fees/ (costs), net, of $0.8 million of net deferred loan costs and $0.9 million of net deferred loan fees as of December 31, 2009 and 2008, respectively. Deferred loan fees/ (costs) include unamortized premiums or discounts related to mortgage loans purchased by the Banks. Also included in total loans is the unamortized loan fair market valuation discount related to acquisitions of $1.0 million and $1.6 million as of December 31, 2009 and 2008, respectively. Mortgage loans serviced for others totaled $60.0 million and $64.2 million at December 31, 2009 and 2008, respectively and are not included in the total of the Company’s loans.

The following table is a summary of the loan portfolio based on the geography of the lender. The concentration of the Private Banking loan data is based on the location of the lender. Net loans from the Holding Company to certain principals of the Company’s affiliate partners, loans at the Company’s nonbanking segments, and inter-company loan eliminations are identified as “Eliminations and other, net.”

 

     December 31,
2009
    December 31,
2008
 
     (In thousands)  

Commercial loans:

    

New England

   $ 943,740      $ 986,381   

Northern California

     927,074        821,308   

Southern California

     231,684        220,636   

Pacific Northwest

     111,039        129,727   

Eliminations and other, net

     (517     (1,144
                

Total commercial loans

   $ 2,213,020      $ 2,156,908   
                

Construction and land loans:

    

New England

   $ 117,817      $ 107,991   

Northern California

     161,839        225,536   

Southern California

     7,719        21,477   

Pacific Northwest

     28,286        76,713   
                

Total construction and land loans

   $ 315,661      $ 431,717   
                

Residential mortgage loans:

    

New England

   $ 1,113,842      $ 1,087,843   

Northern California

     219,394        211,976   

Southern California

     124,212        29,204   

Pacific Northwest

     37,255        23,858   
                

Total residential mortgage loans

   $ 1,494,703      $ 1,352,881   
                

Home equity and other consumer loans:

    

New England

   $ 179,792      $ 87,619   

Northern California

     74,192        78,159   

Southern California

     20,947        15,333   

Pacific Northwest

     5,278        2,683   

Eliminations and other, net

     3,447        3,781   
                

Total home equity and other consumer loans

   $ 283,656      $ 187,575   
                

Total loans

   $ 4,307,040      $ 4,129,081   
                

Non-accrual loans totaled $90.3 million at December 31, 2009, compared to $64.0 million at December 31, 2008. The increase in non-accrual loans is generally the result of continued weakness in the U.S. housing, labor, and commercial real estate markets and increased bankruptcy filings. This weakness has caused a related

 

99


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

 

deterioration in real estate, construction in process, and land loans as prices for these assets continued to decline. Further deterioration in the real estate markets or the local economies of the Banks’ market areas will lead to increased non-accrual loans, with a corresponding increase in provision for loan losses.

The Company discontinues the accrual of interest on a loan when the collectability of principal or interest is in doubt or the loan is 90 days past due. In certain instances, although very infrequent, loans that become 90 days past due may remain on accrual status if management determines that the loan is both well secured and in the process of collection. There were no loans 90 days past due, but still accruing, as of December 31, 2009 or December 31, 2008.

Non-performing loans, delinquent loans, and classified loans are impacted by factors such as the economic conditions in the Banks’ geographic regions, interest rates, collateral values, and seasonality. These factors are generally not within the Company’s control. A decline in fair values of the collateral, for loans that are collateral dependent, for non-performing loans or classified loans could result in additional future expense depending on the timing and severity of the decline. The Banks continue to evaluate the underlying collateral of each non-accrual loan and pursue the collection of interest and principal. Where appropriate, the Banks obtain updated appraisals on the collateral.

When management determines that it is probable that the Bank will not collect all principal and interest on a loan, usually commercial loans, in accordance with the original loan terms, as well as all troubled debt restructured loans (“TDRs”), the loan is designated as impaired. Impaired loans are generally included within the balance of non-accrual loans. Impaired loans totaled $83.2 million as of December 31, 2009 as compared to $35.2 million at December 31, 2008. At December 31, 2009, $20.7 million of the impaired loans had $5.0 million in specific allocations to the general reserve. The remaining $62.5 million of impaired loans did not have specific allocations due primarily to the adequacy of collateral or prior charge-offs taken. At December 31, 2008, $21.6 million of impaired loans had $8.0 million in specific allocations to the general reserve, and the remaining $13.6 million of impaired loans did not have specific allocations. For loans classified as impaired, while the loans were considered impaired, the Company recognized no interest income in 2009, an immaterial amount of interest income in 2008, and no interest income in 2007. The average investment in impaired loans in 2009 and 2008 was $67.8 million and $36.4 million, respectively. Loans that are designated as impaired require an analysis to determine the amount of impairment, if any. Impairment would be indicated as a result of the carrying value of the loan exceeding the estimated collateral value, less costs to sell, for collateral dependent loans or the net present value of cash flow for loans not considered to be collateral dependent. Generally, shortfalls in the analysis on collateral dependent loans would result in the impairment amount being charged off to the allowance for loan losses. Shortfalls on cash flow dependent loans may be carried as specific allocations to the general reserve as long as the impairment is not a significant percentage of the loan and the impairment has not been evident for a prolonged period of time.

Loans in the Held for Sale category are carried at fair value and are required to be excluded from the allowance for loan losses analysis.

The Company may, under certain circumstances, restructure loans as a concession to borrowers who have experienced financial difficulty. TDRs are included in impaired loans. These TDRs typically result from the Company’s loss mitigation activities and could include rate reductions, payment extensions, and principal forgiveness. TDRs included in impaired loans totaled $8.0 million and $1.4 million at December 31, 2009 and 2008, respectively. At December 31, 2009, the Company had an immaterial amount of commitments to lend additional funds to debtors for loans whose terms had been modified in a troubled debt restructuring and no commitments at December 31, 2008.

 

100


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

 

Loans to senior management, executive officers, and directors are made in the ordinary course of business, under normal credit terms, including interest rates and collateral requirements prevailing at the time of origination for comparable transactions with other persons and do not represent more than normal credit risk. The majority of the loans are made by the Banks to their directors. Many of these directors have long-term business and personal accounts with the Banks which may include deposits, loans, and investment management and trust services.

The following table presents a summary of the activity of loans to senior management, executive officers, and directors:

 

     For the year ended
December 31,
 
     2009     2008  
     (In thousands)  

Balance at beginning of year

   $ 28,181      $ 24,467   

Additions

     21,488        12,576   

Repayments

     (6,128     (8,862

Adjustments(1)

     (6,346     —     
                

Balance at end of year

   $ 37,195      $ 28,181   
                

 

(1) Adjustment is for a loan still outstanding at December 31, 2009 to a director who retired during the year.

In addition, less than 1% of the Company’s loans at December 31, 2009 and 2008 are managed by the Holding Company and a nonbanking affiliate partner. Loans managed by the Holding Company and the nonbanking affiliate partner of $2.9 million and $2.6 million at December 31, 2009 and 2008, respectively, include loans made to certain principals of DGHM, DTC, Anchor, and BOS at market rates and terms.

7. ALLOWANCE FOR LOAN LOSSES

The allowance for loan losses is reported as a reduction of outstanding loan balances, and totaled $68.4 million and $64.1 million at December 31, 2009 and 2008, respectively.

The increased level of allowance for loan losses in 2009 reflects the higher amount of non-performing and classified loans, particularly in the Northern California region, and recent historical charge-off trends and current economic conditions in all regions. An analysis of the risk in the loan portfolio as well as management judgment is used to determine the estimated appropriate amount of the allowance for loan losses.

The following table summarizes the changes in the allowance for loan losses for the periods indicated:

 

     At and for the year ended December 31,  
   2009     2008     2007  
     (In thousands)  

Total loans(1)

   $ 4,307,040      $ 4,129,081      $ 4,003,291   
                        

Allowance for loan losses, beginning of year

   $ 64,091      $ 59,933      $ 33,234   

Provision for loan losses

     44,959        196,643        23,449   

Charge-offs

     (41,934     (192,796     (189

Recoveries

     1,328        311        667   

Acquisition and other

     —          —          2,772   
                        

Allowance for loan losses, end of year

   $ 68,444      $ 64,091      $ 59,933   
                        

Allowance for loan losses to total loans(1)

     1.59     1.55     1.50

 

(1) Total loans include deferred loan origination fees/(costs), net, and purchase premiums and discounts.

 

101


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

 

The balance for the reserve for unfunded loan commitments, which is included in the consolidated balance sheets in Other Liabilities, was $3.0 million, $3.4 million, and $4.7 million at the year ending December 31, 2009, 2008, and 2007, respectively.

8. DERIVATIVES

The Company’s objective in using derivatives is to add stability to interest income and to manage the risk related to exposure to changes in interest rates. To accomplish this objective, one of the affiliate Banks entered into a $100 million prime-based interest rate floor (the “Floor”) to protect against movements in interest rates below the Floor’s strike rate of 6.5% over the life of the agreement. The Floor has an effective date of November 1, 2005, and a maturity date of November 1, 2010. The Floor hedges the variable cash flows associated with existing variable-rate loan assets that are based on the prime rate (“Prime”). For accounting purposes, the Floor is designated as a cash flow hedge of the overall changes in cash flows on the first Prime-based interest payments received by the Bank affiliate each calendar month during the term of the hedge that, in aggregate for each period, are interest payments on principal from specified portfolios equal to the notional amount of the Floor.

The Company uses the “Hypothetical Derivative Method” described in ASC 815, Derivatives and Hedging (formerly FAS 133, Accounting for Derivative Instruments and Hedging Activities ) (ASC 815), for quarterly prospective and retrospective assessments of hedge effectiveness, as well as for measurements of hedge ineffectiveness. The effective portion of changes in the fair value of the derivative is initially reported in other comprehensive income (outside of earnings) and subsequently reclassified to earnings in “Interest and dividend income” when the hedged transactions affect earnings. Ineffectiveness resulting from the hedge is recorded as a gain or loss in the consolidated statement of operations as part of “Fees and other income”. The Bank affiliate did not have any hedge ineffectiveness recognized in earnings during the year ended December 31, 2009. The Bank affiliate also monitors the risk of counterparty default on an ongoing basis.

Interest payments received from loans that prepay are included in the hedged portfolio due to the guidance in ASC 815, which allows the designated forecasted transactions to be the variable, Prime-based interest payments on a rolling portfolio of prepayable interest-bearing loans using the first-payments-received technique.

 

102


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

 

In addition to the above hedging activities, the Bank affiliate offers certain derivative products directly to qualified commercial borrowers. The Bank affiliate hedges derivative transactions executed with commercial borrowers by entering into mirror-image, offsetting derivatives with third parties. Derivative transactions executed as part of this program are not designated as qualifying hedging relationships and are, therefore, marked to market through earnings each period. Because the derivatives have mirror-image contractual terms, the changes in fair value substantially offset each other through earnings. As of December 31, 2009 and December 31, 2008, the fair value of the derivative assets was $4.9 million and $7.8 million, respectively, and the offsetting derivative liabilities had a fair value of $5.1 million and $7.7 million, respectively. Fees earned in connection with the execution of derivatives related to this program are recognized in “Other income”. The derivative asset and liability values below include an adjustment related to the consideration of credit risk required under ASC 820 of less than $0.1 million in the years ended December 31, 2009 and December 31, 2008, respectively. As of December 31, 2009 and December 31, 2008, the Bank affiliate had 18 interest rate swaps with aggregate notional amounts of $184.2 million and $185.8 million, respectively, related to this program. The table below presents the fair value of the Bank affiliate’s derivative financial instruments as well as their classification on the consolidated balance sheets as of December 31, 2009 and December 31, 2008.

 

    December 31, 2009     December 31, 2008  
    Asset derivatives   Liability derivatives     Asset derivatives   Liability derivatives  
    Balance
sheet
location
  Fair value   Balance
sheet
location
  Fair value     Balance
sheet
location
  Fair value   Balance
sheet
location
  Fair value  
    (In thousands)  

Derivatives designated as hedging instruments:

               

Interest rate products

  Other

assets

  $ 2,646   Other

liabilities

  $ —        Other

assets

  $ 5,260   Other

liabilities

  $ —     

Derivatives not designated as hedging instruments:

               

Interest rate products(1)

  Other

assets

    4,924   Other
assets
    (5,053   Other
assets
    7,762   Other
assets
    (7,698
                                   

Total

    $ 7,570     $ (5,053     $ 13,022     $ (7,698
                                   

 

(1) Interest rate product derivative liabilities are netted with interest rate product derivative assets within Other assets on the consolidated balance sheet.

As indicated in the table above, as of December 31, 2009 and December 31, 2008, the Floor designated as a cash flow hedge had a fair value of $2.6 million and $5.3 million, respectively. For the year ended December 31, 2009 and December 31, 2008, the after-tax change in net unrealized gains/losses on the cash flow hedge reported in the consolidated statements of changes in stockholders’ equity were $1.3 million (net loss) and $2.5 million (net gain), respectively.

Amounts reported in accumulated other comprehensive income related to the Floor will be reclassified to interest income as interest payments are received on the Bank affiliate’s variable-rate assets. During 2010, the Bank affiliate estimates that an additional $2.4 million will be reclassified as an increase to interest income.

During the years ended December 31, 2009 and 2008, the Bank affiliate accelerated the reclassification of amounts in other comprehensive income to earnings as a result of the hedged forecasted transactions relating to the Bank affiliate’s previously designated interest rate floor becoming probable not to occur. The accelerated amount was an immaterial loss for both the years ended December 31, 2009 and December 31, 2008.

 

103


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

 

The table below presents the effect of the Bank affiliate’s derivative financial instruments on the consolidated statement of operations for the years ended December 31, 2009.

 

Year Ended December 31, 2009

Derivatives in
ASC 815 cash
flow hedging
relationships

  Amount of gain/
(loss) recognized
in OCI on
derivative
(effective
portion)
  Location of gain/(loss)
reclassified from
accumulated OCI into
income (effective portion)
  Amount of gain/
(loss) reclassified
from accumulated
OCI into income
(effective portion)
  Location of gain/(loss)
recognized in income on
derivative (ineffective
portion and amount
excluded from
effectiveness testing)
  Amount of gain/(loss)
recognized in income on
derivative (ineffective

portion and amount
excluded from
effectiveness testing)
(In thousands)

Interest rate products

  $ 674   Interest and dividend

income

  $ 3,054   Fees and other

income

  $ —  

 

Year Ended December 31, 2009

 

Derivatives not
designated as hedging
instruments under
ASC 815

   Location of gain/(loss)
recognized in income
on derivative
   Amount of gain/
(loss) recognized
in income on
derivative
 
          (In thousands)  

Interest rate products

   Fees and other income    $ (193

The Bank affiliate has agreements with its derivative counterparties that contain provisions where, if the Bank affiliate defaults on any of its indebtedness, including default where repayment of the indebtedness has not been accelerated by the lender, then the Bank affiliate could also be declared in default on its derivative obligations.

The Bank affiliate also has agreements with certain of its derivative counterparties that contain provisions where if the Bank affiliate fails to maintain its status as a well- or adequately-capitalized institution, then the counterparty could terminate the derivative positions and the Bank affiliate would be required to settle its obligations under the agreements.

Certain of the Bank affiliate’s agreements with its derivative counterparties contain provisions where if specified events or conditions occur that materially change the Bank affiliate’s creditworthiness in an adverse manner, the Bank affiliate may be required to fully collateralize its obligations under the derivative instruments.

As of December 31, 2009, the fair value of derivatives in a liability position, which includes accrued interest but excludes any adjustment for nonperformance risk, related to these agreements was $2.4 million. As of December 31, 2009, the Bank affiliate has minimum collateral posting thresholds with certain of its derivative counterparties and has posted collateral of $0.3 million against its obligations under these agreements.

 

104


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

 

9. PREMISES AND EQUIPMENT

Premises and equipment consisted of the following:

 

     As of December 31,
   2009    2008
     (In thousands)

Leasehold improvements

   $ 29,077    $ 26,967

Furniture, fixtures, and equipment

     32,941      29,806

Buildings

     4,258      4,258

Land

     374      374
             

Subtotal

     66,650      61,405
             

Less: accumulated depreciation and amortization

     38,301      32,659
             

Premises and equipment, net

   $ 28,349    $ 28,746
             

Depreciation and amortization expense related to premises and equipment was $5.9 million, $5.4 million and $5.2 million for the years ended December 31, 2009, 2008, and 2007, respectively.

The Company is obligated for minimum payments under non-cancelable operating leases. In accordance with the terms of these leases, the Company is currently committed to minimum annual payments as follows:

 

     Minimum
lease payments
   (In thousands)

2010

   $ 12,435

2011

     12,657

2012

     10,759

2013

     9,013

2014

     7,982

Thereafter

     20,451
      

Total

   $ 73,297
      

Additionally, the Company remains a guarantor on a non-cancelable operating lease for a divested affiliate. Minimum lease payments on this lease are $0.6 million for 2010 and 2011; $0.7 million for 2012, 2013 and 2014; and $1.3 million thereafter.

Rent expense for the years ended December 31, 2009, 2008, and 2007 was $13.1 million, $11.8 million and $10.3 million, respectively.

 

105


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

 

10. GOODWILL AND OTHER INTANGIBLE ASSETS

Goodwill

The following table details the changes in the carrying value of goodwill:

 

     Balance at
December 31,
2008
   Acquisitions    Impairment     Other
adjustments
   Balance at
December 31,
2009
   (In thousands)

Goodwill

             

Private Banking

   $ 2,403    $ —      $ —        $ —      $ 2,403

Investment Management

     59,361      3,303      —          —        62,664

Wealth Advisory

     43,326      1,739      (1,440     —        43,625
                                   

Total goodwill

   $ 105,090    $ 5,042    $ (1,440   $ —      $ 108,692
                                   

 

     Balance at
December 31,
2007
   Acquisitions    Impairment     Other
adjustments
   Balance at
December 31,
2008
   (In thousands)

Goodwill

             

Private Banking

   $ 86,219    $ 236    $ (84,178   $ 126    $ 2,403

Investment Management

     81,915      9,855      (32,409     —        59,361

Wealth Advisory

     38,539      4,787      —          —        43,326

Equity method investments

     3,456      —        (3,456     —        —  
                                   

Total goodwill

   $ 210,129    $ 14,878    $ (120,043   $ 126    $ 105,090
                                   

The following table details total goodwill and the cumulative impairment charges thereon as of December 31, 2009:

 

     Goodwill
prior to

impairment
   Cumulative
goodwill

impairment
    Goodwill
   (In thousands)

Goodwill

       

Private Banking

   $ 86,581    $ (84,178   $ 2,403

Investment Management

     112,925      (50,261     62,664

Wealth Advisory

     45,065      (1,440     43,625

Equity method investments

     3,456      (3,456     —  
                     

Total goodwill

   $ 248,027    $ (139,335   $ 108,692
                     

In 2009, the Company recognized additional goodwill of $5.0 million due to contingent consideration payments at Anchor and DTC.

In 2008, the Company recognized additional goodwill of $15.0 million due primarily to contingent consideration payments at Anchor, DTC, and BOS.

For tax purposes, the goodwill relating to BOS, KLS, and DTC of $43.6 million and $43.3 million at December 31, 2009 and 2008, respectively, is expected to be deductible.

ASC 350 requires the Company to test goodwill for impairment on an annual basis and in between annual dates if events or circumstances change that would more likely than not reduce the fair value of the reporting unit

 

106


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

 

below its carrying value. In addition, management evaluated the relationship of aggregate fair values of its reporting units to the Company’s overall market capitalization and book values during each quarter of 2009.

2009 Goodwill and Intangibles Impairment

Management completed its annual goodwill and intangibles impairment testing during the fourth quarter of 2009. The conclusion of the testing resulted in the Company recognizing a $1.4 million goodwill impairment charge and $0.3 million intangible impairment charge at DTC. The impairment was primarily due to the fourth quarter 2009 contingent consideration payment to DTC. For all other reporting units, the estimated fair value exceeded the carrying value.

To reach this impairment conclusion, the Company performed a detailed two step goodwill impairment analysis at DTC. The following describes the details of this testing.

The Company performed the Step 1 goodwill impairment analysis using a weighted average of the discounted cash flow method and comparable market multiples method. The income approach utilized a discounted cash flow analysis which was based on the expectation that DTC’s net AUM flows will continue to recover in 2010. The resulting operating earnings were expected to grow at a 13.0% compounded annual growth rate over the projected period. The terminal growth rate was estimated at 5.0% and the cash flows were discounted at a 16.0% cost of capital. Based on these inputs and assumptions, the income approach resulted in an $8.6 million valuation.

The market approach utilized revenue and earnings before interest, taxes, depreciation and amortization (“EBITDA”) multiples from a peer group of nine publicly traded comparable investment management firms. The comparables were chosen based on similar growth prospects and risks to that of DTC. A price to revenue multiple of 1.1x was selected and a price to EBITDA multiple of 10.0x was selected. Control premiums were considered and determined to be 15%. The average of the price to revenue multiple method and the price to EBITDA multiple method resulted in a $6.7 million valuation.

A weighted average, with 80% from the income and 20% from the market approach, indicated a fair value of approximately $8.2 million.

As the carrying amount of DTC exceeded its fair value, the Company proceeded to Step 2 of the goodwill impairment testing to measure the amount of the impairment loss. This was done by comparing the fair value of the reporting unit goodwill with the carrying amount of that goodwill. In order to do this, the fair value of the reporting unit was allocated to the assets and liabilities of the unit. This process included estimating the fair value of the advisory contracts, trade name, non-compete agreements, and trust charter.

2008 Goodwill and Intangibles Impairment

In 2008, the Company recognized $120.0 million of goodwill impairment charges related to three of its consolidated affiliates and its equity method investee. Triggering events occurred in each of the first three quarters of 2008, and the regular annual goodwill and intangible impairment testing in the fourth quarter also resulted in impairment charges. The triggering events were related to the downturn in local and national real estate markets, the resulting decrease in values of peer banks whose operations relate to the depressed real estate markets, and downturns in national and international stock markets. The Company also recognized intangible impairment charges for $13.2 million during 2008.

 

107


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

 

FPB

A rapid downturn in the local real estate market and resulting decline in the credit quality of FPB’s loan portfolio in the first quarter of 2008, followed by a significant decrease in the market capitalization of comparable public companies in the second quarter of 2008, were considered triggering events for testing goodwill for impairment. The Company performed the Step 1 goodwill impairment analysis and determined that the goodwill at FPB was impaired. The fair value used in Step 1 was determined using an income approach and a market approach weighted equally. The income approach utilized a two stage dividend discount model which was based on the expectation that the Southern California economy will remain depressed throughout 2008 and 2009 with a recovery beginning in 2010. The resulting operating earnings were expected to grow at a 7.3% compounded annual growth rate over the projected period. The terminal growth rate was estimated at 4.5% and the cash flows were discounted at a 12.3% discount rate. The market multiples were determined using the price to earnings multiples of public banks in the Southern California region that were of a comparable size with similar lending activities. As a result of the Step 1 analysis, management determined that the goodwill at FPB was impaired and initiated a Step 2 valuation to determine the amount of goodwill impairment expense to recognize. Due to the timing of the impairment assessment, the Company believed that an impairment loss was probable and could be reasonably estimated. The significant estimates that management made for the Step 2 estimate were the value of the fixed rate loan portfolio and the core deposit intangibles. The fixed rate loans were valued as of March 31, 2008 based on a fair value analysis prepared as of December 31, 2007, and core deposit intangibles were valued based on the ratio of the core deposit intangible to core deposits at the time of acquisition applied to core deposits at March 31, 2008. Based on this valuation, the Company recognized a goodwill impairment expense of $20.6 million in the first quarter of 2008.

In the second quarter of 2008, FPB recognized additional loan losses and additional loans were classified as non-accrual in excess of what was expected in the March 31, 2008 valuation. The Company reviewed the market approach used at March 31, 2008 and determined that the stock prices of the comparable public companies used in that approach had decreased, on average, 23% in the second quarter of 2008. An updated market approach resulted in a valuation of FPB significantly below book value and, therefore, the remaining goodwill of $13.7 million was expensed for a total goodwill impairment of $34.3 million in 2008.

The Company recognized goodwill impairment charges for all of FPB’s $34.3 million of goodwill in 2008. The Company also recognized intangible impairment charges for $3.7 million of FPB’s core deposit intangibles in 2008.

Charter

The significant adverse change in business climate in the third quarter of 2008 was considered a triggering event for testing goodwill for impairment. This was followed by the annual goodwill and intangible impairment testing in the fourth quarter of 2008. The Company performed the detailed Step 1 goodwill impairment analysis and determined that the goodwill at Charter was impaired. The fair value used in Step 1 was determined using an income approach and a market approach each weighted equally. For the income approach, the projected cash flows of Charter were estimated based on future net income, capital needs, and dividends or capital contributions to or from the Company. The exit price to tangible book value was estimated at 1.25x. A control premium of 10% was applied to the exit price to tangible book which resulted in a value of 1.375. The terminal year financial value was multiplied by the 1.375 to obtain an implied exit value. The present value of the exit value was determined using a discount rate of 14.5%. The sum of the present value of the cash flows and the present value of the terminal value indicated a value from the income approach of $28.6 million.

For the market approach, the Price to Tangible Book Value Method and the Price to Earnings Value Method were used. The Price to Tangible Book was calculated using 12 comparable banks and was estimated at 1.25x. For the Price to Earnings Value Method, Charter’s financial information was forecasted through 2012. Based on

 

108


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

 

comparisons to other banks, a price to earnings multiple of 7.5x was selected. A control premium of 10% was then applied to the price to tangible book and earnings multiples. The average of the Price to Tangible Book Value Method and the Price to Earnings Value Method was $36.5 million.

Based on equally weighting the income and market approaches, the fair value was approximately $32.6 million.

As the carrying amount of Charter exceeded its fair value, the Company proceeded to Step 2 of the goodwill impairment testing to measure the amount of the impairment loss. This was done by comparing the fair value of the reporting unit goodwill with the carrying amount of that goodwill. In order to do this, the fair value of the reporting unit was allocated to the assets and liabilities of the unit. This process included estimating the fair value of the investments, loans, core deposit intangibles, fixed assets, non-compete agreements, borrowings, and deposits.

The Company recognized goodwill impairment charges for all of Charter’s $49.9 million of goodwill in 2008. The Company also recognized intangible impairment charges for $3.7 million of Charter’s core deposit intangibles in 2008.

DGHM

The significant adverse change in business climate in the third quarter of 2008 was considered a triggering event for testing goodwill for impairment. This was followed by the annual goodwill and intangible impairment testing in the fourth quarter of 2008. In the third quarter of 2008, the Company estimated fair value of DGHM by comparing the ratios of price to EBITDA from a peer group of publicly traded comparable investment management firms. This estimate was refined during the fourth quarter of 2008 when the fair value was determined using an average of the discounted cash flow method and a comparable market multiple method. The Company performed the Step 1 goodwill impairment analysis using an average of the income approach and the market approach method and determined that the goodwill was impaired. The income approach utilized a discounted cash flow model which was based on the expectation that DGHM’s net AUM flows will remain weak throughout 2009 with a recovery beginning in 2010. The resulting operating earnings are expected to grow at a 6.4% compounded annual growth rate over the projected period. The terminal growth rate was estimated at 5.0% and the cash flows were discounted at an 18.0% cost of capital. Based on these inputs and assumptions, the income approach resulted in an $11.2 million valuation.

The market approach utilized revenue and EBITDA multiples from a peer group of nine publicly traded comparable investment management firms. The comparables were chosen based on similar growth prospects and risks to that of the reporting units. A price to revenue multiple of 1.3x was selected and a price to EBITDA multiple of 5.0x was selected. Control premiums were considered and determined to be 0%. The average of the price to revenue multiple method and the price to EBITDA multiple method resulted in a $12.3 million valuation.

Based on a weighted average of the income and market approaches, the fair value was approximately $11.5 million.

As the carrying amount of DGHM exceeded its fair value, the Company proceeded to Step 2 of the goodwill impairment testing to measure the amount of the impairment loss. This was done by comparing the fair value of the reporting unit goodwill with the carrying amount of that goodwill. In order to do this, the fair value of the reporting unit was allocated to the assets and liabilities of the unit. This process included estimating the fair value of the advisory contracts, trade name, and non-compete agreements.

The Company recognized goodwill impairment charges for all of DGHM’s $32.4 million of goodwill in 2008. The Company also recognized intangible impairment charges of $5.2 million for DGHM’s advisory contracts intangible assets in 2008.

 

109


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

 

Coldstream

The Company’s equity method investee was tested for goodwill impairment as part of the annual goodwill impairment testing in the fourth quarter of 2008. The Company performed the Step 1 goodwill impairment analysis using an average of the discounted cash flow method and comparable market multiples method and determined that the goodwill was impaired. The income approach utilized a discounted cash flow which was based on the expectation that Coldstream’s net AUM flows will remain weak throughout 2009 with a recovery beginning in 2010. The resulting operating earnings are expected to grow at a 19.4% compounded annual growth rate over the projected period. The terminal growth rate was estimated at 5.0% and the cash flows were discounted at a 17.0% cost of capital. Based on these inputs and assumptions, the income approach resulted in a $7.0 million valuation.

The market approach utilized revenue and EBITDA multiples from a peer group of nine publicly traded comparable investment management firms. The comparables were chosen based on similar growth prospects and risks to that of the reporting units. A price to revenue multiple of 1.0x was selected and a price to EBITDA multiple of 9.0x was selected. Control premiums were considered and determined to be 0%. The average of the price to revenue multiple method and the price to EBITDA multiple method resulted in an $8.6 million valuation.

The weighted average of the income and market approaches indicated a fair value of approximately $7.5 million.

As the carrying amount of Coldstream exceeded its fair value, the Company proceeded to Step 2 of the goodwill impairment testing to measure the amount of the impairment loss. This was done by comparing the fair value of the reporting unit goodwill with the carrying amount of that goodwill. In order to do this, the fair value of the reporting unit was allocated to the assets and liabilities of the unit. This process included estimating the fair value of the advisory contracts.

The Company recognized goodwill impairment charges for all of Coldstream’s $3.5 million of goodwill in 2008. The Company also recognized intangible impairment charges of $0.5 million for Coldstream’s advisory contracts intangible assets in 2008.

Intangible assets

The following table shows the gross and net carrying amounts of identifiable intangible assets at December 31, 2009 and 2008:

 

     2009    2008
   Gross
Carrying
Amount
   Accumulated
Amortization
   Net    Gross
Carrying
Amount
   Accumulated
Amortization
   Net
   (In thousands)

Advisory contracts

   $ 53,721    $ 17,289    $ 36,432    $ 53,709    $ 12,320    $ 41,389

Core deposit intangibles

     3,058      2,639      419      3,058      141      2,917

Employment agreements

     3,977      2,743      1,234      3,977      2,028      1,949

Trade names and other

     2,890      —        2,890      3,150      —        3,150

Mortgage servicing rights

     649      199      450      649      93      556
                                         

Total

   $ 64,295    $ 22,870    $ 41,425    $ 64,543    $ 14,582    $ 49,961
                                         

In 2008, the Company recognized additional identifiable intangible assets of $4.4 million. This was primarily related to the acquisition of DTC for $3.1 million and the purchase of additional interests in BOS for $1.2 million.

 

110


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

 

The Company acquired DTC on February 1, 2008 and allocated $2.0 million to amortizable intangible assets. $1.6 million of the amortizable intangible assets was allocated to advisory contracts and will be amortized over a weighted average period of 10 years and $0.4 million was allocated to non-compete agreements that will be amortized over a period of seven years. These amortization periods are based upon estimates of their expected useful lives. The remaining $1.1 million was allocated to trade name intangibles, which are not amortizable.

When the Company acquired additional interests in BOS on January 2, 2008 and August 1, 2008, $0.5 million and $0.7 million, respectively, were allocated to intangible assets and will be amortized on an accelerated basis over a period of 15 years.

Management reviews, and adjusts if necessary, intangible asset amortization schedules to ensure that the remaining life on the amortization schedule accurately reflects the useful life of the intangible asset. Consolidated expense related to intangible assets subject to amortization was $8.3 million, $8.1 million, and $9.0 million for 2009, 2008, and 2007, respectively. The estimated annual amortization expense for these identifiable intangibles over the next five years is:

 

     Estimated intangible
amortization expense
     (In thousands)

2010

   $ 5,264

2011

     4,942

2012

     4,769

2013

     4,538

2014

     4,297

11. DEPOSITS

Deposits are summarized as follows:

 

     December 31,
   2009    2008
   (In thousands)

Demand deposits (non-interest bearing)

   $ 835,676    $ 826,797

NOW

     348,674      262,963

Savings

     158,508      142,184

Money market

     1,447,811      1,180,518

Certificates of deposit under $100,000*

     373,360      585,972

Certificates of deposit $100,000 or greater

     1,091,190      750,478
             

Total

   $ 4,255,219    $ 3,748,912
             

 

* Includes brokered CDs

 

111


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

 

Certificates of deposit had the following schedule of maturities:

 

     December 31,
   2009    2008
   (In thousands)

Less than 3 months remaining

   $ 663,086    $ 559,698

3 to 6 months remaining

     440,382      438,715

6 to 12 months remaining

     216,456      207,098

1 to 3 years remaining

     105,280      90,525

3 to 5 years remaining

     24,501      31,180

More than 5 years remaining

     14,845      9,234
             

Total

   $ 1,464,550    $ 1,336,450
             

Interest expense on certificates of deposit $100,000 or greater was $18.4 million, $27.9 million and $37.1 million for the years ended December 31, 2009, 2008, and 2007, respectively. At December 31, 2009 and 2008, $2.8 million and $1.7 million, respectively, of overdrawn deposit accounts were reclassified to loans.

12. FEDERAL HOME LOAN BANK BORROWINGS

The Banks are members of the FHLB System. As members of the FHLB, the Banks have access to short and long-term borrowings. Borrowings from the FHLB are secured by the Banks’ stock in the FHLB and a blanket lien on “qualified collateral” defined principally as a percentage of the principal balance of certain types of mortgage loans. The percentage of collateral allowed varies between 15% and 83% based on the type of the underlying collateral. As of December 31, 2009, the Banks had $555.0 million of borrowings outstanding and available credit of $789.3 million. The Banks had no federal fund borrowings outstanding with the FHLBs at December 31, 2009.

As members of the FHLB, the Banks are required to invest in FHLB stock based on a percentage of outstanding advances in addition to a membership stock requirement. The minimum requirements vary depending on the FHLB membership. The Banks are required to own FHLB stock at least equal to 4.0% to 4.7% of outstanding advances depending on the individual FHLB membership. FHLB stock owned in excess of the minimum requirements can be redeemed at par upon the FHLB’s request. The FHLB redeems excess stock at its option at par from time to time. The Banks may not redeem additional purchases of stock prior to a five year minimum holding period.

As of both December 31, 2009 and 2008, the Banks’ FHLB stock holdings totaled $47.5 million. The Banks’ investment in FHLB stock is recorded at cost and is redeemable at par after a five-year holding period. The FHLBs have advised their members that they are focusing on preserving capital in response to ongoing market volatility and, accordingly, there will be little or no dividend payout in future quarterly periods. Further, a moratorium has been placed on excess stock repurchases.

At each year end, the Company evaluates its investments in the respective FHLBs stock for other-than-temporary impairment based on publicly available financial information on the respective FHLBs. Based on the Company’s evaluation of the underlying investments, including the long-term nature of the investments, and the liquidity position of the respective FHLBs, the actions taken by the respective FHLBs to address their regulatory situations, and the Company’s current intention not to sell or redeem any of its investment in the respective FHLBs, and the determination that it is not more likely than not that the Company would be required to sell or redeem any of its investments in the respective FHLBs, the Company has concluded that the unrealized losses on its investments in the FHLBs is not other-than-temporarily impaired.

 

112


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

 

A summary of borrowings from the FHLBs is as follows:

 

     December 31, 2009     December 31, 2008  
   Amount    Weighted
Average
Rate
    Amount    Weighted
Average
Rate
 
   (In thousands)  

Within 1 year

   $ 158,232    4.35   $ 210,202    1.93

Over 1 to 2 years

     129,182    4.02     159,009    4.37

Over 2 to 3 years

     103,897    4.08     129,955    4.04

Over 3 to 5 years

     98,748    4.06     164,692    4.16

Over 5 years

     64,953    4.32     81,614    4.40
                          

Total

   $ 555,012    4.17   $ 745,472    3.58
                          

As of December 31, 2009, approximately $136.0 million of the FHLB borrowings were callable before maturity.

13. SHORT-TERM BORROWINGS

 

     Federal Funds
Purchased
    Securities Sold Under
Agreement to
Repurchase
 
     (In thousands)  

2009

    

Outstanding at end of period

   $ —        $ 243,377   

Maximum outstanding at any month-end

     65,000        243,377   

Average balance for the year

     9,455        182,592   

Weighted average rate at end of period

     —          1.78

Weighted average rate paid for the period

     0.26     1.80

2008

    

Outstanding at end of period

   $ —        $ 293,841   

Maximum outstanding at any month-end

     130,000        353,520   

Average balance for the year

     43,369        311,620   

Weighted average rate at end of period

     —          1.15

Weighted average rate paid for the period

     1.48     1.64

2007

    

Outstanding at end of period

   $ 6,000      $ 268,340   

Maximum outstanding at any month-end

     36,100        268,340   

Average balance for the year

     2,093        164,451   

Weighted average rate at end of period

     2.50     2.80

Weighted average rate paid for the period

     5.87     2.96

The federal funds purchased and securities sold under agreements to repurchase generally mature within 30 days of the transaction date. The Company enters into sales of securities under agreements to repurchase with clients and brokers. These agreements are treated as financing and the obligations to repurchase securities sold are reflected as a liability in the Company’s consolidated balance sheets. The securities underlying the agreements remain under the Company’s control. Investment securities with a fair value of $260.6 million and $308.3 million were pledged as collateral for the securities sold under agreements to repurchase at December 31, 2009 and 2008, respectively.

 

113


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

 

As of December 31, 2009 the Banks had unused federal fund lines with correspondent banks of $166.0 million.

14. JUNIOR SUBORDINATED DEBENTURES AND OTHER LONG-TERM DEBT

The schedule below presents the detail of the Company’s junior subordinated debentures and other long-term debt:

 

     December 31,
   2009    2008
   (In thousands)

Boston Private Capital Trust II junior subordinated debentures

   $ 103,093    $ 103,093

Boston Private Capital Trust I junior subordinated debentures

     63,747      108,247

Gibraltar junior subordinated debentures

     16,495      16,495

FPB junior subordinated debentures

     6,186      6,186

Charter junior subordinated debentures

     4,124      4,124

Contingent convertible senior notes

     —        52,440
             

Total

   $ 193,645    $ 290,585
             

All of the Company’s junior subordinated debentures and other long-term debt mature in more than five years.

Boston Private Capital Trust II junior subordinated debentures

In September, 2005, the Company and Boston Private Capital Trust II, a Delaware statutory trust (“Trust II”) entered into a Purchase Agreement for the sale of $100 million of trust preferred securities issued by Trust II and guaranteed by the Company on a subordinated basis. Trust II’s preferred securities pay interest quarterly and have an annual distribution rate of 6.25% up to, but not including, December 30, 2010. Subsequently, Trust II’s preferred securities will convert to a floating rate of a three-month London Inter Bank Offered Rate (“LIBOR”) plus 1.68%, provided, however, that the interest rate does not exceed the highest rate permitted by New York law, and may be modified by the U.S. law of general application.

Each of the Trust II preferred securities represents an undivided beneficial interest in the assets of Trust II. The Company owns all of Trust II’s common securities. Trust II’s only assets will be the junior subordinated debentures issued to it by the Company on substantially the same payment terms as Trust II’s preferred securities.

The junior subordinated debentures mature on December 30, 2035, and may not be redeemed prior to or on December 30, 2010, except that they may be redeemed at any time upon the occurrence and continuation of certain special events.

The Company has the following covenants with regard to Trust II:

 

   

for so long as Trust II’s preferred securities remain outstanding, the Company shall maintain 100% ownership of the Trust II’s common securities;

 

   

the Company will use its commercially reasonable efforts to ensure Trust II remains a statutory trust, except in connection with a distribution of debt securities to the holders of the Trust II securities in liquidation of Trust II, the redemption of all Trust II’s securities or mergers, consolidations or incorporation, each as permitted by Trust II’s declaration of trust;

 

114


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

 

   

to continue to be classified as a grantor trust for U.S. federal income tax purposes; and

 

   

the Company will ensure each holder of Trust II’s preferred securities is treated as owning an undivided beneficial interest in the junior subordinated debentures.

At December 31, 2009, the Company was in compliance with the above covenants.

So long as the Company is not in default in the payment of interest on the junior subordinated debentures, the Company has the right under the indenture to defer payments of interest for up to 20 consecutive quarterly periods. The Company has no current intention to exercise its right to defer interest payments on the junior debentures issued to Trust II. If the Company defers interest payments, it would be subject to certain restrictions relating to the payment of dividends on or purchases of its capital stock and payments on its debt securities ranking equal with or junior to the junior subordinated debentures.

Boston Private Capital Trust I junior subordinated debentures

In October 2004, the Company and Boston Private Capital Trust I, a Delaware statutory trust (“Trust I”), entered into a Purchase Agreement for the sale of $75 million of convertible trust preferred securities to be issued by Trust I and guaranteed by the Company on a subordinated basis. The convertible trust preferred securities have a liquidation amount of $50.00 per security, pay interest quarterly and have a fixed distribution rate of 4.875%. The quarterly distributions are cumulative. The junior subordinated convertible debentures will mature on October 1, 2034. The Company also granted the initial purchasers an option to purchase up to an additional $30 million of convertible trust preferred securities, which was exercised in November 2004.

In November 2009, the Company repurchased $44.5 million of the Trust I’s convertible trust preferred securities, recognizing an $18.3 million pretax gain on repurchase.

Each of the convertible trust preferred securities represents an undivided beneficial interest in the assets of Trust I. The Company owns all of Trust I’s common securities. Trust I’s only assets will be the junior subordinated debentures issued to it by the Company on substantially the same payment terms as the convertible trust preferred securities.

The initial conversion ratio was 1.5151 shares of the Company’s common stock, $1.00 par value, for each trust preferred security (equivalent to a conversion price of approximately $33.00 per share), subject to adjustment as described in the offering memorandum. The conversion ratio at December 31, 2009 was 1.5375. The trust preferred securities were not redeemable prior to October 1, 2009, except that they may be redeemed at any time upon the occurrence of certain special events. The trust preferred securities may be redeemed in whole at any time or in part from time to time on or after October 1, 2009 if the closing price of BPFH’s common stock for 20 trading days in a period of 30 consecutive trading days ending on the trading day prior to the mailing of the redemption notice exceeds 130% of the then prevailing conversion price of the trust preferred securities. Assuming the remaining $60.5 million liquidation amount of convertible trust preferred securities are converted, the Company would issue approximately 1,860,339 shares of common stock, based on the December 31, 2009 conversion ratio.

The initial conversion ratio is subject to adjustment if the Company takes certain actions, including paying dividends to all holders of BPFH common stock, excluding any quarterly cash dividend on BPFH common stock to the extent that such quarterly cash dividend per share of BPFH common stock in any quarter does not exceed the greater of (i) $0.060 and (ii) 1.00% multiplied by the average of the daily closing prices per share of BPFH common stock for the ten consecutive trading days ending on the trading day immediately prior to the declaration date of the dividend. If an adjustment is required to be made as a result of a distribution that is a quarterly dividend, the adjustment would be based upon the amount by which the distribution exceeds the amount of the quarterly cash dividend permitted to be excluded.

 

115


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

 

The Company has the following covenants with regard to Trust I:

 

   

to cause Trust I to remain a statutory business Trust and not try to voluntarily dissolve, wind-up, liquidate, or terminate except as permitted by the Trust agreement;

 

   

to maintain directly or indirectly ownership of all of the common securities of Trust I;

 

   

to use its commercially reasonable efforts to ensure that Trust I will not be an “investment company” under the Investment Company Act of 1940, as amended from time to time, or any successor legislation; and

 

   

to take no action that would be reasonably likely to cause Trust I to be classified as an association or a partnership taxable as a corporation for U.S. federal income tax purposes.

At December 31, 2009, the Company was in compliance with the above covenants.

So long as the Company is not in default in the payment of interest on the junior subordinated convertible debentures, the Company has the right under the indenture to defer payments of interest. The Company has no current intention to exercise its right to defer interest payments on the junior subordinated convertible debentures issued to Trust I. If the Company defers interest payments, it would be subject to certain restrictions relating to the payment of dividends on or purchases of its capital stock and payments on its debt securities ranking equal with or junior to the junior subordinated convertible debentures.

Gibraltar junior subordinated debentures

The Company, through the acquisition of Gibraltar, assumed the outstanding amount of Gibraltar’s junior subordinated debentures of $16 million. The junior subordinated debentures assumed are a liability of the Holding Company. The disposition of Gibraltar in 2009 had no impact on these debentures. The trust preferred securities pay interest quarterly at a floating rate based on the three month LIBOR plus a margin of 2.27%, provided, however, that the interest rate does not exceed the highest rate permitted by New York law, and may be modified by the U.S. law of general application. The interest rate on December 31, 2009 was 2.54% based on the three month LIBOR as of November 19, 2009. The junior subordinated debentures will mature on February 23, 2035, and are fully redeemable as of February 23, 2010.

FPB junior subordinated debentures

The Company, through the acquisition of FPB, assumed the outstanding amount of FPB’s junior subordinated debentures of $6 million. The junior subordinated debentures assumed are a liability of the Holding Company. The regulatory capital benefit of these debentures is solely with BPFH. FPB has no liability related to these debentures and accordingly gets no regulatory capital benefit. The trust preferred securities have a floating rate based on the three month LIBOR plus a margin of 3.15% with a maximum rate of 11.75% and pay interest quarterly. The interest rate on December 31, 2009 was 3.40% based on the three month LIBOR as of December 23, 2009. The junior subordinated debentures will mature on March 26, 2033, and they may be redeemed, in whole or in part from time to time, upon the occurrence and continuation of certain special events.

Charter junior subordinated debentures

The Company, through the acquisition of Charter, assumed the outstanding amount of Charter’s junior subordinated debentures of $4 million. The junior subordinated debentures assumed are a liability of the Holding Company. The regulatory capital benefit of these debentures is solely with BPFH. Charter has no liability related to these debentures and accordingly gets no regulatory capital benefit. The trust preferred securities pay interest quarterly on January 7, April 7, July 7, and October 7, at a floating rate based on the three month LIBOR plus a

 

116


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

 

margin of 2.85%. The interest rate on December 31, 2009 was 3.13% based on the three month LIBOR as of October 13, 2009. The junior subordinated debentures will mature on January 7, 2034, and are currently redeemable.

Contingent Convertible Senior Notes

During 2008 and 2009, the Company repurchased its Convertible Senior Notes (the “Notes”) due 2027. In 2008, the Company repurchased $235.1 million of the Notes and recognized a $22.5 million gain on repurchase. In 2009, the Company repurchased the remaining $52.4 million of the Notes, and recognized a $0.4 million gain on repurchase.

The $287.5 million in Notes were initially sold to Merrill Lynch & Co., and RBC Capital Markets pursuant to Rule 144A under the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, in July 2007. The net proceeds from the offering, after deducting the initial purchasers’ discount of $2.9 million, or 1% of the total Notes, and the estimated offering expenses payable by the Company, was approximately $284.1 million. The Notes were senior, unsecured obligations of the Company and paid interest at 3.0% semi-annually on January 15 and July 15, beginning January 15, 2008.

Management has determined that each of the trusts qualify as variable interest entities under GAAP. The trusts issued preferred securities to investors and loaned the proceeds to the Company. Each of the trusts holds, as its sole asset, subordinated debentures issued by the Company.

In March 2005, the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System (“FRB”) adopted a final rule that would continue to allow the inclusion of trust preferred securities in Tier 1 capital, but with stricter quantitative limits. Under the final rule, after a five-year transition period, the aggregate amount of trust preferred securities and certain other capital elements would be limited to 25% of Tier 1 capital elements. The amount of trust preferred securities and certain other elements in excess of the limit could be included in Tier 2 capital, subject to restrictions.

15. NONCONTROLLING INTERESTS

Effective January 1, 2009, the Company adopted updates to ASC 810, Consolidation (formerly FAS 160, Noncontrolling Interests in Consolidated Financial Statements an amendment of ARB No. 51 ) (“ASC 810”), which affects the accounting, reporting and disclosure of the Company’s noncontrolling interests. More specifically, it establishes the accounting and reporting standards for noncontrolling interests in certain of the Company’s affiliates and for the deconsolidation of the affiliates under certain circumstances. It clarifies that, in general, a noncontrolling interest in an affiliate is an ownership interest in the consolidated entity that should be reported as equity in the consolidated balance sheets.

Also affected by this update was ASC 480, which requires that noncontrolling interests containing redemption features that make the interests probable to be redeemable at a fixed or determinable price on a fixed or determinable date, at the option of the holder, or upon the occurrence of an event that is not solely within the control of the issuer, be reported in a category outside permanent equity, between liabilities and equity on the consolidated balance sheets.

Redeemable noncontrolling interests have been reported at the estimated maximum redemption values for all periods presented in the accompanying consolidated balance sheets in accordance with the ASC 480.

ASC 810 changes the way the consolidated statement of operations is presented in the accompanying consolidated financial statements. It requires disclosure, on the face of the consolidated statements of operations, of the amounts of consolidated net income attributable to the Company and to the noncontrolling interests.

 

117


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

 

At the Company, noncontrolling interests typically consist of equity owned by management of the Company’s respective majority-owned affiliate partners. Net income attributable to noncontrolling interests in the consolidated statements of operations represents the net income allocated to the noncontrolling interest owners of the affiliate partners. The net income allocated to the noncontrolling interest owners was $3.6 million, $4.3 million and $4.0 million for the years ended December 31, 2009, 2008 and 2007, respectively. To the extent that the increase in the estimated maximum redemption amounts exceeds the net income attributable to the noncontrolling interests, such excess reduces net income available to common shareholders for purposes of EPS computations.

Noncontrolling interests which are not redeemable as provided in ASC 480 are included in stockholders’ equity in the consolidated balance sheets, and include the capital and undistributed profits owned by the noncontrolling partner. The Company did not have any noncontrolling interests included in stockholder’s equity at December 31, 2009 and had $3.5 million in noncontrolling interests at December 31, 2008. The $3.5 million at December 31, 2008 related to the noncontrolling interest of Westfield, which was disposed of during 2009.

Each affiliate operating agreement provides the Company and/or the noncontrolling interests with contingent call or put redemption features used for the orderly transfer of noncontrolling equity interests between the affiliate minority shareholders and the Company at fair value. Fair value is generally defined in the operating agreements as a multiple of earnings before interest, taxes, depreciation, and amortization. The aggregate amount of such redeemable noncontrolling interests at the estimated maximum redemption amounts of $51.9 million and $50.2 million are included in the accompanying consolidated balance sheets at December 31, 2009 and December 31, 2008, respectively. The Company may pay for the purchases of these noncontrolling interests in cash, shares of the Company’s common stock, or other forms of consideration dependent on the operating agreement.

The new provisions of ASC 810 have been applied prospectively as of January 1, 2009, except for the presentation and disclosure requirements. The presentation and disclosure requirements were applied retrospectively for all years presented in the accompanying consolidated financial statements.

Generally, these put and call options refer to shareholder rights of both the Company and the noncontrolling interests of the Company’s majority-owned affiliate companies. The affiliate company noncontrolling interests generally take the form of LLC units, profits interests, or common stock (collectively, the “noncontrolling equity interests”). In most circumstances, the put and call options generally relate to the Company’s right and, in some cases, obligation to purchase and the noncontrolling equity interests’ right to sell their equity interests. There are various events that could cause the puts or calls to be exercised, such as a change in control, death, disability, retirement, resignation or termination. The puts and calls are generally to be exercised at the then fair value. The terms of these rights vary and are governed by the respective individual operating and legal documents that were negotiated at the time of acquisition.

The following is a summary, by individual affiliate, of the terms of the put and call options:

KLS

The Company acquired an 81% interest in KLS on December 31, 2004. The transaction purchase price was approximately $30.0 million, with approximately 90% paid in cash and the remainder paid in the Company’s common stock. The estimated fair value to repurchase the remaining 19% of KLS’s equity was approximately $30.0 million and $25.0 million at December 31, 2009 and 2008, respectively.

At December 31, 2009, KLS had an option to put and the Company had an option to call, at a negotiated formula that was intended to reflect a fair market value at the time of the transaction, the remaining 19% interest

 

118


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

 

in KLS beginning in the first quarter of 2010. If the put or call was not exercised in the first quarter of 2010, the agreement specified that the put or call could be exercised in each successive even numbered year. KLS exercised their option to put on January 1, 2010. See Part II. Item 8. “Financial Statements and Supplementary Data—Note 26: Subsequent Events” for additional information.

DGHM

The Company acquired an 80% interest in DGHM on February 6, 2004. DGHM management and employees own the remaining 20% interest in DGHM. The agreement describes a process for the orderly transfer of noncontrolling equity interests between the Company and the DGHM minority shareholders at fair value, with appraisal rights for all parties. Certain events, such as a change in control, death, disability, retirement, resignation or termination may result in repurchase of the LLC units by the Company at the then fair value. DGHM noncontrolling equity interests’ units vest after five years. Beginning six months after vesting, a minority shareholder may put up to 10%-20% of his or her outstanding units annually to the Company. The six-month holding period ensures the risks and rewards of ownership are transferred to the noncontrolling equity interests. Beginning in December 2009, the Company has an annual call right under which it may elect to repurchase 10-20% of the non-management and management members’ vested units. No more than 40% of the outstanding noncontrolling equity interests’ units can be put in any one year. The noncontrolling equity interests must retain 50% of their total outstanding units until such time as they leave the firm. The estimated fair value to repurchase the remaining 20% of DGHM’s equity is approximately $1.8 million and $1.0 million as of December 31, 2009 and 2008, respectively.

Anchor

The Company, through its acquisition of Anchor, has acquired approximately an 80% interest in each of Anchor Capital Advisors and Anchor Russell on June 1, 2006. Anchor Capital Advisors and Anchor Russell management and employees, respectively, own the remaining 20% noncontrolling equity interests of each firm. The purchase agreement describes a process for the orderly transfer of noncontrolling equity interests between the Company and the Anchor Capital and Anchor Russell minority shareholders at fair value, with appraisal rights for all parties. Certain events, such as death, disability, retirement, resignation or termination may result in repurchase of the noncontrolling equity interests by the Company at the then fair value. These noncontrolling equity interests have a five-year vesting period. Beginning six months after vesting, a holder of noncontrolling equity interests may put up to 10% of his or her outstanding equity interests annually to the Company. The six-month holding period ensures the risks and rewards of ownership are transferred to the holder of the noncontrolling equity interests. Holders of noncontrolling equity interests must retain 50% of their total outstanding units until such time as they leave the firm. The estimated fair value to repurchase the remaining 20% of Anchor’s and Anchor Russell’s noncontrolling equity interests is approximately $13.0 million and $17.4 million, as of December 31, 2009 and 2008, respectively.

BOS

The Company has acquired approximately 70% of BOS through a series of purchases dating back to February 5, 2004. The BOS operating agreement provides for, upon the occurrence of certain events, various puts, calls, restrictions, and limitations on the transfer of noncontrolling equity interests, including certain purchase rights of noncontrolling equity interests at fair value.

The BOS operating agreement describes a procedure for the orderly transfer of noncontrolling equity interests between the BOS minority shareholders and the Company at fair value, with appraisal rights for all parties. The estimated fair value to repurchase the contractually obligated number of noncontrolling equity interests held by the noncontrolling interests is approximately $5.2 million and $4.8 million as of December 31, 2009 and 2008, respectively.

 

119


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

 

DTC

The Company acquired a 70.1% interest in DTC on February 1, 2008. DTC management and employees own the remaining 30% interest in the firm. The purchase agreement describes a procedure for the orderly transfer of shares between the Company and DTC noncontrolling equity interests at fair value. Certain events, such as death, incapacity, retirement, bankruptcy, resignation or termination may result in repurchase of noncontrolling equity interests by the Company at the then fair value. The purchase agreements provide a formulaic mechanism to determine fair value. The estimated fair value to repurchase the remaining 30% of DTC’s noncontrolling equity interests is approximately $1.8 million and $2.0 million as of December 31, 2009 and 2008, respectively.

The following table is an analysis of the Company’s redeemable noncontrolling interests for the periods indicated:

 

     2009     2008     2007  
   (In thousands)  

Balance at beginning of year

   $ 50,167      $ 48,814      $ 44,631   

Net income attributable to noncontrolling interests

     3,649        4,327        3,987   

Distributions

     (2,663     (4,621     (5,366

Other

     (1,520     (782     (1,031

Adjustment to fair value

     2,217        2,429        6,593   
                        

Balance at end of year

   $ 51,850      $ 50,167      $ 48,814   
                        

16. EQUITY

Preferred Stock and Related Warrants

On July 29, 2008, the Company entered into an investment agreement with The Carlyle Group (“Carlyle”) to obtain approximately $75 million in capital. Under that agreement, the Company issued approximately 351 shares of Series A Non-Cumulative Mandatorily Convertible Preferred Stock (“Series A Preferred”) to Carlyle with a liquidation preference of $100,000 per share and convertible into approximately 6.3 million common shares. The Series A Preferred had a par value of $1.00 per share, was convertible into common stock at $5.52 per share, and participated in dividends payable in common stock on an as-converted basis. The shares were perpetual and did not include any redemption provisions. All of the Series A Preferred converted into shares of the Company’s common stock effective October 1, 2008.

The Company also issued to Carlyle approximately 401 shares of Series B Preferred with a liquidation preference of $100,000 per share that is convertible into approximately 7.2 million common shares. The Series B Preferred has a par value of $1.00 per share, is convertible into common stock at $5.52 per share, and participates in dividends payable in common stock on an as-converted basis. There are no mandatory redemption features and preferred stockholders have no rights to require redemption. The conversion price was able to be adjusted upon various changes in outstanding shares of the Company such as the declaration of stock dividends, stock splits, issuance of stock purchase rights, self-tender offers, or a rights plan.

In connection with the preferred stock issuance, Carlyle was issued warrants (the “Carlyle warrants”) to purchase 5.4 million shares of common stock at a price of $6.62 per share. The Carlyle warrants are exercisable at any time, in whole or in part, over the five year term of the warrants.

The Company determined that the Carlyle warrants meet the definition of a derivative instrument under GAAP but do not require derivative treatment pursuant to certain scope exceptions as they are indexed to the Company’s common stock and are classified in the stockholders’ equity section of the consolidated balance

 

120


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

 

sheets. As of the date of issuance, the Company did not have sufficient authorized but unissued common shares for issuance upon exercise of the Carlyle warrants. Therefore, the Company classified the Carlyle warrants as a liability. At issuance, the Carlyle warrants were valued at $3.51 per warrant, $19.1 million in total, using the Black-Scholes option pricing model with the following assumptions: 0.50% dividend yield; risk free rate of 3.30%; volatility of 39.2% and a contractual life of five years. On September 30, 2008, stockholders approved an increase in the Company’s authorized shares.

The Company allocated $19.1 million of the proceeds to the Carlyle warrants based on the fair value of the Carlyle warrants at the date of issuance. The remaining $56.0 million was allocated to the Series A Preferred and the Series B Preferred based upon their relative fair values at the closing date. Net of transaction fees, approximately $22.8 million of the proceeds was allocated to the Series A Preferred and $26.3 million was allocated to the Series B Preferred.

On September 30, 2008, the Company’s stockholders approved an amendment to the Company’s Restated Articles of Organization to increase the number of authorized shares of common stock from 70 million to 170 million. The Company’s stockholders also approved the future conversion of the Series B Preferred Stock into common stock and the exercise of the Carlyle warrants to purchase common stock. The conversion of the Series B Preferred stock and exercise of the Carlyle warrants may take place in accordance with their terms and subject to certain common stock ownership limitations. On that date, the Company had sufficient authorized but unissued shares for settlement of the Carlyle warrants and reclassified the Carlyle warrants as equity at their then fair value. The fair value of the Carlyle warrants on September 30, 2008 was $3.92 per warrant, or $21.3 million in total, using the Black-Scholes option pricing model with the following assumptions: 0.47% dividend yield; risk free rate of 2.88%; volatility of 41.4% and a contractual life of five years. An expense of $2.2 million was recognized in 2008 due to the change in the fair value of the Carlyle warrants during the period they were classified as a liability, which is recorded as “Warrant expense” on the 2008 consolidated statement of operations.

After allocation of the proceeds, the Company evaluated the effective conversion price of the preferred securities and concluded that they were issued in the money. The resulting discount to the fair value of the Company’s stock price on the date of issuance is accounted for as a beneficial conversion feature. The beneficial conversion feature is treated as a dividend to the preferred stockholder and accreted over the period of issuance to the earliest conversion date using the effective interest method. The Series A Preferred converted into shares of the Company’s common stock on October 1, 2008 and the Series B Preferred became convertible as of December 31, 2009 after a December 2009 amendment to the original agreement accelerating the earliest conversion date by one month. The accretion of the beneficial conversion feature on the Series B Preferred is a non-cash transaction which increases preferred stock and reduces additional paid in capital and income available to common shareholders.

On November 21, 2008, the Company entered into an investment agreement with the U.S. Department of the Treasury (the “Treasury”) and received in exchange $154 million (the “TARP agreement”). The TARP agreement was entered into under the Capital Purchase Program (“CPP”), which is a component of the Troubled Asset Relief Program (“TARP”) which in turn was created under the Emergency Economic Stabilization Act of 2008. Under the TARP agreement, the Company issued 154,000 shares of Series C Fixed Rate Cumulative Perpetual Preferred Stock (the “Series C Preferred”) to the Treasury. Subject to consultation with the FRB, the Series C Preferred may be redeemed without regard to whether the Company has replaced such funds from any other source or to any waiting period. There is no conversion feature on the Series C Preferred. Dividends on the Series C Preferred are paid quarterly on a cumulative basis at an annual rate of 5% through February 15, 2014 and at 9% thereafter. Importantly, the TARP Agreement may be unilaterally amended by the Treasury. It is likely that new obligations, such as a requirement to establish a foreclosure relief program or to increase lending levels, may be imposed on CPP participants. Accordingly, the Company or the Banks may be subject to further restrictions or obligations as a result of their participation in the CPP.

 

121


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

 

In connection with the preferred stock issuance, the Company issued Treasury warrants to purchase approximately 2.9 million shares of common stock at a price of $8.00 per share (the “TARP warrants”). The term of the TARP warrants is ten years. 50% of the TARP warrants are immediately exercisable, and the remaining 50% of the TARP warrants became exercisable on December 31, 2009.

The Company determined that the TARP warrants met the definition of a derivative instrument under GAAP, but do not require derivative treatment pursuant to certain scope exceptions as they are indexed to the Company’s common stock and are classified in the stockholders’ equity section of the balance sheet. As of the date of issuance, the Company had sufficient authorized but unissued common shares for issuance upon exercise of the TARP warrants. Therefore, the Company classified the TARP warrants as equity. At issuance, the TARP warrants were valued at $2.65 per warrant, or $7.6 million in total, using the Black-Scholes option pricing model with the following assumptions: 0.71% dividend yield; risk free rate of 3.53%; volatility of 44.72% and a contractual life of ten years.

The Company allocated $9.3 million of the proceeds to the TARP warrants based on the relative fair value of the TARP warrants at the date of issuance. Net of transaction fees, the remaining $144.5 million was allocated to the Series C Preferred based upon the relative fair value at the date of issuance.

The discount on the Series C Preferred created by the TARP warrants is being amortized over the period from issuance through the date of the rate increase, February 15, 2014. If the Company repurchases all or a portion of the Series C Preferred, a proportionate amount of the unamortized discount will be accelerated upon repurchase. The accretion of the discount on the Series C Preferred is a non-cash transaction which increases preferred stock and reduces additional paid in capital and income available to common shareholders.

Both classes of preferred shares rank on parity with other classes or series of preferred shares and senior to any common shares with respect to dividends and upon liquidation or winding up of the Company.

Common Stock

In July 2008, the Company completed a public offering of its common stock in which 18.4 million shares were sold to the public at a price of $6.00 per share, for total gross proceeds of approximately $110.4 million, and net proceeds of $104.9 million.

17. INCOME TAXES

The components of income tax expense/(benefit) for continuing operations are as follows:

 

     Year Ended December 31,  
   2009     2008     2007  
     (In thousands)  

Current expense/(benefit):

      

Federal

   $ 4,757      $ (55,926   $ 14,580   

State

     3,105        1,279        3,400   
                        

Total current expense/(benefit)

     7,862        (54,647     17,980   
                        

Deferred expense/(benefit):

      

Federal

     (4,968     (10,824     (19,262

State

     (1,262     (5,266     (5,057
                        

Total deferred (benefit)/expense

     (6,230     (16,090     (24,319
                        

Income tax expense/(benefit)

   $ 1,632      $ (70,737   $ (6,339
                        

 

122


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

 

Income tax expense/(benefit) attributable to income/(loss) from continuing operations differs from the amounts computed by applying the Federal statutory rate to pretax income/(loss) from continuing operations. The valuation allowance recorded on capital losses that exceeded capital gains is recorded to discontinued operations, and therefore not reflected in the effective tax rate reconciliation presented below for continuing operations. Reconciliations between the expected Federal income tax expense using the Federal statutory rate of 35% to actual income tax expense/(benefit) and resulting effective income tax rates for 2009, 2008 and 2007 are as follows:

 

     Year Ended December 31,  
       2009             2008             2007      

Statutory Federal income tax rate

   35.0   35.0   35.0

Increase (decrease) resulting from:

      

Nondeductible goodwill

   0.0   -11.7   0.0

Tax exempt interest, net

   -18.6   1.3   -99.1

Non deductible compensation

   6.9   -0.2   14.0

Officers life insurance

   -2.8   0.3   -19.8

State and local income tax, net of Federal tax benefit

   6.7   1.0   -32.2

Tax credits

   -7.3   0.5   -40.2

Noncontrolling interest

   -7.1   0.6   -41.8

Prior year provision to return differences

   -5.9   0.1   -2.3

Tax contingencies

   0.0   0.3   -9.2

Meals and entertainment

   0.9   -0.1   5.3

Other, net

   1.3   -0.3   0.6
                  

Effective income tax rate

   9.1   26.8   -189.7
                  

On July 3, 2008, Massachusetts enacted legislation that requires corporations that are engaged in unitary business operations to file combined returns with their affiliates for tax years beginning on or after January 1, 2009. Starting in 2009, all of the affiliates will be included in the BPFH Massachusetts tax return instead of just those affiliates with nexus to Massachusetts. In addition, the Massachusetts excise tax on financial institutions will be reduced to 10% in 2010, 9.5% in 2011, and 9% in 2012 and thereafter. The Company incorporated the impact of these Massachusetts law changes in the third quarter of 2008 since the law was changed during the third quarter of 2008. The Company adjusted the Massachusetts state applicable rate for purposes of measuring the deferred tax assets and liabilities that will reverse after the effective date. The value of the net deferred state tax asset as of July 3, 2008 was reduced by $0.8 million which increased tax expense by $0.5 million, net of federal tax savings.

 

123


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

 

The components of gross deferred tax assets and gross deferred tax liabilities are as follows:

 

     December 31,
2009
   December 31,
2008
   (In thousands)

Gross deferred tax assets:

     

Allowance for loan losses

   $ 21,153    $ 16,977

Allowance for losses on OREO

     2,647      877

Stock compensation

     11,393      10,763

Goodwill and acquired intangible assets

     18,365      15,052

Deferred and accrued compensation

     3,021      6,029

State loss carryforward, net of federal

     2,199      2,010

Capital loss carryforward

     12,834      —  

Mark to market on securities available for sale

     2,855      —  

Other

     3,585      2,357
             

Gross deferred tax assets

     78,052      54,065

Less: valuation allowance

     14,523      1,570
             

Total deferred tax assets

     63,529      52,495
             

Gross deferred tax liabilities:

     

Unrealized gain on investments

     4,376      2,833

Other

     2,544      2,667
             

Total gross deferred tax liabilities

     6,920      5,500
             

Net deferred tax asset

   $ 56,609    $ 46,995
             

In accordance with ASC 740, Income Taxes (formerly FAS 109, Accounting for Income Taxes ), deferred tax assets are to be reduced by a valuation allowance if, based on the weight of available evidence, it is more likely than not that some portion or all of the deferred tax assets will not be realized. The realization of the tax benefit depends upon the existence of sufficient taxable income within the carry-back and carry-forward periods.

The Company was profitable in 2009 and exhibited a strong earnings history before 2008. The Company recognized a loss in 2008, which was partly comprised of losses attributable to discontinued operations. Further, the 2008 loss attributable to continuing operations included items such as goodwill and intangible impairment charges of $133.2 million and losses on the sale of non-strategic loans in Southern California of $160.6 million. These losses will not affect future earnings. Due to the continued historical ability of the Company to generate taxable income, management believes it is more likely than not that the balance of deferred tax assets at December 31, 2009 is realizable with the exception of capital losses.

A deferred tax asset of $1.6 million was created in 2008 when impairment was recognized for the goodwill and intangibles at BPFH’s equity method investment, Coldstream. BPFH has fewer tax planning opportunities to avoid capital loss treatment where it holds a minority ownership position, so a valuation allowance of $1.6 million was established for the potential capital loss related to Coldstream. A deferred tax asset of $12.8 million was created in 2009 due to the capital loss incurred on the sale of Gibraltar in excess of the capital gain recognized on the sale of RINET. Capital losses are deductible only to the extent of offsetting capital gains and the Company has limited ability to generate capital gains. As such, a valuation allowance of $12.8 million was established for the net capital loss incurred on the sale of Gibraltar. The Company believes it is more likely than not that the deferred tax asset related to capital losses will not be realized and has recorded a valuation allowance of $14.5 million and $1.6 million at December 31, 2009 and 2008, respectively, attributable to deferred tax assets on these capital losses.

 

124


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

 

The Company believes the existing net deductible temporary differences that give rise to the net deferred tax asset, excluding the capital losses, will reverse in future periods when the Company expects to generate net taxable income. BPFH would need to generate approximately $142.0 million of future net taxable income to realize the net deferred tax asset at December 31, 2009. The Company believes that it is more likely than not that the net deferred tax asset, excluding the capital losses, will be realized based on the expected generation of future taxable income.

Included in deferred taxes at December 31, 2009 is a $3.3 million California loss carryover. California has suspended the use of loss carryovers until 2010 but allows the loss to carry-forward for 20 years. The Company believes that it is more likely than not that the full amount of the California loss carryover will be utilized before it expires.

The Company adopted the provisions of ASC 740-10, Income Taxes , (formerly FASB Interpretation No. 48, Accounting for Uncertainty in Income Taxes) , on January 1, 2007. A reconciliation of the beginning and ending amount of unrecognized tax benefits is as follows:

 

     2009     2008     2007  
     (In thousands)  

Balance at January 1

   $ 350      $ 1,142      $ 1,185   

Additions based on tax positions related to the current year

     97        166        152   

Decreases based on tax positions taken in prior years

     —          (850     —     

Expiration of statute of limitations

     (97     (108     (266

Acquisition of Charter

     —          —          71   
                        

Balance at December 31

   $ 350      $ 350      $ 1,142   
                        

The amount of unrecognized tax benefit which, if recognized, would affect the effective tax rate is $0.3 million at December 31, 2009 and December 31, 2008 and $1.1 million at December 31, 2007. The Company classifies interest and penalties, if applicable, related to unrecognized tax benefits as a component of income tax expense in the consolidated statement of operations. Interest and penalties recognized as part of the Company’s income tax expense for the years ending December 31, 2009, 2008, and 2007 were not material.

Income tax returns filed for the tax years ended December 31, 2008, 2007 and 2006 remain subject to examination by the Internal Revenue Service and various other state tax authorities. The Company is currently under examination by the Internal Revenue Service for the tax year ended December 31, 2008. Based upon the timing and status of the current examinations by taxing authorities, the Company does not expect that the amounts of unrecognized tax benefits will change significantly within the next twelve months.

18. EMPLOYEE BENEFITS

Employee 401(k) Profit Sharing Plan

The Company established a corporate-wide 401(k) Profit Sharing Plan for the benefit of the employees of the Company and its affiliates, which became effective on July 1, 2002. The Plan is a 401(k) savings and retirement plan that is designed to qualify as an ERISA section 404(c) plan. The assets of the Charter Bank 401(k) plan and the Davidson Trust Company 401(k) plan were merged into this Plan during 2009. The employees of BOS joined the Plan as new participants on January 1, 2009. Generally, employees that are at least twenty-one (21) years of age are eligible to participate in the plan on their date of hire. Employee contributions may be matched based on a predetermined formula and additional discretionary contributions may be made. Consolidated 401(k) expenses for all plans were $2.3 million, $2.7 million, and $1.9 million, in 2009, 2008, and 2007, respectively.

 

125


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

 

Salary Continuation Plans

Borel maintains a discretionary salary continuation plan for certain officers. The officers become eligible for benefits under the salary continuation plan if they reach a defined retirement age while working for Borel. In December 1990, Borel implemented a discretionary deferred compensation plan for directors. The compensation expense relating to each contract is accounted for individually and on an accrual basis. The expense relating to these plans was $0.2 million, $0.2 million, and $0.3 million, for 2009, 2008, and 2007, respectively. The amount recognized in other liabilities was $2.2 million and $2.3 million at December 31, 2009 and 2008, respectively. Borel has purchased life insurance contracts to help fund these plans. Borel has single premium life insurance policies with cash surrender values totaling $5.7 million and $5.5 million, which are included in other assets on the accompanying consolidated balance sheets, as of December 31, 2009 and 2008, respectively.

FPB maintains a discretionary salary continuation plan for certain officers. The plan provides for payments to the participants at the age of retirement. The expense relating to these plans was $0.2 million, $0.2 million, and $0.2 million, for 2009, 2008, and 2007, respectively. The net amount recognized in other liabilities was $1.9 million and $1.7 million at December 31, 2009 and 2008, respectively. FPB has purchased life insurance contracts to help fund these plans. These life insurance policies have cash surrender values totaling $4.4 million and $4.3 million, which are included in other assets on the accompanying consolidated balance sheets as of December 31, 2009 and 2008, respectively.

Deferred Compensation Plan

The Company offers a deferred compensation plan that enables certain executives to elect to defer a portion of their compensation. The amounts deferred are excluded from the employee’s taxable income and are not deductible for income tax purposes by the Company until paid. The employee selects from a limited number of mutual funds and the deferred liability is increased or decreased to correspond to the market value of these underlying hypothetical mutual fund investments. The increase in value is recognized as compensation expense. The Company established and funded a Rabbi Trust to offset this liability. The Rabbi Trust holds similar assets and approximately mirrors the activity in the hypothetical mutual funds. Increases and decreases in the value of the mutual funds in the Rabbi Trust are recognized in other income.

Stock-Based Incentive Plans

At December 31, 2009, the Company has three stock-based compensation plans. These plans encourage and enable the officers, employees, non-employee directors, and other key persons of the Company to acquire a proprietary interest in the Company.

The 2009 Stock Option and Incentive Plan (the “Plan”), replaced the Company’s 2004 Stock Option and Incentive Plan. Under the Plan the Company may grant options, stock appreciation rights, restricted stock, restricted stock units, unrestricted stock awards, performance share awards and dividend equivalent rights to its officers, employees, non-employee directors, and other key persons of the Company for an amount not to exceed 2% of the total shares of common stock outstanding as of the last business day of the preceding fiscal year. The Plan provides for the authorization and issuance of 4,000,000 shares, along with any residual shares from previous plans. Under the Plan, the exercise price of each option shall not be less than 100% of the fair market value of the stock on the date the options are granted. Generally, options expire ten years from the date granted and vest over a three-year graded vesting period for officers and employees and a one-year or less period for non-employee directors. Stock grants generally vest over a three year cliff vesting period. As of December 31, 2009 the maximum number of shares of stock reserved and available for issuance under the plan was 4,036,345 shares.

The Company maintains both a qualified and non-qualified Employee Stock Purchase Plan (“the ESPPs”) with similar provisions. The non-qualified plan was approved in 2006 and allows for employees of certain

 

126


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

 

subsidiaries that are structured as limited liability companies to participate. Under the ESPPs, eligible employees may purchase common stock of the Company at 85 percent of the lower of the closing price of the Company’s common stock on the first or last day of a six month purchase period on The NASDAQ ® Stock Market. Employees pay for their stock purchases through payroll deductions at a rate equal to any whole percentage from 1 percent to 15 percent of after-tax earnings. Participants have a right to a full reimbursement of ESPP deferrals through the end of the offering period. Such a reimbursement would result in a reversal of the compensation expense, previously recorded, attributed to that participant. The Company issues shares under the ESPPs in January and July of each year. As of December 31, 2008 there were 43,983 and 193,548 shares available for issuance in the non-qualified and qualified ESPP plans, respectively. There were 15,995 shares issued to participants under the non-qualified ESPP plan in 2009 and 27,989 shares available for issuance at December 31, 2009. There were 253,030 shares issued to participants under the qualified ESPP in July 2009, of which 193,548 were issued from the qualified ESPP and the remaining 59,482 shares were issued to employees from the Plan.

Share-based payments recorded in salaries and benefits expense are as follows:

 

     Year Ended December 31,
   2009    2008    2007
     (In thousands)

Stock option and ESPP expense

   $ 2,807    $ 4,293    $ 4,640

Nonvested share expense

     2,315      2,525      2,340
                    

Subtotal

     5,122      6,818      6,980
                    

Tax benefit

     1,800      2,633      2,723
                    

Stock-based compensation expense, net of tax benefit

   $ 3,322    $ 4,185    $ 4,257
                    

The fair value of each stock option award is estimated on the date of grant using the Black-Scholes option pricing model that uses the assumptions noted in the table below. Expected volatility is determined based on historical volatility of the Company’s stock, historical volatility of industry peers, and other factors. The Company uses historical data to estimate employee option exercise behavior and post-vesting cancellation for use in determining the expected life assumption. The risk-free rate is determined on the grant date of each award using the yield on a U.S. Treasury zero-coupon issue with a remaining term that approximates the expected term for the award. The dividend yield is based on expectations of future dividends paid by the Company and the market price of the Company’s stock on the date of grant. Compensation expense is recognized using the straight-line method over the vesting period of the option or the retirement eligible date, whichever is shorter. Options issued to retirement eligible employees are expensed on the date of grant.

The fair value of each option grant is estimated on the date of grant using the Black-Scholes option-pricing model with the following assumptions:

 

     Year Ended December 31,  
     2009         2008         2007    

Expected volatility

   55.2   38.4   30.0

Expected dividend yield

   0.8   1.2   1.5

Expected term (in years)

   6.4      6.4      6.2   

Risk-free rate

   3.2   3.3   4.8

 

127


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

 

Stock Options

A summary of option activity under the Plan for the year ended December 31, 2009 is as follows:

 

     Shares    Weighted-
Average
Exercise
Price
   Weighted-
Average
Remaining

Contractual
Term in
Years
   Aggregate
Intrinsic Value
(in 000’s)

Outstanding at January 1, 2009

   5,464,138    $ 20.99      

Granted

   300,936    $ 4.94      

Exercised

   7,582    $ 4.23      

Forfeited or expired

   836,167    $ 19.02      
                 

Outstanding at December 31, 2009

   4,921,325    $ 20.33    5.46    $ 327
                 

Exercisable at December 31, 2009

   3,868,458    $ 22.19    4.62    $ 107

The weighted-average grant-date fair value of options granted during the years ended December 31, 2009, 2008, and 2007 was $2.58, $3.57, and $9.85, respectively. The total intrinsic value of options exercised during the years ended December 31, 2009, 2008, and 2007 was less than $0.1 million, $1.5 million, and $5.0 million, respectively. As of December 31, 2009, there was $2.1 million of total unrecognized compensation cost related to stock option arrangements granted under the Plan that is expected to be recognized over a weighted-average period of 1.5 years.

Restricted Stock

A summary of the Company’s nonvested shares as of December 31, 2009 and changes during the year ended December 31, 2009 is as follows:

 

     Shares    Weighted-
Average
Grant-
Date Fair
Value

Nonvested at January 1, 2009

   492,546    $ 18.59

Granted

   697,327    $ 4.97

Vested

   159,398    $ 23.26

Forfeited

   2,246    $ 12.24
       

Nonvested at December 31, 2009

   1,028,229    $ 8.95
       

The fair value of nonvested shares is determined based on the closing price of the Company’s stock on the grant date. The weighted-average grant-date fair value of shares granted during the year ended December 31, 2009, 2008, and 2007 was $4.97, $11.93, and $28.49, respectively. At December 31, 2009, there was $4.1 million of total unrecognized compensation cost related to nonvested share-based compensation arrangements under the Plan. That cost is expected to be recognized over a weighted-average period of 1.7 years. The total fair value of shares that vested during the years ended December 31, 2009, 2008, and 2007 was $3.7 million, $3.0 million, and $5.2 million, respectively.

Included in the restricted stock balances above are performance shares, which are accounted for in the same manner as restricted stock. In 2009 there were 112,469 performance shares granted to certain executives within the Company. The amount of the performance shares could increase up to 202,444 shares. The Company recognizes the expense for performance shares based upon the most likely outcome of shares to be issued based on current information.

 

128


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

 

Supplemental Executive Retirement Plan

The Company has a non-qualified supplemental executive retirement plan (“SERP”) with an executive officer of the Company. The SERP, which is unfunded, provides a defined cash benefit based on a formula using average compensation, years of service, and age at retirement of the executive. The agreement was amended in July 2004 and then revised February of 2007. Expected benefits were increased and the full vesting age was increased to age 70. The actuarial present value of the projected benefit obligation was $7.5 million at both December 31, 2009 and 2008. The accrued SERP liability was $6.6 million and $6.2 million at December 31, 2009 and 2008, respectively. The expense associated with the SERP was $0.5 million, $1.1 million and $1.1 million in 2009, 2008 and 2007, respectively. The benefit will be fully accrued by November 2011. The discount rate used to calculate the SERP liability was 5.50%, 5.75%, and 5.75% for the 2009, 2008 and 2007, respectively.

Charter has a SERP with various current and previous executives of Charter. The SERP, which is unfunded, provides a defined cash benefit based on a formula using compensation, years of service, and age at retirement of the executives. The actuarial present value of the projected benefit obligation was $3.1 million at both December 31, 2009 and 2008. The accrued SERP liability was $3.1 million and $1.3 million at December 31, 2009 and 2008, respectively. The expense associated with the SERP was $0.6 million, $0.3 million and $0.1 million in 2009, 2008 and 2007, respectively. The benefits for each executive under the plan are accrued until the full vesting age of 65. The discount rate used to calculate the SERP liability was 6.50%, 6.50%, and 6.50% for the years 2009, 2008 and 2007, respectively.

19. OTHER OPERATING EXPENSE

Major components of other operating expense are as follows:

 

     Year Ended December 31,
   2009    2008    2007
          (In thousands)     

Insurance

   $ 3,025    $ 2,482    $ 1,989

OREO and repossessed asset expenses

     2,048      1,470      267

Forms and supplies

     1,415      1,391      1,337

Telephone

     1,145      1,098      860

Employee travel and meals

     1,932      1,781      1,220

Courier and express mail

     805      957      905

Publications and dues

     818      851      678

Training and education

     658      691      627

Postage

     666      653      633

Correspondent bank charges

     979      429      284

Other

     3,634      3,689      3,226
                    

Total

   $ 17,125    $ 15,492    $ 12,026
                    

20. FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS WITH OFF-BALANCE SHEET RISK

The Company is party to financial instruments with off-balance sheet risk in the normal course of business to meet the financing needs of its customers. These financial instruments include commitments to originate loans, unadvanced portion of loans, unused lines of credit, standby letters of credit, commitments to sell loans, and rate locks related to loans that if originated will be held for sale. The instruments involve, to varying degrees, elements of credit and interest rate risk in excess of the amount recognized in the consolidated balance sheets. The contract or notional amounts of those instruments reflect the extent of involvement the Company has in particular classes of financial instruments.

 

129


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

 

The Company’s exposure to credit loss in the event of nonperformance by the other party to the financial instrument for loan commitments and standby letters of credit is represented by the contractual amount of those instruments. The Company uses the same credit policies in making commitments and conditional obligations as it does for on-balance sheet instruments.

Commitments to originate loans, the unadvanced portion of loans, and the unused lines of credit are agreements to lend to a customer, provided there is no violation of any condition established in the contract. Commitments generally have fixed expiration dates or other termination clauses and may require payment of a fee. Since certain commitments may expire without being drawn upon, the total commitment amounts do not necessarily represent future cash requirements. The Company evaluates each customer’s creditworthiness on a case-by-case basis. The amount of collateral obtained, if deemed necessary by the Company upon extension of credit, is based on management’s credit evaluation of the borrower.

Standby letters of credit are conditional commitments issued by the Company to guarantee the performance by a customer to a third party. The credit risk involved in issuing standby letters of credit is essentially the same as that involved in extending loan facilities to customers.

Loans sold to investors have recourse to the Company on any loans that are deemed to have been fraudulent or misrepresented. In addition, investors would require the Company to repurchase any loan sold which has a first payment default.

Financial instruments with off-balance sheet risk are summarized as follows:

 

     December 31,
2009
   December 31,
2008
     (In thousands)

Commitments to originate loans

     

Variable rate

   $ 47,951    $ 78,355

Fixed rate

     24,767      23,506
             

Total commitments to originate new loans

   $ 72,718    $ 101,861
             

Unadvanced portion of loans and unused lines of credit

   $ 831,613    $ 882,856

Standby letters of credit

   $ 29,432    $ 33,292

Forward commitments to sell loans

   $ 30,722    $ 39,322

21. FAIR VALUE OF FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS

Fair Value is defined under GAAP as the exchange price that would be received to sell an asset or paid to transfer a liability (an exit price) in an orderly transaction between market participants on the measurement date. The Company determines the fair values of its financial instruments based on the fair value hierarchy established in ASC 820, which requires an entity to maximize the use of observable inputs and minimize the use of unobservable inputs when measuring fair value. ASC 820 describes three levels of inputs that may be used to measure fair value. Financial instruments are considered Level 1 when valuation can be based on quoted prices in active markets for identical assets or liabilities. Level 2 financial instruments are valued using quoted prices for similar assets or liabilities; quoted prices in markets that are not active; or models using inputs that are observable or can be corroborated by observable market data of substantially the full term of the assets or liabilities. Financial instruments are considered Level 3 when their values are determined using pricing models, discounted cash flow methodologies or similar techniques and at least one significant model assumption or input is unobservable and when determination of the fair value requires significant management judgment or estimation.

 

130


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

 

The following table presents the Company’s assets and liabilities measured at fair value on a recurring basis as of December 31, 2009 and December 31, 2008, aggregated by the level in the fair value hierarchy within which those measurements fall.

 

     At
December 31,
2009
   Fair value measurements at reporting date using:
      Quoted prices in
active markets
for identical
assets (level 1)
   Significant other
observable
inputs (level 2)
   Significant
unobservable
inputs (level 3)
   (In thousands)

Assets:

           

Available for sale securities:

           

Mortgage-backed securities

   $ 311,511    $ —      $ 308,360    $ 3,151

Government-sponsored entities

     188,394      —        188,394      —  

U.S. government and agencies

     184,722      178,048      6,674      —  

Municipal bonds

     184,544      —        184,544      —  

Corporate bonds

     15,943      —        15,943      —  

Other

     2,918      412      2,006      500
                           

Total available for sale securities

     888,032      178,460      705,921      3,651

Derivatives—interest rate floor

     2,646      —        2,646      —  

Derivatives—customer swaps

     4,924      —        4,924      —  

Other investments

     9,628      4,176      5,452      —  

Liabilities:

           

Derivatives—customer swaps*

   $ 5,053    $ —      $ 5,053    $ —  

 

* Derivatives-customer swap (liabilities) is netted with the Derivative assets within Other assets on the consolidated balance sheets.

 

          Fair value measurements at reporting date using:
   At
December 31,
2008
   Quoted prices in
active markets
for identical
assets (level 1)
   Significant other
observable inputs

(level 2)
   Significant
unobservable
inputs (level 3)
   (In thousands)

Assets:

           

Available for sale securities

           

Mortgage-backed securities

   $ 281,355    $ —      $ 281,355    $ —  

Government-sponsored entities

     268,570      —        268,570      —  

Municipal bonds

     212,943      —        212,943      —  

Corporate bonds

     23,233      —        23,233      —  

U.S. government and agencies

     8,574      —        8,574      —  

Other

     4,351      —        4,351      —  
                           

Total available for sale securities

     799,026      —        799,026      —  

Derivatives—interest rate floor

     5,260      —        5,260      —  

Derivatives—customer swaps

     7,762      —        7,762      —  

Other investments

     7,441      3,084      4,357      —  

Liabilities:

           

Derivative—customer swaps*

   $ 7,698    $ —      $ 7,698    $ —  

 

* Derivatives-customer swap (liabilities) is netted with the Derivative assets within Other assets on the consolidated balance sheets.

 

131


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

 

Available for sale securities consist primarily of U.S. government and agency securities, government-sponsored entities, municipal bonds, mortgage-backed securities (primarily residential), corporate bonds, and other investments. The U.S. government securities, and equities and mutual funds (which are categorized as other investments) are valued with prices quoted in active markets. Therefore, they have been categorized as a Level 1 measurement. The government-sponsored entities, corporate bonds, municipal bonds, most of the mortgage-backed securities, and certain investments in SBA loans (which are categorized as other investments) generally have quoted prices but are traded less frequently than exchange-traded securities and can be priced using market data from similar assets. Therefore, they have been categorized as a Level 2 measurement. The remaining investments—one mortgage-backed security and two CRA loan funds (which are categorized as other investments) have unobservable inputs and are not actively traded. The value for these securities is determined by third party pricing models. Therefore, they have been categorized as a Level 3 measurement.

Currently, the Company uses an interest rate floor and interest rate customer swaps to manage its interest rate risk. The valuation of these instruments is determined using widely accepted valuation techniques including discounted cash flow analysis on the expected cash flows of each derivative. This analysis reflects the contractual terms of the derivatives, including the period to maturity, and uses observable market-based inputs, including interest rate curves and implied volatilities. Therefore, they have been categorized as a Level 2 measurement. See “Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements—Note 10: Derivatives and Hedging Activities” for further details.

To comply with the provisions of ASC 820, the Company incorporates credit valuation adjustments to appropriately reflect both its own nonperformance risk and the respective counterparty’s nonperformance risk in the fair value measurements. In adjusting the fair value of its derivative contracts for the effect of nonperformance risk, the Company has considered the impact of netting and any applicable credit enhancements, such as collateral postings, thresholds, mutual puts and guarantees.

The Company has determined that the majority of the inputs used to value its derivatives fall within Level 2 of the fair value hierarchy, although the credit valuation adjustments associated with its derivatives utilize Level 3 inputs, such as estimates of current credit spreads to evaluate the likelihood of default by itself and its counterparties. As a result, the Company has determined that its derivative valuations in their entirety are classified in Level 2 of the fair value hierarchy.

Other investments, which are not considered available for sale investments, consist of deferred compensation trusts for the benefit of employees, which consist of publicly traded mutual fund investments that are valued at prices quoted in active markets. Therefore, they have been categorized as a Level 1 measurement.

The following table presents a rollforward of the Level 3 assets for the period ended December 31, 2009. The unrealized gains/(losses) on the Level 3 assets included in the table below are included in Accumulated comprehensive income on the consolidated balance sheet as of December 31, 2009.

 

     Balance at
January 1,
2009
   Purchase, (sales),
issuances and
(settlements), net
   Transfers into
Level 3
   Unrealized
gains (losses)
   Amortization     Balance at
December 31,
2009
   (In thousands)

Mortgage-backed securities

   $ —      $ 3,141    $ —      $ 33    $ (23   $ 3,151

Other available for sale investments

     —        —        500      —        —          500
                                          

Total Level 3 assets

   $ —      $ 3,141    $ 500    $ 33    $ (23   $ 3,651
                                          

 

132


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

 

The following tables present the Company’s assets and liabilities measured at fair value on a non-recurring basis as of December 31, 2009 and December 31, 2008, aggregated by the level in the fair value hierarchy within which those measurements fall.

 

     December 31,
2009
   Fair value measurements recorded during the year:
      Quoted prices in
active markets
for identical
assets (level 1)
   Significant other
observable inputs
(level 2)
   Significant
unobservable
inputs (level 3)
   (In thousands)

Assets:

           

Impaired loans(1)

   $ 34,471    $ —      $ —      $ 34,471

Loans held for sale(2)

     473      —        —        473

OREO(3)

     6,129      —        —        6,129

Goodwill and identifiable intangible assets(4)

     3,654      —        —        3,654
                           
   $ 42,526    $ —      $ —      $ 42,526
                           

 

(1) Collateral-dependent impaired loans whose specific reserve changed during 2009.
(2) Two loans in the loans held for sale category had write downs during 2009.
(3) Six OREO properties had write downs during 2009.
(4) Goodwill and identifiable intangible assets at one affiliate partner had write downs during 2009.

 

     December 31,
2008
   Fair value measurements recorded during the year:
      Quoted prices in
active markets
for identical
assets (level 1)
   Significant other
observable
inputs (level 2)
   Significant
unobservable
inputs (level 3)
   (In thousands)

Assets:

           

Impaired loans(1)

   $ 26,271    $ —      $ —      $ 26,271

Loans held for sale(2)

     27,219      —        —        27,219

OREO(3)

     2,436      —        —        2,436
                           
   $ 55,926    $ —      $ —      $ 55,926
                           

 

(1) Collateral-dependent impaired loans whose specific reserve changed during 2008.
(2) 18 loans in the loans held for sale category had write downs during 2008.
(3) One OREO property had a write down during 2008.

Impaired loans include those loans that were measured at the value of underlying collateral as allowed under ASC 310. The amount does not include impaired loans that are measured based on expected future cash flows discounted at the respective loan’s original effective interest rate, as that amount is not considered a fair value measurement. The Company uses appraisals, which management may adjust to reflect estimated market value declines, or apply other discounts to appraised values for unobservable factors resulting from its knowledge of the property. Therefore they have been categorized as a Level 3 measurement.

The loans held for sale in the table above represent the portfolio of loans in Southern California transferred to the held for sale category in the third quarter of 2008, as discussed in the Company’s 2008 Annual Report on Form 10-K, which had an adjustment to fair value for the year ended December 31, 2009. The fair value of these

 

133


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

 

loans held for sale was based on broker quotes, comparable market transactions and information from the Company’s agent hired to assist with the sale of the portfolio. Therefore they have been categorized as a Level 3 measurement.

The OREO in the table above includes those properties that had an adjustment to fair value during the years ended December 31, 2009 and 2008. The Company uses appraisals, which management may adjust to reflect estimated fair value declines, or apply other discounts to appraised values for unobservable factors resulting from its knowledge of the property. Therefore they have been categorized as a Level 3 measurement.

The goodwill and identifiable intangible assets in the table above includes the goodwill and identifiable intangible assets at one affiliate that had an adjustment to fair value during the year ended December 31, 2009. The Company utilized a weighted average of the income and market approaches, with 80% from the income and 20% from the market approach, to determine fair value. Therefore they have been categorized as a Level 3 measurement. See Part II, Item 8, “Financial Statements and Supplementary Data—Note 10: Goodwill and Other Intangible Assets” for a detailed discussion of the fair value measurement techniques employed.

The following table presents the book and fair values of the Company’s financial instruments that are not measured at fair value on a recurring basis (other than certain loans, as noted below):

 

     December 31, 2009    December 31, 2008
   Book Value    Fair Value    Book Value    Fair Value
   (In thousands)

FINANCIAL ASSETS:

           

Cash and cash equivalents

   $ 447,460    $ 447,460    $ 281,275    $ 281,275

Held to maturity securities

     4,501      4,511      4,499      4,597

Loans, net (including loans held for sale)

     4,251,310      4,314,744      4,101,836      4,141,499

Other financial assets

     123,979      123,979      124,769      124,769

FINANCIAL LIABILITIES:

           

Deposits

     4,255,219      4,265,309      3,748,912      3,763,141

Securities sold under agreements to repurchase

     243,377      246,592      293,841      298,208

Federal Home Loan Bank borrowings

     555,012      577,705      745,472      775,665

Junior subordinated debentures and other long-term debt

     193,645      156,568      290,585      211,085

Other financial liabilities

     15,588      15,588      16,738      16,738

The estimated fair values have been determined by using available quoted market information or other appropriate valuation methodologies. The aggregate fair value amounts presented do not represent the underlying value of the Company taken as a whole.

The fair value estimates provided are made at a specific point in time, based on relevant market information and the characteristics of the financial instrument. The estimates do not provide for any premiums or discounts that could result from concentrations of ownership of a financial instrument. Because no active market exists for some of the Company’s financial instruments, certain fair value estimates are based on subjective judgments regarding current economic conditions, risk characteristics of the financial instruments, future expected loss experience, prepayment assumptions, and other factors. The resulting estimates involve uncertainties and therefore cannot be determined with precision. Changes made to any of the underlying assumptions could significantly affect the estimates.

Cash and cash equivalents

The carrying value reported in the balance sheet for cash and cash equivalents approximates fair value due to the short-term nature of their maturities.

 

134


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

 

Securities held to maturity

The fair value presented for securities are based on quoted market prices received from third party pricing services, where available. If quoted market prices were not available, fair values were based on quoted market prices of comparable instruments, quotations, or analysis of estimated future cash flows.

Loans, net (including loans held for sale)

Fair value estimates are based on loans with similar financial characteristics. Fair values of commercial and residential mortgage loans are estimated by discounting contractual cash flows adjusted for prepayment estimates and using discount rates approximately equal to current market rates on loans with similar characteristics and maturities. The incremental credit risk for non-performing loans has been considered in the determination of the fair value of consumer loans. The fair value estimates for home equity and other loans are based on outstanding loan terms and pricing in each Bank’s local market. The Company’s fair value estimates, methods, and assumptions are set forth below for each type of financial instrument. The method of estimating the fair value of the financial instruments disclosed in the table above does not incorporate the exit price concept in the presentation of the fair value of these financial instruments.

Other financial assets

Other financial assets consist primarily of accrued interest and fees receivable, stock in FHLBs, and the cash surrender value of bank-owned life insurance, for which the carrying amount approximates fair value.

The Company carries the FHLB stock at the original cost basis (par value). Each of the Banks is a member of their local FHLB located in either Boston, Seattle, or San Francisco. At each period end, the Company evaluates its investment in the respective FHLB’s stock for other-than-temporary impairment. Based on the Company’s evaluation of the underlying investment, including the long-term nature of the asset, the liquidity position of the respective FHLBs, the actions being taken by the respective FHLBs to address their regulatory situations, and the Company’s current intention not to sell or redeem any of its investment in the respective FHLBs, and the determination that it is not more likely than not that the Company would be required to sell or redeem any of its investments in the respective FHLBs, the Company has not recognized an other-than-temporary impairment loss with respect to stock in the FHLBs.

Deposits

The fair values reported for transaction accounts (demand, NOW, savings, and money market) equal their respective book values reported on the balance sheet. The fair values disclosed are, by definition, equal to the amount payable on demand at the reporting date. The fair values for certificates of deposit are based on the discounted value of contractual cash flows. The discount rates used are representative of approximate rates currently offered on certificates of deposit with similar remaining maturities.

Securities sold under agreements to repurchase

The fair value of securities sold under agreements to repurchase are estimated based on contractual cash flows discounted at the Company’s incremental borrowing rate for FHLB borrowings with similar maturities.

Federal Home Loan Bank borrowings

The fair value reported for FHLB borrowings is estimated based on the discounted value of contractual cash flows. The discount rate used is based on the Company’s estimated current incremental borrowing rate for FHLB borrowings of similar maturities.

 

135


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

 

Junior subordinated debentures and other long-term debt

The fair value of the junior subordinated debentures issued by Trust I was based on the current market price of the securities at December 31, 2009 and December 31, 2008. The fair value of the junior subordinated debentures issued by Trust II was based on the present value of cash flows discounted using the current rate for similar securities. The fair value of the junior subordinated debentures acquired in the FPB, Gibraltar, and Charter acquisitions approximates book value because of the floating rate nature of the securities. The fair value of the long-term debt was based on the price the Company repurchased this debt for in the open market.

Other financial liabilities

Other financial liabilities consist of accrued interest payable and deferred compensation for which the carrying amount approximates fair value.

Financial instruments with off-balance sheet risk

The Company’s commitments to originate loans and for unused lines and outstanding standby letters of credit are primarily at market interest rates and therefore, the carrying amount approximates fair value.

22. BOSTON PRIVATE FINANCIAL HOLDINGS, INC. (PARENT COMPANY ONLY)

CONDENSED BALANCE SHEETS

 

     December 31,
2009
   December 31,
2008
   (In thousands)

ASSETS:

     

Cash and cash equivalents

   $ 90,195    $ 202,319

Investment securities available for sale

     175,000      —  

Investment in wholly-owned and majority-owned subsidiaries:

     

Banks

     468,121      432,652

Nonbanks

     138,609      142,194

Investment in partnerships and trusts

     8,841      8,839

Intangible assets, net

     692      798

Income tax receivable and deferred

     25,765      39,995

Other assets

     23,563      18,300

Investments in discontinued operations

     —        164,359
             

Total assets

   $ 930,786    $ 1,009,456
             

LIABILITIES:

     

Deferred acquisition obligations

   $ 3,476    $ 11,466

Junior subordinated debentures and other long-term debt

     193,645      290,585

Other liabilities

     32,489      18,429
             

Total liabilities

     229,610      320,480
             

REDEEMABLE NONCONTROLLING INTERESTS(1)

     50,022      43,800

TOTAL COMPANY’S STOCKHOLDERS’ EQUITY(2)

     651,154      645,176
             

Total liabilities, redeemable noncontrolling interests and stockholders’ equity

   $ 930,786    $ 1,009,456
             

 

(1) Represents the maximum redemption value, if any, of noncontrolling interests
(2) Excludes noncontrolling interests

 

136


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

 

CONDENSED STATEMENTS OF OPERATIONS

 

     December 31,
2009
    December 31,
2008
    December 31,
2007
 
     (In thousands)  

INCOME:

      

Interest income

   $ 1,887      $ 4,364      $ 4,870   

Gain on repurchase of debt

     18,739        22,513        —     

Dividends from subsidiaries:

      

Banks

     10,000        —          13,900   

Nonbanks

     17,511        29,782        22,171   

Other income/(loss)

     1,187        (1,866     1,173   
                        

Total income

     49,324        54,793        42,114   
                        

EXPENSES:

      

Salaries and employee benefits

     13,283        13,878        13,875   

Professional fees

     6,192        7,785        4,987   

Interest expense

     12,421        18,488        18,652   

Warrant expense

     —          2,233        —     

Impairment of goodwill and intangibles

     —          3,921        —     

Other expenses

     4,725        5,505        5,453   
                        

Total expenses

     36,621        51,810        42,967   
                        

Income/(loss) from continuing operations before income taxes

     12,703        2,983        (853
                        

Income tax benefit

     (8,924     (9,400     (16,115

Net loss from discontinued operations

     (7,505     (191,209     (1,524
                        

Income/(loss) before equity in undistributed loss of subsidiaries

     14,122        (178,826     13,738   
                        

Equity in undistributed loss of subsidiaries

     (8,891     (209,926     (9,568
                        

Net income/(loss) attributable to the Company

   $ 5,231      $ (388,752   $ 4,170   
                        

 

137


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

 

CONDENSED STATEMENTS OF CASH FLOWS

 

    December 31,
2009
    December 31,
2008
    December 31,
2007
 
  (In thousands)  

CASH FLOWS FROM OPERATING ACTIVITIES

     

Net income/(loss) attributable to the Company

  $ 5,231      $ (388,752   $ 4,170   

Net loss from discontinued operations

    (7,505     (191,209     (1,524
                       

Net income/(loss) from continuing operations

    12,736        (197,543     5,694   
                       

Adjustments to reconcile net income/(loss) from continuing operations to net cash provided by/(used in) operating activities:

     

Equity in loss/(earnings) of subsidiaries:

     

Banks

    (13,905     166,729        (34,675

Nonbanks

    (4,715     13,415        8,172   

Dividends from subsidiaries:

     

Banks

    10,000        —          13,900   

Nonbanks

    17,511        29,782        22,171   

Reclassification of increase in fair value of warrants

    —          2,233        —     

Impairment of goodwill and intangibles

    —          3,921        —     

Gain on the repurchase of debt

    (18,739     (22,513     —     

Decrease/(increase) in income taxes receivable and deferred

    14,230        (18,532     —     

Depreciation and amortization

    3,257        5,233        5,265   

Net decrease in other operating activities

    13,905        10,808        21,397   
                       

Net cash provided by/(used in) operating activities of continuing operations

    34,280        (6,467     41,924   
                       

Net cash provided by operating activities of discontinued operations

    5,195        20,027        11,202   
                       

Net cash provided by operating activities

    39,475        13,560        53,126   
                       

CASH FLOWS FROM INVESTING ACTIVITIES

     

Cash paid for acquisitions, including deferred acquisition obligations

    (2,744     (9,521     (64,721

Capital investments in subsidiaries:

     

Banks

    (34,000     (134,702     (6,500

Nonbanks

    —          (1,132     —     

Intercompany notes repaid from/(issued to) Banks

    —          214,000        (214,000

Intercompany notes issued to Nonbanks

    —          (1,000     —     

Purchases of investment securities available for sale

    (175,000     —          —     

Cash received from divestitures

    161,474        —          —     

Net cash (used in)/provided by in other investing activities

    (112     13        (5,120
                       

Net cash (used in)/provided by in investing activities of continuing operations

    (50,382     67,658        (290,341
                       

Net cash used in in investing activities of discontinued operations

    (9,815     —          —     
                       

Net cash (used in)/provided by in investing activities

    (60,197     67,658        (290,341
                       

CASH FLOWS FROM FINANCING ACTIVITIES

     

Proceeds from issuance of Notes, net of discounts

    —          —          284,625   

Repurchase of debt

    (76,939     (210,941     —     

Share buyback

    —          —          (40,043

Dividends paid to common shareholders

    (2,688     (8,815     (13,361

Dividends paid to preferred shareholders

    (7,862     (851     —     

Excess tax benefit from stock options exercised

    —          —          789   

Proceeds from issuance of preferred stock, net

    —          193,580        —     

Proceeds from issuance of warrants, net

    —          28,418        —     

Proceeds from stock option exercises

    341        1,452        4,600   

Proceeds from issuance of common stock, net

    2,728        108,120        3,355   

Other equity adjustments

    (6,982     2,757        (2,343
                       

Net cash (used in)/provided by in financing activities of continuing operations

    (91,402     113,720        237,622   
                       

Net cash provided by financing activities of discontinued operations

    —          291        —     
                       

Net cash (used in)/provided by in financing activities

    (91,402     114,011        237,622   
                       

Net (decrease)/increase in cash and cash equivalents

    (112,124     195,229        407   

Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year

    202,319        7,090        6,683   
                       

Cash and cash equivalents at end of year

  $ 90,195      $ 202,319      $ 7,090   
                       

 

138


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

 

23. REGULATORY MATTERS

Investment Management

The Company’s investment management business is highly regulated, primarily at the federal level by the SEC, National Association of Securities Dealers, and by state regulatory agencies. The Company has subsidiaries which are registered investment advisers under the Investment Advisers Act of 1940. The Investment Advisers Act imposes numerous obligations on registered investment advisers, including fiduciary, record keeping, operational, and disclosure obligations. The subsidiaries, as investment advisers, are also subject to regulation under the federal and state securities laws and the fiduciary laws of certain states. In addition, the Company has subsidiaries which act as sub-advisers to mutual funds, which are registered under the Investment Company Act of 1940 and are subject to that Act’s provisions and regulations. The Company’s subsidiaries are also subject to the provisions and regulations of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974 (“ERISA”), to the extent any such entities act as a “fiduciary” under ERISA with respect to certain of its clients. ERISA and the related provisions of the federal tax laws impose a number of duties on persons who are fiduciaries under ERISA, and prohibit certain transactions involving the assets of each ERISA plan which is a client, as well as certain transactions by the fiduciaries and certain other related parties to such plans.

Banking

The Company and its private banking subsidiaries are also subject to extensive supervision and regulation by the FRB, the FDIC, which insures the deposits of the Banks to the maximum extent permitted by law, the Massachusetts Commissioner of Banks, the California Department of Financial Institutions, and the Washington State Department of Financial Institutions. The federal and state laws and regulations which are applicable to banks regulate, among other things, the scope of their business, their investments, their reserves against deposits, the timing of the availability of deposited funds, and the nature and amount of collateral for certain loans. The laws and regulations governing the Banks generally have been promulgated to foster the safety and soundness of the Banks and protect depositors and not for the purpose of protecting stockholders.

As a bank holding company, the Company is subject to various regulatory capital requirements administered by federal agencies. Failure to meet minimum capital requirements can result in certain mandatory, and possibly additional discretionary actions by regulators that, if undertaken, could have a material effect on the Company’s financial statements. For example, under capital adequacy guidelines and the regulatory framework for prompt corrective action, the Banks, which are wholly-owned subsidiaries of the Company, must each meet specific capital guidelines that involve quantitative measures of each of the Banks’ assets and certain off-balance sheet items as calculated under regulatory accounting standards. The Banks’ respective capital amounts and classifications are also subject to qualitative judgments by the regulators about components, risk weightings, and other factors. Similarly, the Company is also subject to capital requirements administered by the Federal Reserve with respect to certain nonbanking activities, including adjustments in connection with off-balance sheet items.

Current FDIC regulations governing capital requirements state that FDIC-insured institutions, to be adequately capitalized, have qualifying total capital to risk-weighted assets of at least 8%, of which at least 4% must be Tier I capital. The primary items in the Company’s Tier I capital include total equity plus qualifying trust preferred securities, less accumulated other comprehensive income, goodwill and intangible assets, and disallowed deferred tax assets. Assets and off-balance sheet items are assigned to four risk categories, each with appropriate weights. The resulting capital ratio represents Tier I capital as a percentage of risk weighted assets and off-balance sheet items. The risk-based capital rules are designed to make regulatory capital more sensitive to differences in risk profiles among banks and bank holding companies, to account for off-balance sheet exposure and to minimize disincentives for holding liquid assets.

 

139


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

 

To be categorized as “well capitalized,” the Company and the Banks must maintain minimum total risk-based, Tier I risk-based, and Tier I leverage ratios as set forth in the following table. In addition, the Company and the Banks cannot be subject to any written agreement, order or capital directive or prompt corrective action to be considered “well capitalized.”

Although the Company and all of the Banks within the segment maintain capital at levels that would otherwise be considered “well capitalized” under the applicable regulations, for supervisory reasons, the Southern California and Pacific Northwest banks, and therefore the Company, are not deemed “well capitalized.”

In 2009, the Company contributed $21.0 million of capital to Charter and $13.0 million to FPB. These capital contributions were made to meet applicable regulatory capital requirements and to increase regulatory capital levels given the economic conditions in the regions in which these affiliate Banks operate amid increased uncertainty in the local real estate markets. In addition, the Company contributed $18.0 million of capital to Gibraltar in 2009 prior to the divestiture in the third quarter.

The Company contributed $125.3 million of capital in 2008 to FPB. These capital contributions were needed for FPB to meet applicable regulatory capital requirements. In addition, the Company made capital contributions of $6.4 million to Borel and $3.0 million to Charter in 2008. The capital contributions to Borel were made to support significant loan growth during the year. The capital contribution to Charter was made to meet applicable regulatory capital requirements.

 

140


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

 

The following table presents the Company’s and the Banks’ amount of regulatory capital and related ratios as of December 31, 2009 and 2008. Also presented are the capital guidelines established by the Federal Reserve, which pertain to the Company, and by the FDIC, which pertain to the Banks. To be categorized as “adequately capitalized” or “well capitalized”, the Company and the Banks must be in compliance with these ratios as long as the Company and/or the Banks are not subject to any written agreement, order, capital directive, or prompt corrective action directive. The Federal Reserve, the FDIC, and applicable state banking regulators may impose higher capital ratios than those listed below based on the results of regulatory exams.

 

     Actual     For capital
adequacy

purposes
    To be
well capitalized
under

prompt corrective
action provisions
 
   Amount    Ratio     Amount    Ratio     Amount    Ratio  
   (In thousands)  

As of December 31, 2009

               

Total risk-based capital

               

Company

   $ 759,807    18.95   $ 320,763    >8.0   $ 400,954    >10.0

Boston Private Bank

     245,367    12.03        163,202    8.0        204,002    10.0   

Borel

     159,459    11.73        108,754    8.0        135,943    10.0   

FPB

     60,241    16.80        28,695    8.0        35,868    10.0   

Charter

     38,984    19.50        15,995    8.0        19,994    10.0   

Tier I risk-based capital

               

Company

     709,417    17.69        160,381    4.0        240,572    6.0   

Boston Private Bank

     219,851    10.78        81,601    4.0        122,401    6.0   

Borel

     142,412    10.48        54,377    4.0        81,566    6.0   

FPB

     55,663    15.52        14,347    4.0        21,521    6.0   

Charter

     36,397    18.20        7,998    4.0        11,996    6.0   

Tier I leverage capital

               

Company

     709,417    11.62        244,189    4.0        305,236    5.0   

Boston Private Bank

     219,851    6.54        134,537    4.0        168,171    5.0   

Borel

     142,412    8.66        65,784    4.0        82,230    5.0   

FPB

     55,663    10.59        21,028    4.0        26,286    5.0   

Charter

     36,397    9.93        14,660    4.0        18,325    5.0   

As of December 31, 2008

               

Total risk-based capital

               

Company

   $ 797,726    15.47   $ 412,500    >8.0   $ 515,625    >10.0

Boston Private Bank

     229,476    11.57        158,678    8.0        198,347    10.0   

Borel

     145,247    10.95        106,155    8.0        132,693    10.0   

FPB

     52,835    13.74        30,771    8.0        38,463    10.0   

Charter

     29,053    11.01        21,109    8.0        26,386    10.0   

Tier I risk-based capital

               

Company

     731,768    14.19        206,250    4.0        309,375    6.0   

Boston Private Bank

     204,666    10.32        79,339    4.0        119,008    6.0   

Borel

     129,625    9.77        53,077    4.0        79,616    6.0   

FPB

     48,003    12.48        15,385    4.0        23,078    6.0   

Charter

     25,621    9.71        10,554    4.0        15,831    6.0   

Tier I leverage capital

               

Company

     731,768    10.52        278,189    4.0        347,737    5.0   

Boston Private Bank

     204,666    6.79        120,652    4.0        150,815    5.0   

Borel

     129,625    9.08        57,110    4.0        71,387    5.0   

FPB

     48,003    8.43        22,772    4.0        28,466    5.0   

Charter

     25,621    6.27        16,354    4.0        20,442    5.0   

 

141


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

 

Bank regulatory authorities restrict the Banks from lending or advancing funds to, or investing in the securities of, the Company. Further, these authorities restrict the amounts available for the payment of dividends by the Banks to the Company.

As of December 31, 2009, the Company has sponsored the creation of five statutory trusts for the sole purpose of issuing trust preferred securities and investing the proceeds in junior subordinated debentures of the Company. In accordance with ASC 810-10-55, Consolidation—Overall—Implementation Guidance and Illustrations—Variable Interest Entities , these statutory trusts created by the Company are not consolidated into the Company’s financial statements; however, the Company reflects the amounts of junior subordinated debentures payable to the preferred stockholders of statutory trusts as debt in its financial statements. As of December 31, 2009, all $186.5 million of the net balance of these trust preferred securities qualify as Tier I capital. As of December 31, 2008, $229.9 million of the net balance of these trust preferred securities qualify as Tier I capital and $1.1 qualified as Tier II capital.

On March 1, 2005, the FRB issued a final rule that would retain trust preferred securities in Tier I capital of bank holding companies, but with stricter quantitative limits and clearer standards. On March 17, 2009, the FRB announced the adoption of a final rule that delays until March 31, 2011, the effective date of new limits whereby the aggregate amount of trust preferred securities would be limited to 25% of Tier I capital elements, net of goodwill. The Company has evaluated the impact that the new limits would have and has concluded that it would still be in compliance with all required regulatory capital ratios.

24. LITIGATION AND CONTINGENCIES

Trust Litigation

Beginning in 1984, Borel served as the trustee of a private family trust (the “Trust”) that was the joint owner of a certain real property known as the Guadalupe Oil Field. The field was leased for many years to Union Oil Company of California (d/b/a UNOCAL) for oil and gas production. Significant environmental contamination resulting from UNOCAL’s operations was found on the property in 1994. The subject property was the subject of lengthy litigation brought by certain beneficiaries of the Trust against Borel and others in 1994. In 2002, during the course of that litigation, Borel (as Trustee) sold the property to its former lessee, the Union Oil Company of California (d/b/a UNOCAL) in exchange for cash and a comprehensive indemnity on behalf of the Trust. Litigation with the beneficiaries continued until 2005, when Borel, UNOCAL, and others entered into a comprehensive settlement with all of the beneficiaries, except one, dismissing all of their pending actions in exchange for a payment of cash and other considerations from UNOCAL. Borel paid nothing in the settlement. The dissenting beneficiary attempted to continue the litigation against Borel on his own, acting pro se. The state court dismissed this individual action with prejudice in 2005, whereupon the dissenting beneficiary filed a similar action, again pro se, in the U.S. District Court for the Northern District of California. The federal court dismissed this action with prejudice, and the dissenting beneficiary then unsuccessfully pursued appeals to the Ninth Circuit Court of Appeals and the U.S. Supreme Court. His petition for certiorari was denied in February 2008, concluding the litigation. The 2005 settlement with the other beneficiaries was thereafter consummated. All of the property formerly belonging to the Trust was distributed to separate subtrusts established for each individual beneficiary. Borel is not the trustee of these subtrusts of the litigants. Borel’s petition for termination of the Trust was heard in March 2009. The motion for termination was granted and the order signed on March 18, 2009. Borel was formally discharged as Trustee on June 2, 2009. No further action will be required with respect to this matter.

Other

The Company is also involved in routine legal proceedings occurring in the ordinary course of business. In the opinion of management, final disposition of these proceedings will not have a material adverse effect on the consolidated balance sheets or consolidated statements of operations of the Company.

 

142


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

 

25. SELECTED QUARTERLY DATA (UNAUDITED)

 

     2009(1)  
   Fourth
Quarter
    Third
Quarter
    Second
Quarter
    First
Quarter
 
   (In thousands, except per share data)  

Revenues

        

Net interest income

   $ 41,057      $ 39,717      $ 39,302      $ 39,409   

Fees and other income

     42,364        26,523        26,941        30,620   
                                

Total revenues

     83,421        66,240        66,243        70,029   
                                

Provision for loan losses

     13,804        9,099        8,730        13,325   

Operating expense

     57,739        55,936        57,657        51,626   
                                

Income/(loss) before income taxes

     11,878        1,205        (144     5,078   
                                

Income tax expense/ (benefit)

     2        815        (3     818   

Net income/(loss) from discontinued operations

     31,501        (30,614     (7,763     (629

Less: Net income attributable to noncontrolling interests

     1,169        1,136        579        765   
                                

Net income/(loss) attributable to the Company(2)

   $ 42,208      $ (31,360   $ (8,483   $ 2,866   
                                

Net income/(loss) per share attributable to the Company’s common shareholders:

        

Basic and diluted earnings/ (loss) per share

   $ 0.42      $ (0.61   $ (0.24   $ (0.09
     2008(1)  
   Fourth
Quarter
    Third
Quarter
    Second
Quarter
    First
Quarter
 
   (In thousands, except per share data)  

Revenues

        

Net interest income

   $ 37,842      $ 38,013      $ 38,636      $ 35,737   

Fees and other income

     22,242        28,074        38,223        40,910   
                                

Total revenues

     60,084        66,087        76,859        76,647   
                                

Provision for loan losses

     15,709        135,145        30,804        14,986   

Operating expense

     60,118        142,042        71,337        73,489   
                                

(Loss)/income before income taxes

     (15,743     (211,100     (25,282     (11,828
                                

Income tax (benefit)/expense

     (7,177     (59,297     (5,816     1,553   

Net (loss)/income from discontinued operations

     (16,045     (120,303     (59,817     4,956   

Less: Net income attributable to noncontrolling interests

     308        1,255        1,345        1,419   
                                

Net loss attributable to the Company(3)

   $ (24,919   $ (273,361   $ (80,628   $ (9,844
                                

Net loss per share attributable to the Company’s common shareholders:

        

Basic and diluted loss per share

   $ (0.47   $ (5.92   $ (2.11   $ (0.26

 

(1) Due to rounding, the sum of the four quarters may not add to the year to date total.
(2) Third quarter 2009 earnings include a $42.4 million pretax loss on sale of discontinued operations related to the divestiture of Gibraltar and RINET. Fourth quarter 2009 earnings include a $48.0 million pretax gain on sale of discontinued operations related to the divestiture of Westfield. See Part II. Item 8. “Financial Statements and Supplementary Data—Note 2: Divestitures and Acquisitions” for further details.
(3)

First quarter 2008 earnings include a $20.6 million non-deductible goodwill impairment charge. Second quarter 2008 earnings include a $17.4 million goodwill and intangibles impairment charge. Third quarter

 

143


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

 

 

2008 earnings include an $84.7 million goodwill and intangibles impairment charge, and a $135.1 million provision for loan losses. Fourth quarter 2008 earnings includes a $10.5 million goodwill and intangible impairment charge. See Part II. Item 8. “Financial Statements and Supplementary Data—Note 10: Goodwill and Other Intangible Assets and Note 7: Allowance for Loan Losses” for further details.

 

26. SUBSEQUENT EVENTS

The Company evaluated subsequent events through the date the accompanying consolidated financial statements were issued, which was March 12, 2010. Pursuant to the requirements of ASC 855, there were no events or transactions during the subsequent event reporting period that required disclosure in the consolidated financial statements, other than the following items:

 

   

On January 13, 2010, the Company redeemed $50.0 million of the Company’s outstanding $154.0 million in Series C Preferred stock that was issued to the Treasury pursuant to the TARP CPP in November of 2008. The Company paid approximately $50.4 million to the Treasury to repurchase the Series C Preferred, which included payment for accrued and unpaid dividends for the shares.

 

   

On January 20, 2010, the Company increased its investment in KLS to 100% from 81%. The acquisition of the remaining 19% interest of KLS was made pursuant to the Amended and Restated Limited Liability Agreement (“Agreement”) between the Company and KLS dated December 31, 2004. The consideration paid by the Company was approximately $29.7 million which represents the value of the additional 19% interest and additional consideration paid for performance targets negotiated in the original Agreement.

 

144


Table of Contents

REPORT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM

The Board of Directors and Stockholders

Boston Private Financial Holdings, Inc.:

We have audited the accompanying consolidated balance sheets of Boston Private Financial Holdings, Inc. and subsidiaries (the “Company”) as of December 31, 2009 and 2008, and the related consolidated statements of operations, changes in stockholders’ equity, and cash flows for each of the years in the three-year period ended December 31, 2009. These consolidated financial statements are the responsibility of the Company’s management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on these consolidated financial statements based on our audits. We did not audit the 2007 financial statements of Gibraltar Private Bank & Trust Company, a wholly-owned subsidiary, which statements reflect total revenues constituting 14.8 percent of the total revenue in 2007. Those statements were audited by other auditors whose report has been furnished to us, and our opinion, insofar as it relates to the amounts included for Gibraltar Private Bank & Trust Company for 2007 is based solely on the report of the other auditors.

We conducted our audits in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States). Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the consolidated financial statements are free of material misstatement. An audit includes examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the consolidated financial statements. An audit also includes assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, as well as evaluating the overall financial statement presentation. We believe that our audits and the report of the other auditors provide a reasonable basis for our opinion.

In our opinion, based on our audits and the report of the other auditors, the consolidated financial statements referred to above present fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of Boston Private Financial Holdings, Inc. and subsidiaries as of December 31, 2009 and 2008, and the results of their operations and their cash flows for each of the years in the three-year period ended December 31, 2009, in conformity with U.S. generally accepted accounting principles.

As discussed in Note 15 to the consolidated financial statements, the Company has changed its method of accounting for noncontrolling interests in 2009 to comply with new accounting requirements issued by the Financial Accounting Standards Board.

We also have audited, in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States), the Company’s internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2009, based on criteria established in Internal Control—Integrated Framework issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission (COSO), and our report dated March 12, 2010 expressed an unqualified opinion on the effectiveness of the Company’s internal control over financial reporting.

/s/  KPMG LLP

Boston, Massachusetts

March 12, 2010

 

145


Table of Contents

REPORT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM

Gibraltar Private Bank & Trust Company

Coral Gables, Florida:

We have audited the consolidated statement of operations of Gibraltar Private Bank & Trust Company and Subsidiary (the “Bank”) for the year ended December 31, 2007, and the related changes in stockholders’ equity, and cash flows for the year then ended. These financial statements are the responsibility of the Bank’s management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on these financial statements based on our audits.

We conducted our audit in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States). Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material misstatement. An audit includes examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements. An audit also includes assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, as well as evaluating the overall financial statement presentation. We believe that our audit provides a reasonable basis for our opinion.

In our opinion, the consolidated financial statements referred to above present fairly, in all material respects, the results of operations of the Bank for the year ended December 31, 2007, and its cash flows for the year then ended, in conformity with U.S. generally accepted accounting principles.

/s/ Hacker, Johnson & Smith PA

Fort Lauderdale, Florida

February 26, 2008

 

146


Table of Contents

REPORT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM

The Board of Directors and Stockholders

Boston Private Financial Holdings, Inc.:

We have audited Boston Private Financial Holdings, Inc.’s (the “Company”) internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2009, based on criteria established in Internal Control-Integrated Framework issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission (“COSO”). The Company’s management is responsible for maintaining effective internal control over financial reporting and for its assessment of the effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting, included in the accompanying Management’s Report on Internal Control Over Financial Reporting. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on the Company’s internal control over financial reporting based on our audit.

We conducted our audit in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States). Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether effective internal control over financial reporting was maintained in all material respects. Our audit included obtaining an understanding of internal control over financial reporting, assessing the risk that a material weakness exists, and testing and evaluating the design and operating effectiveness of internal control based on the assessed risk. Our audit also included performing such other procedures as we considered necessary in the circumstances. We believe that our audit provides a reasonable basis for our opinion.

A company’s internal control over financial reporting is a process designed to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles. A company’s internal control over financial reporting includes those policies and procedures that (1) pertain to the maintenance of records that, in reasonable detail, accurately and fairly reflect the transactions and dispositions of the assets of the company; (2) provide reasonable assurance that transactions are recorded as necessary to permit preparation of financial statements in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles, and that receipts and expenditures of the company are being made only in accordance with authorizations of management and directors of the company; and (3) provide reasonable assurance regarding prevention or timely detection of unauthorized acquisition, use, or disposition of the company’s assets that could have a material effect on the financial statements.

Because of its inherent limitations, internal control over financial reporting may not prevent or detect misstatements. Also, projections of any evaluation of effectiveness to future periods are subject to the risk that controls may become inadequate because of changes in conditions, or that the degree of compliance with the policies or procedures may deteriorate.

In our opinion, the Company maintained, in all material respects, effective internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2009, based on criteria established in Internal Control—Integrated Framework issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission (“COSO”).

We also have audited, in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States), the consolidated balance sheets of the Company as of December 31, 2009 and 2008, and the related consolidated statements of operations, changes in stockholders’ equity, and cash flows for each of the years in the three-year period ended December 31, 2009, and our report dated March 12, 2010 expressed an unqualified opinion on those consolidated financial statements.

/s/  KPMG LLP

Boston, Massachusetts

March 12, 2010

 

147


Table of Contents

ITEM 9. CHANGES IN AND DISAGREEMENTS WITH ACCOUNTANTS ON ACCOUNTING AND FINANCIAL DISCLOSURE

None.

ITEM 9A. CONTROLS AND PROCEDURES.

A. Disclosure Controls and Procedures

As required by Rules 13a-15 and 15d-15 of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, the Company has evaluated, with the participation of management, including the Chief Executive Officer, President, and the Chief Financial Officer, as of the end of the period covered by this report, the effectiveness of the design and operation of its disclosure controls and procedures.

Based on such evaluation, the Chief Executive Officer and Chief Financial Officer have concluded that such disclosure controls and procedures were effective as of December 31, 2009 in ensuring that material information required to be disclosed by the Company, including its consolidated subsidiaries:

 

  a. was made known to the certifying officers by others within the Company and its consolidated subsidiaries in the reports that it files or submits under the Exchange Act; and

 

  b. is recorded, processed, summarized, and reported within the time periods specified in the Securities Exchange Commission rules and forms.

On a quarterly basis, the Company evaluates the disclosure controls and procedures, and may from time to time make changes aimed at enhancing their effectiveness and to ensure that the Company’s systems evolve with its business.

B. Management’s Report on Internal Control Over Financial Reporting

The management of the Company is responsible for establishing and maintaining adequate internal control over financial reporting. The Company’s internal control over financial reporting is a process designed to provide reasonable assurance to the Company’s management and Board of Directors regarding the reliability and preparation of published financial statements in accordance with accounting principles generally accepted in the U.S.

In designing and evaluating the Company’s disclosure controls and procedures, the Company and its management recognize that any controls and procedures, no matter how well designed and operated, can provide only a reasonable assurance of achieving the desired control objectives, and management necessarily was required to apply its judgment in evaluating and implementing possible controls and procedures. Therefore, even those systems determined to be effective can provide only reasonable assurance with respect to financial statement preparation and presentation and may not prevent or detect misstatements. Also, projections of any evaluation of effectiveness to future periods are subject to the risk that controls may become inadequate because of changes in conditions, or that the degree of compliance with the policies or procedures may deteriorate.

The Company’s management assessed the effectiveness of the Company’s internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2009. In making this assessment, the Company used the criteria set forth in Internal Control—Integrated Framework issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission (“COSO”). Based on management’s assessment, the Company believes that, as of December 31, 2009, the Company’s internal control over financial reporting is effective based on the criteria established by COSO.

 

148


Table of Contents

KPMG LLP, the independent registered public accounting firm that reported on the Company’s consolidated financial statements, has issued an audit report on the effectiveness of the Company’s internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2009. This report can be found on page 147.

C. Changes in Internal Controls over Financial Reporting

There have been no changes in the Company’s internal controls over financial reporting that have materially affected, or are reasonably likely to materially affect, the Company’s internal controls over financial reporting in 2009.

ITEM 9B. OTHER INFORMATION

None.

 

149


Table of Contents

PART III

ITEM 10. DIRECTORS, EXECUTIVE OFFICERS AND CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

Information with respect to Directors and Executive Officers required by Item 10 shall be included in the Proxy Statement and is incorporated herein by reference.

ITEM 11. EXECUTIVE COMPENSATION

Information with respect to executive compensation required by Item 11 shall be included in the Proxy Statement and is incorporated herein by reference.

ITEM 12. SECURITY OWNERSHIP OF CERTAIN BENEFICIAL OWNERS AND MANAGEMENT AND RELATED STOCKHOLDER MATTERS

Information with respect to security ownership and the other matters required by Item 12 shall be included in the Proxy Statement and is incorporated herein by reference.

ITEM 13. CERTAIN RELATIONSHIPS AND RELATED TRANSACTIONS, AND DIRECTOR INDEPENDENCE

Information with respect to certain relationships and related transactions required by Item 13 shall be included in the Proxy Statement and is incorporated herein by reference.

ITEM 14. PRINCIPAL ACCOUNTING FEES AND SERVICES

Information with respect to principal accountant fees and services required by Item 14 shall be included in the Proxy Statement and is incorporated herein by reference.

PART IV

ITEM 15. EXHIBITS AND FINANCIAL STATEMENT SCHEDULES.

Financial Statements and Exhibits

1. Financial Statements

 

     Page No.

a) Consolidated Balance Sheets

   71

b) Consolidated Statements of Operations

   72

c) Consolidated Statements of Changes in Stockholders’ Equity

   73

d) Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows

   75

e) Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements

   77

 

150


Table of Contents

2. Financial Schedules

None

3. Exhibits

 

Exhibit No.

  

Description

   Incorporated by Reference     
      Form    SEC Filing
Date
   Exhibit
Number
   Filed with
this 10-K
  3.1    Restated Articles of Organization of Boston Private Financial Holdings, Inc. filed May 23, 1994.    10-Q    8/14/2001    3.1   
  3.2    Articles of Amendment of Boston Private Financial Holdings, Inc. filed on April 22, 1998.    10-Q    8/14/2001    3.2   
  3.3    Articles of Amendment of Boston Private Financial Holdings, Inc. filed on November 20, 2001.    S-8    11/28/2001    4.3   
  3.4    Articles of Amendment of Boston Private Financial Holdings, Inc. filed on August 8, 2008    8-K    8/11/2008    3.1   
  3.5    Articles of Amendment of Boston Private Financial Holdings, Inc. filed on September 30, 2008    10-Q    11/7/2008    3.2   
  3.6    Articles of Amendment of Boston Private Financial Holdings, Inc. filed on November 19, 2008    8-K    11/24/2008    3.2   
  3.7    By-laws of Boston Private Financial Holdings, Inc., as amended and restated.    8-K    6/6/2007    99.1   
10.1    Employee Incentive Stock Option Plan of Boston Private Financial Holdings, Inc.    S-1    4/1/1991    10.1   
10.2    Employee Incentive Compensation Plan of Boston Private Financial Holdings, Inc.    S-1    4/1/1991    10.2   
10.3    Amended and Restated Commercial Lease dated June 30, 2004, by and between Boston Private Financial Holdings, Inc. and Leggat McCall Properties Management, Inc., as amended             X
10.4    Change in Control Protection Agreement, by and between Boston Private Financial Holdings, Inc. and Walter M. Pressey, effective as of March 19, 1997    10-K    3/13/2002    10.13   
10.5    Boston Private Financial Holdings, Inc. Deferred Compensation Plan    S-8    7/24/2001    4.1   
10.6    Boston Private Financial Holdings, Inc. 2001 Employee Stock Purchase Plan    S-8    11/28/2001    99.2   
10.7    Boston Private Financial Holdings, Inc. Amended and Restated 1997 Long-Term Incentive Plan    10-K    3/13/2002    10.16   
10.8    Borel Private Bank & Trust Company 1998 Stock Option Plan    S-8    12/3/2001    99.1   
10.9    1998 Amendment and Restatement of Directors’ Stock Option Plan of Boston Private Financial Holdings, Inc., as amended February 7, 2003    10-K    3/12/2004    10.21   

 

151


Table of Contents

Exhibit No.

  

Description

   Incorporated by Reference     
      Form    SEC Filing
Date
   Exhibit
Number
   Filed with
this 10-K
10.10    January 2000 Amendment to Boston Private Financial Holdings, Inc. Directors’ Stock Option Plan    10-K    3/13/2002    10.20   
10.11    February 2003 Amendment to Boston Private Financial Holdings, Inc. Directors’ Stock Option Plan    10-K    3/7/2003    10.22   
10.12    Boston Private Financial Holdings, Inc. 401(k) Profit-Sharing Plan    S-8    6/28/2002    N/A   
10.13    Change in Control Protection Agreement by and between Boston Private Financial Holdings, Inc. and Margaret W. Chambers dated November 21, 2003    10-K    3/15/2005    10.24   
10.14    Amended and Restated Employment Agreement, dated December 18, 2008, by and between Boston Private Financial Holdings, Inc. and Timothy L. Vaill    8-K    12/23/2008    10.1   
10.15    Amended and Restated Supplemental Executive Retirement Agreement, dated December 18, 2008, by and between Boston Private Financial Holdings, Inc. and Timothy L. Vaill    8-K    12/23/2008    10.2   
10.16    Boston Private Financial Holdings, Inc. 2004 Stock Option and Incentive Plan    S-8    6/15/2004    N/A   
10.17    Indenture dated October 12, 2004 between Boston Private Financial Holdings, Inc. and Sun Trust Bank, as debenture trustee    8-K    10/15/2004    10.1   
10.18    Guarantee Agreement dated as of October 19, 2004 by Boston Private Financial Holdings, Inc. and Sun Trust Bank, as trustee, for the benefit of the holders from time to time of the Trust Preferred Securities and Trust Common Securities of Boston Private Capital Trust I    8-K    10/15/2004    10.2   
10.19    First Private Bank & Trust 1994 Stock Option Plan    S-8    3/5/2004    N/A   
10.20    Non-Solicitation/Non-Accept and Confidentiality Agreement and Release and Change in Control Protection Agreement by and between Boston Private Financial Holdings, Inc. and Joseph H. Cromarty dated March 1, 2005    8-K    3/7/2005    10.1

and

10.2

  
10.21    Indenture dated September 27, 2005 between Boston Private Financial Holdings, Inc. and Wilmington Trust Company, as debenture trustee    8-K    9/30/2005    10.1   
10.22    Guarantee Agreement dated as of September 27, 2005 by Boston Private Financial Holdings, Inc. and Wilmington Trust Company, as trustee, for the benefit of the holders from time to time of the Capital Securities of Boston Private Capital Trust II    8-K    9/30/2005    10.2   
10.23    Amended and Restated Declaration of Trust of Boston Private Capital Trust II dated September 27, 2005    8-K    9/30/2005    10.3   

 

152


Table of Contents

Exhibit No.

  

Description

   Incorporated by Reference     
      Form    SEC Filing
Date
   Exhibit
Number
   Filed with
this 10-K
10.24    Forms of award grant agreements under the Company’s 2004 Stock Option and Incentive Plan    8-K    12/20/2006    10.1,
10.2 and
10.3
  
10.25    Indenture, dated March 14, 2007, between Boston Private, Inc. and U.S. Bank, National Association, as Trustee    8-K    7/9/2007    4.1   
10.26    Registration Rights Agreement, dated July 5, 2007, between Boston Private, Inc. and the Initial Purchasers    8-K    7/9/2007    4.3   
10.27    Recapitalization Agreement, dated March 19, 2008, by and among Boston Private Financial Holdings, Inc., Westfield Capital Management Company, LLC, Westfield Capital Management, LP, WMS Management LLC and WCM General Partner LLC    8-K    3/26/2008    99.1   
10.28    Investment Agreement, dated July 22, 2008, between Boston Private Financial Holdings, Inc. and the investor party thereto    8-K    7/24/2008    10.1   
10.29    Warrant Agreement, dated July 22, 2008, between Boston Private Financial Holdings, Inc. and the investor party thereto    8-K    7/24/2008    10.2   
10.30    Letter Agreement, dated November 21, 2008, between Boston Private Financial Holdings, Inc. and the United States Department of the Treasury    8-K    11/24/2008    10.1   
10.31    Warrant for Purchase of Shares of Common Stock, dated November 21, 2008, between Boston Private Financial Holdings, Inc. and the United States Department of the Treasury    8-K    11/24/2008    4.2   
10.32    Form of Waiver of Senior Officers, dated November 21, 2008    8-K    11/24/2008    10.2   
10.33    Change in Control Protection Agreement by and between Boston Private Financial Holdings, Inc. and James D. Dawson dated January 28, 2009    8-K    1/28/2009    10.1   
10.34    Change in Control Protection Agreement by and between Boston Private Financial Holdings, Inc. and David J. Kaye dated January 28, 2009    8-K    1/28/2009    10.2   
10.35    Change in Control Protection Agreement by and between Boston Private Financial Holdings, Inc. and Martha T. Higgins dated January 28, 2009    8-K    1/28/2009    10.3   
10.36    Boston Private Financial Holdings, Inc. Executive Bonus Plan    8-K    1/28/2009    10.4   
10.37    Form of Non-Qualified Stock Option Agreement for Employees Under the Boston Private Financial Holdings, Inc. 2009 Stock Option and Incentive Plan    10-Q    8/7/2009    10.2   

 

153


Table of Contents

Exhibit No.

  

Description

   Incorporated by Reference     
      Form    SEC Filing
Date
   Exhibit
Number
   Filed with
this 10-K
10.38    Form of Restricted Stock Award Agreement Under the Boston Private Financial Holdings, Inc. 2009 Stock Option and Incentive Plan    10-Q    8/7/2009    10.3   
10.39    Stock Purchase Agreement by and among Boston Private Financial Holdings, Inc. Gibraltar Private Bank and Trust Company, and Buyers dated September 17, 2009    8-K    9/17/2009    10.1   
10.40    Redemption Agreement by and among Boston Private Financial Holdings, Inc., BPFH Manager, L.L.C., Westfield Capital Management Company, L.P. and WMS General Partner LLC dated October 6, 2009    8-K    10/7/2009    10.1   
10.41    Change in Control Protection Agreement by and between Boston Private Financial Holdings, Inc. and George L. Alexakos dated October 27, 2009    8-K    10/28/2009    10.1   
10.42    Letter Agreement by and between Boston Private Financial Holdings, Inc. and David J. Kaye, dated July 3, 2007    10-Q    11/6/2009    10.1   
10.43    Amendment No. 1 to Investment Agreement by and among Boston Private Financial Holdings, Inc. and BP Holdco, L.P., dated December 15, 2009    8-K    12/18/2009    10.1   
10.44    Boston Private Financial Holdings, Inc. Deferred Compensation Plan, As Amended and Restated as of January 1, 2009             X
21.1    List of Subsidiaries of Boston Private Financial Holdings, Inc.             X
23.1    Consent of KPMG, LLP             X
23.2    Consent of Hacker, Johnson & Smith PA             X
31.1    Certification of Chief Executive Officer pursuant to Rule 13a - 14(a)/15d - 14(a) under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934             X
31.2    Certification of Chief Financial Officer pursuant to Rule 13a - 14(a)/15d - 14(a) under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934             X
32.1    Certification of the Chief Executive Officer pursuant to 18 U.S.C. 1350, as adopted pursuant to Section 906 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002             X
32.2    Certification of the Chief Financial Officer pursuant to 18 U.S.C. 1350, as adopted pursuant to Section 906 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002             X
99.1    Certification pursuant to Section 111(b)(4) of the Emergency Economic Stabilization Act of 2008, as amended             X

 

154


Table of Contents

SIGNATURES

Pursuant to the requirements of Section 13 or 15 (d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, the registrant has duly caused this report to be signed on its behalf by the undersigned, thereunto duly authorized on this 12 th day of March, 2010.

 

B OSTON  P RIVATE  F INANCIAL  H OLDINGS , I NC .

By:

 

/s/    T IMOTHY L. V AILL      

  Timothy L. Vaill
 

Chief Executive Officer

(Principal Executive Officer)

Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, this report has been signed below by the following persons on behalf of the registrant in the capacities indicated.

 

/s/    T IMOTHY L. V AILL        

Timothy L. Vaill

  

Chairman of the Board and Chief Executive Officer

  March 12, 2010

/s/    W ALTER M. P RESSEY        

Walter M. Pressey

  

President and Vice Chairman

  March 12, 2010

/s/    D AVID J. K AYE        

David J. Kaye

  

Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer

  March 12, 2010

/s/    W ILLIAM A. G RATRIX        

William A. Gratrix

  

Senior Vice President and Controller (Principal Accounting Officer)

  March 12, 2010

/s/    H ERBERT S. A LEXANDER        

Herbert S. Alexander

  

Director

  March 12, 2010

/s/    E UGENE S. C OLANGELO        

Eugene S. Colangelo

  

Director

  March 12, 2010

/s/    K ATHLEEN M. G RAVELINE        

Kathleen M. Graveline

  

Director

  March 12, 2010

/s/    A DOLFO H ENRIQUES        

Adolfo Henriques

  

Director

  March 12, 2010

/s/    L YNN T HOMPSON H OFFMAN        

Lynn Thompson Hoffman

  

Director

  March 12, 2010

/s/    D EBORAH F. K EUNSTNER        

Deborah F. Keunstner

  

Director

  March 12, 2010

/s/    J OHN M ORTON , III        

John Morton, III

  

Director

  March 12, 2010

/s/    W ILLIAM J. S HEA        

William J. Shea

  

Director

  March 12, 2010

/s/    D R . A LLEN  L. S INAI        

Dr. Allen L. Sinai

  

Director

  March 12, 2010

/s/    S TEPHEN M. W ATERS        

Stephen M. Waters

  

Director

  March 12, 2010

 

155

Exhibit 10.3

AMENDED AND RESTATED LEASE

BETWEEN

BOSTON PRIVATE FINANCIAL HOLDINGS, INC ., AS TENANT

AND

WALTON 10-TEN P.O. INVESTORS, III, LLC , AS LANDLORD

T EN P OST O FFICE S QUARE ( SOUTH ) AND 10 P OST O FFICE S QUARE (N ORTH ),

BOSTON, MASSACHUSETTS

The submission of an unsigned copy of this document to Tenant for Tenant’s consideration does not constitute an offer to lease the Premises or an option to or for the Premises. This document shall become effective and binding only upon the execution and delivery of this Lease by both Landlord and Tenant.

 

-1-


TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

PAGE

ARTICLE 1   BASIC DATA; DEFINITIONS    1
            1.1   Basic Data    1
            1.2   Definitions    5
            1.3   Enumeration of Exhibits    9
ARTICLE 2   PREMISES AND APPURTENANT RIGHTS    10
            2.1   Lease of Premises    10
            2.2   Appurtenant Rights and Reservations    10
ARTICLE 3   BASIC RENT    12
            3.1   Payment    12
ARTICLE 4   COMMENCEMENT, CONDITION AND EXTENSION OPTION    13
            4.1   Commencement Date    13
            4.2   Condition of Premises    13
            4.3   Landlord’s Contribution    13
            4.4   Extension Options    16
ARTICLE 5   USE OF PREMISES    19
            5.1   Permitted Use    19
            5.2   Installations and Alterations by Tenant    20
            5.3   Extra Hazardous Use    23
            5.4   Hazardous Materials    23
ARTICLE 6   ASSIGNMENT AND SUBLETTING    24
            6.1   Prohibition    24
            6.2   Acceptance of Rent    25
            6.3   Excess Payments    25
            6.4   Tenant’s Notice    25
            6.5   Conditions to Assignment/Subletting    26
            6.6   Related Entities    28
            6.7   Further Requirements    28
ARTICLE 7   RESPONSIBILITY FOR REPAIRS AND CONDITION OF PREMISES; SERVICES TO BE FURNISHED BY LANDLORD    29
            7.1   Landlord Repairs    29
            7.2   Tenant Repairs    29
            7.3   Floor Load - Heavy Machinery    30
            7.4   Utility Services    30
            7.5   Other Services    32
            7.6   Interruption of Service    34

 

(i)


ARTICLE 8   REAL ESTATE TAXES    35
            8.1   Payments on Account of Real Estate Taxes    35
            8.2   Abatement    37
ARTICLE 9   OPERATING AND UTILITY EXPENSES    38
            9.1   Definitions    38
            9.2   Tenant’s Payment of Operating Expenses    39
            9.3   Utility Payments    41
ARTICLE 10   INDEMNITY AND PUBLIC LIABILITY INSURANCE    41
            10.1   Tenant’s Indemnity    41
            10.2   Tenant Insurance    41
            10.3   Tenant’s Risk    42
            10.4   Waiver of Subrogation    42
ARTICLE 11   FIRE, EMINENT DOMAIN, ETC.    43
            11.1   Landlord’s Right of Termination    43
            11.2   Restoration; Tenant’s Right of Termination    43
            11.3   Landlord’s Insurance    44
            11.4   Abatement of Rent    44
            11.5   Final 18 Months    44
            11.6   Condemnation Award    44
            11.7   Temporary Taking    45
ARTICLE 12   HOLDING OVER; SURRENDER    45
            12.1   Holding Over    45
            12.2   Surrender of Premises    45
ARTICLE 13   RIGHTS OF MORTGAGEES; TRANSFER OF TITLE    46
            13.1   Rights of Mortgagees    46
            13.2   Assignment of Rents and Transfer of Title    47
            13.3   Notice to Mortgagee    47
ARTICLE 14   DEFAULT; REMEDIES    47
            14.1   Tenant’s Default    47
            14.2   Landlord’s Remedies    51
            14.3   Additional Rent    53
            14.4   Remedying Defaults    53
            14.5   Remedies Cumulative    53
            14.6   Enforcement Costs    53
            14.7   Waiver    54
            14.8   [Intentionally Deleted]    54
            14.9   Landlord’s Default    54
ARTICLE 15   MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS    54
            15.1   Rights of Access    54
            15.2   Covenant of Quiet Enjoyment    55

 

(ii)


            15.3   Landlord’s Liability    55
            15.4   Estoppel Certificates    56
            15.5   Brokerage    57
            15.6   Financial Statements    57
            15.7   [Intentionally Deleted]    57
            15.8   Rules and Regulations    57
            15.9   Invalidity of Particular Provisions    57
            15.10   Provisions Binding, Etc.    57
            15.11   Recording    58
            15.12   Notice    58
            15.13   When Lease Becomes Binding; Entire Agreement; Modification    58
            15.14   Paragraph Headings and Interpretation of Sections    59
            15.15   Dispute Resolution    59
            15.16   Waiver of Jury Trial    59
            15.17   Time Is of the Essence    59
            15.18   Multiple Counterparts    59
            15.19   Governing Law    59
            15.20   Building Name, Property Name, Exterior Signage    59
ARTICLE 16   PARKING    60
            16.1   Parking Spaces    60
            16.2   Responsibility for Garage    60
            16.3   Personal Rights    60
ARTICLE 17   RIGHT OF FIRST OFFER TO LEASE SPACE    61
            17.1   ROFO Rights    61
            17.2   Excluded Areas, Available for Leasing, Exclusions, etc.    62
            17.3   Conditions    63
            17.4   Terms    63
            17.5   Amendment    63
            17.6   Expiration    63
ARTICLE 18   ROOFTOP EQUIPMENT    64
            18.1   Rooftop Equipment    64
            18.2   Relocation    67
ARTICLE 19   SPECIAL SURRENDER PROVISIONS FOR BASEMENT PREMISES    67
            19.1   Special Surrender Provision    67
ARTICLE 20   RIGHT OF FIRST OFFER TO PURCHASE PROPERTY    68
            20.1   Right of First Offer    68
            20.2   Acceptance of Offer    69
            20.3   Tenant’s Failure to Accept Offer    70
            20.4   Inapplicability    70
            20.5   Time is of Essence    70

 

(iii)


ARTICLE 21   ATM MACHINE    70
ARTICLE 22   GENERATOR    72
ARTICLE 23   EXPANSION RIGHTS    74

 

EXHIBIT A   Location Plans of Premises

EXHIBIT A-1

  Basement Storage (Ten P.O. Square)

EXHIBIT A-2

  Basement Storage (Ten P.O. Square)

EXHIBIT A-3

  Gallery Level (Ten P.O. Square)

EXHIBIT A-4

  Banking Hall (Ten P.O. Square)

EXHIBIT A-5

  Mezzanine Level (Ten P.O. Square)

EXHIBIT A-6

  2 nd Floor (Ten P.O. Square)

EXHIBIT A-7

  6 th Floor (Ten P.O. Square)

EXHIBIT A-8

  13 TH Floor (Ten P.O. Square)

EXHIBIT A-9

  Mezzanine (10 P.O. Square)

EXHIBIT A-10

  2 ND Floor (10 P.O. Square)

EXHIBIT A-11

  12 th Floor (10 P.O. Square)

EXHIBIT A-12

  3 RD Floor Expansion (Ten P.O. Square)

EXHIBIT A-13

  13 TH Floor Expansion (Ten P.O. Square)

EXHIBIT B

  Site Plan of Buildings

EXHIBIT C

  [Intentionally Deleted]

EXHIBIT D

  Operating Expenses

EXHIBIT E

  Rules and Regulations

EXHIBIT F

  Plans of Excluded Areas

 

(iv)


EXHIBIT F-1

  12 th Floor (Ten P.O. Square)

EXHIBIT F-2

  8 th Floor (Ten P.O. Square)

EXHIBIT G

  Plan of ATM Area

EXHIBIT H

  Plan of Generator Area

EXHIBIT I

  Cleaning Standards

EXHIBIT J

  Schedule of Existing Specialty Alterations to be Removed on Lease Expiration

EXHIBIT K

  Form of SNDA

EXHIBIT L

  Plans of Expansion Spaces

EXHIBIT L-1

  3 rd Floor - 10 P.O. Square

EXHIBIT L-2

  3 rd Floor - Ten P.O. Square

 

(v)


AMENDED AND RESTATED LEASE

THIS AMENDED AND RESTATED LEASE (this “Lease”) is dated as of June     , 2004 between the Landlord and the Tenant named below.

ARTICLE 1

BASIC DATA; DEFINITIONS

1.1 Basic Data . Each reference in this Lease to any of the following terms shall be construed to incorporate the data for that term set forth in this Section:

Landlord : WALTON 10-TEN P.O. INVESTORS, III, LLC, a Delaware limited liability company

Landlord’s Address : 900 North Michigan Avenue, Suite 1900, Chicago, IL 60611

Tenant : BOSTON PRIVATE FINANCIAL HOLDINGS, INC., a Massachusetts corporation

Tenant’s Address : Ten Post Office Square, Boston, Massachusetts 02109

Guarantor : N/A

Ten P.O. Square Property: The land located in Boston, Massachusetts, together with the Ten P.O. Square Building and other improvements thereon, all as shown on the site plan attached hereto as Exhibit B , together with all other buildings and improvements from time to time located on said land.

10 P.O. Square Property : The land located in Boston, Massachusetts, together with the 10 P.O. Square Building and other improvements thereon, all as shown on the site plan attached hereto as Exhibit B , together with all other buildings and improvements from time to time located on said land.

Property: Collectively, the Ten P.O. Square Property and the 10 P.O. Square Property.

Ten P.O. Square Building : The thirteen (13) story building commonly known and numbered as Ten Post Office Square (South), Boston, MA, shown on the site plan attached hereto as Exhibit B .

Ten P.O. Square Building Rentable Area : Agreed to be 236,317 rentable square feet. For purposes of this Lease, all areas described as “rentable square feet” are as agreed by the Landlord and the Tenant and such areas shall not be subject to remeasurement or recalculation.

10 P.O. Square Building : The thirteen (13) story building commonly known and numbered as 10 Post Office Square (North), Boston, MA, shown on the site plan attached hereto as Exhibit B , including all additions thereto and replacements thereof.


10 P.O. Square Building Rentable Area : Agreed to be 171,552 rentable square feet.

Buildings : Collectively, the Ten P.O. Square Building and the 10 P.O. Square Building.

Existing Premises: The following portions of the Premises, comprising in the aggregate 70,777 rentable square feet: (a) in the Ten P.O. Square Building, (i) a portion of the Premises on the Banking Hall Level, consisting of 5,832 rentable square feet, as shown on Exhibit A-4 attached hereto, (ii) a portion of the Premises on the Mezzanine Level, consisting of 13,829 rentable square feet as shown on Exhibit A- 5 attached hereto, (iii) a portion of the Premises on the 2 nd Floor, consisting of 19,020 rentable square feet, as shown on Exhibit A-6 attached hereto, (iv) a portion of the Premises located on the 6 th Floor, consisting of 3,434 rentable square feet, as shown on Exhibit A-7 attached hereto, and (v) a portion of the Premises located on the 13 th Floor, consisting of 3,434 rentable square feet, as shown on Exhibit A-8 attached hereto; and (b) in the 10 P.O. Square Building, (i) a portion of the Premises on the Mezzanine Level, consisting of 13,867 rentable square feet, as shown on Exhibit A-9 attached hereto, and (ii) a portion of the Premises on the 12 th Floor, consisting of 11,361 rentable square feet, as shown on Exhibit A-11 attached hereto.

Subleased Premises: A portion of the Premises located on the 2 nd Floor of the 10 P.O. Square Building, consisting of 12,612 rentable square feet, as shown on Exhibit A-10 attached hereto

Basement Premises : The portions of the Premises located on the Basement Level of the Ten P.O. Square Building, consisting of 1,096 rentable square feet in the aggregate, as shown on Exhibits A-1 and A-2 attached hereto.

Gallery Premises : A portion of the Premises located on the Gallery Level of the Ten P.O. Square Building, consisting of 7,308 rentable square feet, as shown on Exhibit A-3 attached hereto.

Additional Premises : (a) A portion of the Premises located on the 3 rd Floor of the Ten P.O. Square Building, consisting of 6,133 rentable square feet, as shown on Exhibit A-12 attached hereto; and (b) a portion of the Premises located on the 13 th Floor of the Ten P.O. Square Building, consisting of 2,295 rentable square feet, as shown on Exhibit A-13 attached hereto.

Premises: Collectively, the Existing Premises, the Subleased Premises, the Basement Premises, the Gallery Level Premises, the ATM Space, and the Additional Premises.

Premises Rentable Area : 100,221 rentable square feet, as mutually agreed by Landlord and Tenant, as follows: (a) in the Ten P.O. Square Building, 62,381 rentable square feet, consisting of the following; (i) 1,096 rentable square feet on the Basement Level, (ii) 7,308 rentable square feet on the Gallery Level, (iii) 5,832 rentable square feet on the Banking Hall Level, (iv) 13,829 rentable square feet on the Mezzanine Level, (v) 19,020 rentable square feet on the 2 nd Floor, (vi) 6,133 rentable square feet on the 3 rd Floor, (vii) 3,434 rentable square feet on the 6 th Floor, (viii) 3,434 rentable square feet on the 13 th Floor, and (ix) 2,295 rentable square feet on the 13 th Floor; and (b) in the 10 P.O. Square Building, 37,840 rentable square feet, consisting of the following; (i) 13,867 rentable square feet on the Mezzanine Level, (ii) 12,612 rentable square feet on the 2 nd Floor, and (iii) 11,361 rentable square feet on the 12 th Floor.

 

-2-


Basic Rent : The Basic Rent is as follows:

For the Existing Premises, as follows :

For and with respect to the period of time commencing on January 1, 2004 through and including December 31, 2004 (both dates inclusive), at the rate of $1,910,979.00 per annum ($159,248.25 per month), calculated at the rate of $27.00 per rentable square foot.

For and with respect to the period of time commencing on January 1, 2005 through and including December 31, 2009 (both dates inclusive), at the rate of $2,070,227.25 per annum ($172,518.93 per month), calculated at the rate of $29.25 per rentable square foot.

For and with respect to the period of time commencing on January 1, 2010 through and including December 31, 2010 (both dates inclusive), at the rate of $2,211,781.25 per annum ($184,315.10 per month), calculated at the rate of $31.25 per rentable square foot.

For and with respect to the period of time commencing on January 1, 2011 through and including February 28, 2015 (both dates inclusive), at the rate of $2,353,335.25 per annum ($196,111.27 per month), calculated at the rate of $33.25 per rentable square foot.

For the Additional Premises, as follows :

For and with respect to the period of time commencing on January 1, 2005 through and including December 31, 2009 (both dates inclusive), at the rate of $246,519.00 per annum ($20,543.25 per month), calculated at the rate of $29.25 per rentable square foot.

For and with respect to the period of time commencing on January 1, 2010 through and including December 31, 2010 (both dates inclusive), at the rate of $263,375.00 per annum ($21,947.92 per month), calculated at the rate of $31.25 per rentable square foot.

For and with respect to the period of time commencing on January 1, 2011 through and including February 28, 2015 (both dates inclusive), at the rate of $280,231.00 per annum ($23,352.58 per month), calculated at the rate of $33.25 per rentable square foot.

For the Subleased Premises, as follows :

For and with respect to the period of time commencing on February 1, 2005 through and including December 31, 2009 (both dates inclusive), at the rate of $368,901.00 per annum ($30,741.75 per month), calculated at the rate of $29.25 per rentable square foot.

For and with respect to the period of time commencing on January 1, 2010 through and including December 31, 2010 (both dates inclusive), at the rate of $394,125.00 per annum ($32,843.75 per month), calculated at the rate of $31.25 per rentable square foot.

 

-3-


For and with respect to the period of time commencing on January 1, 2011 through and including February 28, 2015 (both dates inclusive), at the rate of $419,349.00 per annum ($34,945.75 per month), calculated at the rate of $33.25 per rentable square foot.

For the Gallery Premises, as follows :

For and with respect to the period of time commencing on January 1, 2004 through and including December 31, 2009 (both dates inclusive), at the rate of $95,004.00 per annum ($7,917.00 per month), calculated at the rate of $13.00 per rentable square foot.

For and with respect to the period of time commencing on January 1, 2010 through and including December 31, 2010 (both dates inclusive), at the rate of $116,928.00 per annum ($9,744.00 per month), calculated at the rate of $16.00 per rentable square foot.

For and with respect to the period of time commencing on January 1, 2011 through and including February 28, 2015 (both dates inclusive), at the rate of $138,852.00 per annum ($11,571.00 per month), calculated at the rate of $19.00 per rentable square foot.

For the Basement Premises, as follows :

For and with respect to the period of time commencing on January 1, 2004 through and including December 31, 2009 (both dates inclusive), at the rate of $9,864.00 per annum ($822.00 per month), calculated at the rate of $9.00 per rentable square foot.

For and with respect to the period of time commencing on January 1, 2010 through and including February 28, 2015 (both dates inclusive), at the rate of $11,508.00 per annum ($959.00 per month), calculated at the rate of $10.50 per rentable square foot.

Base Year for Operating Expenses : Calendar Year 2004.

Base Year for Taxes : The greater of (i) the Taxes for Fiscal Year 2004 (i.e. the twelve month period beginning July 1, 2003 and ending June 30, 2004), or (ii) the Taxes for Fiscal Year 2005 (the twelve month period beginning July 1, 2004 and ending June 30, 2005).

Tenant’s Proportionate Ten P.O. Share : 25.933% (which is based on the ratio of (a) the Rentable Area of the portion of the Premises in the Ten P.O. Square Building (excluding therefrom the Rentable Area of the Basement Premises and the ATM Space) to (b) the Ten P.O. Square Building Rentable Area ).

Tenant’s Proportionate 10 P.O. Share: For and with respect to the period of time commencing on the Commencement Date through and including January 31, 2005 (both dates inclusive), 14.71%; from and after February 1, 2005, 22.06% (which calculations are based on the then-applicable ratio of (a) the Rentable Area of the portion of the Premises in the 10 P.O. Square Building to (b) the 10 P.O. Square Building Rentable Area).

Security Deposit: N/A

Commencement Date : January 1, 2004.

 

-4-


Expiration Date : February 28, 2015.

Term : Eleven (11) years and two (2) months, commencing on the Commencement Date and expiring at the close of the day on the Expiration Date. The Term shall include any extension thereof in accordance with the provisions of Section 4.4.

Initial General Liability Insurance : $3,000,000.00 per occurrence/$5,000,000.00 aggregate (combined single limit) for property damage, bodily injury or death.

Permitted Uses : Executive and general offices, and the operation of banking facilities, and no other purpose or purposes; provided, however, the Basement Premises shall be used for storage purposes accessory to such offices and facilities.

Landlord’s Initial Contribution : $2,261,124.75, an amount calculated by adding the following: (a) 65% of $35.00 multiplied by 83,389 (i.e. the Rentable Area of the Existing Premises and the Subleased Premises, collectively), (b) $50.00 multiplied by 6,133 (i.e. the Rentable Area of the portion of the Additional Premises on the 3 rd Floor of the Ten P.O. Square Building), and (c) $25.00 multiplied by 2,295 (i.e. the Rentable Area of the portion of the Additional Premises on the 13 th Floor of the Ten P.O. Square Building).

Landlord’s Additional Contribution: $1,021,515.25, an amount calculated as follows: 35% of $35.00 multiplied by 83,389 (i.e. the Rentable Area of the Existing Premises and the Subleased Premises, collectively).

Landlord’s Contribution : Collectively, Landlord’s Initial Contribution and Landlord’s Additional Contribution.

Tenant’s Construction Representative: Samuel L. Guiffre, Senior Vice President

1.2 Definitions . When used in Lease, the capitalized terms set forth below shall bear the meanings set forth below.

Adequate Assurance : As defined in Section 14.1.

Adequate Assurance of Future Performance : As defined in Section 14.1.

Additional Rent : All charges and sums payable by Tenant as set forth in this Lease, other than and in addition to Basic Rent.

Affiliate: With respect to any person or entity, any other person or entity that, directly or indirectly (through one of more intermediaries), Controls, is Controlled by, or is under common Control with, such first person or entity. “Control” shall mean ownership of not less than 50% of all of the stock, membership interests, or other beneficial interests in such entity.

Alterations : As defined in Section 5.2.

Bankruptcy Code : As defined in Section 14.1.

 

-5-


Base Operating Expenses : Actual Operating Expenses for the Base Year for Operating Expenses.

Base Taxes : Actual Taxes assessed for the Base Year for Taxes.

Base Year for Operating Expenses : As defined in Section 1.1.

Base Year for Taxes : As defined in Section 1.1.

Basic Rent : As defined in Section 1.1.

Brokers : CB Richard Ellis/Whittier Partners and Trammell Crow

Buildings : As defined in Section 1.1.

Business Day : All days except Saturdays, Sundays, New Year’s Day, Martin Luther King Day, Memorial Day, Presidents Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Columbus Day, Veteran’s Day, Thanksgiving Day, Christmas Day (and the following day when any such day occurs on Sunday), and such other days that tenants occupying at least 50% of Rentable Area of the respective Building now or in the future recognize as holidays for their general office staff.

Commencement Date : As defined in Section 1.1.

Common Facilities : As defined in Section 2.2.

Control: (i)(a) The ownership, directly or indirectly, of more than 50% of the voting stock of a corporation, or (b) in the case of any person or entity which is not a corporation, the ownership, directly or indirectly, of more than 50% of the beneficial ownership interest in such person or entity, or (ii) in the case of any such person or entity, the possession, directly or indirectly, of the power to direct or cause the direction of the management and policies of such person or entity.

Environmental Condition : Any disposal, release or threat of release of Hazardous Materials on, from or about the Buildings or the Property or storage of Hazardous Materials on, from or about the Buildings or the Property.

Environmental Laws : Any federal, state and/or local statute, ordinance, bylaw, code, rule and/or regulation now or hereafter enacted, pertaining to any aspect of the environment or human health, including, without limitation, Chapter 21C, Chapter 21D, and Chapter 21E of the General Laws of Massachusetts and the regulations promulgated by the Massachusetts Department of Environmental Protection, the Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation and Liability Act of 1980, 42 U.S.C. § 9601 et seq., the Resource Conservation and Recovery Act of 1976, 42 U.S.C. § 6901 et seq., the Toxic Substances Control Act, 15 U.S.C. §2061 et seq., the Federal Clean Water Act, 33 U.S.C. §1251, and the Federal Clean Air Act, 42 U.S.C. §7401 et seq .

Escalation Charges : The Additional Rent arising pursuant to Article 8 and Article 9 of this Lease.

 

-6-


Essential Services : As defined in Section 7.6.

Event of Bankruptcy : As defined in Section 14.1.

Event of Default : As defined in Section 14.1.

Existing Leases : Collectively, the following lease agreements, between the predecessors-in-interest to Landlord, as landlord, and the Tenant, as tenant: (i) that certain lease, dated October 31, 1994, as amended by amendments thereto dated August, 1995, October 7, 1996, July, 1999, September 29, 2000, and January 4, 2002; (ii) that certain lease originally dated December 23, 1999, as amended by amendments thereto dated September 29, 2000, September 7, 2001, March     , 2002, and May 19, 2003; and (iii) that certain storage space license, dated as of November 7, 2001.

Existing Sublease: That certain Sublease Agreement, dated as of October 19, 2001, between Leggat McCall Properties LLC, as sublandlord, and Tenant, as subtenant.

Force Majeure : Collectively and individually, strikes or other labor trouble, fire or other casualty, acts of God, governmental preemption of priorities or other controls in connection with a national or other public emergency or shortages of fuel, supplies or labor resulting therefrom, or any other cause, whether similar or dissimilar, beyond the reasonable control of the party required to perform an obligation.

Holder : As defined in Section 13.1.

Hazardous Materials : Shall mean each and every element, compound, chemical mixture, contaminant, pollutant, material, waste or other substance which is defined, determined or identified as hazardous or toxic under any Environmental Law, including, without limitation, any “oil,” “hazardous material,” “hazardous waste,” “hazardous substance” or “chemical substance or mixture”, as the foregoing terms (in quotations) are defined in any Environmental Laws.

Initial General Liability Insurance : As defined in Section 1.1.

Land : The land that constitutes a portion of the Property.

Landlord : As defined in Section 1.1.

Landlord’s Initial Contribution : As defined in Section 1.1.

Landlord’s Additional Contribution : As defined in Section 1.1.

Landlord’s Address : As defined in Section 1.1.

Lease Year : Each period of one year during the Term commencing on the Commencement Date or on any anniversary thereof, or, if the Commencement Date does not fall on the first day of a calendar month, the first Lease Year shall consist of the partial calendar month following the Commencement Date and the succeeding twelve full calendar months, and each succeeding Lease Year shall consist of a one-year period commencing on the first day of the calendar month following the calendar month in which the Commencement Date fell.

 

-7-


Mortgage : As defined in Section 13.1.

Operating Expenses : Collectively, the Ten P.O. Square Operating Expenses and the 10 P.O. Square Operating Expenses.

Operating Year : As defined in Section 9.1.

Permitted Uses : As defined in Section 1.1.

Premises : As defined in Section 1.1.

Premises Rentable Area : As defined in Section 1.1.

Property : As defined in Section 1.1.

Recapture Date : As defined in Section 6.4.

Related Entity : An entity in which Boston Private Financial Holdings, Inc. owns (directly or indirectly) not less than 20% of all of the stock, membership interests or other beneficial interests in such entity.

Rules and Regulations : As defined in Section 2.2.

Security Deposit : As defined in Section 1.1.

Service Interruption : As defined in Section 7.6.

Specialty Alterations: Alterations which are not standard office installations such as kitchens, executive bathrooms, raised computer floors, computer room installations, supplemental HVAC equipment, safe deposit boxes, vaults, libraries or file rooms requiring reinforcement of floors, internal staircases, slab penetrations, conveyors, dumbwaiters, and other Alterations of a similar character.

Subleased Premises: As defined in Section 1.1.

Successor : As defined in Section 13.1.

Taxes : Collectively, the Ten P.O. Square Taxes and the 10 P.O. Square Taxes.

Tax Year : As defined in Section 8.1.

Tenant : As defined in Section 1.1.

Tenant’s Address : As defined in Section 1.1.

Tenant’s Construction Representative : As defined in Section 1.1.

 

-8-


Tenant’s Proportionate 10 P.O. Share : As defined in Section 1.1.

Tenant’s Proportionate Ten P.O. Share : As defined in Section 1.1.

Tenant’s Removable Property : As defined in Section 5.2.

Term : As defined in Section 1.1.

1.3 Enumeration of Exhibits . The following Exhibits are a part of this Lease, are incorporated herein by reference attached hereto, and are to be treated as a part of this Lease for all purposes. Undertakings contained in such Exhibits are agreements on the part of Landlord and Tenant, as the case may be, to perform the obligations stated therein.

 

Exhibit A   Location Plans of the Premises
  Exhibit A-1   Basement Storage (Ten P.O. Square)
  Exhibit A-2   Basement Storage (Ten P.O. Square)
  Exhibit A-3   Gallery Level (Ten P.O. Square)
  Exhibit A-4   Banking Hall (Ten P.O. Square)
  Exhibit A-5   Mezzanine Level (Ten P.O. Square)
  Exhibit A-6   2 nd Floor (Ten P.O. Square)
  Exhibit A-7   6 th Floor (Ten P.O. Square)
  Exhibit A-8   13 TH Floor (Ten P.O. Square)
  Exhibit A-9   Mezzanine (10 P.O. Square)
  Exhibit A-10   2 ND Floor (10 P.O. Square)
  Exhibit A-11   12 th Floor (10 P.O. Square)
  Exhibit A-12   3 RD Floor Expansion (Ten P.O. Square)
  Exhibit A-13   13 TH Floor Expansion (Ten P.O. Square)
Exhibit B   Site Plans of Buildings
Exhibit C   [Intentionally Deleted]
Exhibit D   Operating Expenses
Exhibit E   Rules and Regulations
Exhibit F   Plans of Excluded Areas
  Exhibit F-1    12 th Floor (Ten P.O. Square)
  Exhibit F-2    8 th Floor (Ten P.O. Square)
Exhibit G   Plan of ATM Area
Exhibit H   Plan of Generator Area
Exhibit I   Cleaning Standards
Exhibit J   Schedule of Existing Specialty Alterations to be Removed on Lease
Exhibit K   Form of SNDA
Exhibit L   Plans of Expansion Areas
  Exhibit L-1    3rd Floor- 10 P.O. Square
  Exhibit L-2    3rd Floor- Ten P.O. Square

 

-9-


ARTICLE 2

PREMISES AND APPURTENANT RIGHTS

2.1 Lease of Premises . Landlord hereby leases to Tenant and Tenant hereby leases from Landlord the Premises for the Term and upon the terms and conditions hereinafter set forth. Effective as of January 1, 2004, this Lease fully and completely amends, restates, and supercedes the Existing Leases in all respects.

2.2 Appurtenant Rights and Reservations .

(a) Tenant shall have, as appurtenant to the Premises, the non-exclusive right to use, and permit its invitees to use in common with Landlord and others, (i) public or common lobbies, hallways, stairways, elevators and common walkways necessary for access to the Buildings and the Premises, and if the portion of the Premises on any floor includes less than the entire floor, the common toilets, corridors and elevator lobby of such floor; and (ii) the access roads, driveways, loading areas, pedestrian sidewalks, trash enclosures and other areas or facilities, if any, which are located in or on the Property and designated by Landlord from time to time for the non-exclusive use of tenants and other occupants of the Buildings (the “Common Facilities” ); but such rights shall always be subject to reasonable rules and regulations from time to time established by Landlord pursuant to Section 15.8 (the “Rules and Regulations” ) and to the right of Landlord to designate and change from time to time areas and facilities so to be used.

(b) Excepted and excluded from the Premises and the Common Facilities are the ceiling, floor, perimeter walls and exterior windows (except the inner surface of each thereof), and any space in the Premises used for shafts, stacks, pipes, conduits, fan rooms, ducts, electric or other utilities, sinks or other Building facilities, but the entry doors (and related glass and finish work) to the Premises are a part thereof. Landlord shall have the right to place in, over and through the Premises (but in such manner as to reduce to a minimum interference with Tenant’s use of the Premises) interior storm windows, sun control devices, utility lines, equipment, stacks, pipes, conduits, ducts and the like. In the event that Tenant shall install any hung ceilings or walls in the Premises, Tenant shall install and maintain, as Landlord may require, proper access panels therein to afford access to any facilities above the ceiling or within or behind the walls. Tenant shall be entitled to install any such ceilings or walls only in compliance with the other terms and conditions of this Lease.

(c) Landlord shall cause Tenant’s name, and the names of Tenant’s departments, affiliates, and senior officers, to be listed on the building directories in the lobbies of the respective Buildings. In addition, tenant identification signage for Tenant has previously been installed in the elevator lobbies of the respective floors on which the Premises are located and in the respective entry areas of the Premises. Landlord and Tenant both acknowledge and agree that all such existing identification signage is satisfactory and acceptable. Landlord shall provide building standard tenant identification signage for Tenant in the elevator lobby of the 3 rd Floor of the Ten P.O. Square Building and in the lobby areas on the respective floors on which additional areas may be added to the Premises pursuant to Article 17 or Article 23 .

 

-10-


(d) Tenant may elect, at Tenant’s sole cost and expense, to construct and erect a sign identifying Tenant as an occupant of the Building on the exterior of the Ten P.O. Square Building, which sign (including, without limitation, the size, location, design, materials, colors and appearance thereof) shall be subject to the prior review and approval of Landlord in all respects. Tenant shall, at its sole cost and expense, prepare all plans and specifications relating to such exterior sign, obtain all required permits and approvals from governmental authorities required in connection with such sign, and be responsible for all costs and expenses of constructing, maintaining, repairing and replacing said sign. Landlord shall have no obligations or liabilities with respect to such sign, including, without limitation, relating to the obtaining of required permits or approvals with respect thereto, or the construction, installation, maintenance, repair, or replacement thereof, all of which shall be at the sole risk, cost and expense, of Tenant. Landlord shall maintain and repair such sign and, within not more than thirty (30) days after receipt of invoices therefor, Tenant shall reimburse Landlord for all such costs and expenses, as Additional Rent. In the event that Tenant is unable to obtain required approvals and permits from governmental authorities in connection with the proposed sign, then neither party shall have any further rights, claims, obligations, or liabilities with respect thereto.

(e) At the request of Tenant and at Tenant’s sole cost and expense, Landlord will install a canopy with 3 sides of illuminated signage displaying the name of “Boston Private Bank & Trust Company” at the existing Milk Street entrance to the Ten P.O. Square Building, which canopy (including, without limitation, the size, location, design, materials, colors, signage, illumination, and appearance thereof) shall be subject to the prior review and approval of Landlord in all respects. Tenant shall, at its sole cost and expense, prepare all plans and specifications relating to such canopy, obtain all required permits and approvals from governmental authorities required in connection with such canopy, and be responsible for all costs and expenses of constructing, maintaining, repairing and replacing said canopy. Landlord shall have no obligations or liabilities with respect to such canopy, including, without limitation, relating to the obtaining of required permits or approvals with respect thereto, all of which shall be at the sole risk, cost and expense, of Tenant. Landlord shall maintain and repair such canopy and, within not more than thirty (30) days after receipt of invoices therefor, Tenant shall reimburse Landlord for all such costs and expenses, as Additional Rent. In the event that Tenant is unable to obtain required approvals and permits from governmental authorities in connection with the proposed canopy, then neither party shall have any further rights, claims, obligations, or liabilities with respect thereto.

(f) Pursuant to the Existing Sublease, Tenant has subleased the Subleased Premises. The term of the Existing Sublease expires on January 31, 2005 and prior to the expiration or earlier termination of the Existing Sublease the Subleased Premises shall not be considered to be part of the Premises for purposes of this Lease. Without limitation, neither Landlord nor Tenant shall have any obligations or liabilities

 

-11-


under this Lease with respect to the Subleased Premises unless and until the expiration or earlier termination of the Existing Sublease. Concurrent with the expiration or earlier termination of the Existing Sublease, the Subleased Premises automatically shall become part of the Premises for all purposes under this Lease, in accordance with and subject to the terms and conditions hereof. In no event will the Existing Sublease be extended, amended or otherwise modified except with the prior written consent of Landlord in each instance.

ARTICLE 3

BASIC RENT

3.1 Payment .

(a) Tenant agrees to pay the Basic Rent and Additional Rent to Landlord, or as directed by Landlord, commencing on the Commencement Date, without offset, abatement (except as expressly and specifically provided in Section 11.4 ), deduction or demand. Basic Rent shall be payable in equal monthly installments, in advance, on the first day of each and every calendar month during the Term of this Lease, to Landlord at Landlord’s Address or at such other place as Landlord shall from time to time designate by notice, in lawful money of the United States. In addition to any charges under Section 14.4 , in the event that during any twelve (12) consecutive months two (2) or more installments of Basic Rent or any regularly scheduled payment of Additional Rent are not paid when due, then Tenant shall pay, at Landlord’s request an administrative fee equal to three percent (3%) of each such overdue payment. Landlord and Tenant agree that all amounts due from Tenant under or in respect of this Lease, whether labeled Basic Rent, Escalation Charges, Additional Rent or otherwise, shall be considered as rental reserved under this Lease for all purposes, including, without limitation, regulations promulgated pursuant to the Bankruptcy Code, and including further without limitation Section 502(b) thereof.

(b) Basic Rent for any partial month shall be pro-rated on a daily basis, and if the first day on which Tenant must pay Basic Rent shall be other than the first day of a calendar month, the first payment which Tenant shall make to Landlord shall be equal to a proportionate part of the monthly installment of Basic Rent for the partial month from the first day on which Tenant must pay Basic Rent to the last day of the month in which such day occurs, plus the installment of Basic Rent for the succeeding calendar month.

(c) Landlord has agreed to provide a rent credit to Tenant on account of a portion of the rent payable by Tenant under the Existing sublease. Accordingly, without limiting the obligations of Tenant to pay Basic Rent and Additional Rent hereunder, provided that (i) no uncured Event of Default then exists under this Lease, and (ii) the Existing Sublease remains in full force and effect through January 31, 2005, Tenant shall be entitled to a rent credit of $100,000.00, which credit may be applied in 13 equal monthly installments of $7,692.31 each against the monthly payments of Basic Rent which are payable on the first day of each month commencing on January, 2004 and continuing through January, 2005.

 

-12-


(d) Pursuant to the Existing Leases, Tenant has previously made payments on account of basic rent, real estate taxes and operating expenses to Landlord for the period of time between January 1, 2004 and the date of this Lease. Landlord has agreed to provide a rent credit to Tenant to the extent such payments on account of basic rent, real estate taxes and operating expenses actually paid by Tenant under the Existing Leases exceed the Basic Rent and Escalation Charges payable under this Lease for such period of time. Accordingly, without limiting the obligations of Tenant to pay Basic Rent and Additional Rent hereunder, provided that no Event of Default then exists under this Lease, Tenant shall be entitled to a rent credit of $535,377.95, which credit may be applied in 3 equal monthly installments of $178,459.31 each against the monthly payments of Basic Rent which are payable on each of July 1, 2004, August 1, 2004, and September 1, 2004.

ARTICLE 4

COMMENCEMENT, CONDITION OF PREMISES, AND EXTENSION OPTIONS

4.1 Commencement Date . The “ Commencement Date ” shall be January 1, 2004.

4.2 Condition of Premises . Tenant acknowledges that prior to the date of this Lease, the Existing Premises, the Basement Premises and the Gallery Premises all have been under its control, subject to and in accordance with the terms and conditions of the Existing Leases (and with respect to the Subleased Premises, pursuant to the Existing Sublease). Tenant has had a full and complete opportunity to review and inspect all aspects of all portions of the Premises and agrees (a) to accept possession of the Premises in the condition existing on the Commencement Date, in “as is” and “where is” condition, (b) that neither Landlord nor Landlord’s agents have made any representations or warranties with respect to the Premises or the Building except as expressly set forth herein, and (c) except for payment of Landlord’s Contribution, Landlord has no obligation to perform any work, supply any materials, incur any expense or make any alterations, additions or improvements to the Building to prepare the Premises for Tenant’s use and occupancy. Promptly after the date of this Lease, Tenant shall, at its own cost and expense, in accordance with and subject to the terms and provisions of this Lease, perform or cause to be performed any and all work necessary to prepare the Premises for Tenant’s occupancy (the “Initial Installations”), shall equip the Premises with new trade fixtures and personal property necessary or proper for the conduct of Tenant’s business. Tenant has accepted the Premises in its current condition, and confirms that the Premises and the Buildings are in a good and satisfactory condition as required by this Lease.

4.3 Landlord’s Contribution .

(a) Landlord agrees to pay to Tenant an amount not to exceed Landlord’s Contribution toward the cost of performing Alterations in the Premises and other costs and expenses relating to the occupancy of the Premises by Tenant (including, without limitation, the costs of installing a canopy pursuant to Section 2.2(e) and the costs of

 

-13-


Alterations to the Premises previously performed by Tenant), provided as of the date on which Landlord is required to make any payment on account thereof as set forth below, (i) this Lease is in full force and effect, (ii) no Event of Default then exists under this Lease, and (iii) Boston Private Financial Holdings, Inc. and/or Affiliates of Boston Private Financial Holdings, Inc. is (or are) in occupancy of not less than sixty-five (65%) of the rentable area of the Premises then demised under this Lease. In no event will Landlord be obligated to pay to Tenant in the aggregate an amount in excess of Landlord’s Contribution.

(b) Landlord shall make progress payments to Tenant on account of the Landlord’s Initial Contribution on a monthly basis, to reimburse Tenant for payments previously made by Tenant on account of the work performed in performing Alterations during the previous month and other costs and expenses relating to the occupancy of the Premises by Tenant. Each of Landlord’s progress payments shall be limited to an amount equal to the aggregate amount theretofore paid by Tenant (as certified by a duly authorized officer of Tenant and, with respect to Alterations, as also certified by Tenant’s independent architect) to Tenant’s contractors, subcontractors, and material suppliers that have not been subject to previous disbursements from Landlord’s Initial Contribution. In no event shall Landlord pay in the aggregate an amount greater than Landlord’s Initial Contribution. Provided that this Lease is in full force and effect and no Default of Tenant then exists, such progress payments shall be made within thirty (30) days after the delivery to Landlord of requisitions therefor, signed by a duly authorized officer of Tenant, setting forth the names of each contractor, subcontractor, payee, and supplier to whom payment has been made by Tenant, and the amount thereof, and accompanied by (i) evidence of payment by Tenant of the amounts sought to be reimbursed (such as paid receipts); (ii) with respect to payments on account of Alterations, partial waivers of lien from all contractors, subcontractors, and material suppliers covering all work and materials that were the subject of previous progress payments by Landlord; (iii) with respect to payments on account of Alterations, a written certification from Tenant’s architect that the work for which the requisition is being made has been completed substantially in accordance with the plans and specifications approved by Landlord; and (iv) such other documents and information as Landlord may reasonably request. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary set forth in this Section 4.3, if Tenant does not pay any contractor, subcontractor or supplier as required by this provision, Landlord shall have the right, but not the obligation, to promptly pay to such contractor or supplier all sums so due from Tenant, and Tenant agrees the same shall be deemed Additional Rent and shall be paid by Tenant within ten (10) days after Landlord delivers to Tenant an invoice therefor, or, at Landlord’s election, be deducted from the unpaid balance of Landlord’s Initial Contribution.

(c) Landlord shall pay the final installment of the Landlord’s Initial Contribution to Tenant within thirty (30) days after delivery by Tenant to Landlord of a written requisition therefor, certified as true, correct and complete by a duly authorized officer of Tenant and accompanied by (i) copies of paid invoices, (ii) with respect to payments on account of Alterations, a written certification from Tenant’s architect stating that the Initial Installations described on such invoices have been completed in

 

-14-


accordance with the plans and specifications approved by Landlord, that such work has been paid in full by Tenant and that all contractors, subcontractors and material suppliers have delivered to Tenant waivers of lien with respect to such work (copies of which shall be included with such architect’s certification), (iii) with respect to payments on account of Alterations, proof of the satisfactory completion of all required inspections and the issuance of any required approvals and sign-offs by Governmental Authorities with respect thereto, (iv) if requested by Landlord, final “as-built” plans and specifications for the subject Alterations, and (v) such other documents and information as Landlord may reasonably request, in connection therewith.

(d) Without limiting the foregoing, Tenant may requisition a portion of the Landlord’s Initial Contribution on a monthly basis, in order to reimburse Tenant for payments made by Tenant to Landlord on account of the Basic Rent payable hereunder, provided that all of the following conditions are satisfied: (i) this Lease is in full force and effect; (ii) no Event of Default then exists under this Lease; (iii) Tenant shall provide not less than thirty (30) days prior notice of its intention to requisition a portion of the Initial Contribution for reimbursement of payments made on account of Basic Rent, which notice shall specify the amount of such requisition and the applicable installments of Basic Rent; and (iv) such requisitions may be applied in equal amounts on account of not less than six (6) monthly installments of Basic Rent payable hereunder.

(e) In no event shall Landlord be obligated to make any payments on account of the Landlord’s Additional Contribution prior to October 1, 2009. From and after October 1, 2009, Landlord shall make progress payments to Tenant on account of the Landlord’s Additional Contribution on a monthly basis, to reimburse Tenant for payments previously made by Tenant on account of the work performed in performing Alterations during the previous month and other costs and expenses relating to the occupancy of the Premises by Tenant. Each of Landlord’s progress payments shall be limited to an amount equal to the aggregate amount theretofore paid by Tenant (as certified by a duly authorized officer of Tenant and, with respect to payments on account of Alterations, as also certified by Tenant’s independent architect) to Tenant’s contractors, subcontractors, and material suppliers that have not been subject to previous disbursements from Landlord’s Additional Contribution. In no event shall Landlord pay in the aggregate an amount greater than Landlord’s Additional Contribution. Provided that this Lease is in full force and effect and no Event of Default then exists, such progress payments shall be made within thirty (30) days after the delivery to Landlord of requisitions therefor, signed by a duly authorized officer of Tenant, setting forth the names of each contractor, subcontractor, payee, and supplier to whom payment has been made by Tenant, and the amount thereof, and accompanied by (i) evidence of payment by Tenant of the amounts sought to be reimbursed (such as paid receipts); (ii) with respect to payments on account of Alterations, partial waivers of lien from all contractors, subcontractors, and material suppliers covering all work and materials that were the subject of previous progress payments by Landlord; (iii) with respect to payments on account of Alterations, a written certification from Tenant’s architect that the work for which the requisition is being made has been completed substantially in accordance with the plans and specifications approved by Landlord; and (iv) such other documents and

 

-15-


information as Landlord may reasonably request. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary set forth in this Section 4.3, if Tenant does not pay any contractor, subcontractor or supplier as required by this provision, Landlord shall have the right, but not the obligation, to promptly pay to such contractor or supplier all sums so due from Tenant, and Tenant agrees the same shall be deemed Additional Rent and shall be paid by Tenant within ten (10) days after Landlord delivers to Tenant an invoice therefor, or, at Landlord’s election, be deducted from the unpaid balance of Landlord’s Additional Contribution.

(f) Landlord shall pay the final installment of the Landlord’s Additional Contribution to Tenant within thirty (30) days after delivery by Tenant to Landlord of a written requisition therefor, certified as true, correct and complete by a duly authorized officer of Tenant and accompanied by (i) copies of paid invoices, (ii) with respect to payments on account of Alterations, a written certification from Tenant’s architect stating that the Alterations described on such invoices have been completed in accordance with the plans and specifications approved by Landlord, that such work has been paid in full by Tenant and that all contractors, subcontractors and material suppliers have delivered to Tenant waivers of lien with respect to such work (copies of which shall be included with such architect’s certification), (iii) with respect to payments on account of Alterations, proof of the satisfactory completion of all required inspections and the issuance of any required approvals and sign-offs by Governmental Authorities with respect thereto, (iv) if requested by Landlord, final “as-built” plans and specifications for the subject Alterations, and (v) such other documents and information as Landlord may reasonably request in connection therewith.

(g) Without limiting the foregoing, after October 1, 2009 the Tenant may requisition a portion of the Landlord’s Additional Contribution on a monthly basis, in order to reimburse Tenant for payments made by Tenant to Landlord on account of the Basic Rent payable hereunder, provided that all of the following conditions are satisfied: (i) this Lease is in full force and effect; (ii) no Event of Default then exists under this Lease; (iii) Boston Private Financial Holdings, Inc. and/or Affiliates of Boston Private Financial Holdings, Inc. is (or are) in occupancy of not less than sixty-five (65%) of the rentable area of the Premises then demised under this Lease; (iv) Tenant shall provide not less than thirty (30) days prior notice of its intention to requisition a portion of the Additional Contribution for reimbursement of payments made on account of Basic Rent, which notice shall specify the amount of such requisition and the applicable installments of Basic Rent; and (v) such requisitions may be applied in equal amounts on account of not less than six (6) monthly installments of Basic Rent payable hereunder.

4.4 Extension Options .

(a) Provided both on the date Tenant’s Extension Notice (as hereinafter defined) is given and on the then-scheduled expiration date (i) Tenant shall not then be in breach or default under any term, covenant or condition of this Lease on Tenant’s part to be observed or performed, and (ii) Boston Private Financial Holdings, Inc. and/or Affiliates of Boston Private Financial Holdings, Inc. is (or are) in occupancy of not less than sixty-five (65%) of the rentable area of the Premises then demised under this Lease,

 

-16-


then Tenant may extend the Term of this Lease for three (3) successive periods (each, an “Extension Period”) of five (5) years each by written notice (each, a “Tenant’s Extension Notice”) to Landlord given at least sixteen and one-half (16.5) months prior to the commencement of each such Extension Period. Delivery of each Tenant’s Extension Notice shall unconditionally constitute the exercise by Tenant of the option to extend the Term of this Lease and in no event may Tenant revoke a Tenant’s Extension Notice, then such notice shall be irrevocable after delivery thereto. Immediately after delivery of each Tenant’s Extension Notice this Lease shall be automatically extended in accordance with the provisions of this Section 4.4. Each such extension shall be for and with respect to the entirety of the Premises then demised under this Lease. Each such extension shall be on the same terms and conditions set forth herein, except that (a) after the exercise of the third (3 rd ) such extension option Tenant shall have no further option to extend said Term, (b) Basic Rent payable with respect to each such Extension Period shall be equal to 97.5% of the fair market rental value of the Premises during said Extension Period, as determined by Landlord promptly after receipt of Tenant’s Extension Notice (subject to Tenant’s right to object thereto as hereinafter set forth), and (c) Landlord shall have no obligation to make or pay for any improvements to the Premises or to pay any allowances or inducements of any kind. In determining fair market rental value, the following factors, among others, shall be taken into account and given effect: size of the premises, escalation charges then payable under the lease, location of the premises, location of the building, tenant improvement and fit-up of the premises, other transaction costs and lease term, and other terms and conditions then being provided for comparable lease transactions in comparable office buildings in the Downtown Boston Financial District.

(b) Promptly after receipt of a Tenant’s Extension Notice, Landlord shall deliver to Tenant a notice (“Landlord’s Determination Notice”) setting forth Landlord’s determination of the fair market rental value of the Premises with respect to such Extension Period. In the event that Tenant objects to Landlord’s determination of fair market rental value with respect to such Extension Period, Tenant may elect, by giving Landlord written notice of such objection not later than fifteen (15) Business Days following receipt of the Landlord’s Determination Notice, to deliver to Landlord a notice (a “Tenant’s Appraisal Notice”) that Tenant elects to submit the determination of fair market rental value to appraisers, the first appraiser to be chosen by Landlord, the second appraiser to be chosen by Tenant, and a third appraiser to be selected by the two appraisers first chosen. If Tenant fails to deliver to Landlord a Tenant’s Appraisal Notice within such fifteen (15) Business Day period (time being of the essence thereof), then Tenant shall have no further right to object to Landlord’s determination of fair market rental value for such Extension Period, and Tenant conclusively shall be deemed to have accepted Landlord’s determination of the fair market rental value of the Premises for such Extension Period.

(c) If Tenant timely delivers a Tenant’s Appraisal Notice pursuant to subsection (b) above, then the unanimous written decision of the two appraisers first chosen, without selection and participation of a third appraiser, or otherwise the written decision of a majority of three appraisers chosen and selected as aforesaid, shall be conclusive and binding upon Landlord and Tenant. Landlord and Tenant shall each notify the other of its chosen appraiser within ten (10) days following receipt by Landlord

 

-17-


of Tenant’s Appraisal Notice. If within thirty (30) days after the second appraiser has been appointed, the two designated appraisers are unable to agree upon fair market rental value for the Extension Period, then within ten (10) days after expiration of such thirty (30) day period they shall elect a third appraiser who has the qualifications set forth in subsection (d) below. If the two appraisers are not able to agree upon such third appraiser within such ten (10) day period, either appraiser may request the office of the American Arbitration Association located within or nearest to Boston, Massachusetts to designate a third appraiser willing so to act and an appraiser so appointed shall, for all purposes, have the same standing and powers as though he had been seasonably appointed by the appraisers first appointed. In the case of the inability or refusal to serve of any person designated as an appraiser, or in case any appraiser for any reason ceases to be such, an appraiser, to fill such vacancy, having the minimum qualifications set forth in subsection (d) below, shall be promptly appointed by the Landlord, the Tenant, the appraiser first appointed by the Landlord, the appraiser first appointed by the Tenant, or the said office of the American Arbitration Association, as the case may be, whichever made the original appointment, or, if the person who made the original appointment fails to fill such vacancy, any appraiser who continues to act, or the Landlord, or the Tenant may apply to said office of the American Arbitration Association to fill such vacancy with an appraiser having the minimum qualifications set forth in subsection (d) below, and any appraiser so appointed to fill such vacancy shall have the same standing and powers as though originally appointed. The resulting board of appraisers shall, forthwith upon their appointment, (i) hear the parties to this Lease and their witnesses, (ii) examine the records relating to the Premises, market surveys and such other documents and records as may, in their judgment, be necessary, and (iii) within not more than forty-five (45) days after their appointment, issue a decision (the “Appraisers’ Decision”) determining the fair market rental value of the Premises for such Extension Period.

Any determination by a majority of the members of the board of appraisers shall be final and binding upon the parties, but if a majority of the members of the board of appraisers are unable to agree upon a determination, the determination of such third appraiser shall be binding upon the parties. If any party shall fail to appear at the hearings appointed by the appraisers, the appraisers may act in the absence of such party. The determination of the board of appraisers (or the third appraiser, as appropriate) made in accordance with the foregoing provisions may be entered as an award in arbitration in a court of competent jurisdiction, and judgment thereon may be entered.

(d) Landlord and Tenant shall each bear the expense of the appraiser chosen by it and shall equally bear the expense of the third appraiser (if any). All appraisers chosen or elected hereunder shall have received the M.A.I. (Member Appraisal Institute) designation from the American Institute of Real Estate Appraisers and shall have had at least ten (10) years of experience in appraising commercial office space and determining fair market rental values in office buildings in Downtown Boston comparable to the Building. If, as contemplated herein, the Basic Rent payable with respect to said Extension Period shall not have been determined prior to the commencement thereof, then said Extension Period shall nevertheless commence, and Tenant shall make payments of Basic Rent at 97.5% of the fair market rental value

 

-18-


designated by Landlord, subject to retroactive adjustment in conformity with and within ten (10) days following the final determination of the fair market rental value by the appraisers.

(e) Time is of the Essence of this Section 4.4.

ARTICLE 5

USE OF PREMISES

5.1 Permitted Use .

(a) Tenant agrees that the Premises shall be used and occupied by Tenant only for the Permitted Uses and for no other purpose or purposes, including, without limitation, use for medical, dental, governmental, utility company or employment agency offices, without Landlord’s express prior written consent. Tenant shall not use, or suffer or permit the use of, or suffer or permit anything to be done in or anything to be brought into or kept in or about the Premises or the Buildings or any part thereof (i) which would violate any of the provisions of this Lease, (ii) for any unlawful purposes or in any unlawful manner, (iii) which is not customarily found in first-class office buildings in the downtown Boston area, or (iv) which, in the reasonable judgment of Landlord, shall in any way (A) impair the appearance or reputation of either of the Buildings, or (B) impair or interfere with any of the Building services or the proper and economic heating, ventilation, cleaning, air conditioning or other servicing of either of the Buildings or Premises, or with the use of any of the other areas of either of the Buildings, or occasion discomfort, inconvenience or annoyance to, any of the other tenants or occupants of either of the Buildings.

(b) Tenant agrees to conform to the following provisions during the Term of this Lease:

(i) Tenant shall cause all freight to be delivered to or removed from either of the Buildings and the Premises from the Kilby Street entrance, in accordance with the Rules and Regulations established from time to time by Landlord therefor;

(ii) Tenant will not place on the exterior of the Premises (including both interior and exterior surfaces of doors and interior surfaces of windows) or on any part of the Buildings outside the Premises, any sign, symbol, advertisement or the like visible to public view outside of the Premises. Landlord will not withhold consent for signs or lettering on the entry doors to the Premises provided such signs conform to sign standards adopted from time to time by Landlord in its sole discretion and Tenant has submitted to Landlord a plan or sketch in reasonable detail (showing, without limitation, size, color, location, materials and method of affixation) of the sign to be placed on such entry doors. Landlord agrees, to maintain a tenant directory in the lobby of each respective Building (and, in the case of multi-tenant floors, in that floor’s elevator lobby) in which will be placed Tenant’s name and the location of the Premises in the respective Building;

 

-19-


(iii) Tenant shall not perform any act or carry on any practice which may injure the Premises, or any other part of either Building, or cause any offensive odors or loud noise or constitute a nuisance or a menace to any other tenant or tenants or other persons in either Building;

(iv) Tenant shall, in its use of the Premises, comply with the requirements of all applicable governmental laws, rules and regulations, including, without limitation, the Americans With Disabilities Act of 1990 and the codes, rules and regulations promulgated thereunder (collectively, the “ADA”) and the codes, rules and regulations of the Massachusetts Architectural Access Board (collectively, the “MAAB Regulations”); provided however, Landlord shall be responsible for the compliance of the common areas of the Buildings with the ADA and the MAAB Regulations; and

(v) Tenant shall not abandon the Premises.

5.2 Installations and Alterations by Tenant .

(a) Tenant shall make no alterations, additions (including, for the purposes hereof, wall-to-wall carpeting), or improvements (collectively, “ Alterations ”) in or to the Premises (including any Alterations necessary for Tenant’s initial occupancy of the Premises) without Landlord’s prior written consent, which consent shall not be unreasonably withheld or delayed with respect to non-structural Alterations that do not affect or involve the Building’s electrical, plumbing or mechanical systems or any other Building systems; provided, however, no such consent shall be required with respect to non-structural Alterations that do not affect or involve the structural elements of the respective Building, or the electrical, plumbing or mechanical systems of the respective Building, or any other Building systems, having an aggregate cost to completion of less than $25,000.00 for each such Alteration project. Landlord’s failure to approve or reject plans and specifications for a proposed Alteration within fifteen (15) Business Days of receipt of same shall be deemed an approval thereof, provided that at the time of submission of the plans and specifications to Landlord Tenant shall include the following legend displayed prominently at the top of the first page of Tenant’s notice delivered concurrently with said plans and specifications: “TEN/10 POST OFFICE SQUARE: THE LEASE TO BOSTON PRIVATE FINANCIAL HOLDINGS, INC.: AS PROVIDED IN SUCH LEASE, THESE SUBMISSIONS SHALL BE DEEMED TO BE AUTOMATICALLY APPROVED IF YOU DO NOT RESPOND WITHIN FIFTEEN (15) BUSINESS DAYS AFTER RECEIPT.”

At the time Landlord approves any of Tenant’s Alterations Landlord shall notify Tenant which of the subject Alterations, if any, constitute Specialty Alterations which may be required to be removed by Tenant at the end of the Term, provided that Tenant shall include the following legend in capitalized and bold type displayed

 

-20-


prominently on the top of the first page of Tenant’s notice delivered concurrently with such plans and specifications: “IF LANDLORD FAILS TO NOTIFY TENANT AT THE TIME LANDLORD APPROVES THESE PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS THAT ANY ALTERATIONS SHOWN THEREON ARE SPECIALTY ALTERATIONS (AS DEFINED IN THE LEASE), LANDLORD MAY NOT REQUIRE TENANT TO REMOVE SUCH SPECIALTY ALTERATIONS AT THE END OF THE TERM OF THE LEASE.”

All Alterations shall be performed in accordance with (x) the provisions of the Rules and Regulations attached hereto as Exhibit E (including the requirements attached thereto as Attachment I ), (y) such other Rules and Regulations as may be from time to time adopted by Landlord with respect to Alterations, and (z) with plans and specifications meeting the requirements set forth in the Rules and Regulations and approved in advance by Landlord. All Alteration work shall be (i) be performed in a good and workmanlike manner and in compliance with all applicable laws, ordinances and regulations; (ii) be made at Tenant’s sole cost and expense; and (iii) be coordinated with any work being performed by Landlord in such a manner as not to damage the Building or interfere with the construction or operation of the Building. At Landlord’s request, Tenant shall, before its work is started, secure assurances satisfactory to Landlord in its reasonable discretion protecting Landlord against claims arising out of the furnishing of labor and materials for the Alterations. If any Alterations shall involve the removal of fixtures, equipment or other property in the Premises which are not Tenant’s Removable Property, such fixtures, equipment or property shall be promptly replaced by Tenant at its expense with new fixtures, equipment or property of like utility and of at least equal quality. Tenant shall promptly reimburse Landlord for all reasonable costs, including attorneys’, architects’, engineers’, and consultants’ fees, incurred by Landlord in connection with any request from Tenant pursuant to this Section 5.2 .

(b) All articles of personal property and all movable fixtures, machinery and equipment and furniture owned or installed by Tenant solely at its expense in the Premises (“ Tenant’s Removable Property ”) shall remain the property of Tenant and may be removed by Tenant at any time prior to the expiration or earlier termination of the Term, provided that Tenant, at its expense, shall repair any damage to the Premises or the respective Building caused by such installation or removal. Tenant shall remove, at its expense, on the expiration or earlier termination of this Lease, all cabling installed in or at the Premises after June 1, 2004. On or prior to the Expiration Date, Tenant shall, (i) in consideration of the agreement by Landlord not to require Tenant to remove Alterations installed in the Premises prior to the commencement of the Term of this Lease, pay to Landlord a surrender fee of $25,000.00, and (ii) unless otherwise directed by Landlord and subject to the provisions of Section 12.2, at Tenant’s expense, remove all Specialty Alterations from the Premises and close up any slab penetrations in the Premises, installed after the Commencement Date. Tenant shall repair and restore, in a good and workmanlike manner, any damage to the Premises or the Property caused by Tenant’s removal of any Alterations or by the closing of any slab penetrations, and upon default thereof, Tenant shall reimburse Landlord for Landlord’s cost of repairing and restoring such damage. Any Specialty Alterations or Tenant’s

 

-21-


Removable Property not so removed shall be deemed abandoned and Landlord may retain or remove and dispose of same, and repair and restore any damage caused thereby, at Tenant’s cost and without accountability to Tenant. All other Alterations shall become Landlord’s property upon expiration or termination of this Lease.

(c) Notice is hereby given that Landlord shall not be liable for any labor or materials furnished or to be furnished to Tenant upon credit, and that no mechanic’s or other lien for any such labor or materials shall attach to or affect the reversion or other estate or interest of Landlord in and to the Premises, the Buildings or the Property. To the maximum extent permitted by law, before such time as any contractor commences to perform work on behalf of Tenant, such contractor (and any subcontractors) shall furnish a written statement acknowledging the provisions set forth in the prior clause. Tenant agrees to pay promptly when due the entire cost of any work done on behalf of Tenant, its agents, employees or independent contractors, and not to cause or permit any liens for labor or materials performed or furnished in connection therewith to attach to all or any part of the Property and immediately to discharge any such liens which may so attach. If, notwithstanding the foregoing, any lien is filed against all or any part of the Property for work claimed to have been done for, or materials claimed to have been furnished to, Tenant or its agents, employees or independent contractors, Tenant, at its sole cost and expense, shall cause such lien to be dissolved promptly after receipt of notice that such lien has been filed, by the payment thereof or by the filing of a bond sufficient to accomplish the foregoing. If Tenant shall fail to discharge any such lien, Landlord may, at its option, discharge such lien and treat the cost thereof (including attorneys’ fees incurred in connection therewith) as Additional Rent payable upon demand, it being expressly agreed that such discharge by Landlord shall not be deemed to waive or release the Event of Default in not discharging such lien. Tenant shall indemnify and hold Landlord harmless from and against any and all expenses, liens, claims, liabilities and damages based on or arising, directly or indirectly, by reason of the making of any Alterations by or on behalf of Tenant to the Premises under this Section, which obligation shall survive the expiration or termination of this Lease.

(d) In the course of any work being performed by Tenant (including, without limitation, the “field installation” of any Tenant’s Removable Property), Tenant agrees to use labor compatible with that being employed by Landlord for work in the Buildings or on the Property or other buildings owned by Landlord or its affiliates (which term, for purposes hereof, shall include, without limitation, entities which control or are under common control with or are controlled by Landlord or, if Landlord is a partnership or limited liability company, by any partner or member of Landlord) and not to employ or permit the use of any labor or otherwise take any action which might result in a labor dispute involving personnel providing services in the Buildings or on the Property pursuant to arrangements made by Landlord.

(e) If Tenant shall make or cause to be made at its own expense any Alteration to the Premises which shall result in an increase in the Taxes (as evidenced by the official records of the office of the tax assessor), then Tenant shall pay, in addition to the Basic Rent, Escalation Charges and other Additional Rent, the entire increase in such Taxes attributable to such Alteration.

 

-22-


5.3 Extra Hazardous Use . Tenant covenants and agrees that Tenant will not do or permit anything to be done in or upon the Premises, or bring in anything or keep anything therein, which shall increase the rate of property or liability insurance on the Premises or the Property above the standard rate applicable to Premises being occupied for the Permitted Uses. Landlord confirms that the use of the Premises principally and primarily for the operation of first-class executive business offices and bank facilities in a manner and fashion consistent with the existing use of the Premises by Tenant will not breach the foregoing covenant. If the premium or rates payable with respect to any policy or policies of insurance carried by or on behalf of Landlord with respect to the Property increases as a result of any act or activity on or use of the Premises during the Term or payment by the insurer of any claim arising from any act or neglect of Tenant, its employees, agents, contractors or invitees, Tenant shall pay such increase, from time to time, within fifteen (15) days after demand therefor by Landlord, as Additional Rent.

5.4 Hazardous Materials .

(a) In order to conduct its business at the Premises and to maintain and operate the business machines located in the Premises, Tenant may, in accordance with all applicable Environmental Laws, use chemicals and cleaning materials such as adhesives, lubricants, ink, solvents and cleaning fluids and substances of the kind and in amounts and in the manner customarily found and used in first-class business offices. Tenant shall not use, store, handle, treat, transport, release or dispose of any other Hazardous Materials on or about the Premises or the Property without Landlord’s prior written consent, which Landlord may withhold or condition in Landlord’s sole discretion.

(b) Any handling, treatment, transportation, storage, disposal or use of Hazardous Materials by Tenant or Tenant’s agents, contractors, employees or invitees, in or about the Premises or the Property shall comply with all applicable Environmental Laws. Tenant shall, within ten (10) Business Days of Landlord’s written request therefor, disclose in writing all Hazardous Materials that are being used by Tenant in the Premises, the nature of such use and the manner of storage and disposal. Without Landlord’s prior written consent, Tenant shall not conduct any sampling or investigation of soil or groundwater on the Property to determine the presence of any constituents therein.

(c) Tenant shall indemnify, defend upon demand with counsel reasonably acceptable to Landlord, and hold Landlord harmless from and against, any liabilities, losses, claims, damages, interest, penalties, fines, attorneys’ fees, experts’ fees, court costs, remediation costs, and other expenses which arise out of or result from the use, storage, handling, treatment, transportation, release, threat of release or disposal of Hazardous Materials in or about the Premises or the Property by Tenant or Tenant’s agents, employees, contractors or invitees. The provisions of this paragraph (c) shall survive the expiration or earlier termination of this Lease.

 

-23-


(d) Tenant shall give written notice to Landlord as soon as reasonably practicable of (i) any communication received by Tenant from any governmental authority concerning Hazardous Materials which relates to the Premises or the Property, and (ii) any Environmental Condition of which Tenant is aware.

ARTICLE 6

ASSIGNMENT AND SUBLETTING

6.1 Prohibition .

(a) Tenant covenants and agrees that neither this Lease nor the Term and estate hereby granted, nor any interest herein or therein, will be assigned, mortgaged, pledged, encumbered or otherwise transferred, whether voluntarily, involuntarily, by operation of law or otherwise, and that neither the Premises nor any part thereof will be encumbered in any manner by reason of any act or omission on the part of Tenant, or used or occupied or permitted to be used or occupied, by anyone other than Tenant, or for any use or purpose other than the Permitted Uses, or be sublet (which term, without limitation, shall include granting of concessions, licenses and the like) in whole or in part, or be offered or advertised for assignment or subletting by Tenant or any person acting on behalf of Tenant, without, in each case, the prior written consent of Landlord. Without limiting the foregoing, any agreement pursuant to which: (x) Tenant is relieved from the obligation to pay, or a third party agrees to pay on Tenant’s behalf, all or any portion of the Basic Rent or Additional Rent under this Lease; and/or (y) a third party undertakes or is granted by or on behalf of Tenant the right to assign or attempt to assign this Lease or sublet or attempt to sublet all or any portion of the Premises, shall for all purposes hereof be deemed to be an assignment of this Lease and subject to the provisions of this Article 6 . The provisions of this paragraph (a)  shall apply to a transfer (by one or more transfers) of a controlling portion of or interest in the stock or partnership or membership interests or other evidences of equity interests of Tenant as if such transfer were an assignment of this Lease; provided that if equity interests in Tenant at any time are or become traded on a public stock exchange, the transfer of equity interests in Tenant on a public stock exchange shall not be deemed an assignment within the meaning of this Article.

(b) The provisions of paragraph (a)  shall not apply to either (x) transactions with an entity into or with which Tenant is merged or consolidated, or to which all or substantially all of Tenant’s assets are transferred, or (y) transactions with any entity which controls or is controlled by Tenant or is under common control with Tenant; provided that in any such event:

(i) the successor to Tenant has a net worth, computed in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles consistently applied, at least equal to the net worth of Tenant immediately prior to such merger, consolidation or transfer,

 

-24-


(ii) proof satisfactory to Landlord of such net worth shall have been delivered to Landlord at least ten (10) days prior to the effective date of any such transaction, and

(iii) the assignee agrees directly with Landlord, by written instrument in form and content satisfactory to Landlord in its reasonable discretion, to be bound by all the obligations of Tenant hereunder, including, without limitation, the covenant against further assignment and subletting.

6.2 Acceptance of Rent . If this Lease be assigned, or if the Premises or any part thereof be sublet or occupied by anyone other than Tenant, whether or not in violation of the terms and conditions of the Lease, Landlord may, at any time and from time to time, collect rent and other charges from the assignee, subtenant or occupant, and apply the net amount collected to the rent and other charges herein reserved, but no such assignment, subletting, occupancy, collection or modification of any provisions of this Lease shall be deemed a waiver of this covenant, or the acceptance of the assignee, subtenant or occupant as a tenant or a release of Tenant from the further performance of covenants on the part of Tenant to be performed hereunder. Any consent by Landlord to a particular assignment, subletting or occupancy or other act for which Landlord’s consent is required under paragraph (a)  of Section 6.1 shall not in any way diminish the prohibition stated in paragraph (a)  of Section 6.1 as to any further such assignment, subletting or occupancy or other act or the continuing liability of the original named Tenant. No assignment or subletting hereunder shall relieve Tenant from its obligations hereunder, and Tenant shall remain fully and primarily liable therefor. Landlord may revoke any consent by Landlord to a particular assignment, subletting or occupancy if the assignment or sublease does not provide that the assignee, subtenant or other occupant agrees to be independently bound by and upon all of the covenants, agreements, terms, provisions and conditions set forth in this Lease on the part of Tenant to be kept and performed. Tenant shall promptly reimburse Landlord for all reasonable costs, including attorneys’ fees, incurred by Landlord in connection with any request from Tenant regarding assignment or subletting or any other act that is subject to Section 6.1 .

6.3 Excess Payments . If Tenant assigns this Lease or sublets the Premises or any portion thereof, Tenant shall pay to Landlord as Additional Rent fifty percent (50%) of the amount, if any, by which (a) any and all compensation received by Tenant as a result of such assignment or subletting, net of reasonable expenses actually incurred by Tenant in connection with such assignment or subletting (prorated over the term of the assignment or subletting), exceeds (b) in the case of an assignment, the Basic Rent and Additional Rent under this Lease, and in the case of a subletting, the portion of the Basic Rent and Additional Rent allocable to the portion of the Premises subject to such subletting. Such payments shall be made on the date the corresponding payments under this Lease are due. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the provisions of this Section shall impose no obligation on Landlord to consent to an assignment of this Lease or a subletting of all or a portion of the Premises.

6.4 Tenant’s Notice . If Tenant desires to assign this Lease or sublet all or any portion of the Premises, Tenant shall give notice thereof to Landlord, which shall be accompanied by (a) with respect to an assignment of this Lease, the date Tenant desires the

 

-25-


assignment to be effective, and (b) with respect to a sublet of all or a part of the Premises, a description of the portion of the Premises to be sublet, the commencement date of such sublease and the rent per rentable square foot Tenant will ask for such portion of the Premises. Except with respect to an assignment or sublease to a Related Entity (as defined in Section 6.6), such notice shall be deemed an irrevocable offer from Tenant to Landlord of the right, at Landlord’s option, (1) to terminate this Lease with respect to such space as Tenant proposes to sublease (the “ Partial Space ”), upon the terms and conditions hereinafter set forth, or (2) if the proposed transaction is an assignment of this Lease or a sublease which is scheduled to expire prior to the date which is one (1) year prior to the Expiration Date, which sublease (together with all other subleases, if any) would result in 50% or more of the rentable square footage of the Premises being sublet (excluding subleases to Related Entities and/or Affiliates of Tenant), to terminate this Lease with respect to the entire Premises. Such option may be exercised by notice from Landlord to Tenant within thirty (30) days after delivery of Tenant’s notice. If Landlord exercises its option to terminate all or such portion of this Lease, (a) this Lease shall end and expire with respect to all or such portion of the Premises, as the case may be, on the date that such assignment or sublease was to commence, provided that such date is in no event earlier than 90 days after the date of the above notice unless Landlord agrees to such earlier date, (b) Rent shall be apportioned, paid or refunded as of such date, (c) the Landlord and Tenant shall enter into an amendment of this Lease ratifying and confirming such total or partial termination, and setting forth any appropriate modifications to the terms and provisions hereof, and (d) Landlord shall be free to lease the Premises (or any part thereof) to any person, including, without limitation, to Tenant’s prospective assignee or subtenant.

6.5 Conditions to Assignment/Subletting . (a) If Landlord does not exercise Landlord’s termination option provided under Section 6.4 and provided that no Event of Default then exists, Landlord’s consent to a proposed assignment or subletting shall not be unreasonably withheld or delayed, provided that:

(i) in Landlord’s reasonable judgment, the proposed assignee or sublessee (the “ Transferee ”) is engaged in a business or activity, and the Premises will be used in a manner, which (1) is in keeping with the then established standards of the Property, (2) is for any of the Permitted Uses, and (3) does not violate any restrictions set forth in this Lease, any Mortgage or any negative covenant as to use of the Premises required by any other lease in the Property;

(ii) the Transferee is reputable with sufficient financial means to perform all of its obligations under this Lease or the sublease, as the case may be;

(iii) if Landlord has, or reasonably expects to have within 3 months thereafter, comparable space available in the Property, neither the Transferee nor any person or entity which, directly or indirectly, controls, is controlled by, or is under common control with, the Transferee is then an occupant of the Property;

(iv) the Transferee is not a person or entity (or affiliate of a person or entity) with whom Landlord is then or has been within the prior 3 months negotiating in connection with the rental of space in the Property;

 

-26-


(v) there shall be not more than 2 subtenants in each floor of the Premises;

(vi) the aggregate consideration to be paid by the Transferee under the terms of the proposed sublease shall not be less than 90% of the fixed rent at which Landlord is then offering to lease other space in the respective Building (the “ Market Sub-rent ”) determined as though the Premises were vacant and taking into account (1) the length of the term of the proposed sublease; (2) any rent concessions granted to Transferee, and (3) the cost of any Alterations being performed for the Transferee;

(vii) Tenant shall, upon demand, reimburse Landlord for all reasonable expenses incurred by Landlord in connection with such assignment or sublease, including any investigations as to the acceptability of the Transferee and all legal costs reasonably incurred in connection with the granting of any requested consent;

(viii) Tenant shall not list the Premises to be sublet or assigned with a broker, agent or other entity or otherwise offer the Premises for subletting at a rental rate less than the Market Sub-rent; and

(ix) the Transferee shall not be entitled, directly or indirectly, to diplomatic or sovereign immunity, regardless of whether the Transferee agrees to waive such diplomatic or sovereign immunity, and shall be subject to the service of process in, and the jurisdiction of the courts of, the Commonwealth of Massachusetts.

(b) With respect to each and every subletting and/or assignment approved by Landlord under the provisions of this Lease:

(i) the form of the proposed assignment or sublease shall be reasonably satisfactory to Landlord;

(ii) no sublease shall be for a term ending later than one day prior to the Expiration Date;

(iii) no Transferee shall take possession of any part of the Premises, until an executed counterpart of such sublease or assignment has been delivered to and approved by Landlord;

(iv) if a material Event of Default occurs prior to the effective date of such assignment or subletting, then Landlord’s consent thereto, if previously granted, shall be immediately deemed revoked without further notice to Tenant, and if such assignment or subletting would have been permitted without Landlord’s consent, such permission shall be void and without force and effect, and in either such case, any such assignment or subletting shall constitute a further Event of Default hereunder; and

(v) each sublease shall be subject and subordinate to this Lease and to the matters to which this Lease is or shall be subordinate; and Tenant and each Transferee shall

 

-27-


be deemed to have agreed that upon the occurrence and during the continuation of an Event of Default hereunder, Tenant has hereby assigned to Landlord, and Landlord may, at its option, accept such assignment of, all right, title and interest of Tenant as sublandlord under such sublease, together with all modifications, extensions and renewals thereof then in effect and such Transferee shall, at Landlord’s option, attorn to Landlord pursuant to the then executory provisions of such sublease, except that Landlord shall not be (A) liable for any previous act or omission of Tenant under such sublease, (B) subject to any counterclaim, offset or defense not expressly provided in such sublease, which theretofore accrued to such Transferee against Tenant, (C) bound by any previous modification of such sublease not consented to by Landlord or by any prepayment of more than one month’s rent, (D) bound to return such Transferee’s security deposit, if any, except to the extent Landlord shall receive actual possession of such deposit and such Transferee shall be entitled to the return of all or any portion of such deposit under the terms of its sublease, or (E) obligated to make any payment to or on behalf of such Transferee, or to perform any work in the sublet space or the respective Building, or in any way to prepare the subleased space for occupancy, beyond Landlord’s obligations under this Lease. The provisions of this Section 6.5(b)(v) shall be self-operative, and no further instrument shall be required to give effect to this provision, provided that the Transferee shall execute and deliver to Landlord any instruments Landlord may reasonably request to evidence and confirm such subordination and attornment.

6.6 Related Entities . Tenant may also, (i) upon prior notice to, and with the prior written consent of Landlord (which consent shall not be unreasonably withheld or delayed), permit any Related Entity to sublet all or part of the Premises for the Permitted Uses, and (ii) upon prior notice to Landlord, permit any Affiliate of Boston Private Financial Holdings to sublet all or part of the Premises for the Permitted Uses, provided that such Related Entity or Affiliate, as applicable, is of a character and engaged in a business which is in keeping with the standards for the Building and for so long as such entity remains a Related Entity or Affiliate, as applicable. Such sublease shall not be deemed to vest in any such Related Entity any right or interest in this Lease nor shall it relieve, release, impair or discharge any of Tenant’s obligations hereunder. Notwithstanding the foregoing, Tenant shall have no right to sublease all or any portion of the Premises without Landlord’s consent pursuant to this Section 6.6 if Tenant is not the initial Tenant herein named or a person or entity who acquired Tenant’s interest in this Lease in a transaction expressly and specifically approved by Landlord.

6.7 Further Requirements . Tenant shall reimburse Landlord on demand, as Additional Rent, for any out-of-pocket costs (including reasonable attorneys’ fees and expenses) incurred by Landlord in connection with any actual or proposed assignment or sublease or other act described in paragraph (a)  of Section 6.1 , whether or not consummated, including the costs of making investigations as to the acceptability of the proposed assignee or subtenant. Any sublease or assignment to which Landlord gives its consent shall not be valid or binding on Landlord unless and until Tenant and the sublessee or assignee, as applicable, execute a consent agreement in form and substance satisfactory to Landlord in its reasonable discretion and a fully executed counterpart of such sublease or assignment agreement, as applicable, has been delivered to Landlord.

 

-28-


ARTICLE 7

RESPONSIBILITY FOR REPAIRS AND CONDITION OF PREMISES; SERVICES TO

BE FURNISHED BY LANDLORD

7.1 Landlord Repairs .

(a) Except as otherwise provided in this Lease, Landlord agrees to keep in good order, condition and repair the roof, public areas, exterior walls (including exterior glass), floor slabs and other structural elements of the floors, and structure of the Buildings (including all plumbing, mechanical and electrical systems installed by Landlord, but specifically excluding any supplemental heating, ventilation or air conditioning equipment or systems installed at Tenant’s request or as a result of Tenant’s requirements in excess of building standard design criteria), all insofar as they affect the Premises, except that Landlord shall in no event be responsible to Tenant for the repair of glass in the Premises, the doors (or related glass and finish work) leading to the Premises, or any condition in the Premises or the Buildings arising out of or resulting from any act or neglect of Tenant, its agents, employees, invitees or contractors. Landlord shall also keep and maintain all Common Facilities in a good and clean order, condition and repair, free of snow and ice and accumulation of dirt and rubbish, and shall keep and maintain all landscaped areas on the Property in a neat and orderly condition. Landlord shall not be responsible to make any improvements or repairs to the Buildings other than as expressly in this Section 7.1 provided, unless expressly provided otherwise in this Lease.

(b) Landlord shall never be liable for any failure to make repairs which Landlord has undertaken to make under the provisions of this Section 7.1 or elsewhere in this Lease, unless Tenant has given notice to Landlord of the need to make such repairs, and Landlord has failed to commence to make such repairs within a reasonable time after receipt of such notice, or fails to proceed with reasonable diligence to complete such repairs.

7.2 Tenant Repairs .

(a) Tenant will keep the Premises and every part thereof neat and clean, and will maintain the same in good order, condition and repair, excepting only those repairs for which Landlord is responsible under the terms of this Lease, reasonable wear and tear of the Premises, and damage by fire or other casualty or as a consequence of the exercise of the power of eminent domain; and Tenant shall surrender the Premises, at the end of the Term, in such condition. Without limitation, Tenant shall comply with, and shall cause the Premises to comply with, all laws, regulations, codes and ordinances from time to time in effect, and all directions, rules and regulations of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, and the standards recommended by the Board of Fire Underwriters, and shall, at Tenant’s expense, obtain all permits, licenses and the like required thereby. Subject to Section 10.4 regarding waiver of subrogation, Tenant shall be responsible for the cost of repairs which may be made necessary by reason of damage to either Building arising out of or resulting from any act or neglect of Tenant, or its contractors or invitees (including any damage by fire or other casualty arising therefrom), excepting only to the extent such damage is caused by the negligent acts or misconduct of Landlord or the agents of Landlord.

 

-29-


(b) If repairs are required to be made by Tenant pursuant to the terms hereof, and Tenant fails to make the repairs, upon not less than thirty (30) days’ prior written notice (except that no notice shall be required in the event of an emergency), Landlord may elect to make or cause such repairs to be made (but shall not be required to do so), and the provisions of Section 14.4 shall be applicable to the costs thereof. Landlord shall not be responsible to Tenant for any loss or damage whatsoever that may accrue to Tenant’s stock or business by reason of Landlord’s making such repairs.

7.3 Floor Load - Heavy Machinery .

(a) Tenant shall not place a load upon any floor in the Premises exceeding the floor load per square foot of area which such floor was designed to carry and which is allowed by law. The maximum floor load throughout the Premises is 75 pounds per square foot “live load.” Landlord reserves the right to prescribe the weight and position of all business machines and mechanical equipment, including safes, which shall be placed so as to distribute the weight. Business machines and mechanical equipment shall be placed and maintained by Tenant at Tenant’s expense in settings sufficient, in Landlord’s judgment, to absorb and prevent vibration, noise and annoyance. Tenant shall not move any safe, heavy machinery, heavy equipment, freight, bulky matter or fixtures into or out of the Building without Landlord’s prior consent, which consent may include a requirement to provide insurance, naming Landlord as an insured, in such amounts as Landlord may deem reasonable.

(b) If any such safe, machinery, equipment, freight, bulky matter or fixtures requires special handling, Tenant agrees to employ only persons holding a Master Rigger’s License to do such work, and that all work in connection therewith shall comply with applicable laws and regulations. Any such moving shall be at the sole risk and hazard of Tenant, and Tenant will exonerate, indemnify and save Landlord harmless against and from any liability, loss, injury, claim or suit resulting directly or indirectly from such moving.

7.4 Utility Services .

(a) Landlord shall, on Business Days from 8:00 a.m. to 6:00 p.m. and on Saturdays from 9:00 a.m. to 1:00 p.m., furnish heating and cooling as normal seasonal changes may require to provide reasonably comfortable space temperature and ventilation for occupants of the Premises under normal business operation at an occupancy of not more than one person per 125 square feet of Premises Rentable Area and an electrical load not exceeding 3.0 watts per square foot of Premises Rentable Area. If Tenant shall require air conditioning, heating or ventilation outside the hours and days above specified, Landlord may furnish such service and Tenant shall pay therefor such charges as may from time to time be in effect for the Building upon demand as Additional Rent. The overtime HVAC charge is currently $40.00 per hour per floor and is subject to

 

-30-


increase from time to time by Landlord. In the event Tenant introduces into the Premises personnel or equipment which overloads the capacity of the Building system or in any other way interferes with the ability of the base building HVAC to perform adequately its proper functions, supplementary systems may, if and as needed, at Landlord’s option, be provided by Landlord, and the cost of such supplementary systems shall be payable by Tenant to Landlord upon demand as Additional Rent. Tenant shall not install any supplementary or auxiliary HVAC equipment to serve the Premises without Landlord’s prior consent in each instance. The work to install any such supplementary or auxiliary HVAC equipment shall be considered to be an Alteration for all purposes under this Lease and Tenant shall comply with all terms and conditions of this Lease in connection therewith. Without limitation, the plans and specifications for any such supplementary or auxiliary HVAC equipment and the installation and maintenance thereof, shall be subject to Landlord’s prior approval in each instance. The installation, maintenance, operation and repair of any such supplementary or auxiliary HVAC equipment shall be performed by Tenant at its sole cost and expense and Landlord shall have no obligations or liabilities in connection therewith.

(b) Landlord shall supply electricity to the Premises to meet a demand requirement not to exceed 3.0 watts per rentable square foot of the respective area of the Premises for standard single-phase 120 volt alternating current, and Tenant agrees in its use of the Premises (i) not to exceed such requirements, and (ii) that its total connected lighting load it will not exceed the maximum from time to time permitted under applicable governmental regulations. If, without in any way derogating from the foregoing limitation, Tenant shall require electricity in excess of the requirements set forth above, Tenant shall notify Landlord and Landlord may (without being obligated to do so) supply such additional service or equipment at Tenant’s sole cost and expense. Landlord shall purchase and install, at Tenant’s expense, all lamps, tubes, bulbs, starters and ballasts. In order to assure that the foregoing requirements are not exceeded and to avert possible adverse effect on the Building’s electric system, Tenant shall not, without Landlord’s prior consent, connect any fixtures, appliances or equipment to the Building’s electric distribution system other than personal computers, facsimile transceivers, typewriters, pencil sharpeners, adding machines, photocopiers, word and data processors, clocks, radios, hand-held or desk top calculators, dictaphones, desktop computers and other similar small electrical equipment normally found in business offices and not drawing more than [15 amps at 120/208 volts] . All charges to Tenant under this paragraph shall be due and payable as Additional Rent within thirty (30) days after receiving Landlord’s invoice therefor.

(c) Landlord has installed check meters to measure the consumption of electricity in the portions of the Premises in the Ten P.O. Square Building. Tenant shall pay to Landlord, as Additional Rent, within ten (10) Business Days after receipt of Landlord’s invoice therefor, the costs of all electricity consumed in such portions of the Premises, based on the amounts shown on said check meters. Said payments shall be based upon the actual out-of-pocket costs incurred by Landlord in providing electrical service, which costs may include, without limitation, energy charges, demand charges, surcharges, time-of-day charges, the cost of generation, transmission and distribution

 

-31-


services, stranded cost charges, taxes and other charges. If Landlord so elects, from time-to-time, Landlord may furnish a notice to Tenant increasing or adjusting the electricity charges and thereafter Tenant shall pay the increased or adjusted electricity charges in accordance with Landlord’s notice. Said adjustments may be based upon (i) increased consumption as measured by said check meters, or (ii) increases in the actual out-of-pocket costs and expenses incurred by Landlord in connection with providing said electricity.

(d) Landlord has installed separate meters to measure the consumption of electricity in the portions of the Premises in the 10 P.O. Square Building. Tenant shall contract directly with the public utility company furnishing electric service to the 10 P.O. Square Building for electric service to the Premises. Tenant shall pay all amounts payable to the utility company, on a timely basis, and in all events prior to the due date thereof. Tenant shall maintain the meters in good working order and repair. If Tenant fails to maintain such meters or to pay such charges on a timely basis, then Landlord may repair or replace such meters and/or pay such charges directly to the utility company and Tenant shall reimburse Landlord as Additional Rent for all amounts expended by Landlord in connection therewith within ten (10) days after receipt of a bill therefor.

(e) From time to time during the Term of this Lease, either Landlord or Tenant shall have the right to have an electrical consultant acceptable to both parties in their reasonable discretion make a survey of Tenant’s electric usage. In the event that such survey shows that Tenant has exceeded the requirements set forth in paragraph (b) , in addition to any other rights Landlord may have hereunder, Tenant shall, upon demand, reimburse Landlord for the cost of such survey and the cost, as determined by such consultant, of electricity usage in excess of such requirements as Additional Rent.

(f) Landlord shall have the right to discontinue furnishing electricity to the Premises at any time upon not less than thirty (30) days’ notice to Tenant; provided that Landlord shall, at Tenant’s expense, separately meter the Premises directly to the applicable public utility company. If Landlord exercises such right, from and after the effective date of such discontinuance, Landlord shall not be obligated to furnish electricity to the Premises, and in the computation of Operating Expenses, only the cost of electricity supplied to those portions of the Building other than those leased or intended to be leased to tenants for their exclusive use and occupancy, i.e. , the Common Facilities, shall be included; and

(g) Landlord shall permit Landlord’s existing wires, risers, conduits and other electrical equipment of Landlord to be used to supply electricity to Tenant, provided that the limits set forth in paragraph (b)  shall not be exceeded, and Tenant shall be responsible for payment of all electricity charges directly to such utility.

7.5 Other Services .

Landlord shall also provide the following:

(a) Passenger elevator service from the existing passenger elevator system in common with Landlord and others entitled thereto.

 

-32-


(b) Warm water for lavatory purposes and cold water (at temperatures supplied by the city in which the Property is located) for drinking, lavatory and toilet purposes. If Tenant uses water for any purpose other than for ordinary lavatory and drinking purposes, Landlord may assess a reasonable charge for the additional water so used, or install a water meter and thereby measure Tenant’s water consumption for all purposes. In the latter event, Tenant shall pay the cost of the meter and the cost of installation thereof as Additional Rent upon demand and shall keep such meter and installation equipment in good working order and repair. Tenant agrees to pay for water consumed, as shown on such meter, together with the sewer charge based on such meter charges, as and when bills are rendered, and in the event Tenant fails timely to make any such payment, Landlord may pay such charges and collect the same from Tenant upon demand as Additional Rent.

(c) Cleaning and janitorial services to the Premises, provided the same are kept in order by Tenant, substantially in accordance with the cleaning standards set forth in Exhibit I attached hereto, as the same may be modified, amended, supplemented or replaced from time to time by Landlord in its reasonable discretion.

(d) Access to the Premises at all times, subject to security precautions from time to time in effect, if any, and subject always to restrictions based on emergency conditions. The Milk Street entrance to the Ten P.O. Square Building provides a 24-hour security checkpoint for after hours access to the Ten P.O. Square Building. Any security devices required by Tenant, and the installation thereof, shall be at Tenant’s sole cost and expense

Landlord may from time to time, but shall not be obligated to, provide one or more attendants in or about the lobby areas of the respective Building, and the costs of such services shall constitute Operating Expenses in accordance with the provisions of Article 9 hereof. Tenant expressly acknowledges and agrees that, if provided: (i) such attendants shall not serve as police officers, and will be unarmed, and will not be trained in situations involving potentially physical confrontation; and (ii) such attendants will be solely an amenity to tenants of the respective Building for purposes such as assisting visitors and invitees of tenants and others in the respective Building, monitoring fire control and alarm equipment, and summoning emergency services to the respective Building as and when needed, and not for the purpose of securing any individual tenant premises or guaranteeing the physical safety of Tenant’s Premises or of Tenant’s employees, agents, contractors or invitees. If and to the extent that Tenant desires to provide security for the Premises or for such persons or their property, Tenant shall be responsible for so doing, after having first consulted with Landlord and after obtaining Landlord’s consent, which shall not be unreasonably withheld. Landlord expressly disclaims any and all responsibility and/or liability for the physical safety of Tenant’s property, and for that of Tenant’s employees, agents, contractors and invitees, and, without in any way limiting the operation of Article 10 hereof, Tenant, for itself and its agents, contractors, invitees and employees, hereby expressly waives any claim, action, cause of action or other right which may

 

-33-


accrue or arise as a result of any damage or injury to the person or property of Tenant or any such agent, invitee, contractor or employee. Tenant agrees that, as between Landlord and Tenant, it is Tenant’s responsibility to advise its employees, agents, contractors and invitees as to necessary and appropriate safety precautions.

Landlord shall also permit cable television providers to install wires, conduits and other necessary equipment in the Buildings and to furnish cable television service to the Premises. Tenant shall contract directly with such cable television providers for cable television services and shall pay all amounts payable to such providers on a timely basis, including, without limitation, all subscription, maintenance and repair costs and expenses related thereto.

7.6 Interruption of Service .

(a) Landlord reserves the right to curtail, suspend, interrupt and/or stop the supply of water, sewage, electrical current, cleaning, and other services, and to curtail, suspend, interrupt and/or stop use of entrances and/or lobbies serving access to either of the Buildings, or other portions of the Property, without thereby incurring any liability to Tenant, when necessary by reason of accident or emergency, or for repairs, alterations, replacements or improvements in the judgment of Landlord reasonably exercised desirable or necessary, or when prevented from supplying such services or use due to any act or neglect of Tenant or Tenant’s agents, employees, contractors or invitees or any person claiming by, through or under Tenant, or by Force Majeure, including, but not limited to, strikes, lockouts, difficulty in obtaining materials, accidents, laws or orders, or inability, by exercise of reasonable diligence, to obtain electricity, water, gas, steam, coal, oil or other suitable fuel or power. Except as set forth in paragraph (b)  below, no diminution or abatement of rent or other compensation, nor any direct, indirect or consequential damages shall or will be claimed by Tenant as a result of, nor shall this Lease or any of the obligations of Tenant be affected or reduced by reason of, any such interruption, curtailment, suspension or stoppage in the furnishing of the foregoing services or use, irrespective of the cause thereof. Except as set forth in paragraph (b)  below, failure or omission on the part of Landlord to furnish any of the foregoing services or use as provided in this paragraph shall not be construed as an eviction of Tenant, actual or constructive, nor entitle Tenant to an abatement of rent, nor to render the Landlord liable in damages, nor release Tenant from prompt fulfillment of any of its covenants under this Lease.

(b) Notwithstanding anything contained in this Lease to the contrary, if (i) an interruption or curtailment, suspension or stoppage of an Essential Service (as said term is hereinafter defined) shall occur, except any of the same due to any act or neglect of Tenant or Tenant’s agents employees, contractors or invitees or any person claiming by, through or under Tenant (any such interruption of an Essential Service being hereinafter referred to as a “Service Interruption” ), and (ii) such Service Interruption occurs or continues as a result of the negligent acts or wrongful misconduct of the Landlord or Landlord’s agents, servants, employees or contractors, and (iii) such Service Interruption continues for more than seven (7) consecutive Business Days after Landlord shall have received written notice thereof from Tenant, and (iv) as a result of such

 

-34-


Service Interruption despite the commercially reasonable good faith efforts of Tenant, all or substantially all of the Premises are not usable by Tenant in the usual operations of its business, and Tenant actually ceases operating its business in all or substantially all of the Premises for such seven (7) Business Day period, then there shall be an abatement of one day’s Basic Rent and Escalation Charges for each day during which such Service Interruption continues after such seven (7) Business Day period; provided, however, that if any part of the Premises is reasonably useable for Tenant’s normal business operations notwithstanding such Service Interruption, then the amount of each daily abatement of Basic Rent and Escalation Charges shall only be proportionate to the nature and extent of the interruption of Tenant’s normal operations or ability to use the Premises. The provisions of this subsection (b) shall not apply in the event of a Force Majeure event or a casualty, eminent domain event or other event governed by the provisions of Article 11 . The rights granted to Tenant under this paragraph (b)  shall be Tenant’s sole and exclusive remedy resulting from a failure of Landlord to provide services, and Landlord shall not otherwise be liable for any loss or damage suffered or sustained by Tenant resulting from any failure or cessation of services. For purposes hereof, the term “Essential Services” shall mean the following services: access to the Premises, passenger elevator service, water and sewer/septic service and electricity, but only to the extent that Landlord has an obligation to provide same to Tenant under this Lease. Any abatement of Basic Rent under this paragraph shall apply only with respect to Basic Rent allocable to the period after each of the conditions set forth in subsections (i) through (iv) hereof shall have been satisfied and only during such times as each of such conditions shall exist.

ARTICLE 8

REAL ESTATE TAXES

8.1 Payments on Account of Real Estate Taxes .

(a) “ Tax Year ” shall mean a twelve-month period commencing on July 1 and falling wholly or partially within the Term.

Ten P.O. Square Taxes ” shall mean (i) all taxes, assessments (special or otherwise), levies, fees and all other government levies, exactions and charges of every kind and nature, general and special, ordinary and extraordinary, foreseen and unforeseen, which are, at any time prior to or during the Term, imposed or levied upon or assessed against the Ten P.O. Square Property or any portion thereof, or against any Basic Rent, Additional Rent or other rent of any kind or nature payable to Landlord by anyone on account of the ownership, leasing or operation of the Ten P.O. Square Property, or which arise on account of or in respect of the ownership, development, leasing, operation or use of the Ten P.O. Square Property or any portion thereof, as the same may be abated or reduced from time to time; (ii) all gross receipts taxes or similar taxes imposed or levied upon, assessed against or measured by any Basic Rent, Additional Rent or other rent of any kind or nature or other sum payable to Landlord by anyone on account of the ownership, development, leasing, operation, or use of the Ten P.O. Square Property or any portion thereof; (iii) all value added, use and similar taxes at

 

-35-


any time levied, assessed or payable on account of the ownership, development, leasing, operation, or use of the Ten P.O. Square Property or any portion thereof; (iv) reasonable fees and expenses paid to attorneys and consultants of Landlord in connection with such Ten P.O. Square Taxes; and (v) reasonable costs and expenses incurred by Landlord in connection therewith, including, without limitation, in connection with any proceeding for abatement of any of the foregoing items included in Ten P.O. Square Taxes, but the amount of special taxes or special assessments included in Ten P.O. Square Taxes shall be limited to the amount of the installment (plus any interest, other than penalty interest, payable thereon) of such special tax or special assessment required to be paid during the year in respect of which such Ten P.O. Square Taxes are being determined. There shall be excluded from Ten P.O. Square Taxes all income, estate, succession, inheritance and transfer taxes of Landlord; provided, however, that if at any time during the Term the present system of ad valorem taxation of real property shall be changed so that a capital levy, franchise, income, profits, sales, rental, use and occupancy, or other tax or charge shall in whole or in part be substituted for, or added to, such ad valorem tax and levied against, or be payable by, Landlord with respect to the Ten P.O. Square Property or any portion thereof, such tax or charge shall be included in the term “ Ten P.O. Square Taxes ” for the purposes of this Article.

10 P.O. Square Taxes ” shall mean (i) all taxes, assessments (special or otherwise), levies, fees and all other government levies, exactions and charges of every kind and nature, general and special, ordinary and extraordinary, foreseen and unforeseen, which are, at any time prior to or during the Term, imposed or levied upon or assessed against the 10 P.O. Square Property or any portion thereof, or against any Basic Rent, Additional Rent or other rent of any kind or nature payable to Landlord by anyone on account of the ownership, leasing or operation of the 10 P.O. Square Property, or which arise on account of or in respect of the ownership, development, leasing, operation or use of the 10 P.O. Square Property or any portion thereof, as the same may be abated or reduced from time to time; (ii) all gross receipts taxes or similar taxes imposed or levied upon, assessed against or measured by any Basic Rent, Additional Rent or other rent of any kind or nature or other sum payable to Landlord by anyone on account of the ownership, development, leasing, operation, or use of the 10 P.O. Square Property or any portion thereof; (iii) all value added, use and similar taxes at any time levied, assessed or payable on account of the ownership, development, leasing, operation, or use of the 10 P.O. Square Property or any portion thereof; (iv) reasonable fees and expenses paid to attorneys and consultants of Landlord in connection with such 10 P.O. Square Taxes; and (v) reasonable costs and expenses incurred by Landlord in connection therewith, including, without limitation, in connection with any proceeding for abatement of any of the foregoing items included in 10 P.O. Square Taxes, but the amount of special taxes or special assessments included in 10 P.O. Square Taxes shall be limited to the amount of the installment (plus any interest, other than penalty interest, payable thereon) of such special tax or special assessment required to be paid during the year in respect of which such 10 P.O. Square Taxes are being determined. There shall be excluded from 10 P.O. Square Taxes all income, estate, succession, inheritance and transfer taxes of Landlord; provided, however, that if at any time during the Term the present system of ad valorem taxation of real property shall be changed so that a capital levy, franchise, income,

 

-36-


profits, sales, rental, use and occupancy, or other tax or charge shall in whole or in part be substituted for, or added to, such ad valorem tax and levied against, or be payable by, Landlord with respect to the 10 P.O. Square Property or any portion thereof, such tax or charge shall be included in the term “ 10 P.O. Square Taxes ” for the purposes of this Article.

(b) In the event that Ten P.O. Square Taxes during any Tax Year shall exceed Base Taxes for the Ten P.O. Square Property, Tenant shall pay to Landlord, as an Escalation Charge, an amount equal to (i) the excess of Ten P.O. Square Taxes for such Tax Year over Base Taxes for the Ten P.O. Square Property, multiplied by (ii) Tenant’s Proportionate Ten P.O. Square Share, such amount to be apportioned for any portion of a Tax Year in which the Commencement Date occurs or the Term expires.

(c) In the event that 10 P.O. Square Taxes during any Tax Year shall exceed Base Taxes for the 10 P.O. Square Property, Tenant shall pay to Landlord, as an Escalation Charge, an amount equal to (i) the excess of 10 P.O. Square Taxes for such Tax Year over Base Taxes for the 10 P.O. Square Property, multiplied by (ii) Tenant’s Proportionate 10 P.O. Square Share, such amount to be apportioned for any portion of a Tax Year in which the Commencement Date occurs or the Term expires.

(d) Estimated payments by Tenant on account of Taxes shall be made on the first day of each and every calendar month during the Term of this Lease, in the fashion herein provided for the payment of Basic Rent. The monthly amount so to be paid to Landlord shall be sufficient to provide Landlord by the time real estate tax payments are due with a sum equal to Tenant’s required payment, as reasonably estimated by Landlord from time to time, on account of the Ten P.O. Square Taxes and the 10 P.O. Square Taxes for the then current Tax Year. Promptly after receipt by Landlord of bills for such Taxes, Landlord shall advise Tenant of the amount thereof and the computation of Tenant’s payment on account thereof. If estimated payments theretofore made by Tenant for the Tax Year covered by such bills exceed the required payment on account thereof for such Tax Year (including as a result of any abatement of Taxes), Landlord shall credit the amount of overpayment against subsequent obligations of Tenant on account of Taxes (or promptly refund such overpayment if the Term of this Lease has ended and Tenant has no further obligation to Landlord); but if the required payments on account thereof for such Tax Year are greater than estimated payments theretofore made on account thereof for such Tax Year, Tenant shall pay the difference to Landlord within thirty (30) days after being so advised by Landlord, and the obligation to make such payment for any period within the Term shall survive expiration of the Term.

8.2 Abatement . If Landlord shall receive any tax refund or reimbursement of Taxes or sum in lieu thereof with respect to any Tax Year all or any portion of which falls within the Term, then out of any balance remaining thereof after deducting Landlord’s expenses in obtaining such refund, Landlord shall pay to Tenant, provided there does not then exist an Event of Default, an amount equal to such refund or reimbursement or sum in lieu thereof (exclusive of any interest, and apportioned if such refund is for a Tax Year a portion of which falls outside the Term), multiplied by the respective Tenant’s Proportionate Share; provided, that in no event

 

-37-


shall Tenant be entitled to receive more than the payments made by Tenant on account of Taxes for such Tax Year pursuant to paragraph (b)  of Section 8.1 or to receive any payments or abatement of Basic Rent if Taxes for any year are less than Base Taxes for the respective Property or if Base Taxes for the respective Property are abated.

ARTICLE 9

OPERATING AND UTILITY EXPENSES

9.1 Definitions . “ Operating Year ” shall mean each calendar year all or any part of which falls within the Term.

Ten P.O. Square Operating Expenses ” shall mean the aggregate customary costs and expenses incurred by Landlord with respect to the operation, administration, cleaning, repair, maintenance and management of the Ten P.O. Square Property, all as set forth in Exhibit D attached hereto, provided that if during any portion of the Operating Year for which Ten P.O. Square Operating Expenses are being computed (including, without limitation, the Base Year for Operating Expenses), less than ninety-three percent (93%) of the Ten P.O. Square Building was occupied by tenants or Landlord was not supplying all tenants with the services being supplied under this Lease, actual Ten P.O. Square Operating Expenses incurred shall be extrapolated reasonably by Landlord on an item by item basis to the estimated Ten P.O. Square Operating Expenses that would have been incurred if the Ten P.O. Square Building were ninety-three percent (93%) occupied for such Operating Year and such services were being supplied to all tenants, and such extrapolated amount shall, for the purposes hereof, be deemed to be the Ten P.O. Square Operating Expenses for such Operating Year. The foregoing extrapolation of Operating Expenses shall be performed with respect to those components of Operating Expenses that vary or are impacted by changes in the occupancy of the respective Building.

10 P.O. Square Operating Expenses ” shall mean the aggregate customary costs and expenses incurred by Landlord with respect to the operation, administration, cleaning, repair, maintenance and management of the 10 P.O. Square Property, all as set forth in Exhibit D attached hereto, provided that if during any portion of the Operating Year for which 10 P.O. Square Operating Expenses are being computed (including, without limitation, the Base Year for Operating Expenses), less than ninety-three percent (93%) of the 10 P.O. Square Building was occupied by tenants or Landlord was not supplying all tenants with the services being supplied under this Lease, actual 10 P.O. Square Operating Expenses incurred shall be extrapolated reasonably by Landlord on an item by item basis to the estimated 10 P.O. Square Operating Expenses that would have been incurred if the 10 P.O. Square Building were ninety-three percent (93%) occupied for such Operating Year and such services were being supplied to all tenants, and such extrapolated amount shall, for the purposes hereof, be deemed to be the 10 P.O. Square Operating Expenses for such Operating Year. The foregoing extrapolation of Operating Expenses shall be performed with respect to those components of Operating Expenses that vary or are impacted by changes in the occupancy of the respective Building.

 

-38-


9.2 Tenant’s Payment of Operating Expenses .

(a) In the event that for any Operating Year the Ten P.O. Square Operating Expenses shall exceed Base Operating Expenses for the Ten P.O. Square Property, Tenant shall pay to Landlord, as an Escalation Charge, an amount equal to (i) such excess Ten P.O. Square Operating Expenses multiplied by (ii) Tenant’s Proportionate Ten P.O. Square Share, such amount to be apportioned for any portion of an Operating Year in which the Commencement Date falls or the Term of this Lease ends. For each Operating Year, Landlord shall not be entitled to a reimbursement from tenants for Ten P.O. Square Operating Expenses in excess of 100% of the costs and expenses relating to the Ten P.O. Square Property actually incurred by Landlord with respect to such Operating Year.

(b) In the event that for any Operating Year the 10 P.O. Square Operating Expenses shall exceed Base Operating Expenses for the 10 P.O. Square Property, Tenant shall pay to Landlord, as an Escalation Charge, an amount equal to (i) such excess 10 P.O. Square Operating Expenses multiplied by (ii) Tenant’s Proportionate 10 P.O. Square Share, such amount to be apportioned for any portion of an Operating Year in which the Commencement Date falls or the Term of this Lease ends. For each Operating Year, Landlord shall not be entitled to a reimbursement from tenants for 10 P.O. Square Operating Expenses in excess of 100% of the costs and expenses relating to the 10 P.O. Square Property actually incurred by Landlord with respect to such Operating Year.

(c) Estimated payments by Tenant on account of Operating Expenses shall be made on the first day of each and every calendar month during the Term of this Lease, in the fashion herein provided for the payment of Basic Rent. The monthly amount so to be paid to Landlord shall be sufficient to provide Landlord by the end of each Operating Year a sum equal to Tenant’s required payment, as reasonably estimated by Landlord from time to time during each Operating Year, on account of the Ten P.O. Square Operating Expenses and the 10 P.O. Square Operating Expenses for such Operating Year. Promptly after the end of each Operating Year, Landlord shall submit to Tenant reasonably detailed accountings (calculated on an accrual basis) of the Ten P.O. Square Operating Expenses and the 10 P.O. Square Operating Expenses, respectively, for such Operating Year, and Landlord shall certify to the accuracy thereof. If estimated payments theretofore made for such Operating Year by Tenant exceed Tenant’s required payment on account thereof for such Operating Year according to such statement, Landlord shall credit the amount of overpayment against subsequent obligations of Tenant with respect to Ten P.O. Square Operating Expenses and/or 10 P.O. Square Operating Expenses (or promptly refund such overpayment if the Term of this Lease has ended and Tenant has no further obligation to Landlord); but if the required payments on account thereof for such Operating Year are greater than the estimated payments (if any) theretofore made on account thereof for such Operating Year, Tenant shall make payment to Landlord within thirty (30) days after being so advised by Landlord, and the obligation to make such payment for any period within the Term shall survive expiration of the Term.

 

-39-


(d) Each statement with respect to Operating Expenses sent to Tenant by Landlord shall be conclusively binding upon Tenant, unless Tenant shall (i) pay to Landlord the amount set forth in such statement when due, without prejudice to Tenant’s right to dispute such statement, and (ii) within not more than one hundred fifty (150) days after such statement is sent, send a notice (an “Operating Expense Dispute Notice”) to Landlord objecting to such statement and specifying the reasons for Tenant’s claim that such statement is incorrect. Provided that Tenant shall have first paid all amounts set forth in the statement and shall have notified Landlord within said one hundred fifty (150) day period as aforesaid, then Tenant shall have the right to examine, copy and audit Landlord’s books and records establishing Operating Expenses for any Operating Year at any time prior to the date which is one hundred and twenty (120) days following the delivery of the Operating Expense Dispute Notice. Tenant shall give Landlord not less than thirty (30) days’ prior notice of its intention to examine and audit such books and records, and such examination and audit shall take place at such place within the continental United States as Landlord routinely maintains such books and records, unless Landlord elects to have such examination and audit take place in another location designated by Landlord in the city and state in which the Property is located. Tenant’s review shall be conducted solely by an auditor or accountant of a nationally recognized auditing or accounting firm and not by any party compensated by Tenant on a contingency fee arrangement. Tenant, all consultants and accountants retained by Tenant, and all those acting on behalf of Tenant, shall execute and deliver to Landlord confidentiality agreements, in form and substance reasonably satisfactory to Landlord, whereby such parties agree not to disclose to any third party any of the information obtained in connection with such audit or inspection, the substance of any admissions or stipulations by any party in connection therewith, or of any resulting reconciliation, compromise or settlement. All costs of the examination and audit shall be borne by Tenant; provided, however, that if such examination and audit establishes that the actual Operating Expenses for the Operating Year in question are less than the amount set forth as the annual Operating Expenses on the annual statement delivered to Tenant by greater than five percent (5%), then Landlord shall pay the reasonable costs of such examination and audit. If, pursuant to the audit, the payments made for such Operating Year by Tenant exceed Tenant’s required payment on account thereof for such Operating Year, Landlord shall credit the amount of overpayment against subsequent obligations of Tenant with respect to Operating Expenses (or promptly refund such overpayment if the Term of this Lease has ended and Tenant has no further obligation to Landlord); but, if the payments made by Tenant for such Operating Year are less than Tenant’s required payment as established by the examination and audit, Tenant shall pay the deficiency to Landlord within thirty (30) days after conclusion of the examination and audit, and the obligation to make such payment for any period within the Term shall survive expiration of the Term. If Tenant does not elect to exercise its right to examine and audit Landlord’s books and records for any Operating Year within the time period provided for by this paragraph, Tenant shall have no further right to challenge Landlord’s statement of Operating Expenses.

 

-40-


9.3 Utility Payments . Tenant shall be responsible for the payment of all utilities used and consumed in the Premises. Tenant shall pay for electricity consumed in the Premises as more particularly set forth in Section 7.4 . The obligation to pay for electricity used and consumed in the Premises during the Term hereof shall survive expiration of the Term.

ARTICLE 10

INDEMNITY AND PUBLIC LIABILITY INSURANCE

10.1 Tenant’s Indemnity . Except to the extent caused by the gross negligence or willful misconduct of Landlord or its agents or employees, Tenant agrees to indemnify and save harmless Landlord and Landlord’s partners, members, shareholders, officers, directors, managers, employees, agents and contractors and any Holder from and against all claims, losses, cost, damages, liability or expenses of whatever nature arising out of or resulting from: (i) from any accident, injury or damage whatsoever to any person, or to the property of any person, occurring in or about the Premises; (ii) from any accident, injury or damage whatsoever to any person, or to the property of any person, occurring outside of the Premises but on or about the Property, where such accident, damage or injury results or is claimed to have resulted from any act or omission on the part of Tenant or Tenant’s agents, employees, contractors, invitees or sublessees; or (iii) the use or occupancy of the Premises or of any business conducted therein or any thing or work whatsoever done or any condition created in or about the Premises, and, in any case, occurring after the Commencement Date (or such earlier date as of which Tenant takes possession of the Premises) until the expiration of the Term of this Lease and thereafter so long as Tenant is in occupancy of any part of the Premises. This indemnity and hold harmless agreement shall include indemnity against all losses, costs, damages, expenses and liabilities incurred in or in connection with any such claim or any proceeding brought thereon, and the defense thereof, including, without limitation, reasonable attorneys’ fees and costs at both the trial and appellate levels. The provisions of this Section 10.1 shall survive the expiration or earlier termination of this Lease.

10.2 Tenant Insurance . Tenant agrees to maintain in full force from the date upon which Tenant first enters the Premises for any reason, throughout the Term of this Lease, and thereafter so long as Tenant is in occupancy of any part of the Premises, (a) a policy of commercial general liability and property damage insurance (including broad form contractual liability, independent contractor’s hazard and completed operations coverage) in at least the amounts of the Initial General Liability Insurance specified in Section 1.1 or such greater amounts as Landlord in its reasonable discretion shall from time to time request, under which Tenant is named as an insured and Landlord, and, at Landlord’s request, Landlord’s property manager, any Holder, and such other persons as Landlord reasonably may request are named as additional insureds, and under which the insurer agrees to indemnify and hold Landlord and such other additional named insureds harmless from and against all cost, expense and/or liability arising out of or based upon any and all claims, accidents, injuries and damages set forth in Section 10.1 and (b) a policy of “all-risk” property insurance on a “replacement cost” basis, insuring Tenant’s Removable Property and any Alterations made by Tenant pursuant to Section 5.2 , to the extent that the same have not become the property of Landlord. Tenant may satisfy such insurance requirements by including the Premises in a so-called “blanket” and/or “umbrella” insurance policy, provided that the amount of coverage allocated to the Premises

 

-41-


pursuant to a “per location” endorsement shall fulfill the requirements set forth herein. Tenant’s insurance shall be primary to, and not contributory with any insurance carried by Landlord, whose insurance shall be considered excess only. Each policy required hereunder shall be non-cancelable and non-amendable with respect to Landlord and Landlord’s said designees without thirty (30) days’ prior notice, shall be written on an “occurrence” basis. and a duplicate original or certificates thereof satisfactory to Landlord, together with a photocopy of the entire policy, shall be delivered to Landlord. The policies of insurance required to be maintained by Tenant hereunder shall be issued by companies domiciled in the United States and qualified and licensed to conduct business in the state in which the Property is located, and shall be rated A:X or better in the most current issue of Best’s Insurance Reports. Tenant’s insurance policies shall not include deductibles in excess of Five Thousand Dollars ($5,000.00).

10.3 Tenant’s Risk . Tenant agrees to use and occupy the Premises and to use such other portions of the Property as Tenant is herein given the right to use at Tenant’s own risk. Landlord shall not be liable to Tenant, its employees, agents, invitees or contractors for any damage, injury, loss, compensation, or claim (including, but not limited to, claims for the interruption of or loss to Tenant’s business) based on, arising out of or resulting from any cause whatsoever, including, but not limited to, repairs to any portion of the Premises or the Property, any fire, robbery, theft, mysterious disappearance and/or any other crime or casualty, the actions of any other tenants of the Building or of any other person or persons, or any leakage in any part or portion of the Premises or the Building, or from water, rain or snow that may leak into, or flow from any part of the Premises or the Building, or from drains, pipes or plumbing fixtures in the Building, unless due to the gross negligence or willful misconduct of Landlord or Landlord’s agents, contractors or employees. Any goods, property or personal effects stored or placed in or about the Premises shall be at the sole risk of Tenant, and neither Landlord nor Landlord’s insurers shall in any manner be held responsible therefor. Landlord shall not be responsible or liable to Tenant, or to those claiming by, through or under Tenant, for any loss or damage that may be occasioned by or through the acts or omissions of persons occupying adjoining premises or any part of the premises adjacent to or connecting with the Premises or any part of the Property or otherwise. The foregoing provisions of this Section 10.3 (as well as any other provisions in this Lease providing for indemnification of Landlord by Tenant) shall be deemed to be modified in each case by the insertion of the phrase: “except as otherwise provided in Section 15 of Massachusetts General Laws Chapter 186.” Notwithstanding the foregoing, Landlord shall not be released from liability for any injury, loss, damages or liability to the extent caused by the gross negligence or willful misconduct of Landlord, its servants, employees or agents acting within the scope of their authority on or about the Premises; provided, however, that in no event shall Landlord, its servants, employees or agents have any liability to Tenant based on any loss with respect to or interruption in the operation of Tenant’s business. The provisions of this Section 10.3 shall be applicable from and after the execution of this Lease and until the end of the Term of this Lease, and during such further period as Tenant may use or be in occupancy of any part of the Premises or of the Building.

10.4 Waiver of Subrogation . The parties hereto shall each procure an appropriate clause in, or endorsement on, any property insurance policy on the Premises or any personal property, fixtures or equipment located thereon or therein, pursuant to which the insurer waives subrogation or consents to a waiver of right of recovery in favor of either party, its respective

 

-42-


agents or employees. Having obtained such clauses and/or endorsements, each party hereby agrees that it will not make any claim against or seek to recover from the other or its agents or employees for any loss or damage to its property or the property of others resulting from fire or other perils covered by such property insurance regardless of the cause or origin of such loss or damage, including, but not limited to, the negligence of such other party or its agents or employees.

ARTICLE 11

FIRE, EMINENT DOMAIN, ETC.

11.1 Landlord’s Right of Termination . If (i) a substantial part of the Premises, or (ii) a substantial part of the Property is (or are) substantially damaged by fire or casualty (the term “substantially damaged” meaning damage of such a character that the same cannot, in the ordinary course, reasonably be expected to be repaired within twelve (12) months from the commencement of the repair or restoration thereof (as determined by a contractor selected by Landlord in its reasonable discretion)), or if any part of the Property is taken by any exercise of the right of eminent domain, then Landlord shall have the right to terminate this Lease (even if Landlord’s entire interest in the Premises may have been divested) by giving notice of Landlord’s election so to do within ninety (90) days after the occurrence of such casualty or the effective date of such taking, provided that if the Premises are not damaged or taken, Landlord may not terminate this Lease unless Landlord similarly terminates the leases of other tenants in the respective Building aggregating at least 50% of the portion of the respective Building occupied for office purposes immediately prior to such damage or taking. If this Lease is so terminated, (a) the Term shall expire upon the 30th day after such notice is given by Landlord, (b) Tenant shall vacate the Premises and surrender the same to Landlord, (c) Tenant’s liability for Rent shall cease as of the date of the damage or taking, and (d) any prepaid Rent for any period after the date of the damage shall be refunded by Landlord to Tenant.

11.2 Restoration; Tenant’s Right of Termination . If the Premises or either of the Buildings are damaged by fire or other casualty, and this Lease is not terminated pursuant to Section 11.1 , Landlord shall thereafter use reasonable efforts to restore the respective Building and the portion of the Premises (excluding any Alterations made by Tenant pursuant to Section 5.2 ) to proper condition for Tenant’s use and occupation, provided that Landlord shall not be obligated to expend more than the amount it actually receives in insurance proceeds as a result of such fire or other casualty, and Landlord shall not be obligated to commence restoration until Landlord has received the insurance proceeds. If, for any reason (including, without limitation, the insufficiency or unavailability of insurance proceeds), full restoration shall not be substantially completed within twelve (12) months after the expiration of the ninety-day period referred to in Section 11.1 (which twelve (12) month period may be extended for such periods of time as Landlord is prevented from proceeding with or completing such restoration due to Force Majeure, but in no event for more than an additional three (3) months), Tenant shall have the right to terminate this Lease by giving notice to Landlord thereof within thirty (30) days after the expiration of such period (as so extended) provided that such restoration is not completed within such period. This Lease shall cease and come to an end without further liability or obligation on the part of either party thirty (30) days after such giving of notice by Tenant unless, within such thirty-day period, Landlord substantially completes such restoration. Such right of termination shall be Tenant’s sole and exclusive remedy at law or in equity for Landlord’s failure so to complete such restoration, and time shall be of the essence with respect thereto.

 

-43-


11.3 Landlord’s Insurance . Landlord agrees to maintain in full force and effect, during the Term of this Lease, property damage insurance with such deductibles and in such amounts as may from time to time be carried by reasonably prudent owners of similar buildings in the area in which the Property is located, provided that in no event shall Landlord be required to carry other than fire and extended coverage insurance or insurance in amounts greater than 80% of the actual insurable cash value of the Building (excluding footings and foundations). Landlord also shall maintain a policy of commercial general liability insurance, with the coverages and in the amounts as Landlord determines in its reasonable discretion to be prudent, and in any event in accordance with the requirements of all mortgagees holding mortgages on the interest of Landlord in the Property. Landlord may satisfy such insurance requirements by including the Property in a so-called “blanket” insurance policy, provided that the amount of coverage allocated to the Property shall fulfill the foregoing requirements.

11.4 Abatement of Rent . If Tenant is not in default or breach under the Lease and the Premises or the Buildings are damaged by fire or other casualty, Basic Rent and Escalation Charges payable by Tenant shall abate proportionately for the period during which, by reason of such damage, there is substantial interference with Tenant’s use of the Premises for the Permitted Uses, having regard for the extent to which Tenant may despite its commercially reasonable good faith efforts be required to discontinue Tenant’s use of all or an undamaged portion of the Premises due to such damage, but such abatement or reduction shall end if and when Landlord shall have substantially completed sufficient restoration that Tenant is reasonably able to use the Premises and the Premises are in substantially the condition in which they were prior to such damage (excluding any Alterations made by Tenant pursuant to Section 5.2 ). If the Premises shall be affected by any exercise of the power of eminent domain, Basic Rent and Escalation Charges payable by Tenant shall be justly and equitably abated and reduced according to the nature and extent of the loss of use thereof suffered by Tenant. In no event shall Landlord have any liability for damages to Tenant for inconvenience, annoyance, or interruption of business arising from any fire or other casualty or eminent domain.

11.5 Final 18 Months . Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in this Article 11 , if any damage during the final 18 months of the Term renders the Premises wholly untenantable, either Landlord or Tenant may terminate this Lease by notice to the other party within 30 days after the occurrence of such damage and this Lease shall expire on the 30th day after the date of such notice. For purposes of this Section 11.5 , the Premises shall be deemed wholly untenantable if Tenant shall be precluded from using more than 50% of the Premises for the conduct of its business for the Permitted Uses and Tenant’s inability to so use the Premises is reasonably expected to continue for more than 90 days.

11.6 Condemnation Award . Landlord shall have and hereby reserves and excepts, and Tenant hereby grants and assigns to Landlord, all awards and rights to recover for damages to the Property and the leasehold interest hereby created, and to compensation accrued or hereafter to accrue by reason of any taking, by exercise of the right of eminent domain and Tenant shall have no claim against Landlord or the condemning authority for the value of any

 

-44-


unexpired portion of the Term or any improvements or alterations of Tenant. By way of confirming the foregoing, Tenant hereby grants and assigns, and covenants with Landlord to grant and assign to Landlord, all rights to such awards, damages or compensation, and covenants to deliver such further assignments and assurances thereof as Landlord may from time to time request, and Tenant hereby irrevocably appoints Landlord its attorney-in-fact to execute and deliver in Tenant’s name all such assignments and assurances. Nothing contained herein shall be construed to prevent Tenant from prosecuting in any condemnation proceedings a separate claim for the value of any of Tenant’s furniture, fixtures and other personal property and the unamortized value of tenant improvements installed in the Premises by Tenant solely at Tenant’s expense (as amortized on a straight-line basis over the term of this Lease, with interest at the rate of 10% per annum) and for relocation expenses, provided that such action shall not reduce, detract from or affect the amount of compensation otherwise recoverable by Landlord from the taking authority.

11.7 Temporary Taking . If all or any part of the Premises is Taken temporarily during the Term for any public or quasi-public use or purpose, Tenant shall give prompt notice to Landlord and the Term shall not be reduced or affected in any way and Tenant shall continue to pay all Rent payable by Tenant without reduction or abatement and to perform all of its other obligations under this Lease, except to the extent prevented from doing so by the condemning authority, and Tenant shall be entitled to receive any award or payment from the condemning authority for such use, which shall be received, held and applied by Tenant as a trust fund for payment of the Rent falling due.

ARTICLE 12

HOLDING OVER; SURRENDER

12.1 Holding Over . Any holding over by Tenant after the expiration of the Term of this Lease shall be treated as a daily tenancy at sufferance at a Basic Rent equal to one hundred and fifty percent (150%) of the greater of (i) the Basic Rent then in effect plus Escalation Charges and other Additional Rent herein provided (prorated on a daily basis), and (ii) the rate Landlord is then asking for comparable space in the Buildings (or if no comparable space is then available, the fair market rental value of the Premises, as determined by Landlord in its reasonable discretion). Tenant shall also pay to Landlord all damages, direct, indirect, or consequential sustained by reason of any such holding over. In all other respects, such holding over shall be on the terms and conditions set forth in this Lease as far as applicable.

12.2 Surrender of Premises . Upon the expiration or earlier termination of the Term of this Lease, Tenant shall peaceably quit and surrender to Landlord the Premises in neat and clean condition and in good order, condition and repair, together with all Alterations which may have been made or installed in, on or to the Premises prior to or during the Term of this Lease (except as hereinafter provided), excepting only ordinary wear and use and damage by fire or other casualty for which, under other provisions of this Lease, Tenant has no responsibility to repair or restore. Upon the expiration or earlier termination of the Term of this Lease, Tenant shall remove (i) all of Tenant’s Removable Property, (ii) all Specialty Alterations other than (a) Specialty Alterations which Landlord expressly confirms in writing at the time of approval of the plans for such Specialty Alteration do not need to be removed in accordance with the

 

-45-


provisions of Section 5.2 , (b) Existing Specialty Alterations (as hereinafter defined), and (c) and, to the extent specified by Landlord, all other Alterations made by Tenant and all partitions wholly within the Premises. “Existing Specialty Alterations” shall mean the Specialty Alterations installed by Tenant in the Premises prior to the date of this Lease in accordance with the provisions of the Existing Leases; provided, however, the Existing Specialty Alterations shall not include the alterations referred to on the Schedule of Existing Specialty Alterations to be Removed on Lease Expiration attached hereto as Exhibit J and incorporated herein by this reference. Tenant shall repair any damage to the Premises and/or the Property caused by any such removal. Without limiting the foregoing, any Tenant’s Removable Property and/or other Alterations which shall remain in the Buildings or on the Premises after the expiration or termination of the Term of this Lease shall be deemed conclusively to have been abandoned, and either may be retained by Landlord as its property or may be disposed of in such manner as Landlord may see fit, at Tenant’s sole cost and expense.

ARTICLE 13

RIGHTS OF MORTGAGEES; TRANSFER OF TITLE

13.1 Rights of Mortgagees .

(a) Subject to the provisions of this Section 13.1, this Lease shall be subordinate to any mortgage, deed of trust or ground lease or similar encumbrance (collectively, a “ Mortgage ”, and the holder thereof from time to time the “ Holder ”) from time to time encumbering the Premises, whether executed and delivered prior to or subsequent to the date of this Lease, unless the Holder shall elect otherwise. If this Lease is subordinate to any Mortgage and the Holder or any other party shall succeed to the interest of Landlord pursuant to the Mortgage (such Holder or other party, a “ Successor ”), at the election of the Successor, Tenant shall attorn to the Successor and this Lease shall continue in full force and effect between the Successor and Tenant. Not more than fifteen (15) days after Landlord’s written request, Tenant agrees to execute such instruments of subordination or attornment in confirmation of the foregoing agreement as the Successor reasonably may request, and provided that such instrument of subordination or attornment is in the form attached hereto as Exhibit K or is otherwise on a commercially customary form, then Tenant hereby appoints the Successor as Tenant’s attorney-in-fact to execute such subordination or attornment agreement upon Tenant’s failure timely to comply with the Successor’s request.

(b) As a condition to Tenant’s agreement hereunder to subordinate Tenant’s interest in this Lease to any Mortgage, Landlord shall obtain from each Holder, an agreement (any such agreement, a “ Non-Disturbance Agreement ”), in recordable form and in either (i) substantially the form of the Non-Disturbance Agreement attached hereto as Exhibit K , or (ii) in the standard form customarily employed by such Holder (which conforms to the provisions of this Article 13 and is otherwise in commercially customary form), pursuant to which such Holder shall agree that if and so long as no Event of Default hereunder shall have occurred, the leasehold estate granted to Tenant and the rights of Tenant pursuant to this Lease to quiet and peaceful possession of the Premises shall not be terminated, modified, affected or disturbed by any action which

 

-46-


such Holder may take to foreclose any such Mortgage, and, except as provided in the form on Non-Disturbance Agreement attached hereto as Exhibit K , any successor landlord shall recognize this Lease as being in full force and effect as if it were a direct lease between such successor landlord and Tenant upon all of the terms, covenants, conditions and options granted to Tenant under this Lease.

13.2 Assignment of Rents and Transfer of Title .

(a) With reference to any assignment by Landlord of Landlord’s interest in this Lease, or the rents payable hereunder, conditional in nature or otherwise, which assignment is made to the holder of a mortgage on property which includes the Premises, Tenant agrees that the execution thereof by Landlord, and the acceptance thereof by the holder of such mortgage shall never be treated as an assumption by such holder of any of the obligations of Landlord hereunder unless such holder shall, by notice sent to Tenant, specifically otherwise elect and, except as aforesaid, such holder shall be treated as having assumed Landlord’s obligations hereunder only upon foreclosure of such holder’s mortgage and the taking of possession of the Premises.

(b) In no event shall the acquisition of Landlord’s interest in the Property by a purchaser which, simultaneously therewith, leases Landlord’s entire interest in the Property back to the seller thereof be treated as an assumption by operation of law or otherwise, of Landlord’s obligations hereunder, but Tenant shall look solely to such seller-lessee, and its successors from time to time in title, for performance of Landlord’s obligations hereunder. In any such event, this Lease shall be subject and subordinate to the lease to such purchaser. For all purposes, such seller-lessee, and its successors in title, shall be the Landlord hereunder unless and until Landlord’s position shall have been assumed by such purchaser-lessor.

(c) Except as provided in paragraph (b)  of this Section, in the event of any transfer of title to the Property by Landlord, Landlord shall thereafter be entirely freed and relieved from the performance and observance of all covenants and obligations hereunder.

13.3 Notice to Mortgagee . After receiving notice from Landlord of any Holder of a Mortgage which includes the Premises, no notice from Tenant to Landlord alleging any default by Landlord shall be effective unless and until a copy of the same is given to such Holder (provided Tenant shall have been furnished with the name and address of such Holder), and the curing of any of Landlord’s defaults by such Holder shall be treated as performance by Landlord.

ARTICLE 14

DEFAULT; REMEDIES

14.1 Tenant’s Default .

(a) If at any time subsequent to the date of this Lease any one or more of the following events (herein referred to as an “ Event of Default ”) shall occur:

(i) Tenant shall fail to pay the Basic Rent, Escalation Charges or any other Additional Rent hereunder when due and such failure shall continue for five (5) Business Days after notice to Tenant from Landlord; or

 

-47-


(ii) Tenant shall neglect or fail to perform or observe any other covenant herein contained on Tenant’s part to be performed or observed and Tenant shall fail to remedy the same within thirty (30) days after notice to Tenant specifying such neglect or failure, or if such failure is of such a nature that Tenant cannot despite its commercially diligent good faith efforts remedy the same within such thirty (30) day period, Tenant shall fail to commence promptly (and in any event within such thirty (30) day period) to remedy the same and to prosecute such remedy to completion with diligence and continuity; or

(iii) Tenant’s leasehold interest in the Premises shall be taken on execution or by other process of law directed against Tenant; or

(iv) Tenant shall make an assignment for the benefit of creditors or shall be adjudicated insolvent, or shall file any petition or answer seeking any reorganization, arrangement, composition, readjustment, liquidation, dissolution or similar relief for itself under any present or future Federal, State or other statute, law or regulation for the relief of debtors (other than the Bankruptcy Code, as hereinafter defined), or shall seek or consent to or acquiesce in the appointment of any trustee, receiver or liquidator of Tenant or of all or any substantial part of its properties, or shall admit in writing its inability to pay its debts generally as they become due; or

(v) An Event of Bankruptcy (as hereinafter defined) shall occur with respect to Tenant; or

(vi) A petition shall be filed against Tenant under any law (including, but not limited to, the Bankruptcy Code) seeking any reorganization, arrangement, composition, readjustment, liquidation, dissolution, or similar relief under any present or future Federal, State or other statute, law or regulation and shall remain undismissed or unstayed for an aggregate of sixty (60) days (whether or not consecutive), or if any trustee, conservator, receiver or liquidator of Tenant or of all or any substantial part of its properties shall be appointed without the consent or acquiescence of Tenant and such appointment shall remain unvacated or unstayed for an aggregate of sixty (60) days (whether or not consecutive);

(vii) If: ( x ) Tenant shall fail to pay the Basic Rent, Escalation Charges or any other Additional Rent hereunder when due or shall fail to perform or observe any other covenant herein contained on Tenant’s part to be performed or observed and Tenant shall cure any such failure within the applicable grace period set forth in clauses (i) or (ii) above; or ( y ) an Event of Default of the kind set forth in clauses (i) or (ii) above shall occur and Landlord shall, in its sole

 

-48-


discretion, permit Tenant to cure such Event of Default after the applicable grace period has expired; and the same or a similar failure shall occur more than once within the next 365 days (whether or not such similar failure is cured within the applicable grace period); or

(viii) The occurrence of any of the events described in paragraphs (a)(iv)-(a)(vi) with respect to any guarantor of all or any portions of Tenant’s obligations under this Lease;

then in any such case Landlord may terminate this Lease as hereinafter provided and exercise any other rights or remedies available under this Lease, at law or in equity.

(b) For purposes of clause (a)(v) above, an “ Event of Bankruptcy ” means the filing of a voluntary petition by Tenant, or the entry of an order for relief against Tenant, under Chapter 7, 11, or 13 of the Bankruptcy Code, and the term “ Bankruptcy Code ” means 11 U.S.C. §101, et seq .. If an Event of Bankruptcy occurs, then the trustee of Tenant’s bankruptcy estate or Tenant as debtor-in-possession may (subject to final approval of the court) assume this Lease, and may subsequently assign it, only if it does the following within sixty (60) days after the date of the filing of the voluntary petition, the entry of the order for relief (or such additional time as a court of competent jurisdiction may grant, for cause, upon a motion made within the original sixty-day period):

(i) file a motion to assume the Lease with the appropriate court;

(ii) satisfy all of the following conditions, which Landlord and Tenant acknowledge to be commercially reasonable:

(A) cure all Defaults of Tenant under this Lease or provide Landlord with Adequate Assurance (as defined below) that it will (x) cure all monetary Defaults of Tenant hereunder within ten (10) days from the date of the assumption; and (y) cure all nonmonetary Defaults of Tenant hereunder within thirty (30) days from the date of the assumption;

(B) compensate Landlord and any other person or entity, or provide Landlord with Adequate Assurance that within ten (10) days after the date of the assumption, it will compensate Landlord and such other person or entity, for any pecuniary loss that Landlord and such other person or entity incurred as a result of any Event of Default, the trustee, or the debtor-in-possession;

(C) provide Landlord with Adequate Assurance of Future Performance (as defined below) of all of Tenant’s obligations under this Lease; and

 

-49-


(D) deliver to Landlord a written statement that the conditions herein have been satisfied.

(c) For purposes only of the foregoing paragraph (b), and in addition to any other requirements under the Bankruptcy Code, any future federal bankruptcy law and applicable case law, “ Adequate Assurance ” means at least meeting the following conditions, which Landlord and Tenant acknowledge to be commercially reasonable:

(i) entering an order segregating sufficient cash to pay Landlord and any other person or entity under paragraph (b)  above, and

(ii) granting to Landlord a valid first lien and security interest (in form acceptable to Landlord) in all property comprising the Tenant’s “property of the estate,” as that term is defined in Section 541 of the Bankruptcy Code, located on, used at or relating to the Premises, which lien and security interest secures the trustee’s or debtor-in-possession’s obligation to cure the monetary and nonmonetary defaults under the Lease within the periods set forth in paragraph (b)  above.

(d) For purposes only of paragraph (b)  above, and in addition to any other requirements under the Bankruptcy Code, any future federal bankruptcy law and applicable case law, “ Adequate Assurance of Future Performance ” means at least meeting the following conditions, which Landlord and Tenant acknowledge to be commercially reasonable:

(i) the trustee or debtor-in-possession depositing with Landlord, as security for the timely payment of rent and other monetary obligations, an amount equal to the sum of two (2) months’ Basic Rent plus an amount equal to two (2) months’ installments on account of Escalation Charges;

(ii) the trustee or the debtor-in-possession agreeing to pay in advance, on each day that the Basic Rent is payable, the monthly installments on account of Escalation Charges;

(iii) the trustee or debtor-in-possession providing adequate assurance of the source of the rent and other consideration due under this Lease;

(iv) Tenant’s bankruptcy estate and the trustee or debtor-in-possession providing Adequate Assurance of the feasibility of the bankruptcy estate (and any successor after the conclusion of the Tenant’s bankruptcy proceedings) continuing to have sufficient unencumbered assets after the payment of all secured obligations and administrative expenses to assure Landlord that the bankruptcy estate (and any successor after the conclusion of the Tenant’s bankruptcy proceedings) will have sufficient funds to fulfill Tenant’s obligations hereunder.

 

-50-


(e) If the trustee or the debtor-in-possession assumes the Lease under paragraph (b)  above and applicable bankruptcy law, it may assign its interest in this Lease only if the proposed assignee first provides Landlord with Adequate Assurance of Future Performance of all of Tenant’s obligations under the Lease, and if Landlord determines, in the exercise of its reasonable business judgment, that the assignment of this Lease will not breach any other lease, or any mortgage, financing agreement, or other agreement relating to the Property by which Landlord or the Property is then bound (and Landlord shall not be required to obtain consents or waivers from any third party required under any lease, mortgage, financing agreement, or other such agreement by which Landlord is then bound).

(f) For purposes only of paragraph (e) above, and in addition to any other requirements under the Bankruptcy Code, any future federal bankruptcy law and applicable case law, “Adequate Assurance of Future Performance” means at least the satisfaction of the following conditions, which Landlord and Tenant acknowledge to be commercially reasonable:

(i) the proposed assignee submitting a current financial statement, audited by a certified public accountant, that allows a net worth and working capital in amounts determined in the reasonable business judgment of Landlord to be sufficient to assure the future performance by the assignee of Tenant’s obligation under this Lease; and

(ii) if requested by Landlord in the exercise of its reasonable business judgment, the proposed assignee obtaining a guarantee (in form and substance satisfactory to Landlord) from one or more persons who satisfy Landlord’s standards of creditworthiness.

14.2 Landlord’s Remedies .

(a) Upon the occurrence of an Event of Default, Landlord may, in addition to any remedies otherwise available to Landlord, immediately or at any time thereafter, and without demand or notice, enter into and upon the Premises or any part thereof in the name of the whole and repossess the same as of Landlord’s former estate, and expel Tenant and those claiming by, through or under it and remove its or their effects (forcibly if necessary) without being deemed guilty of any manner of trespass, and without prejudice to any remedies which might otherwise be used for arrears of rent or preceding breach of covenant, and/or Landlord may terminate this Lease by notice to Tenant, specifying a date not less than five (5) days after the giving of such notice on which this Lease shall terminate and this Lease shall terminate and come to an end on the date specified therein as fully and completely as if such date were the date herein originally fixed for the expiration of the Term of this Lease, and Tenant will then quit and surrender the Premises to Landlord, but Tenant shall remain liable as hereinafter provided. To the extent permitted by law, Tenant hereby expressly waives any and all rights of redemption granted by or under any present or future laws (including M.G.L. c.186, §11), in the event of Tenant being evicted or dispossessed, or in the event of

 

-51-


Landlord obtaining possession of the Premises, by reason of the violation by Tenant of any of the covenants and conditions of this Lease. In the event of any such termination, entry or re-entry, Landlord shall have the right to remove and store Tenant’s property and that of persons claiming by, through or under Tenant at the sole risk and expense of Tenant and, if Landlord so elects, (x) to sell such property at public auction or private sale and apply the net proceeds to the payment of all sums due to Landlord from Tenant and pay the balance, if any, to Tenant, or (y) to dispose of such property in any manner in which Landlord shall elect, Tenant hereby agreeing to the fullest extent permitted by law that it shall have no right, title or interest in any property remaining in the Premises after such termination, entry or re-entry.

(b) If this Lease shall have been terminated as provided in this Article , or if any execution or attachment shall be issued against Tenant or any of Tenant’s property whereupon the Premises shall be taken or occupied by someone other than Tenant, then Landlord may re-enter the Premises, either by summary proceedings, ejectment or otherwise, and remove and dispossess Tenant and all other persons and any and all property from the same, as if this Lease had not been made.

(c) If Landlord enters or re-enters the Premises as aforesaid and/or this Lease shall have been terminated as provided in this Article, Tenant shall pay the Basic Rent, Escalation Charges, Additional Rent and other sums payable hereunder up to the time of such termination, and thereafter Tenant, until the end of what would have been the Term of this Lease in the absence of such entry/re-entry or termination, and whether or not the Premises shall have been relet, shall be liable to Landlord for, and shall pay to Landlord, as liquidated current damages, the Basic Rent, Escalation Charges, Additional Rent and other sums that would be payable hereunder if such termination had not occurred, less the net proceeds, if any, received by Landlord in reletting the Premises, after deducting all expenses in connection with such reletting, including, without limitation, all repossession costs, brokerage commissions, legal expenses, attorneys’ fees, advertising, expenses of employees, alteration costs and expenses of preparation for such reletting. Tenant shall pay the portion of such current damages referred to above to Landlord monthly on the days which the Basic Rent would have been payable hereunder if this Lease had not been terminated, and Tenant shall pay the portion of such current damages referred to in clause (y) above to Landlord upon such termination.

(d) As an alternative, at the election of the Landlord at any time after termination of this Lease as provided in this Article, whether or not Landlord shall have collected any such current damages, as liquidated final damages and in lieu of all such current damages beyond the date of such demand, at Landlord’s election Tenant shall pay to Landlord an amount equal to the excess, if any, of the Basic Rent, Escalation Charges, Additional Rent and other sums as hereinbefore provided which would be payable hereunder from the date of such demand assuming that, for the purposes of this paragraph, annual payments by Tenant on account of Taxes and Operating Expenses would be the same as the payments required for the immediately preceding Operating or Tax Year for what would be the then unexpired Term of this Lease if the same remained in effect, over the then fair net rental value of the Premises for the same period, both

 

-52-


amounts being discounted to present value at an interest rate equal to 200 basis points less than the then-applicable Base Rate (as hereinafter defined). The “Base Rate” shall mean the prime rate, as set forth in the Wall Street Journal from time to time.

(e) In case of any Event of Default, re-entry, expiration and dispossession by summary proceedings or otherwise, Landlord may (i) re-let the Premises or any part or parts thereof, either in the name of Landlord or otherwise, for a term or terms which may at Landlord’s option be equal to or less than or exceed the period which would otherwise have constituted the balance of the Term of this Lease and may grant concessions or free rent to the extent that Landlord considers advisable and necessary to re-let the same, and (ii) make such alterations, repairs and decorations in the Premises as Landlord considers advisable and necessary for the purpose of reletting the Premises, and the making of such alterations, repairs and decorations shall not operate or be construed to release Tenant from liability hereunder as aforesaid. Tenant hereby expressly waives any and all rights of redemption granted by or under any present or future laws in the event of Tenant being evicted or dispossessed, or in the event of Landlord obtaining possession of the Premises, by reason of the violation by Tenant of any of the covenants and conditions of this Lease.

14.3 Additional Rent . If Tenant shall fail to pay when due any sums under this Lease designated as an Escalation Charge or other Additional Rent, Landlord shall have the same rights and remedies as Landlord has hereunder for failure to pay Basic Rent.

14.4 Remedying Defaults . Landlord shall have the right, but shall not be required, to pay such sums or do any act which requires the expenditure of monies which may be necessary or appropriate by reason of the failure or neglect of Tenant to perform any of the provisions of this Lease, and in the event of the exercise of such right by Landlord, Tenant agrees to pay to Landlord forthwith upon demand all such sums, together with interest thereon at a rate equal to 1% over the Base Rate, as Additional Rent. Any payment of Basic Rent, Escalation Charges, Additional Rent or other sums payable hereunder not paid when due shall, at the option of Landlord, bear interest at a rate equal to 200 basis points over the Base Rate in effect from time to time from the due date thereof and shall be payable forthwith on demand by Landlord, as Additional Rent.

14.5 Remedies Cumulative . The specified remedies to which Landlord may resort hereunder are not intended to be exclusive of any remedies or means of redress to which Landlord may at any time be entitled lawfully, and Landlord may invoke any remedy (including the remedy of specific performance) allowed at law or in equity as if specific remedies were not herein provided for.

14.6 Enforcement Costs . In any action or proceeding brought by either party against the other under this Lease, the prevailing party shall be entitled to recover from the other party its reasonable professional fees for attorneys, appraisers and accountants, its reasonable investigation costs, and any other reasonable legal expenses and actual court costs incurred by the prevailing party in such action or proceeding.

 

-53-


14.7 Waiver .

(a) Failure on the part of Landlord or Tenant to complain of any action or non-action on the part of the other, no matter how long the same may continue, shall never be a waiver by Tenant or Landlord, respectively, of any of the other’s rights hereunder. Further, no waiver at any time of any of the provisions hereof by Landlord or Tenant shall be construed as a waiver of any of the other provisions hereof, and a waiver at any time of any of the provisions hereof shall not be construed as a waiver at any subsequent time of the same provisions. The consent or approval of Landlord or Tenant to or of any action by the other requiring such consent or approval shall not be construed to waive or render unnecessary Landlord’s or Tenant’s consent or approval to or of any subsequent similar act by the other.

(b) No payment by Tenant, or acceptance by Landlord, of a lesser amount than shall be due from Tenant to Landlord shall be treated otherwise than as a payment on account of the earliest installment of any payment due from Tenant under the provisions hereof. The acceptance by Landlord of a check for a lesser amount with an endorsement or statement thereon, or upon any letter accompanying such check, that such lesser amount is payment in full, shall be given no effect, and Landlord may accept such check without prejudice to any other rights or remedies which Landlord may have against Tenant.

14.8 [Intentionally Deleted].

14.9 Landlord’s Default . Landlord shall in no event be in default in the performance of any of Landlord’s obligations under this Lease unless Landlord shall have failed to perform such obligations within thirty (30) days (or such additional time as is reasonably required to correct any such default) after notice by Tenant to Landlord properly specifying wherein Landlord has failed to perform any such obligation. Without limitation, in no event shall Tenant have the right to terminate or cancel this Lease or to withhold Rent or to set-off or deduct any claim or damages against Rent as a result of any default by Landlord or breach by Landlord of its covenants or any warranties or promises hereunder, except in the case of a wrongful eviction of Tenant from the Premises (constructive or actual) by Landlord continuing after notice to Landlord thereof and a reasonable opportunity for Landlord to cure the same as set forth above. In addition, the Tenant shall not assert any right to deduct the cost of repairs or any monetary claim against the Landlord from Rent thereafter due and payable under this Lease, but shall look solely to the interests of the Landlord in the Property for satisfaction of any such claim. This Lease shall be construed as though Landlord’s covenants contained herein are independent and not dependent, and Tenant hereby waives the benefit of any law or statute to the contrary.

ARTICLE 15

MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS

15.1 Rights of Access . Landlord, its agents, contractors and employees shall have the right to enter the Premises at all reasonable hours for the purpose of inspecting the Premises, doing maintenance or making repairs or otherwise exercising its rights or fulfilling its obligations

 

-54-


under this Lease, and Landlord also shall have the right to make access available at all reasonable hours to prospective or existing mortgagees, purchasers or tenants of any part of the Property. In connection with the exercise of the foregoing rights or other rights of access afforded by this Lease (excepting routine access such as access for providing cleaning or other regularly scheduled services) Landlord shall exercise reasonable efforts to minimize any interference with the usual and customary security systems and other operations of the Tenant in the Premises in accordance with the provisions of this Lease and, except in the case of emergency, to provide reasonable advance notice of any such entry.

15.2 Covenant of Quiet Enjoyment . Subject to the terms and conditions of this Lease, on payment of the Basic Rent and Escalation Charges and other Additional Rent and observing, keeping and performing all of the other terms and conditions of this Lease on Tenant’s part to be observed, kept and performed, Tenant shall lawfully, peaceably and quietly enjoy the Premises during the term hereof, without hindrance or ejection by Landlord or by any persons lawfully claiming under Landlord to have title to the Premises superior to Tenant. The foregoing covenant of quiet enjoyment is in lieu of any other covenant, express or implied.

15.3 Landlord’s Liability .

(a) Tenant agrees to look solely to Landlord’s equity interest in the Property at the time of recovery for recovery of any judgment against Landlord, and agrees that neither Landlord nor any successor of Landlord shall be personally liable for any such judgment, or for the payment of any monetary obligation to Tenant. The provision contained in the foregoing sentence is not intended to, and shall not, limit any right that Tenant might otherwise have to obtain injunctive relief against Landlord or any successor of Landlord, or to take any action not involving the personal liability of Landlord or any successor of Landlord to respond in monetary damages from Landlord’s assets other than Landlord’s equity interest in the Property and the rents and profits directly and proximately resulting therefrom. The covenants of Landlord contained in this Lease shall be binding upon Landlord and Landlord’s successors only with respect to obligations arising during Landlord and Landlord’s successor’s respective periods of ownership of the Property.

(b) Except as expressly and specifically set forth in Articles 10 and 12 hereof, in no event shall either party ever be liable to the other for any loss of business or any other indirect or consequential damages suffered by such party from whatever cause.

(c) Where provision is made in this Lease for Landlord’s consent, and Tenant shall request such consent, and Landlord shall fail or refuse to give such consent, Tenant shall not be entitled to any damages for any withholding by Landlord of its consent, it being intended that Tenant’s sole remedy shall be an action for specific performance or injunction, and that such remedy shall be available only in those cases where Landlord has expressly agreed in writing not to unreasonably withhold its consent. Furthermore, whenever Tenant requests Landlord’s consent or approval (whether or not provided for herein), Tenant shall pay to Landlord, on demand, as Additional Rent, any reasonable expenses incurred by Landlord (including without limitation reasonable attorneys’ fees and costs, if any) in connection therewith.

 

-55-


(d) Any repairs or restoration required or permitted to be made by Landlord under this Lease may be made during normal business hours, and Landlord shall have no liability for damages to Tenant for inconvenience, annoyance or interruption of business arising therefrom.

(e) The Landlord shall in no event be liable for failure to perform any of its obligations under this Lease when prevented from doing so by causes beyond its reasonable control, including, without limitation, Force Majeure events, labor dispute, breakdown, accident, order or regulation of or by any governmental authority, or failure of supply, or inability by the exercise of reasonable diligence to obtain supplies, parts, or employees necessary to furnish services required under this Lease, or because of war or other emergency, or for any cause due to any act, neglect, or default of Tenant or Tenant’s servants, contractors, agents, employees, licensees or any person claiming by, through or under Tenant.

15.4 Estoppel Certificates .

(a) Within ten (10) Business Days following request from Landlord or any Holder, Tenant shall deliver to Landlord a statement executed and acknowledged by Tenant, in form reasonably satisfactory to Landlord, (a) stating the Commencement Date, the Rent Commencement Date, and the Expiration Date, and that this Lease is then in full force and effect and has not been modified (or if modified, setting forth all modifications), (b) setting forth the date to which the Basic Rent and any Additional Rent have been paid, together with the amount of monthly Basic Rent and Additional, Rent then payable, (c) stating whether or not, to the best of Tenant’s knowledge, Landlord is in default under this Lease, and, if Landlord is in default, setting forth the specific nature of all such defaults, (d) stating the amount of the security, if any, under this Lease, (e) stating whether there are any subleases or assignments affecting the Premises, (f) stating the address of Tenant to which all notices and communications under the Lease shall be sent, and (g) responding to any other matters reasonably requested by Landlord or such Holder. Tenant acknowledges that any statement delivered pursuant to this Section 15.4 may be relied upon by any purchaser or owner of the Property or the Building, or all or any portion of Landlord’s interest in the Property or the Building or by any Holder, or assignee thereof.

(b) From time to time, but not more than two times within any 12 month period, within ten (10) Business Days following request from Tenant, Landlord shall deliver to Tenant a statement executed by Landlord certifying (i) that this Lease is then in full force and effect and has not been modified (or if modified, setting forth all such modifications), (ii) setting forth the date to which Basic Rent and any Additional Rent have been paid, together with the amount of monthly Basic Rent, and Escalation Rent then payable by Tenant under this Lease, (iii) stating whether or not, to the best knowledge of Landlord, but without independent investigation, Tenant is then in default

 

-56-


under this Lease if so, setting forth the specific nature of all such defaults, and (iv) responding to such other matters concerning this Lease as may be reasonably requested by Tenant.

15.5 Brokerage . Tenant warrants and represents that Tenant has dealt with no broker in connection with the consummation of this Lease other than the Brokers, and, in the event of any brokerage claims against Landlord predicated upon prior dealings with Tenant, Tenant agrees to defend the same and indemnify Landlord against any such claim (except any claim by the Brokers). Landlord warrants and represents that it has not dealt directly or indirectly, in connection with the leasing of the Demised Premises, with any broker, agent, or other person entitled to claim a commission or fee therefor other than the Brokers, and in the event of any brokerage claims against the Tenant predicated upon prior dealings with the Landlord named herein, Landlord agrees to defend the same and indemnify Tenant against any such claim. Landlord shall be responsible for payment of brokerage commissions to the Brokers pursuant to a separate agreement.

15.6 Financial Statements . Tenant shall, at any time and from time to time, upon not less than ten (10) Business Days’ prior written notice by Landlord, deliver to Landlord Tenant’s most recently audited, or if not available unaudited, financial statements, in form reasonably satisfactory to Landlord.

15.7 [Intentionally Deleted].

15.8 Rules and Regulations . Tenant shall abide by the Rules and Regulations from time to time established by Landlord, it being agreed that such Rules and Regulations will be established and applied by Landlord in a non-discriminatory fashion, such that all Rules and Regulations shall be generally applicable to other tenants of the Building of similar nature to the Tenant named herein. Landlord agrees to use reasonable efforts to insure that any such Rules and Regulations are uniformly enforced, but Landlord shall not be liable to Tenant for violation of the same by any other tenant or occupant of the Building, or persons having business with them. In the event that there shall be a conflict between such Rules and Regulations and the provisions of this Lease, the provisions of this Lease shall control. The Rules and Regulations currently in effect are set forth in Exhibit E.

15.9 Invalidity of Particular Provisions . If any term or provision of this Lease, or the application thereof to any person or circumstance shall, to any extent, be invalid or unenforceable, the remainder of this Lease, or the application of such term or provision to persons or circumstances other than those as to which it is held invalid or unenforceable, shall not be affected thereby, and each term and provision of this Lease shall be valid and be enforced to the fullest extent permitted by law.

15.10 Provisions Binding, Etc . Except as herein otherwise provided, the terms hereof shall be binding upon and shall inure to the benefit of the successors and assigns, respectively, of Landlord and Tenant (except in the case of Tenant, only such successors and assigns as may be permitted hereunder) and, if Tenant shall be an individual, upon and to his heirs, executors, administrators, successors and permitted assigns. Each term and each provision of this Lease to

 

-57-


be performed by Tenant shall be construed to be both a covenant and a condition. Any reference in this Lease to successors and assigns of Tenant shall not be construed to constitute a consent to assignment by Tenant.

15.11 Recording . Tenant agrees not to record this Lease, but, if the Term of this Lease (including any extended term) is seven (7) years or longer, each party hereto agrees, on the request of the other, to execute a notice of lease in recordable form and complying with applicable law. In no event shall such document set forth the rent or other charges payable by Tenant under this Lease; and any such document shall expressly state that it is executed pursuant to the provisions contained in this Lease, and is not intended to vary the terms and conditions of this Lease. At Landlord’s request, promptly upon expiration of or earlier termination of the Term, Tenant shall execute and deliver to Landlord a release of any document recorded in the real property records for the location of the Property evidencing this Lease, and Tenant hereby appoints Landlord Tenant’s attorney-in-fact, coupled with an interest, to execute any such document if Tenant fails to respond to Landlord’s request to do so within fifteen (15) days. The obligations of Tenant under this Section shall survive the expiration or any earlier termination of the Term.

15.12 Notice . All notices or other communications required hereunder shall be in writing and shall be deemed duly given if delivered in person (with receipt therefor), if sent by reputable overnight delivery or courier service (e.g., Federal Express) providing for receipted delivery, or if sent by certified or registered mail, return receipt requested, postage prepaid, to the following address:

(a) if to Landlord, at Landlord’s Address, Attention: Ten/10 P.O. Square, with a copy to CB Richard Ellis/Whittier Partners, Federal Reserve Building, 600 Atlantic Avenue, Boston, Massachusetts 02110, Attention: Property Manager-10/Ten P.O. Square, with additional copies to Landlord’s Property Management Office, c/o CB Richard Ellis/Whittier Partners, Ten P.O. Square, Boston, Massachusetts 02109 Attention: Property Manager, and to Goulston & Storrs, P.C., 400 Atlantic Avenue, Boston, Massachusetts 02110-3333, Attention: Frank E. Litwin, Esq.

(b) if to Tenant, at Tenant’s Address .

Where receipt of notice or other communication shall be conclusively established by either (i) return of a return receipt indicating that the notice has been delivered; or (ii) return of the letter containing the notice with an indication from the courier or postal service that the addressee has refused to accept delivery of the notice. Either party may change its address for the giving of notices by notice given in accordance with this Section.

15.13 When Lease Becomes Binding; Entire Agreement; Modification . The submission of this document for examination and negotiation does not constitute an offer to lease, or a reservation of, or option for, the Premises, and this document shall become effective and binding only upon the execution and delivery hereof by both Landlord and Tenant. This Lease is the entire agreement between Landlord and Tenant, and this Lease expressly supersedes any negotiations, considerations, representations and understandings and proposals or other

 

-58-


written documents relating hereto. This Lease may be modified or altered only by written agreement between Landlord and Tenant, and no act or omission of any employee or agent of Landlord shall alter, change or modify any of the provisions hereof.

15.14 Paragraph Headings and Interpretation of Sections . The paragraph headings throughout this instrument are for convenience and reference only, and the words contained therein shall in no way be held to explain, modify, amplify or aid in the interpretation, construction or meaning of the provisions of this Lease. The provisions of this Lease shall be construed as a whole, according to their common meaning (except where a precise legal interpretation is clearly evidenced), and not for or against either party. Use in this Lease of the words “including,” “such as” or words of similar import, when followed by any general term, statement or matter, shall not be construed to limit such term, statement or matter to the specified item(s), whether or not language of non-limitation, such as “without limitation” or “including, but not limited to,” or words of similar import, are used with reference thereto, but rather shall be deemed to refer to all other terms or matters that could fall within a reasonably broad scope of such term, statement or matter.

15.15 Dispute Resolution . In the event of a dispute between Landlord and Tenant pursuant to this Lease (other than a dispute relating to the payment of Basic Rent and Escalation Charges) the parties agree that prior to pursuing other available remedies (excluding giving notices of default), they will attempt to directly negotiate resolution of their dispute. If negotiation is unsuccessful, then they agree to participate in at least three hours of non-binding mediation to be facilitated by a mediator mutually acceptable to them under the mediation procedures set by the mediator. The non-binding mediation session shall be conducted within thirty (30) days of the date on which the mediator receives the request to mediate. The costs of such mediation shall be shared equally by the parties.

15.16 Waiver of Jury Trial . Landlord and Tenant hereby each waive trial by jury in any action, proceeding or counterclaim brought by either against the other, on or in respect of any matter whatsoever arising out of or in any way connected with this Lease, the relationship of Landlord and Tenant or Tenant’s use or occupancy of the Premises.

15.17 Time Is of the Essence . Time is of the essence of each provision of this Lease.

15.18 Multiple Counterparts . This Lease may be executed in multiple counterparts, each of which shall be deemed an original and all of which together shall constitute one and the same document.

15.19 Governing Law . This Lease shall be governed by the laws of the Commonwealth of Massachusetts without regard to conflicts of laws.

15.20 Building Name, Property Name, Exterior Signage . Landlord may elect at any time to change the name(s), number(s) or designation(s) by which the Buildings and/or the Property is (or are) commonly known; provided, however, (i) Landlord will not name either Building and/or the Property for any other tenant thereof, and (ii) if Landlord elects to change the number(s) by which the Buildings and/or the Property is (or are) commonly known, Landlord

 

-59-


shall provide not less than six (6) months prior notice thereof to Tenant. Landlord may elect, from time to time, to install exterior signage on the Buildings; provided, however, any such signage which identifies other tenants of the Buildings shall be less prominent than the signage installed by or on behalf of Tenant and shall be reasonably tasteful and restrained in all respects.

ARTICLE 16

PARKING

16.1 Parking Spaces . During the Term, upon the request of Tenant, Tenant shall be entitled to contract for use by Tenant’s employees of up to eighteen (18) parking spaces in the Post Office Square Parking Garage (the “Garage”). In addition, if Tenant exercises its rights pursuant to Articles 17 and 23 of this Lease and adds additional space to the Premises leased hereunder and to the extent additional parking spaces are then-available in the Garage, Tenant may contract for use by Tenant’s employees of one (1) additional parking space for each 5,440 square feet of rentable area of such additional space (excluding any storage areas); provided, however, in no event shall Tenant be entitled to contract for more than twenty-eight (28) parking spaces in the aggregate. The monthly rent per parking space from time to time shall be equal to the prevailing rate charged from time to time by the Garage operator, as the case may be; provided, however, said rate shall not exceed the then-applicable lowest monthly rate per parking space then provided to other tenants of the Property.

16.2 Responsibility for Garage . Tenant acknowledges that the Garage is not owned or controlled by Landlord, and that while Landlord has an agreement with the owner of the Garage concerning the provision of parking spaces to tenants at the Buildings, Landlord has no control over the owner and the operator of the Garage. The management and operation of the Garage shall be solely the responsibility of the Garage owner and operator and Landlord shall have no liabilities or obligations, of any kind, with respect thereto. Tenant hereby waives and releases any claims, actions, causes of action or the like against Landlord arising out of or relating to the Garage and/or the use thereof by Tenant’s employees. Landlord does not assume any responsibility for, and shall not be held liable for, any damage or loss to any automobiles parked in the Garage or to any personal property located therein, or for any injury sustained by any person in or about the Garage. Any failure or inability to provide any such parking spaces, whether because of casualty, eminent domain or for any other reason beyond Landlord’s control, shall not constitute a breach of any of Landlord’s obligations under this Lease and shall in no event entitle Tenant to terminate this Lease or to any compensation, damages or other claim against Landlord. Tenant and its employees shall at all times comply with all rules and regulations promulgated by the Garage operator, including requirements concerning identification or parking stickers.

16.3 Personal Rights . The rights granted to Tenant in this Article 16 are personal to Boston Private Financial Holdings, Inc. and the Affiliates thereof, and may not be assigned or transferred to or exercisable by any other persons or entities.

 

-60-


ARTICLE 17

RIGHT OF FIRST OFFER TO LEASE SPACE

17.1 ROFO Rights . If at any time prior to the ninth (9 th ) anniversary of the Commencement Date, Landlord in its sole discretion determines that any separately demised rentable area on any floor of either Building (each such area, a “ROFO Space”) other than the Excluded Areas (as hereinafter defined) has become “available for leasing” (as hereinafter defined), and provided that the conditions precedent set forth in Section 17.3 below are then satisfied, then prior to offering to lease such ROFO Space to any 3 rd parties, Landlord shall deliver notice thereof to Tenant (the “ROFO Notice”) setting forth a description of the ROFO Space in question (including the rentable area thereof), the Landlord’s determination of the fair market rental value (as defined in Section 4.4 ), for such ROFO Space, the other material business terms upon which Landlord is willing to lease the ROFO Space, and the date Landlord anticipates that the ROFO Space will become available for leasing. Provided that all of the conditions precedent set forth in this Article 17 are fully satisfied by Tenant, Tenant shall have the option (the “ROFO Option”), exercisable by Tenant delivering written notice (the “Acceptance Notice”) to Landlord within twenty (20) calendar days after delivery by Landlord of the ROFO Notice, to lease the ROFO Space upon all of the terms and conditions set forth in the ROFO Notice, including the Basic Rent, Escalation Rent, and Additional Rent for the ROFO Space designated by Landlord as set forth therein. Time shall be of the essence as to Tenant’s giving of the Acceptance Notice with respect to any ROFO Space.

If (a) Tenant fails to deliver an Acceptance Notice within such twenty (20) day period, or (b) if Tenant timely delivers an Acceptance Notice as aforesaid but does not execute and deliver a final fully executed amendment to this Lease with respect to the leasing of the ROFO Space, in form and substance reasonably satisfactory to Landlord, within thirty (30) days after delivery by Landlord of the proposed lease amendment to Tenant, then Tenant shall be deemed to have rejected the option to lease the applicable ROFO Space (the “Rejected ROFO Space”). In such event, except as set forth in this paragraph, Tenant shall have no further rights or claims with respect to the Rejected ROFO Space, Landlord shall have no further liabilities or obligations to Tenant with respect to the Rejected ROFO Space, and Landlord may elect to lease the Rejected ROFO Space to 3 rd parties upon such terms and conditions as Landlord may determine in its discretion. Notwithstanding the foregoing, if (i) Tenant was entitled to exercise its ROFO Option but failed to deliver an Acceptance Notice within the twenty (20) day period set forth above, and (ii) Landlord does not enter into a lease for the respective ROFO Space within a period of twelve (12) months following the date of the ROFO Notice, then Tenant’s rights shall be revived and Tenant shall once again have a ROFO Option with respect to the respective ROFO Space. In addition, notwithstanding the foregoing, if any Rejected ROFO Space shall be leased to any third party and, after the expiration or termination of said lease (including any extensions or renewals which may, from time to time, be granted to the Tenant pursuant to said lease), such Rejected ROFO Space again becomes available for leasing prior to the expiration or earlier termination of the Term of this Lease or the expiration of the ROFO Rights of Tenant pursuant to Section 17.6, then Tenant’s right of first offer under this Article 17 with respect to such Reject ROFO Space shall again become effective, in accordance with and subject to all of the terms and conditions thereof.

 

-61-


Notwithstanding the foregoing, if Tenant, in its good faith reasonable judgment, determines that the rate set forth in Landlord’s ROFO Notice does not accurately reflect the fair market rental value for the respective ROFO Space, Tenant may elect to exercise the ROFO Option and provide Landlord with an Acceptance Notice which expressly and specifically states that Tenant objects to the Landlord’s determination of the fair market rental value for the respective ROFO Space. Such exercise of the ROFO Option shall be unconditional and irrevocable, subject only to the determination of the fair market rental value for the respective ROFO Space. In such event, for a period of fifteen (15) days after the delivery of Tenant’s Acceptance Notice, Landlord and Tenant shall work together in good faith to determine the fair market rental value for the ROFO Space. If Landlord and Tenant fail to agree upon the fair market rental value for the respective ROFO Space within such fifteen (15) day period, then the fair market rental value shall be determined in accordance with the arbitration procedure described in Sections 4.4(b) , 4.4(c) , and 4.4(d) of this Lease. If Tenant fails to provide an Acceptance Notice which expressly and specifically state that Tenant objects to Landlord’s determination of fair market rental value for the respective ROFO Space, then Tenant shall be deemed to have accepted Landlord’s determination.

17.2 Excluded Areas, Available for Leasing, Exclusions, etc. . For purposes of this Article 17 , the “Excluded Areas” shall mean the following: (i) any areas on the basement level of either Building; (ii) an area on the 12 th Floor of the Ten P.O. Square Building comprising approximately 3,434 rentable square feet, which area is depicted on the plan attached hereto as Exhibit F-1 ; and (iii) an area on the 8 th Floor of the Ten P.O. Square Building comprising approximately 3,434 rentable square feet, which area is depicted on the plan attached hereto as Exhibit F-2 . For purposes of this Article 17 , space shall be deemed “available for leasing” when Landlord has determined in its discretion that (a) the space is vacant, or (b) the respective existing tenant or occupant will not extend or renew the term of its lease or other occupancy agreement for the ROFO Space and that said existing tenant or occupant is not interested either in extending or renewing its lease or other occupancy agreement for the ROFO Space or in entering into a new lease for such ROFO Space. For purposes of this Article 17 , space shall not be deemed “available for leasing” if, at the time in question (a) any person or entity leases or occupies the ROFO Space, whether pursuant to a lease or other agreement (unless such person or entity confirms to the satisfaction of Landlord that it does not intend to extend or renew the term of the lease or other occupancy agreement for the ROFO space or enter into a new lease for such ROFO Space), (b) any person or entity holds any option or right to lease or occupy the ROFO Space, or to renew its lease or right(s) of occupancy thereof, or any other rights or claims thereto (including, without limitation, any rights of first offer, rights of first refusal or expansion rights), or (c) Landlord intends occupy the ROFO Space, or to lease or otherwise permit the occupancy of the ROFO Space by an affiliate or subsidiary of Landlord. Without limitation, so long as a tenant or other occupant leases or occupies all or a portion of the ROFO Space, Landlord shall be free to extend or renew any such tenancy or occupancy, whether or not pursuant to a lease or other agreement, and such space shall not be deemed to be “available for leasing.” In no event shall Landlord be liable to Tenant for any failure by any then existing tenant or occupant to vacate any ROFO Space by any particular date. Nothing set forth in this Article 17 shall be construed to limit Landlord’s right to lease space in the Buildings to affiliates of Landlord, or to keep space in the Buildings vacant if Landlord elects, in its sole discretion, to do so, and such space leased to affiliates, subsidiaries or related entities, or vacant space, shall in no event be

 

-62-


deemed to be “available for leasing” hereunder. Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, all rights of first offer granted to Tenant pursuant to this Article 17 are subject and subordinate in all respects to the rights (whether such rights are designated as a right of first offer, right of first refusal, expansion option or otherwise) of any tenant or occupant of the Building(s) existing on the date of this Lease.

17.3 Conditions . Tenant shall have no right to exercise any ROFO Option unless all of the following conditions have been satisfied both on the date of the Acceptance Notice and on the ROFO Space Commencement Date (as hereinafter defined): (a) No uncured default or Event of Default shall exist under this Lease; and (b) Boston Private Financial Holdings, Inc. and/or Affiliates of Boston Private Financial Holdings, Inc. is (or are) occupying not less than sixty-five percent (65%) of the rentable area of the Premises then demised under this Lease.

17.4 Terms . Effective as of the date on which Landlord delivers the ROFO Space to Tenant (the “ROFO Space Commencement Date”):

(i) The ROFO Space shall be added to and be deemed to be a part of the Premises for all purposes under this Lease (except as otherwise provided in this Article 17 );

(ii) The ROFO Space shall be delivered in broom-clean condition, free of all tenants and occupants and otherwise in its “as is” condition; Landlord shall not be obligated to perform any work or improvements or to provide any allowances or inducements with respect thereto;

(iii) Basic Rent, Escalation Rent and Additional Rent for the ROFO Space shall be as set forth in the ROFO Notice; and

(iv) Tenant shall pay all Additional Rent payable under this Lease with respect to the applicable ROFO Space, except to the extent that any such Additional Rent is included in the amounts payable under clause (iii) above.

17.5 Amendment . If Tenant exercises the ROFO Option, upon request made by Landlord, Tenant will execute, acknowledge and deliver to Landlord an amendment to this Lease confirming the ROFO Space Commencement Date, the Basic Rent, Escalation Rent and Additional Rent payable with respect to the ROFO Space, the incorporation of the ROFO Space into the Premises, and the modifications to this Lease resulting therefrom, as provided in subsection 17(d). The failure of either party to execute and deliver such an amendment shall not affect the rights, liabilities or obligations of the parties with respect to the ROFO Space.

17.6 Expiration . Notwithstanding any provision contained herein to the contrary, if and when the date which is twenty-four (24) months prior to then-scheduled expiration date of the Term of this Lease occurs (as such expiration date may be extended from time to time pursuant to Section 4.4 of this Lease), then this Article 17 shall become null and void and of no further force or effect and Tenant shall have no further ROFO Options or other rights to lease any ROFO Space pursuant to this Article 17 . In such event, all of the obligations of Landlord to

 

-63-


offer any ROFO Space to Tenant shall be considered to have been fully and completely satisfied, and neither Landlord nor Tenant shall have any further rights, liabilities or obligations under this Article 17 .

ARTICLE 18

ROOFTOP EQUIPMENT

18.1 Rooftop Equipment . Subject to approval by all applicable governmental authorities and the provisions of this Article 18 , so long as (i) this Lease is in full force and effect, (ii) no Event of Default shall have occurred, and (iii) at the time of the request submitted by Tenant there is space available on the roof of the Ten P.O. Square Building/10 P.O. Square Building, then Tenant shall have the right, at Tenant’s sole cost and expense, to install, use, maintain and operate on the roof of such Building one satellite dish or similar antennae and related equipment and/or an electrical generator (collectively, the “ Roof Equipment ”). The Roof Equipment shall be of a size and located in an area of the roof acceptable to Landlord in its reasonable discretion. The installation, use, maintenance, repair, operation and removal of the Roof Equipment shall at all times comply with all applicable legal requirements, and with all of the following terms and conditions:

 

  (1) If and so long as the Roof Equipment is used solely by Tenant for the operation of its business at the Property, then, except as set forth in this Article 18 , there shall be no additional rent payable to Landlord in connection therewith; however, if and to the extent Tenant receives any direct revenues from third parties arising out of resulting from such Roof Equipment, including, without limitation, license fees, transmission fees or other types of fees, then Tenant shall pay all such third party revenues over to Landlord, as Additional Rent, without deduction or set-off of any kind.

 

  (2) Tenant shall be solely and exclusively responsible for all costs, expenses and charges, of every kind, of installing, operating, maintaining, repairing, replacing, and removing the Roof Equipment and Landlord shall have no liability or obligation in connection therewith.

 

  (3)

If, in the judgment of Landlord, any electrical, electromagnetic, radio frequency or other interference shall result from the operation of any of the Roof Equipment, Tenant agrees that Landlord may, at Landlord’s option, shut down Tenant’s Roof Equipment upon 4 hours prior notice to Tenant; provided, however, if an emergency situation exists, which Landlord reasonably determines in its discretion to be attributable to the Roof Equipment, Landlord shall immediately notify Tenant orally, who shall act immediately to remedy the emergency situation. Should Tenant fail to so remedy said emergency situation, Landlord may then act to shut down Tenant’s Roof Equipment. Tenant shall indemnify Landlord and hold it harmless from, and Tenant waives, all expenses, costs, damages, losses, claims or other liabilities arising out of said shutdown. Tenant

 

-64-


 

agrees to cease operations (except for intermittent testing on a schedule approved by Landlord) until the interference has been corrected to the reasonable satisfaction of Landlord. If such interference has not been corrected to the satisfaction of Landlord within 30 days, Landlord may require that Tenant immediately remove from the Roof Space the specific item of equipment causing such interference, in which latter case the Additional Rent payable on account of the Roof Equipment shall be equitably reduced.

 

  (4) Tenant shall, at its sole cost and expense, and at its sole risk, install, operate and maintain the Roof Equipment in a good and workmanlike manner, and in compliance with all electric, communication, and safety codes, ordinances, standards, regulations and requirements, now in effect or hereafter promulgated, of the Federal Government, including, without limitation, the Federal Communications Commission (the “ FCC ”), the Federal Aviation Administration (“ FAA ”) or any successor agency of either the FCC or FAA having jurisdiction over radio or telecommunications, and of the state, city and county in which the Building is located. Tenant shall cooperate generally with Landlord and other carriers to permit the Building’s rooftop to be and remain in compliance with all FCC and OSHA rules and regulations relating to radio frequency emission levels and maximum permissible exposure, including but not limited to the rules and regulations adopted in FCC document OET 65 (which rules and regulations have also been adopted by OSHA). Neither Landlord nor its agents shall be liable to Tenant for any stoppages or shortages of electrical power furnished to the Roof Equipment or the roof area because of any act, omission or requirement of the public utility serving the Building, or the act or omission of any other tenant, invitee or licensee or their respective agents, employees or contractors, or for any other cause beyond the reasonable control of Landlord, and Tenant shall not be entitled to any rental abatement for any such stoppage or shortage of electrical power. Neither Landlord nor its agents shall have any responsibility or liability for the conduct or safety of any of Tenant’s representatives, repair, maintenance and engineering personnel while in or on any part of the Building or the roof area.

 

  (5) Landlord shall have no obligation to provide any electricity or other utilities or services to the Roof Equipment. Tenant shall be responsible for connecting the Roof Equipment to the electrical outlets currently located on the roof, and for the costs and expenses of all electricity consumed in connection with the Roof Equipment.

 

  (6) Tenant shall not make any changes, alterations, or other improvements on or to the roof of such Building without Landlord’s prior written consent in each instance, which consent, Landlord may withhold at its discretion; provided, however, in connection with the installation, operation, maintenance, repair or replacement of the Roof Equipment, Landlord’s consent shall not be unreasonably withheld.

 

-65-


  (7) Tenant shall have no right of access to the roof of such Building unless Tenant has given Landlord reasonable advance notice and unless Tenant’s representatives are accompanied by a representative of Landlord.

 

  (8) Tenant shall indemnify and hold Landlord harmless from (i) any liability, cost or expense incurred by Landlord arising out of or resulting from the erection, installation, maintenance, operation and removal of the Roof Equipment, and (ii) any and all claims, costs, damages and expenses (including reasonable attorneys’ fees) arising out of accidents, damage, injury or loss to any and all persons and property resulting from or arising in connection with the erection, installation, maintenance, operation and removal of the Roof Equipment;

 

  (9) Tenant shall promptly repair any damage caused by reason of such installation, use, maintenance, operation and removal of the Roof Equipment, including, without limitation, any repairs, restorations, maintenance, renewals or replacements of the roof (or portion thereof) necessitated by or in any way caused by or relating to such installations or the operation or presence of the Roof Equipment on the roof;

 

  (10) Tenant shall remove the Roof Equipment and repair any resulting damage to such Building (including, without limitation, restoration of the roof to the condition which existed prior to any such installation, damage by casualty and ordinary wear and tear excepted) not less than thirty (30) days prior to the expiration or earlier termination of the Term;

 

  (11) Prior to installation, Tenant shall submit to Landlord for Landlord’s approval, in its sole discretion, plans and specifications for the Roof Equipment (including, without limitation, the size of the Roof Equipment). The installation, operation, maintenance, repair and removal of the Roof Equipment shall be performed by a contractor or contractors retained by Tenant, at its sole cost and expense, and approved in each instance by Landlord. Tenant shall be responsible for obtaining any permits and licenses required for the installation and operation of the Roof Equipment and Landlord agrees to cooperate with Tenant to accomplish the same, provided that Tenant shall promptly reimburse Landlord for Landlord’s reasonable costs and expenses in connection with such cooperation;

 

  (12) Tenant’s Roof Equipment shall be for the sole use of Tenant and may be used only in connection with Tenant’s business within the Premises;

 

-66-


  (13) Tenant shall keep the Roof Equipment in good order and condition, at Tenant’s sole cost and expense, and shall promptly make any necessary repairs thereto;

 

  (14) If requested by Landlord from time to time during the Term of the Lease, the Roof Equipment shall be installed or relocated in such a way, and with appropriate screening materials (to be provided at Tenant’s sole cost and expense) so as to minimize the visibility of the Roof Equipment from any vantage point on the ground level of the Property or the public streets adjoining the Property; and

 

  (15) Tenant shall remove or relocate Tenant’s Roof Equipment, at Landlord’s direction, if such Roof Equipment interferes with the communications devices of Landlord and other tenants and licensees in such Building that were installed prior to Tenant’s installation of the Roof Equipment.

18.2 Relocation . Landlord shall have the right, upon thirty (30) days notice to Tenant, to require Tenant to relocate the Roof Equipment to another area on the roof of the Ten P.O. Square Building/10 P.O. Square Building equally suitable for Tenant’s use. In such event, Tenant shall on or before the thirtieth (30th) day after Landlord gives such notice, relocate the Roof Equipment and Landlord shall reimburse Tenant for all reasonable costs and expenses incurred by Tenant in connection with said relocation.

ARTICLE 19

SPECIAL SURRENDER PROVISION FOR BASEMENT PREMISES

19.1 Special Surrender Provision . Subject to the full and complete satisfaction of the Surrender Conditions Precedent (as hereinafter defined), Tenant shall have the option from time to time to surrender all or a portion of the Basement Premises to Landlord and to terminate its obligations with respect to all or a portion of the Basement Premises in accordance with the provisions of this Article 19; provided, however, Tenant shall give not less than ninety (90) days prior written notice (a “Surrender Notice”) thereof to Landlord. The Surrender Notice shall specify the effective date for such surrender of the Basement Premises (or the portion thereof), which date is referred to herein as the “Surrender Date.” For purposes of this Section 19.1 , the “Surrender Conditions Precedent” shall mean the following: (i) Tenant properly gives to Landlord a Surrender Notice, (ii) both on the date the Surrender Notice is given and on the Surrender Date, no Event of Default shall have occurred under this Lease then exists; and (iii) if Tenant elects to surrender a portion but not all of the Basement Premises, then any portion of the Basement Premises which is surrendered must in the reasonable judgement of Landlord be satisfactorily segregated and separated from the other portions of the Basement Premises which are retained by Tenant, and the surrendered portions must be reasonably accessible to and usable by other tenants of the Buildings.

Provided that all of the Surrender Conditions Precedent have been fully and completely satisfied, then the term of this Lease solely with respect to the Basement Premises (or the respective portion thereof) shall end and expire, the Basic Rent shall be adjusted to reflect the

 

-67-


removal of the Basement Premises (or the respective portion thereof) from the Premises, and all of the right, title and interest of the Tenant in and to the Basement Premises (or the respective portion thereof) shall terminate and be extinguished, with the same force and effect as if such Surrender Date was the expiration date of the term of this Lease solely with respect to the Basement Premises (or the respective portion thereof). Any such termination of this Lease with respect to the Basement Premises (or the respective portion thereof) shall be subject to and in accordance with all of the terms and conditions of this Lease, including, without limitation, Sections 12.1 and 12.2 hereof. Notwithstanding any such surrender of the Basement Premises (or the respective portion thereof), the Lease shall remain in full force and effect for and with respect to all of the Premises (excepting only the Basement Premises or the respective portion thereof) in accordance with the terms and conditions thereof. After the surrender thereof, Tenant shall have no further rights or claims, of any kind, with respect to the Basement Premises and/or the respective portion thereof.

ARTICLE 20

RIGHT OF FIRST OFFER TO PURCHASE PROPERTY

20.1 Right of First Offer .

(a) If Landlord should, in Landlord’s sole and exclusive judgment, at any time during the Term of this Lease determine that it would like to “sell” (as hereinafter defined) the entire Property to a third party buyer which is not an Affiliate of Landlord or an Affiliate of any partner or member of Landlord or any of their respective Affiliates, and provided that the conditions precedent set forth in subsection 20.1 (b) are satisfied, then prior to entering into a binding written agreement to sell the Property to such third parties Landlord shall deliver to Tenant a notice (the Offer Notice ). The Offer Notice shall set forth the price at which Landlord intends to offer the Property for sale (the Offering Price ), together with such other terms and conditions (including any deferred payment of the purchase price, earnest money requirements and closing date) that Landlord determines to be material to the sale.

(b) The conditions precedent to Landlord’s obligation to offer to sell the Property to Tenant are as follows: (i) no Event of Default or condition or state of facts which with the passage of time or giving of notice, or both, would constitute an Event of Default then exists, (ii) this Lease is then in full force and effect, and (iii) Boston Private Financial Holdings, Inc. and/or Affiliates of Boston Private Financial Holdings, Inc. is (or are) occupying not less than eighty percent (80%) of the rentable area of the Premises then demised under this Lease.

(c) For the purposes of this Article 20, “sell” or “sale” shall mean an arms-length sale of the fee simple interest of Landlord in the entire Property to a third party unaffiliated purchaser. Without limitation, in no event shall a “sale” include any direct or indirect sale of the Property to an Affiliate (or Affiliates) of Landlord, or any direct or indirect transfer or conveyance of interests in Landlord, or any financing transactions (including the granting of mortgages or other encumbrances, or a sale or transfer pursuant to a “sale/leaseback” financing transaction or other financing transaction).

 

-68-


(d) The rights granted to Tenant in this Article 20 are personal to Boston Private Financial Holdings, Inc., and may not be assigned or transferred to, or exercisable by, any other persons or entities.

20.2 Acceptance of Offer .

(a) Provided that all of the conditions precedent set forth in this Subsection 20.1(b) are fully satisfied by Tenant, Tenant shall have the option, exercisable by Tenant delivering written notice (the “ Purchase Acceptance Notice ”) to Landlord within fourteen (14) calendar days after delivery by Landlord of the Offer Notice, to accept the offer to purchase the entire Property upon all of the terms and conditions set forth in the Offer Notice, including the purchase price and other terms and conditions set forth therein. Time shall be of the essence as to Tenant’s giving of the Purchase Acceptance Notice. If (a) Tenant fails to deliver a Purchase Acceptance Notice within such fourteen (14) day period, or (b) if Tenant timely delivers a Purchase Acceptance Notice as aforesaid but does not timely deliver a deposit as described in Subsection 20.2(b) below, then Tenant shall be deemed to have rejected the option to purchase the Property. In such event, Tenant shall have no further rights or claims with respect to the purchase of the Property, Landlord shall have no further liabilities or obligations to Tenant pursuant to this Article 20, and Landlord may elect to sell the Property to 3 rd parties upon such terms and conditions as Landlord may determine in its sole discretion.

(b) If Tenant timely and validly exercises the Right of First Offer and elects to purchase the Property, concurrent with the delivery of the Purchase Acceptance Notice, as a condition to the effectiveness thereof, Tenant shall deliver to a title insurance company or broker designated by Landlord a deposit in the amount of ten percent (10%) of the Offering Price as a deposit (unless a lesser amount is specified as the deposit in the Offer Notice). The delivery by Tenant of a Purchase Acceptance Notice (together with said deposit) shall be deemed acceptance of Landlord’s offer as contained in the Offer Notice and thereafter Tenant shall be unconditionally obligated to purchase the entire Property at the Offering Price and upon said other terms and conditions as contained in the Offer Notice.

(c) If Tenant timely and validly delivers the Purchase Acceptance Notice and the deposit and elects to purchase the Property, then the purchase by Tenant of the Property shall occur on the date which is fifty-nine (59) calendar days after the date of Tenant’s delivery of the Purchase Acceptance Notice. In the event of Tenant’s default with respect to such purchase, Landlord’s sole remedy shall be to retain the deposit as liquidated damages and not as a penalty, it being understood that Landlord’s actual damages for non-performance by Tenant may be difficult to ascertain. If the sale does not take place for reasons not the fault of Tenant, the deposit shall be promptly refunded to Tenant. Any interest earned on the deposit shall be paid to the party ultimately entitled to receive the deposit.

 

-69-


20.3 Tenant’s Failure to Accept Offer .

(a) If a Purchase Acceptance Notice and deposit are not received by Landlord within such twenty (20) day period, or if in the Purchase Acceptance Notice, Tenant declines to purchase the Property, or if Tenant fails to unconditionally accept the offer on all of the terms and conditions specified in the Offer Notice, then in any such event Tenant shall conclusively be deemed to have waived its rights to purchase the Property, Landlord shall have no further liabilities or obligations to Tenant under this Article 20, and Landlord shall be free to sell the Property to any third party buyer on such terms and conditions as Landlord may determine in its sole discretion.

(b) At any time and from time to time, as reasonably requested by Landlord, upon not less than ten (10) days’ prior notice, Tenant agrees to execute, acknowledge and deliver to Landlord a statement in writing and in recordable form certifying, if such be the case, that Tenant’s right of first offer provided in this Article 20 has lapsed, expired or been waived, or is otherwise not applicable with respect to any particular transaction, it being intended that any such statement delivered pursuant hereto may be relied upon by all others with whom Landlord and its successors from time to time may be dealing.

20.4 Inapplicability . In no event shall the provisions of this Article 20 apply to a sale pursuant to an exercise of a power of sale or a foreclosure by a mortgagee or the acceptance of a deed in lieu of foreclosure by such mortgagee or its nominee or to any subsequent sale by the owner of the Property.

20.5 Time is of Essence . Time is of the essence of this Article 20 .

ARTICLE 21

ATM MACHINE

21.1 As an appurtenance to the Premises, for and with respect to the Term of this Lease, Tenant is hereby granted, subject to this Article 21 and the provisions of this Lease and such other requirements as shall be imposed by Landlord from time to time, the right to install, secure, maintain, replace and operate in the location set forth on Exhibit G annexed hereto (the “ATM Space” ), an automatic teller machine together with all ancillary equipment, mountings, piping, duct work, venting, conduit, wiring and support, as shall be reasonably necessary for the operation thereof, (collectively the “ATM” ). The exact location and dimensions of the ATM shall be subject to Landlord’s approval in all respects. Except as set forth in this Article 21 , there shall be no Basic Rent, Additional Rent or other charges payable to Landlord in connection with the ATM.

21.2 Tenant shall, at its sole cost and expense, diligently operate, service, repair, paint and maintain the ATM, including, without limitation, all electrical wires, guide wires and conduits related thereto.

21.3 No displays or signs, whether temporary or permanent, shall be affixed, installed or attached to the ATM or in the ATM Space without the prior written approval by Landlord in each instance.

 

-70-


21.4 In the performance of any installation, alteration, repair, maintenance, removal and/or any other work with respect to the ATM Space or the ATM, Tenant shall comply with all of the applicable provisions of this Lease and all of the provisions of this Lease shall be applicable to the ATM Space as if the ATM Space was part of the Premises.

21.5 (a) If, at any time during the Term, Landlord, in its judgment, shall determine that it is necessary to move the ATM to another area within the Buildings, then Landlord may give notice thereof to Tenant (which notice shall have annexed thereto a plan on which such other area (the “Substitute ATM Space” ) shall be substantially identified), which Substitute ATM Space shall be acceptable to Tenant in its reasonable discretion. Unless within ten (10) days after receipt of Landlord’s notice (time being of the essence thereof), Tenant notifies Landlord of its objection to the Substitute ATM Space, which notice specifies the reasons for such objection and identifies other acceptable alternative locations, then the proposed Substitute ATM Space shall be considered to be acceptable to Tenant. Within 30 days of receipt of Landlord’s notice (or, if a governmental permit is required to be obtained for installation of the ATM in the Substitute ATM Space, then, within 30 days of the obtaining of such permit (which Tenant shall make prompt application for, with Landlord’s reasonable cooperation), Landlord, at its sole cost shall move the ATM to the Substitute ATM Space (with only a commercially reasonable lapse of service) which shall then become the ATM Space hereunder and the original ATM Space shall be deleted from the coverage of this Lease.

(b) Tenant’s operation or use of the ATM shall not prevent or interfere with the operation or use of any equipment of any present or future tenant or occupant of the Buildings and/or of Landlord. If, at any time, Landlord shall reasonably determine that the ATM causes interference with other operations or equipment, then Landlord may so notify Tenant, and Landlord may require Tenant to replace the ATM with another ATM which would not cause such interference (the “Replacement ATM” ). Tenant, within 30 days of receipt of such notice or, if a government permit is required to install the Replacement ATM, then within 30 days of the obtaining of such permit (which Tenant shall make prompt application for, with Landlord’s cooperation but at no cost to Landlord), shall replace the ATM with the new non-interfering Replacement ATM which shall then be deemed to be the ATM hereunder.

21.6 Landlord has made no warranties or representations as to the condition or suitability of the ATM Space or the Building (or the electricity available to the ATM Space) for the installation, use, maintenance or operation of the ATM, and Tenant agrees to accept same in its “as is” condition and without any work or alterations to be made by Landlord.

21.7 If at any time the ATM ceases operating for more than one hundred twenty (120) consecutive days, then promptly thereafter Tenant shall, at its cost and expense, remove the ATM and perform all repairs required to restore the ATM Space to its previous condition. Thereafter, Tenant shall have no further rights or claims to the ATM Space and Landlord shall have no further liabilities or obligations with respect thereto.

 

-71-


ARTICLE 22

GENERATOR

22.1 As an appurtenant to the Premises, for and with respect to the Term of this Lease, Tenant is hereby granted, subject to this Article 22 , Article 5 of this Lease and all of the other provisions of this Lease and such other requirements as shall be imposed by Landlord from time to time, the right to install, secure, maintain, replace and operate in either (a) the location designated as “A”, or (b) the location designated as “B”, each as set forth on Exhibit H annexed hereto (the “Generator Space” ), an emergency electric generator together with all ancillary equipment, mountings, piping, duct work, venting, conduit, wiring and support, including, without limitation, the emergency electric riser and emergency fuel pumps, as shall be reasonably necessary for the operation thereof, (collectively the “Generator” ). The capacity, size, location and dimensions of the Generator shall be subject to Landlord’s approval, which approval will not be unreasonably withheld. To the extent that the Generator shares facilities (excluding the cooling tower), including, without limitation, fuel systems, supply air systems, generator rooms, feeders, etc., with Landlord’s generator, Tenant shall pay the incremental costs of such facilities in excess of the costs that Landlord would incur but for such sharing and shall reimburse Landlord for all such costs (including design, installation and construction costs) within 30 days after demand.

22.2 Tenant is also granted, subject to the provisions of Article 5 and of this Article 22 and such other requirements as may be imposed by Landlord, the right to install, operate and maintain in shaft or riser space to be reasonably designated by Landlord an electric riser from the Generator Space to the electric closets serving the Premises in order to bring electric power from the Generator to such electric closets and from the Generator Space (i) to the Building’s intake and discharge air shaft/plenums in the basement of the Building, (ii) to a fuel oil fill pipe on the street level of the Building and vent, to bring fuel from the street to the fuel tank, and (iii) to a fuel supply and return and a vent pipe as required to bring fuel from the fuel tank to the Generator.

22.3 Tenant shall, at its sole cost and expense, diligently operate, service, repair, paint and maintain the Generator, including, without limitation, all electrical wires, guide wires and conduits related thereto.

22.4 No signs, whether temporary or permanent, shall be affixed, installed or attached to the Generator or the Generator Space other than those required by applicable laws, regulations, codes and ordinances. All signs required, if any, and the location thereof, shall be first approved in writing by Landlord.

22.5 In the performance of any installation, alteration, repair, maintenance, removal and/or any other work with respect to the Generator Space or the Generator, Tenant shall comply with all of the applicable provisions of this Lease and all of the provisions of this Lease shall be applicable to the Generator Space as if the Generator Space was part of the Premises.

22.6 Any and all taxes, filing fees, charges or license fees imposed upon Landlord by virtue of the existence and/or use of the Generator (including those shown to be specifically

 

-72-


related to any increase in the assessed valuation of the respective Building attributable to the Generator), whether imposed by any local, state and/or federal government or any agency thereof, shall be exclusively borne by Tenant. Landlord agrees to cooperate reasonably with Tenant in any necessary applications for any necessary license or permits provided Landlord incurs no expense or liability in so doing.

22.7 Upon reasonable advance notice to Landlord, Tenant may have access to the Generator Space for the sole purpose of servicing and maintaining the Generator. Landlord shall have the right (in its sole discretion) to have its representative(s) accompany Tenant whenever it services or maintains the Generator. At all other times, Landlord may keep the entrances to the Generator Space locked. Tenant shall not have any tools and/or materials stored in the Space, and Tenant’s employees and independent contractors shall close and lock the entrance door to the Space when leaving the same.

22.8 Throughout the duration of this Lease, Tenant shall inspect the Generator on a regular basis consistent with the prudent and customary inspection and maintenance procedures. The Generator shall not exceed the load-bearing capacity of the Generator Space.

22.9 (a) If, at any time during the Term, Landlord, in its judgment, shall determine that it is necessary to move the Generator to another area of the Property, then Landlord may give notice thereof to Tenant (which notice shall have annexed thereto a plan on which such other area (the “Substitute Generator Space” ) shall be substantially identified). Within 30 days of receipt of Landlord’s notice (or, if a governmental permit is required to be obtained for installation of the Generator in the Substitute Generator Space, then, within 30 days of the obtaining of such permit (which Tenant shall make prompt application for, with Landlord’s reasonable cooperation), Landlord, at its sole cost shall move the Generator to the Substitute Generator Space (with only a commercially reasonable lapse of service) which shall then become the Generator Space hereunder and the original Generator Space shall be deleted from the coverage of this Lease.

(b) Tenant’s operation or use of the Generator shall not prevent or interfere with the operation or use of any equipment of any present or future tenant or occupant of the Buildings or of Landlord. Testing of the Generator shall be performed during non-business hours exclusive of Sundays. If, at any time during the term hereof, Landlord shall reasonably determine that the Generator causes interference with other operations or equipment, then Landlord may so notify Tenant, and Landlord may require Tenant to replace the Generator with another generator which would not cause such interference (the “Replacement Generator” ). Tenant, within 30 days of receipt of such notice or, if a government permit is required to install the Replacement Generator, then within 30 days of the obtaining of such permit (which Tenant shall make prompt application for, with Landlord’s cooperation but at no cost to Landlord), shall replace the Generator with the new non-interfering Replacement Generator which shall then be deemed to be the Generator hereunder.

22.10 Tenant agrees that Landlord has made no warranties or representations as to the condition or suitability of the Generator Space or the Building (or the electricity available to the Generator Space) for the installation, use, maintenance or operation of the Generator, and Tenant agrees to accept same in its “as is” condition and without any work or alterations to be made by Landlord.

 

-73-


ARTICLE 23

EXPANSION RIGHTS

23.1 (a) Subject to the terms and conditions of this Article 23, provided that the Expansion Conditions (as hereinafter defined) have been satisfied, Tenant shall have the option to lease between approximately 8,000 and 12,000 square feet of rentable area (the “ 2007 Expansion Space ”) in the Property, the specific size, location, configuration and commencement date with respect to such 2007 Expansion Space to be determined and designated by Landlord in its discretion.

(b) Tenant may exercise its option to lease the 2007 Expansion Space by giving written notice (a “ 2007 Expansion Exercise Notice ”) to Landlord on or before September 30, 2005. If Tenant timely and properly delivers a 2007 Expansion Exercise Notice to Landlord, then the 2007 Expansion Space shall be leased to Tenant, upon and subject to the terms and conditions set forth herein. If Tenant fails timely and properly to give such 2007 Expansion Exercise Notice, or if the Expansion Conditions have not been fully and completely satisfied, then Tenant shall have no further right to lease the 2007 Expansion Space and shall have no further rights, claims or interests thereto.

(c) Within thirty (30) Business Days after receipt of Tenant’s 2007 Expansion Exercise Notice, Landlord shall give Tenant notice of the specific location, size and configuration of the 2007 Expansion Space and Landlord’s estimate of the commencement date (the “ Estimated 2007 Expansion Date ”) therefor, which Estimated 2007 Expansion Date shall be between January 1, 2007 and December 31, 2007. The commencement date with respect to the 2007 Expansion Space shall be the later to occur of (a) the date that all of the tenants and occupants of the 2007 Expansion Space vacate the 2007 Expansion Space; or (b) the Estimated 2007 Expansion Date designated by Landlord.

23.2 (a) Subject to the terms and conditions of this Article 23, provided that the Expansion Conditions have been satisfied, Tenant shall have the option to lease between approximately 8,000 and 12,000 square feet of rentable area (the “ 2008 Expansion Space ”) in the Property, the specific size, location, configuration and commencement date with respect to such 2008 Expansion Space to be determined and designated by Landlord in its discretion. Without limitation, the exercise by Tenant of the option to lease the 2007 Expansion Space shall not be a condition precedent to the exercise by Tenant of the option to lease the 2008 Expansion Space.

(b) Tenant may exercise its option to lease the 2008 Expansion Space by giving written notice (a “ 2008 Expansion Exercise Notice ”) to Landlord on or before September 30, 2006. If Tenant timely and properly delivers a 2008 Expansion Exercise Notice to Landlord, then the 2008 Expansion Space shall be leased to Tenant, upon and subject to the terms and conditions set forth herein. If Tenant fails timely and properly to give such 2008 Expansion Exercise Notice, or if the Expansion Conditions have not been fully and completely satisfied, then Tenant shall have no further right to lease the 2008 Expansion Space and shall have no further rights, claims or interests thereto.

 

-74-


(c) Within thirty (30) business days after receipt of Tenant’s 2008 Expansion Exercise Notice, Landlord shall give Tenant notice of the specific location, size and configuration of the 2008 Expansion Space and Landlord’s estimate of the commencement date (the “ Estimated 2008 Expansion Date ”) therefor, which Estimated 2008 Expansion Date shall be between January 1, 2008 and December 31, 2008. The commencement date with respect to the 2008 Expansion Space shall be the later to occur of (a) the date that all of the tenants and occupants of the 2008 Expansion Space vacate the 2008 Expansion Space; or (b) the Estimated 2008 Expansion Date designated by Landlord.

23.3 (a) Approximately 10,000 square feet of rentable area located on the 3 rd floor of the 10 P.O. Square Building (the “ 3 rd Floor Expansion Space ”) is currently leased to Leggat McCall Properties LLC, which 3 rd Floor Expansion Space is depicted on Exhibit L-1 attached hereto. The existing lease to Leggat McCall Properties LLC (together with its successors and assigns, “ Leggat McCall ”) with respect to said area currently is scheduled to expire on February 28, 2010 (the “Scheduled Leggat McCall Expiration Date”). Subject to the terms and conditions of this Article 23, provided that the Expansion Conditions have been satisfied, upon the expiration or earlier termination of the existing lease to Leggat McCall Tenant shall have the option to lease the “3 rd Floor Expansion Space. The specific size, location, and configuration with respect to such 3 rd Floor Expansion Space shall be determined and designated by Landlord in its discretion.

(b) Tenant may exercise its option to lease the 3 rd Floor Expansion Space by giving written notice (a “ 3 rd Floor Expansion Space Exercise Notice ”) to Landlord on or before September 30, 2008; provided, however, if the existing lease to Leggat McCall terminates or expires prior to the Scheduled Leggat McCall Expiration Date and as a result the 3 rd Floor Expansion Space becomes (or will become) vacant prior to said date, then Landlord may provide notice (a “ 3 rd Floor Expansion Space Availability Notice ”) thereof to Tenant in which event, notwithstanding the foregoing, Tenant shall have thirty (30) days after receipt of said 3 rd Floor Expansion Space Availability Notice to exercise its option to lease the 3 rd Floor Expansion Space. If Tenant timely and properly delivers a 3 rd Floor Expansion Space Exercise Notice to Landlord, then the 3 rd Floor Expansion Space shall be leased to Tenant, upon and subject to the terms and conditions set forth herein. If Tenant fails timely and properly to give such 3 rd Floor Expansion Space Exercise Notice, or if the Expansion Conditions have not been fully and completely satisfied, then Tenant shall have no further right to lease the 3 rd Floor Expansion Space and shall have no further rights, claims or interests thereto.

(c) Within thirty (30) Business Days after receipt of Tenant’s 3 rd Floor Expansion Exercise Notice or the 3 rd Floor Expansion Space Availability Notice, as applicable, Landlord shall give Tenant notice of the specific location, size and configuration of the 3 rd Floor Expansion Space. If Landlord delivers a 3 rd Floor Expansion Space Availability Notice to Tenant and Tenant exercise its option to lease the 3 rd Floor Expansion Space as a result thereof, then the commencement date with respect to the 3 rd Floor Expansion Space the later to occur of (a) the scheduled commencement date designated by Landlord and set forth in the 3 rd Floor

 

-75-


Expansion Space Availability Notice; or (b) the date that all of the tenants and occupants (including, without limitation, Leggett McCall) of the 3 rd Floor Expansion Space vacate and surrender the 3 rd Floor Expansion Space. If the existing lease to Leggat McCall does not terminate or expire prior to the Scheduled Leggat McCall Expiration Date and Landlord does not deliver a 3 rd Floor Expansion Space Availability Notice to Tenant and Tenant exercises its option to lease the 3 rd Floor Expansion Space by delivering a 3 rd Floor Expansion Space Exercise Notice as aforesaid, then the commencement date with respect to the 3 rd Floor Expansion Space shall be the later to occur of (a) the Scheduled Leggat McCall Expiration Date; or (b) the date that all of the tenants and occupants (including, without limitation, Leggett McCall) of the 3 rd Floor Expansion Space vacate and surrender the 3 rd Floor Expansion Space.

(d) Notwithstanding the foregoing if (a) the existing lease to Leggat McCall terminates or expires prior to December 31, 2005 and prior to December 31, 2005 Landlord delivers a 3 rd Floor Expansion Space Availability Notice to Tenant, but (b) Tenant does not exercise its option to lease the 3 rd Floor Expansion Space as a result thereof, then (i) Tenant shall have no further rights or claims with respect to the 3 rd Floor Expansion Space, and (ii) subject to the terms and conditions of this Article 23, provided that the Expansion Conditions have been satisfied, Tenant shall have the option to lease between 8,000 and 12,000 square feet of rentable area (the “ 2010-2012 Expansion Space ”) in the Property, the specific size, location, configuration and commencement date with respect to such 2010-2012 Expansion Space to be determined and designated by Landlord in its discretion. Without limitation, the exercise by Tenant of the option to lease the 2007 Expansion Space or the 2008 Expansion Space shall not be a condition precedent to the exercise by Tenant of the option to lease the 2010-2012 Expansion Space. Without limitation, in no event shall Tenant have any rights or claims to the 2010-2012 Expansion Space if either (A) the existing lease to Leggat McCall does not terminate or expire prior to December 31, 2005, or (B) the existing lease to Leggat McCall terminates or expires prior to December 31, 2005 and Tenant exercises its option to lease the 3 rd Floor Expansion Space, as aforesaid.

(e) If the conditions set forth in Section 23.3(d) above are satisfied, then Tenant may exercise its option to lease the 2010-2012 Expansion Space by giving written notice (a “ 2010-2012 Expansion Exercise Notice ”) to Landlord on or before September 30, 2008. If Tenant timely and properly delivers a 2010-2012 Expansion Exercise Notice to Landlord, then the 2010-2012 Expansion Space shall be leased to Tenant, upon and subject to the terms and conditions set forth herein. If Tenant fails timely and properly to give such 2010-2012 Expansion Exercise Notice, or if the conditions set forth in Section 23.3(d) above have not been fully and completely satisfied, or if the Expansion Conditions have not been fully and completely satisfied, then Tenant shall have no further right to lease the 2010-2012 Expansion Space and shall have no further rights, claims or interests thereto.

(f) Within thirty (30) business days after receipt of Tenant’s 2010-2012 Expansion Exercise Notice, Landlord shall give Tenant notice of the specific location, size and configuration of the 2010-2012 Expansion Space and Landlord’s estimate of the commencement date (the “ Estimated 2010-2012 Expansion Date ”) therefore, which Estimated Expansion Date shall be between January 1, 2010 and December 31, 2012. The commencement date with respect to the 2010-2012 Expansion Space shall be the later to occur of (a) the date that all of the tenants and occupants of the 2010-2012 Expansion Space vacate the 2010-2012 Expansion Space; or (b) the Estimated 2010-2012 Expansion Date designated by Landlord.

 

-76-


23.4 (a) Subject to the terms and conditions of this Article 23, provided that the Expansion Conditions have been satisfied, Tenant shall have the option to lease approximately 11,000 square feet of rentable area (the “ Ten P.O./3 rd Floor Expansion Space ”) on the 3 rd floor of the Ten P.O. Square Building, which Ten P.O./3 rd Floor Expansion Space is depicted on Exhibit L-2 attached hereto, and the specific commencement date with respect to such Ten P.O./3 rd Floor Expansion Space to be determined and designated by Landlord in its discretion. Without limitation, the exercise by Tenant of the option to lease the 2007 Expansion Space, the 2008 Expansion Space, the 3 rd Floor Expansion Space, and/or the 2010-2012 Expansion Space shall not be a condition precedent to the exercise by Tenant of the option to lease the Ten P.O./3 rd Floor Expansion Space.

(b) Tenant may exercise its option to lease the Ten P.O./3 rd Floor Expansion Space by giving written notice (a “ Ten P.O./3 rd Floor Expansion Exercise Notice ”) to Landlord on or before September 30, 2009. If Tenant timely and properly delivers a Ten P.O./3 rd Floor Expansion Exercise Notice to Landlord, then the Ten P.O./3 rd Floor Expansion Space shall be leased to Tenant, upon and subject to the terms and conditions set forth herein. If Tenant fails timely and properly to give such Ten P.O./3 rd Floor Expansion Exercise Notice, or if the Expansion Conditions have not been fully and completely satisfied, then Tenant shall have no further right to lease the Ten P.O./3 rd Floor Expansion Space and shall have no further rights, claims or interests thereto.

(c) Within thirty (30) business days after receipt of Tenant’s Ten P.O./3 rd Floor Expansion Exercise Notice, Landlord shall give Tenant notice of the Landlord’s estimate of the commencement date (the “ Estimated Ten P.O./3 rd Floor Expansion Date ”) therefor, which Estimated Ten P.O./3 rd Floor Expansion Date shall be between January 1, 2010 and December 31, 2012. The commencement date with respect to the Ten P.O./3 rd Floor Expansion Space shall be the later to occur of (a) the date that all of the tenants and occupants of the Ten P.O./3 rd Floor Expansion Space vacate the Ten P.O./3 rd Floor Expansion Space; or (b) the Estimated Ten P.O./3 rd Floor Expansion Date designated by Landlord.

23.5 The leasing to Tenant of each respective Expansion Space shall be upon and subject to all of the terms and conditions of this Lease, except as follows:

(a) The Basic Rent for the respective Expansion Space shall be the fair market rental value thereof and the rent commencement date for the respective Expansion Space shall be the date which is ninety (90) days after delivery of such Expansion Space to Tenant. Promptly after receipt of Tenant’s Expansion Exercise Notice, Landlord shall provide Tenant with written notice (a “ Expansion Space Rent Notice ”) of its determination of the fair market rental value with respect to the respective Expansion Space. In determining fair market rental value, the following factors, among others, shall be taken into account and given effect: size of the premises, escalation charges then payable under the lease, location of the premises, location of the building, tenant improvement and fit-up of the premises, free rent or “fit-up” periods, other transaction

 

-77-


costs and lease term, and other terms and conditions then being provided for comparable lease transactions in comparable office buildings in the Downtown Boston Financial District. Within not more than fifteen (15) days after receipt of such Expansion Space Rent Notice from Landlord, Tenant may give Landlord written notice (a “ Dispute Notice ”) that Tenant disagrees with Landlord’s determination of such fair market rental value and set forth the determination of Tenant as to the fair market rental value. If Landlord and Tenant are unable to resolve a dispute concerning fair market rental value then said dispute shall be resolved in accordance with the provisions of Section 4.4 of this Lease. If Tenant does not provide a Dispute Notice to Landlord prior to the expiration of said fifteen (15) day period, then Tenant shall be considered to have accepted Landlord’s determination of the fair market rental value with respect to the respective Expansion Space and shall be conclusively bound by Landlord’s determination with respect thereto.

(b) The respective Expansion Space shall be delivered by Landlord and accepted by Tenant “as-is” in its then (i.e. as of the time of delivery of the respective Expansion Space) state of condition, construction, finish and decoration, without any representation or warranty by Landlord or any obligation on the part of Landlord to perform any work or construct any improvements therein or to provide any other types of allowances, contributions or inducement payments with respect to the respective Expansion Space.

(c) Tenant’s respective Proportionate Share shall be recalculated to reflect the addition of the respective Expansion Space to the Premises and for the purposes of determining the Escalation Charges for the respective Expansion Space the Base Year for Operating Expenses and Base Year for Taxes shall be the then-applicable calendar or fiscal year, respectively.

(d) Tenant’s exercise of the above-described expansion option(s) by delivery of the respective Expansion Exercise Notice shall be self-executing and automatic. Without limiting the foregoing, promptly after delivery of the respective Expansion Exercise Notice and the respective Expansion Space Rent Notice the parties shall execute an amendment to this Lease reflecting the addition of the Expansion Space to the Premises. The execution of any such amendment shall not be construed as a waiver of any of the Expansion Conditions or a limitation on the exercise of the rights of the Tenant hereunder.

(e) “ Expansion Conditions ” shall mean the following conditions: Both at the time the Tenant gives Landlord the respective Expansion Exercise Notice and as of the commencement date with respect to the respective Expansion Area: (i) there exists no Default of Tenant under this Lease, (ii) this Lease remains in full force and effect, and (iii) Boston Private Financial Holdings, Inc. and/or Affiliates of Boston Private Financial Holdings, Inc. is (or are) in occupancy of not less than sixty-five percent (65%) of the rentable area of the Premises then demised under this Lease.

(f) Notwithstanding the foregoing provisions, if pursuant to the provisions of this Lease (including, without limitation, Article 17 hereof) any rentable area (or areas) is

 

-78-


added to the Premises between the delivery of an Expansion Exercise Notice and the commencement date with respect to such Expansion Space, then Landlord may elect, by providing notice thereof to Tenant, to reduce the rentable square footage of the respective Expansion Space by the Excess Expansion Amount (as hereinafter defined). The “Excess Expansion Amount” shall mean the amount by which the rentable square footage of the other area (or areas) added to the Premises pursuant to the provisions of this Lease (including, without limitation, Article 17 hereof) exceeds 8,000 rentable square feet, if any.

(g) Notwithstanding any provision contained herein to the contrary, if and when 50,000 rentable square feet of space are added to the Premises (whether pursuant to Article 17 , this Article 23 , or otherwise), then Tenant shall have no further rights or obligations with respect to the 2007 Expansion Space or the 2008 Expansion Space, Sections 23.1 and 23.2 shall become null and void and of no further force or effect, and Tenant shall have no further options or other rights to lease either the 2007 Expansion Space or the 2008 Expansion Space pursuant to this Article 23 . In such event, all of the obligations of Landlord to lease either the 2007 Expansion Space or the 2008 Expansion Space to Tenant shall be considered to have been fully and completely satisfied, and neither Landlord nor Tenant shall have any further rights, liabilities or obligations with respect to either the 2007 Expansion Space or the 2008 Expansion Space under this Article 23 .

(h) Time is of the essence of this Article 23.

 

-79-


IN WITNESS WHEREOF, Landlord and Tenant have caused this Lease to be duly executed by persons hereunto duly authorized, as of the date first set forth above.

 

LANDLORD:
WALTON 10-TEN P.O. INVESTORS, III, LLC, a limited liability company
By:  

 

  Name:
  Title:
TENANT:
BOSTON PRIVATE FINANCIAL HOLDINGS, INC., a Massachusetts corporation
By:  

 

  Name:
  Title:

 

-80-


EXHIBIT A

Location Plans of Premises

 

A-1


EXHIBIT B

Site Plan of Buildings

 

B-1


EXHIBIT C

[Intentionally Deleted]

 

C-1


EXHIBIT D

Operating Expenses

Operating Expenses shall include the following, without limitation:

 

  1. All expenses incurred by Landlord or Landlord’s agents which shall be directly related to employment of personnel at or below the level of general manager, including amounts incurred for wages, salaries and other compensation for services, payroll, social security, unemployment and similar taxes, workmen’s compensation insurance, disability benefits, pensions, hospitalization, retirement plans and group insurance, uniforms and working clothes and the cleaning thereof, and expenses imposed on Landlord or Landlord’s agents pursuant to any collective bargaining agreement for the services of employees of Landlord or Landlord’s agents in connection with the operation, repair, maintenance, cleaning, management and protection of the Property, including, without limitation, day and night supervisors, manager, accountants, bookkeepers, janitors, carpenters, engineers, mechanics, electricians and plumbers and personnel engaged in supervision of any of the persons mentioned above; provided that, if any such employee is also employed on other property of Landlord, such compensation shall be suitably prorated among the Property and such other properties.

 

  2. The cost of services, utilities, materials and supplies furnished or used in the operation, repair, maintenance, cleaning, management and protection of the Property.

 

  3. The cost of replacements for tools and other similar equipment used in the repair, maintenance, cleaning and protection of the Property, provided that, in the case of any such equipment used jointly on other property of Landlord, such costs shall be suitably prorated among the Property and such other properties.

 

  4. Management fees, the cost of equipping and maintaining a management office, accounting and bookkeeping services, legal fees not attributable to leasing or collection activity, and other administrative costs. Landlord, by itself or through an affiliate, shall have the right to directly perform or provide any management services under this Lease. However, if such management services are provided by Landlord or an affiliate of Landlord, in no event shall the management fees for the respective Building (expressed as a percentage of gross receipts for the respective Building) exceed the prevailing market management fees (expressed as a percentage of gross receipts), for comparable third party management companies offering comparable management services in office buildings similar to the respective Building in class, size, age and location.

 

  5. Premiums for insurance against damage or loss to the Property from such hazards as Landlord shall determine, including, but not by way of limitation, insurance covering loss of rent attributable to any such hazards, and public liability insurance.

 

D-1


  6. If, during the Term of this Lease after the Base Year for Operating Expenses, Landlord shall make a capital expenditure which (a) in the good faith reasonable determination of Landlord are performed primarily to reduce operating costs or otherwise improve the efficiency of the Building and/or the Property, or (b) are performed to comply with a law, code, regulation or ordinance enacted, or first interpreted to apply, after the date of this Lease, the total cost of which is not properly includable in Operating Expenses for the Operating Year in which it was made, there shall nevertheless be included in such Operating Expenses for the Operating Year in which it was made and in Operating Expenses for each succeeding Operating Year the annual charge-off of such capital expenditure. Annual charge-off shall be determined by dividing the original capital expenditure plus an interest factor, reasonably determined by Landlord, as being the interest rate then being charged for long-term mortgages by institutional lenders on like properties within the locality in which the Property is located, by the number of years of useful life of the capital expenditure; and the useful life shall be determined reasonably by Landlord in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles and practices in effect at the time of making such expenditure.

 

  7. Costs for electricity, water and sewer use charges, gas and other utilities supplied to the Property and not paid for directly by tenants.

 

  8. Betterment assessments, provided the same are apportioned equally over the longest period permitted by law, and to the extent, if any, not included in Taxes.

 

  9. Amounts paid to independent contractors for services, materials and supplies furnished for the operation, repair, maintenance, cleaning and protection of the Property.

Operating Expenses shall not include the following:

 

  1. Taxes.

 

  2. Payments of principal and interest on mortgages and finance charges and costs relating thereto.

 

  3. Brokerage commissions and fees.

 

  4. Costs of improvements to premises leased to other tenants in the Building.

 

  5. Amounts which, pursuant to the provisions of the respective leases with other tenants, may be specially charged to or otherwise paid by such other tenants of the respective Building (such as electricity, overtime HVAC charges and other costs relating to the premises leased to such tenants).

 

D-2


  6. Costs and expenses that are reimbursed out of insurance, warranty or condemnation proceeds.

 

  7. Any ground or underlying lease rental.

 

  8. Interest, principal, points and fees on debts or amortization on any mortgage or other debt instrument encumbering the Property.

 

  9. Advertising and promotional expenditures, and costs of acquisition and maintenance of signs in or on the Property identifying the owner of the Property.

 

  10. Marketing costs, including leasing commissions, attorneys’ fees (in connection with the negotiation and preparation of letters, deal memos, letters of intent, leases, subleases and/or assignments), space planning costs, and other costs and expenses incurred in connection with lease, sublease and/or assignment negotiations and transactions with present or prospective tenants or other occupants of the Buildings.

 

  11. Management fees paid or charged by Landlord in connection with the management of the Building to the extent such management fee is in excess of 4% of the gross annual income of the respective Building in any Operating Year.

 

  12. Actual or imputed rent for any office space occupied by Building management personnel to the extent the rental rate for such office space exceeds the fair market rental value of such office space.

 

  13. Landlord’s general corporate overhead and general and administrative expenses.

 

  14. Costs incurred to comply with laws, rules, regulations and codes adopted and interpreted to apply to the Property prior to the date of this Lease.

 

  15. Costs of Landlord’s charitable or political contributions.

 

  16. Costs of sculpture, paintings or other objects of art.

 

  17. Costs associated with the operation of the business of the entity which constitutes Landlord (as the same are distinguished from the costs of operation of the Property), including accounting and legal matters, costs of defending any lawsuits with any mortgagee (except as the actions of Tenant may be in issue), costs of selling, syndicating, financing, mortgaging or hypothecating any of Landlord’s interest in the Property, costs incurred in connection with any disputes between Landlord and its employees, between Landlord and Property management, or between Landlord and other tenants or occupants.

 

  18. Increases in insurance premiums which are assessed specifically to any tenant of the Building for which Landlord is entitled to reimbursement from such tenant.

 

D-3


  19. Charges for electricity, water, or other utilities or services which, pursuant to the provisions of the respective leases with other tenants, may be specially charged to such tenants.

 

  20. The cost of correcting defects in the initial design or initial construction of the Building, usual and normal wear and tear excepted.

 

  21. Fees and charges paid to Affiliates of the Landlord for services provided by such Affiliates to the Building, to the extent such fees and charges exceed the then customary fees and charges payable by landlords of comparable buildings for similar services.

 

  22. Except as set forth in item 6 above, costs of capital expenditures.

 

  23. Late fees or charges incurred by Landlord as a result of the failure to pay expenses when due, provided that Tenant timely pays all charges for Operating Expenses when due.

 

  24. Costs of capital improvements required to be made in order to cause the Buildings to comply with laws that, as of the date of this Lease, have been adopted, applied, and interpreted to require such capital improvements with respect to the Buildings.

 

  25. In no event will Landlord be entitled to multiple reimbursement for any individual expenditure on account of Operating Expenses.

 

D-4


EXHIBIT E

Rules and Regulations

The following regulations are generally applicable:

 

  1. The public sidewalks, entrances, passages, courts, elevators, vestibules, stairways, corridors or halls shall not be obstructed or encumbered by Tenant (except as necessary for deliveries) or used for any purpose other than ingress and egress to and from the Premises.

 

  2. No awnings, curtains, blinds, shades, screens or other projections shall be attached to or hung in, or used in connection with, any window of the Premises or any outside wall of the Building. Such awnings, curtains. blinds, shades, screens or other projections must be of a quality, type, design and color, and attached in the manner, approved by Landlord.

 

  3. No show cases or other articles shall be put in front of or affixed to any part of the exterior of the Building, nor, if the Building is occupied by more than one tenant, displayed through interior windows into the atrium of the Building, nor placed in the halls, corridors or vestibules, provided that show cases or articles may be displayed through interior windows into the atrium of the Building (if any) with Landlord’s prior written approval, such approval not to be unreasonably withheld or delayed so long as such display does not adverse affect the aesthetic integrity of the Building.

 

  4. The water and wash closets and other plumbing fixtures shall not be used for any purposes other than those for which they were designed and constructed, and no sweepings, rubbish, rags, acids or like substances shall be deposited therein. All damages resulting from any misuse of the fixtures shall be borne by the Tenant.

 

  5. Tenant shall not use the Premises or any part thereof or permit the Premises or any part thereof to be used as a public employment bureau or for the sale of property of any kind at auction, except in connection with Tenant’s business.

 

  6. Tenant must, upon the termination of its tenancy, return to the Landlord all locks, cylinders and keys to offices and toilet rooms of the Premises.

 

  7. Landlord reserves the right to exclude from the Building after business hours and at all hours on days other than Business Days all persons connected with or calling upon the Tenant who do not present a pass to the Building signed by the Tenant or who are not escorted in the Building by an employee of Tenant. Tenant shall be responsible for all persons for whom it issues any such pass and shall be liable to the Landlord for all wrongful acts of such persons.

 

E-1


  8. The requirements of Tenant will be attended to only upon application at the Building Management Office. Employees of Landlord shall not perform any work or do anything outside of their regular duties, unless under special instructions from the office of the Landlord.

 

  9. There shall not be used in any space in the Building, or in the public halls of the Building, either by Tenant or by jobbers or others, in the delivery or receipt of merchandise, any hand trucks, except those equipped with rubber tires and side guards.

 

  10. No bicycles, vehicles or animals of any kind shall be brought into or kept in or about the Premises.

 

  11. No tenant shall make, or permit to be made, any unseemly or disturbing noises or disturb or interfere with occupants of this or any neighboring building or premises or those having business with them whether by use of any musical instrument, radio, talking machine, unmusical noise, whistling, singing, or in any other way. No tenant shall throw anything out of the doors, windows or skylights or down the passageways.

 

  12. The Premises shall not be used for lodging or sleeping or for any immoral or illegal purpose.

 

  13. No smoking shall be permitted in the Premises or the Building. Smoking shall only be permitted in smoking areas outside of the Building which have been designated by the Landlord.

 

  14. The rules and regulations set forth in Attachment I to this Exhibit, which is by this reference made a part hereof, are applicable to any Alterations being undertaken by or for Tenant in the Premises pursuant to Section 5.2 of the Lease.

 

E-2


Attachment I to Exhibit E

Rules and Regulations for Tenant Alterations

 

A. General

1. All Alterations made by Tenant in, to or about the Premises shall be made in accordance with the requirements of this Exhibit and by contractors or mechanics approved by Landlord.

2. Tenant shall, prior to the commencement of any work, submit for Landlord’s written approval, complete plans for the Alterations, with full details and specifications for all of the Alterations, in compliance with Section D below.

3. Alterations must comply with the Building Code applicable to the Property and the requirements, rules and regulations and any other governmental agencies having jurisdiction.

4. No work shall be permitted to commence before Tenant obtains and furnishes to Landlord copies of all necessary licenses and permits from all governmental authorities having jurisdiction.

5. All demolition, removals or other categories of work that may inconvenience other tenants or disturb Building operations, must be scheduled and performed before or after normal business hours, and Tenant shall provide Landlord with at least 24 hours’ notice prior to proceeding with such work.

6. All inquiries, submissions, approvals and all other matters shall be processed through Landlord’s property manager.

7. All work, if performed by a contractor or subcontractor, shall be subject to reasonable supervision and inspection by Landlord’s representative. Such supervision and inspection shall be at Tenant’s sole expense and Tenant shall pay Landlord’s reasonable charges for such supervision and inspection as Additional Rent within thirty (30) days after receiving Landlord’s invoice therefor.

 

B. Prior to Commencement of Work

1. Tenant shall submit to the Building manager a request to perform the work. The request shall include the following enclosures:

 

  (i) A list of Tenant’s contractors and/or subcontractors for Landlord’s approval.

 

  (ii) Four complete sets of plans and specifications properly stamped by a registered architect or professional engineer.

 

  (iii) A properly executed building permit application form.

 

E-3


  (iv) Four executed copies of the Insurance Requirements Agreement in the form attached to this Exhibit as Attachment II and made a part hereof from Tenant’s contractor and, if requested by Landlord, from the contractor’s subcontractors.

 

  (v) Contractor’s and subcontractor’s insurance certificates, including an indemnity in accordance with the Insurance Requirements Agreement.

2. Landlord will return the following to Tenant:

 

  (i) Two sets of plans approved or a disapproved with specific comments as to the reasons therefor (such approval or comments shall not constitute a waiver of approval of governmental authorities).

 

  (ii) Two fully executed copies of the Insurance Requirements Agreement.

3. Landlord’s approval of the plans, drawings, specifications or other submissions in respect of any Alterations shall create no liability or responsibility on the part of Landlord for their completeness, design sufficiency or compliance with requirements of any applicable laws, rules or regulations of any governmental or quasi-governmental agency, board or authority.

4. Tenant shall obtain a building permit from the Building Department and necessary permits from other governmental agencies. Tenant shall be responsible for keeping current all permits. Tenant shall submit copies of all approved plans and permits to Landlord and shall post the original permit on the Premises prior to the commencement of any work.

 

C. Requirements and Procedures

1. All structural and floor loading requirements shall be subject to the prior approval of Landlord’s structural engineer.

2. All mechanical (HVAC, plumbing and sprinkler) and electrical requirements shall be subject to the approval of Landlord’s mechanical and electrical engineers and all mechanical and electrical work shall be performed by contractors who are engaged by Landlord in constructing, operating or maintaining the Building. When necessary, Landlord will require engineering and shop drawings, which drawings must be approved by Landlord before work is started. Drawings are to be prepared by Tenant and all approvals shall be obtained by Tenant.

3. Elevator service for construction work shall be charged to Tenant at standard Building rates. Prior arrangements for elevator use shall be made with Building manager by Tenant. No material or equipment shall be carried under or on top of elevators. If an operating engineer is required by any union regulations, such engineer shall be paid for by Tenant.

 

E-4


4. If shutdown of risers and mains for electrical, HVAC, sprinkler and plumbing work is required, such work shall be supervised by Landlord’s representative. No work will be performed in Building mechanical equipment rooms without Landlord’s approval and under Landlord’s supervision.

5. Tenant’s contractor shall:

 

  (i) have a superintendent or foreman on the Premises at all times;

 

  (ii) police the job at all times, continually keeping the Premises orderly;

 

  (iii) maintain cleanliness and protection of all areas, including elevators and lobbies.

 

  (iv) protect the front and top of all peripheral HVAC units and thoroughly clean them at the completion of work;

 

  (v) block off supply and return grills, diffusers and ducts to keep dust from entering into the Building air conditioning system; and

 

  (vi) avoid the disturbance of other tenants.

6. If Tenant’s contractor is negligent in any of its responsibilities, Tenant shall be charged for corrective work.

7. All equipment and installations must be equal to the standards generally in effect with respect to the remainder of the Building. Any deviation from such standards will be permitted only if indicated or specified on the plans and specifications and approved by Landlord.

8. A properly executed air balancing report signed by a professional engineer shall be submitted to Landlord upon the completion of all HVAC work.

9. Upon completion of the Alterations, Tenant shall submit to Landlord a permanent certificate of occupancy and final approval by the other governmental agencies having jurisdiction.

10. Tenant shall submit to Landlord a final “as-built” set of drawings showing all items of the Alterations in full detail.

11. Additional and differing provisions in the Lease, if any, will be applicable and will take precedence.

 

E-5


D. Standards for Plans and Specifications .

Whenever Tenant shall be required by the terms of the Lease (including this Exhibit) to submit plans to Landlord in connection with any Alterations, such plans shall include at least the following:

1. Floor plan indicating location of partitions and doors (details required of partition and door types).

2. Location of standard electrical convenience outlets and telephone outlets.

3. Location and details of special electrical outlets; e.g., photocopiers, etc.

4. Reflected ceiling plan showing layout of standard ceiling and lighting fixtures. Partitions to be shown lightly with switches located indicating fixtures to be controlled.

5. Locations and details of special ceiling conditions, lighting fixtures, speakers, etc.

6. Location and specifications of floor covering, paint or paneling with paint colors referenced to standard color system.

7. Finish schedule plan indicating wall covering, paint, or paneling with paint colors referenced to standard color system.

8. Details and specifications of special millwork, glass partitions, rolling doors and grilles, blackboards, shelves, etc.

9. Hardware schedule indicating door number keyed to plan, size, hardware required including butts, latchsets or locksets, closures, stops, and any special items such as thresholds, soundproofing, etc. Keying schedule is required.

10. Verified dimensions of all built-in equipment (file cabinets, lockers, plan files, etc.)

11. Location and weights of storage files.

12. Location of any special soundproofing requirements.

13. Location and details of special floor areas exceeding 50 pounds of live load per square foot.

14. All structural, mechanical, plumbing and electrical drawings, to be prepared by the base building consulting engineers, necessary to complete the Premises in accordance with Tenant’s Plans.

15. All drawings to be uniform size (30” x 46”) and shall incorporate the standard project electrical and plumbing symbols and be at a scale of  1 / 8 ” = 1’ or larger.

 

E-6


16. All drawings shall be stamped by an architect (or, where applicable, an engineer) licensed in the jurisdiction in which the Property is located and without limiting the foregoing, shall be sufficient in all respects for submission to applicable authorization in connection with a building permit application.

 

E-7


Attachment II to Exhibit E

Contractor’s Insurance Requirements

Building:

Landlord:

Tenant:

Premises:

The undersigned contractor or subcontractor (“ Contractor ”) has been hired by the tenant named above (hereinafter called “ Tenant ”) of the Building named above (or by Tenant’s contractor) to perform certain work (“ Work ”) for Tenant in the Premises identified above. Contractor and Tenant have requested the landlord named above (“ Landlord ”) to grant Contractor access to the Building and its facilities in connection with the performance of the Work, and Landlord agrees to grant such access to Contractor upon and subject to the following terms and conditions:

1. Contractor agrees to indemnify and save harmless Landlord and its respective officers, employees and agents and their affiliates, subsidiaries and partners, and each of them, from and with respect to any claims, demands, suits, liabilities, losses and expenses, including reasonable attorneys’ fees, arising out of or in connection with the Work (and/or imposed by law upon any or all of them) because of personal injuries, bodily injury (including death at any time resulting therefrom) and loss of or damage to property, including consequential damages, whether such injuries to person or property are claimed to be due to negligence of the Contractor, Tenant, Landlord or any other party entitled to be indemnified as aforesaid except to the extent specifically prohibited by law (and any such prohibition shall not void this Agreement but shall be applied only to the minimum extent required by law).

2. Contractor shall provide and maintain at its own expense, until completion of the Work, the following insurance:

(a) Workmen’s Compensation and Employers, Liability Insurance covering each and every workman employed in, about or upon the Work, as provided for in each and every statute applicable to Workmen’s Compensation and Employers’ Liability Insurance.

(b) Comprehensive General Liability Insurance including coverages for Protective and Contractual Liability (to specifically include coverage for the indemnification clause of this Agreement) for not less than the following limits:

Personal Injury:

$3,000,000 per person

$10,000,000 per occurrence

Property Damage:

$3,000,000 per occurrence $3,000,000 aggregate

 

E-8


(c) Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance (covering all owned, non-owned and/or hired motor vehicles to be used in connection with the Work) for not less than the following limits:

Bodily Injury:

$1,000,000 per person

$1,000,000 per occurrence

Property Damage:

$1,000,000 per occurrence

Contractor shall furnish a certificate from its insurance carrier or carriers to the Building office before commencing the Work, showing that it has complied with the above requirements regarding insurance and providing that the insurer will give Landlord ten (10) days’ prior written notice of the cancellation of any of the foregoing policies.

3. Contractor shall require all of its subcontractors engaged in the Work to provide the following insurance:

(a) Comprehensive General Liability Insurance including Protective and Contractual Liability coverages with limits of liability at least equal to the limits stated in paragraph 2(b).

(b) Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance (covering all owned, non-owned and/or hired motor vehicles to be used in connection with the Work) with limits of liability at least equal to the limits stated in paragraph 2(c).

Upon the request of Landlord, Contractor shall require all of its subcontractors engaged in the Work to execute an Insurance Requirements agreement in the same form as this Agreement.

Agreed to and executed this day of             , 20    .

 

Contractor:
By:  

 

By:  

 

By:  

 

 

E-9


EXHIBIT I

Cleaning Standards

 

E-10


EXHIBIT J

Schedule of Existing Specialty Alterations

to be Removed on Lease Expiration

Remove any safes (excluding existing vault).

 

E-11


EXHIBIT K

Form of SNDA

 

E-12


First Amendment to Lease

This First Amendment to Lease (this “Amendment”), is made as of the 13th day of April, 2005, by and between WALTON 10-TEN P.O. INVESTORS, III, LLC, a Delaware limited liability company, with an address of 900 North Michigan Avenue, Suite 1900, Chicago, IL 60611 (the “Landlord”) and BOSTON PRIVATE FINANCIAL HOLDINGS, INC., a Massachusetts corporation, with an address of Ten Post Office Square, Boston, Massachusetts 02109 (the “Tenant”).

WITNESSETH :

Reference is hereby made to the following facts:

A. Landlord and Tenant entered into that certain Amended and Restated Lease (as modified and amended hereby, the “Lease”), dated as of June 25, 2004, for certain premises (the “Existing Premises”) located in the buildings commonly known as Ten Post Office Square and 10 Post Office Square in Boston, Massachusetts (as more particularly described in the Lease, the “Buildings”). All capitalized words and phrases not otherwise defined herein shall have the meanings ascribed to them in the Lease.

B. In satisfaction of the provisions of Section 23.4 of the Lease, Tenant has exercised the option to add 8,080 rentable square feet on the 3 rd floor of the Ten P.O. Square Building to the Premises, and in connection therewith, Landlord and Tenant have agreed to modify and amend the Lease, all in the manner hereinafter set forth.

NOW THEREFORE, in consideration of Ten Dollars ($10.00) and other good and valuable consideration, the receipt, sufficiency and delivery of which are hereby acknowledged, the parties agree that the Lease is hereby amended as follows:

1. Demise of First Amendment Additional Premises . Landlord hereby demises and leases to Tenant, and Tenant hereby hires and takes from Landlord, subject to and in accordance with the terms and conditions of the Lease, additional premises consisting of 8,080 square feet of rentable area located on the 3 rd floor of the Ten P.O. Square Building (the “First Amendment Additional Premises”), which First Amendment Additional Premises are depicted on the plan attached to this Amendment as Exhibit M-1 and incorporated herein by this reference, for a term commencing on the First Amendment Additional Premises Delivery Date (as hereinafter defined) and expiring on the Expiration Date, unless earlier terminated in accordance with the provisions of the Lease. The demise and use of the First Amendment Additional Premises shall be upon and subject to all of the terms and conditions of the Lease, except as expressly set forth in this Amendment.


Except as expressly set forth herein, the First Amendment Additional Premises shall be considered to be part of the Premises in all respects. Each reference contained in the Lease to the “Premises” shall be considered to be a reference to the Existing Premises and the First Amendment Additional Premises, collectively.

2. Condition of First Amendment Additional Premises . Notwithstanding anything contained in the Lease to the contrary, the Landlord shall deliver and Tenant shall take the First Amendment Additional Premises free of all tenants and occupants, broom-clean, and in all other respects “as-is”, “where is”, and in the condition in which the First Amendment Additional Premises are in as of the date of this Amendment, without any other obligation on the part of Landlord to prepare or construct the First Amendment Additional Premises for Tenant’s occupancy, or to construct any additional improvements therein or in the Buildings, or to provide any additional contributions or allowances in connection therewith (excepting only the First Amendment Tenant Allowance), and without any representation or warranty (express or implied) on the part of Landlord as to the condition of the First Amendment Additional Premises. Promptly after delivery thereof, Tenant shall, subject to and in accordance with the provisions of the Lease (including, without limitation, Section 5.2 thereof) perform all Alterations required to prepare the First Amendment Additional Premises for occupancy and shall install within the First Amendment Additional Premises all Alterations, fixtures, furnishings and equipment required by Tenant, and all such Alterations shall be considered to be part of the Initial Installations for all purposes under the Lease.

Landlord shall pay to Tenant an amount not to exceed $383,800.00 (the “First Amendment Tenant Allowance”) to be applied toward the costs and expenses incurred by Tenant in performing Alterations in the First Amendment Additional Premises and the costs and expenses relating to the occupancy thereof. The First Amendment Tenant Allowance shall be provided and disbursed in accordance with and subject to the terms and conditions of Section 4.3(a) through (d) of the Lease relating to the disbursement of the Landlord’s Initial Contribution.

3. Delivery of First Amendment Additional Premises . April 15, 2005 is the currently scheduled date for delivery of the First Amendment Additional Premises (the “Scheduled First Amendment Delivery Date”). Landlord shall notify Tenant when the First Amendment Additional Premises have been delivered to it. Notwithstanding the foregoing, no failure or inability to tender possession of any portion of the First Amendment Additional Premises to Tenant on or before the Scheduled First Amendment Delivery Date or any other date for any reason beyond the reasonable control of Landlord shall impose any liability upon Landlord or detract from or otherwise affect any other obligations of Tenant hereunder.

4. Rent for First Amendment Additional Premises . The “First Amendment Rent Commencement Date” shall mean January 1, 2006. From and after the First Amendment Rent Commencement Date and thereafter throughout the Term of the Lease, Tenant shall pay to Landlord, without any set-off, counterclaim, abatement or deduction,

 

-2-


(except as set forth in Section 11.4 of the Lease), of any kind, whatsoever, Basic Rent, Escalation Charges, and Additional Rent with respect to the First Amendment Additional Premises, in accordance with and subject to the terms and provisions of the Lease, as modified and amended hereby.

Without limiting the foregoing, for purposes of determining the Escalation Charges payable by Tenant with respect to the First Amendment Additional Premises, the Base Year for Taxes shall mean the Taxes for Fiscal Year 2006 (i.e. the twelve month period beginning July 1, 2005 and ending June 30, 2006) and the Base Year for Operating Expenses shall mean Calendar Year 2005.

5. Reference Information . Article 1 of the Lease is hereby amended as follows:

(a) by deleting the definitions of “Premises,” “Premises Rentable Area,” and “Landlord’s Contribution,” and replacing said definitions with the following:

Premises : Collectively, the Existing Premises, the Subleased Premises, the Basement Premises, the Gallery Level Premises, the ATM Space, the Additional Premises, and the First Amendment Additional Premises.

Premises Rentable Area : 108,301 rentable square feet, as mutually agreed by Landlord and Tenant, as follows: (a) in the Ten P.O. Square Building, 62,381 rentable square feet, consisting of the following; (i) 1,096 rentable square feet on the Basement Level, (ii) 7,308 rentable square feet on the Gallery Level, (iii) 5,832 rentable square feet on the Banking Hall Level, (iv) 13,829 rentable square feet on the Mezzanine Level, (v) 19,020 rentable square feet on the 2 nd Floor, (vi) 14,213 rentable square feet on the 3 rd Floor, (vii) 3,434 rentable square feet on the 6 th Floor, (viii) 3,434 rentable square feet on the 13 th Floor, and (ix) 2,295 rentable square feet on the 13 th Floor; and (b) in the 10 P.O. Square Building, 37,840 rentable square feet, consisting of the following; (i) 13,867 rentable square feet on the Mezzanine Level, (ii) 12,612 rentable square feet on the 2 nd Floor, and (iii) 11,361 rentable square feet on the 12 th Floor.

Landlord’s Contribution : Collectively, Landlord’s Initial Contribution, Landlord’s Additional Contribution, and Landlord’s First Amendment Contribution.

(b) by inserting the following at the end of the definition of Basic Rent:

For the First Amendment Additional Premises, as follows :

For and with respect to the period of time commencing on January 1, 2006 through and including December 31, 2009 (both dates inclusive), at the rate of $236,340.00 per annum ($19,695.00 per month), calculated at the rate of $29.25 per rentable square foot.

 

-3-


For and with respect to the period of time commencing on January 1, 2010 through and including December 31, 2010 (both dates inclusive), at the rate of $252,500.00 per annum ($21,041.66 per month), calculated at the rate of $31.25 per rentable square foot.

For and with respect to the period of time commencing on January 1, 2011 through and including February 28, 2015 (both dates inclusive), at the rate of $268,660.00 per annum ($22,388.33 per month), calculated at the rate of $33.25 per rentable square foot.

(c) by inserting the following new definitions:

First Amendment Additional Premises : A portion of the Premises located on the 3 rd floor of the Building, as more particularly shown on Exhibit M-1 attached hereto.

First Amendment Rent Commencement Date : January 1, 2006.

Base Year for First Amendment Additional Premises Operating Expenses : Calendar Year 2005.

Base Year for First Amendment Additional Premises Taxes : The Taxes for Fiscal Year 2006 (the twelve month period beginning July 1, 2005 and ending June 30, 2006).

Tenant’s Proportionate First Amendment Additional Premises Share : 3.42% (which is based on the ratio of (a) the Rentable Area of the First Amendment Additional Premises to (b) the Ten P.O. Square Building Rentable Area.

Landlord’s First Amendment Contribution: $383,800.00, an amount calculated as follows: $47.50 multiplied by 8,080 (i.e. the Rentable Area of the First Amendment Additional Premises).

6. Exercise of Expansion Option . The First Amendment Additional Premises have been added to the Premises in full and complete satisfaction of the rights and options granted to Tenant pursuant to Section 23.4 of the Lease. Without limiting the foregoing, all references in the Lease to the exercise of the option to lease the Ten P.O./3 rd Floor Expansion Space shall be deemed to refer to the addition of the First Amendment Additional Premises to the Premises pursuant to this Amendment. Tenant has exercised the expansion option pursuant to the provisions of Section 23.4 of the Lease, and neither Landlord nor Tenant has any further rights, claims, liabilities, duties or obligations, pursuant to Section 23.4 of the Lease. Without limitation, in the first sentence of Section 23.5(g) of the Lease, the figure “50,000” is hereby deleted and replaced with the figure “41,020.”

 

-4-


7. Signage . In accordance with and subject to the terms and conditions of the Lease, including, without limitation, the terms and conditions of Section 2.2(d) Tenant may construct and erect, at its sole cost and expense, a sign identifying Tenant as an occupant of the Building on the exterior of the Ten P.O. Square Building. In accordance with and subject to the terms and conditions of the Lease, Landlord has approved the plans, specifications, size, and location for said sign which are depicted on the rendition attached to this Amendment as Exhibit N and incorporated herein by this reference. In all respects, the installation, repair, maintenance and replacement of said sign shall be in accordance with and subject to the terms and conditions of Section 2.2(d).

In accordance with the provisions of the Lease, including, without limitation, the provisions of Section 2.2(e), Tenant reserves the right to install a canopy or awning at the existing Milk Street entrance to the Ten P.O. Square Building, which canopy or awning may be in a color and have a design selected by Tenant in its discretion; provided, however, notwithstanding the provisions of Section 2.2(e) said canopy or awning shall not include the name or identification of the Tenant. In all respects, the installation, maintenance, repair and removal of said canopy or awning shall be in accordance with and subject to the terms and conditions of Section 2.2(e).

Tenant hereby acknowledges and agrees that it will not install any signage on the Milk Street side of the Ten P.O. Square Building identifying Tenant as an occupant of the Building and that any such signs which have previously been installed by Tenant shall be removed forthwith.

8. Brokerage . Tenant warrants and represents to Landlord, and Landlord warrants and represents to Tenant, that it has dealt with no broker or agent in connection with this Amendment, other than CB Richard Ellis/Whittier Partners and Trammell Crow Company (the “Brokers”). Each of Tenant and Landlord shall indemnify and hold harmless the other from and against any and all loss, cost and expense (including attorneys’ fees) for any breaches of the foregoing representation and warranty, including, without limitation, involving any claims for a brokerage commission, finder’s fee or similar compensation made by any person other than the Brokers, arising out of or in connection with this Amendment and/or the transactions contemplated hereby. Landlord shall be responsible for payment of fees payable to the Brokers arising out of and in connection with this Amendment and the transactions contemplated hereby, pursuant to a separate agreement therewith, and Tenant shall have no obligation with respect thereto. The provisions of this section shall survive the expiration or termination of the Lease and/or this Amendment.

9. Exhibits . The Lease contained a scrivener’s error whereby Exhibits L-1 and L-2 were transposed inadvertently. Landlord and Tenant hereby agree that the plan attached to the Lease and labelled “Exhibit L-1” shall mean and refer to “Exhibit L-2” and the plan attached to the Lease and labelled “Exhibit L-2” shall mean and refer to “Exhibit L-1”.

 

-5-


10. Miscellaneous . Tenant hereby represents and warrants to Landlord, as of the date of this Amendment, as follows: (i) the execution and delivery of this Amendment by Tenant has been duly authorized by all requisite corporate action; (ii) neither the Lease nor the interest of the Tenant therein has been assigned, or, encumbered; (iii) to the best knowledge of the Tenant, there are no defenses or counterclaims to the enforcement of the Lease or the liabilities and obligations of the Tenant thereunder; (iv) Tenant is not entitled to any offset, abatement or reduction of rent under the Lease, except as expressly and specifically set forth in the Lease; (v) to the best knowledge of Tenant, neither Landlord or Tenant is in breach or default of any its respective obligations under the Lease; (vi) Landlord has performed all work and constructed all improvements required pursuant to the Lease; and (vii) Landlord has made no representations or warranties, except as expressly and specifically set forth in this Amendment and in the Lease. The submission of drafts of this Amendment for examination and negotiation does not constitute an offer to lease the First Amendment Additional Premises, or a reservation of or option for, the First Amendment Additional Premises, and this Amendment shall not be binding upon Landlord or Tenant unless and until Landlord shall have executed and delivered a fully executed copy of this Amendment to Tenant. Except as expressly and specifically set forth herein, the Lease is hereby ratified and confirmed, and all of the terms, covenants, agreements and provisions of the Lease shall remain unaltered and unmodified and in full force and effect throughout the balance of the term of the Lease, as amended hereby. Except as expressly set forth herein, all of the covenants, representations and warranties made by the Tenant contained in the Lease are hereby remade, reaffirmed and ratified as of the date hereof.

EXECUTED as an instrument under seal as of the date and year first above-written.

 

LANDLORD:

WALTON 10-TEN P.O. INVESTORS, III, LLC, a limited liability company

By:  

 

  Name:
  Title:

 

-6-


TENANT:

BOSTON PRIVATE FINANCIAL HOLDINGS, INC., a Massachusetts corporation

By:  

 

  Name:
  Title:

 

-7-


Exhibit M-1

Floor Plan for First Amendment Additional Premises


Second Amendment to Lease

This Second Amendment to Lease (this “Amendment”), is made as of the 6 th day of July, 2005, by and between WALTON 10-TEN P.O. INVESTORS, III, LLC, a Delaware limited liability company, with an address of 900 North Michigan Avenue, Suite 1900, Chicago, IL 60611 (the “Landlord”) and BOSTON PRIVATE FINANCIAL HOLDINGS, INC., a Massachusetts corporation, with an address of Ten Post Office Square, Boston, Massachusetts 02109 (the “Tenant”).

WITNESSETH :

Reference is hereby made to the following facts:

A. Landlord and Tenant entered into that certain Amended and Restated Lease (as hereto modified and amended and as modified and amended hereby, the “Lease”), dated as of June 25, 2004, as amended by that certain First Amendment to Lease (the “First Amendment”), dated as of April 13, 2005, for certain premises located in the buildings commonly known as Ten Post Office Square and 10 Post Office Square in Boston, Massachusetts (as more particularly described in the Lease, the “Buildings”). All capitalized words and phrases not otherwise defined herein shall have the meanings ascribed to them in the First Amendment.

B. As more particularly set forth in the First Amendment, Landlord has leased the First Amendment Additional Premises to Tenant and the Scheduled First Amendment Delivery Date is April 15, 2005. Tenant has requested and Landlord has agreed to amend the Lease to provide that notwithstanding the date on which First Amendment Additional Premises Delivery Date occurs, January 1, 2006 shall be the commencement date of the Term of the Lease with respect to the First Amendment Additional Premises.

C. Landlord and Tenant have agreed to modify and amend the Lease, all in the manner hereinafter set forth.

NOW THEREFORE, in consideration of Ten Dollars ($10.00) and other good and valuable consideration, the receipt, sufficiency and delivery of which are hereby acknowledged, the parties agree that the Lease is hereby amended as follows:

1. Term of Lease with Respect to First Amendment Additional Premises . Section 1 of the First Amendment is hereby amended by replacing the phrase “for a term commencing on the First Amendment Additional Premises Delivery Date (as hereinafter defined)” with the phrase “for a term commencing on January 1, 2006 (the “First Amendment Commencement Date”).”


2. Entry to First Amendment Additional Premises . After the occurrence of the First Amendment Additional Premises Delivery Date and prior to the First Amendment Commencement Date, Landlord will permit Tenant to enter the First Amendment Additional Premises for the purpose of planning and constructing the Initial Installations within the First Amendment Additional Premises and for occupancy thereof upon completion. Any such early entry shall be at Tenant’s sole risk and expense, and Landlord shall have no liabilities or obligations to Tenant in connection therewith, including, without limitation, any liability for damage or injury to persons or property in connection therewith, excepting only to the extent such damage or injury is caused by the gross negligence or willful misconduct of the Landlord. Upon such entry, Tenant shall be bound by and shall comply with all of the terms and conditions of the Lease, including, without limitation, the provisions of Article 5 and 10 thereof; provided, however, the obligation to pay the Basic Rent and Escalation Charges shall not commence until the First Amendment Rent Commencement Date.

3. Miscellaneous . Tenant hereby represents and warrants to Landlord, as of the date of this Amendment, as follows: (i) the execution and delivery of this Amendment by Tenant has been duly authorized by all requisite corporate action; (ii) neither the Lease nor the interest of the Tenant therein has been assigned, or, encumbered; (iii) to the best knowledge of the Tenant, there are no defenses or counterclaims to the enforcement of the Lease or the liabilities and obligations of the Tenant thereunder; (iv) Tenant is not entitled to any offset, abatement or reduction of rent under the Lease, except as expressly and specifically set forth in the Lease; (v) to the best knowledge of Tenant, neither Landlord or Tenant is in breach or default of any its respective obligations under the Lease; (vi) Landlord has performed all work and constructed all improvements required pursuant to the Lease; and (vii) Landlord has made no representations or warranties, except as expressly and specifically set forth in this Amendment and in the Lease. This Amendment shall not be binding upon Landlord or Tenant unless and until Landlord shall have executed and delivered a fully executed copy of this Amendment to Tenant. Except as expressly and specifically set forth herein, the Lease is hereby ratified and confirmed, and all of the terms, covenants, agreements and provisions of the Lease shall remain unaltered and unmodified and in full force and effect throughout the balance of the term of the Lease, as amended hereby. Except as expressly set forth herein, all of the covenants, representations and warranties made by the Tenant contained in the Lease are hereby remade, reaffirmed and ratified as of the date hereof.

 

-2-


EXECUTED as an instrument under seal as of the date and year first above-written.

 

LANDLORD:

WALTON 10-TEN P.O. INVESTORS, III, LLC, a limited liability company

By:  

 

  Name:
  Title:

TENANT:

BOSTON PRIVATE FINANCIAL HOLDINGS, INC., a Massachusetts corporation

By:  

 

  Name:
  Title:

 

-3-


Third Amendment to Lease

This Third Amendment to Lease (this “ Third Amendment ”), is made as of the      day of October, 2006, by and between BROADWAY 10-TEN PO FEE, LLC, a Delaware limited liability company, with an address c/o Broadway Real Estate Partners, LLC, 375 Park Avenue, Suite 2107, New York, New York 10152 (the “ Landlord ”) and BOSTON PRIVATE FINANCIAL HOLDINGS, INC., a Massachusetts corporation, with an address of Ten Post Office Square, Boston, Massachusetts 02109 (the “ Tenant ”).

WITNESSETH:

Reference is hereby made to the following facts:

A. Landlord (as the direct or indirect assignee of Walton 10-Ten P.O. Investors, III, LLC) and Tenant are parties to that certain Amended and Restated Lease dated as of June 25, 2004 (the “ Original Lease ”), as amended by that certain First Amendment to Lease dated as of April 13, 2005 (the “ First Amendment ”) and that certain Second Amendment to Lease dated as of July 6, 2005 (the “ Second Amendment ”) (the Original Lease, as modified and amended by the First Amendment, the Second Amendment, and this Third Amendment is referred to herein as the “ Lease ”) for certain premises located in the buildings commonly known as Ten Post Office Square and 10 Post Office Square in Boston, Massachusetts (as more particularly described in the Lease, the “ Buildings ”). All capitalized words and phrases not otherwise defined herein shall have the meanings ascribed to them in the Lease.

B. Pursuant to Article 17 of the Lease, Landlord has offered to lease to Tenant, and Tenant has agreed to Lease from Landlord, (i) approximately three thousand four hundred thirty-four (3,434) rentable square feet on the tenth (10 th ) floor of the Ten P.O. Square Building, and (ii) approximately five thousand five hundred twenty-four (5,524) rentable square feet on the thirteenth (13 th ) floor of the Ten P.O. Square Building.

C. In connection with the Tenant’s exercise of its ROFO Option to lease the above described space, Landlord and Tenant have agreed to modify and amend the Lease as hereinafter provided to confirm the terms upon which such space shall be leased.

NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of Ten Dollars ($10.00) and other good and valuable consideration, the receipt, sufficiency and delivery of which are hereby acknowledged, the parties agree that the Lease is hereby amended as follows:

1. Reference Information . Article 1, Section 1.1 of the Lease is hereby amended as follows:

(a) by deleting the definitions of “Landlord,” Landlord’s Address,” Tenant’s Address,” “Premises,” “Premises Rentable Area,” and “Landlord’s Contribution,” and replacing said definitions with the following:

Landlord : Broadway 10-Ten PO Fee LLC


Landlord’s Address :   

Broadway 10-Ten PO Fee LLC

c/o Broadway Real Estate Partners, LLC

375 Park Avenue, Suite 2107

New York, New York 10152

Attention: Jason P. Semmel

Telephone No. (212) 810-4007

Fax No. (212) 658-93791

 

Tenant’s Address :   

Boston Private Financial Holdings, Inc.

Ten Post Office Square

Boston, Massachusetts 02109

   Attention:   

Joan Thayer

Corporate Real Estate

Premises : Collectively, the Existing Premises, the Subleased Premises, the Basement Premises, the Gallery Level Premises, the ATM Space, the Additional Premises, the First Amendment Additional Premises, and the Third Amendment Additional Premises, provided that (a) the First Amendment Additional Premises are included in the “Premises” only for that portion of the Term from and after the First Amendment Commencement Date, (b) the Third Amendment 10 th Floor Additional Premises are included in the “Premises” only for that portion of the Term from and after the Third Amendment 10 th Floor Additional Premises Delivery Date, and (c) the Third Amendment 13 th Floor Additional Premises are included in the “Premises” only for that portion of the Term from and after the Third Amendment 13 th Floor Additional Premises Delivery Date.

Premises Rentable Area :

For the portion of the Term prior to the First Amendment Commencement Date: one hundred thousand two hundred twenty-one (100,221) rentable square feet as mutually agreed by Landlord and Tenant, as follows: (a) in the Ten P.O. Square Building, sixty-two thousand three hundred eighty-one (62,381) rentable square feet, consisting of the following: (i) one thousand ninety-six (1,096) rentable square feet on the Basement Level, (ii) seven thousand three hundred eight (7,308) rentable square feet on the Gallery Level, (iii) five thousand eight hundred thirty-two (5,832) rentable square feet on the Building Hall Level, (iv) thirteen thousand eight hundred twenty-nine (13,829) rentable square feet on the Mezzanine Level, (v) nineteen thousand twenty (19,020) rentable square feet on the 2 nd Floor, (vi) six thousand one hundred thirty-three (6,133) rentable square feet on the 3 rd Floor, (vii) three thousand four hundred thirty-four (3,434) rentable square feet on the 6 th Floor, (viii) three thousand four hundred thirty-four (3,434) rentable square feet on the 13 th Floor, (ix) two thousand two hundred ninety-five

 

2


(2,295) rentable square feet on the 13 th Floor; and (b) in the 10 P.O. Square Building, thirty-seven thousand eight hundred forty (37,840) rentable square feet, consisting of the following: (i) thirteen thousand eight hundred sixty-seven (13,867) rentable square feet on the Mezzanine Level, (ii) twelve thousand six hundred twelve (12,612) rentable square feet on the 2 nd Floor, and (iii) eleven thousand three hundred sixty-one (11,361) rentable square feet on the 12 th Floor.

For the portion of the Term from the First Amendment Commencement Date through the earlier of the date immediately prior to the Third Amendment 10 th Floor Additional Premises Delivery Date or the date immediately prior to the Third Amendment 13 th Floor Additional Premises Delivery Date: one hundred eight thousand three hundred one (108,301) rentable square feet as mutually agreed by Landlord and Tenant, as follows: (a) in the Ten P.O. Square Building, seventy thousand four hundred sixty-one (70,461) rentable square feet, consisting of the following: (i) one thousand ninety-six (1,096) rentable square feet on the Basement Level, (ii) seven thousand three hundred eight (7,308) rentable square feet on the Gallery Level, (iii) five thousand eight hundred thirty-two (5,832) rentable square feet on the Building Hall Level, (iv) thirteen thousand eight hundred twenty-nine (13,829) rentable square feet on the Mezzanine Level, (v) nineteen thousand twenty (19,020) rentable square feet on the 2 nd Floor, (vi) fourteen thousand two hundred thirteen (14,213) rentable square feet on the 3 rd Floor, (vii) three thousand four hundred thirty-four (3,434) rentable square feet on the 6 th Floor, (viii) three thousand four hundred thirty-four (3,434) rentable square feet on the 13 th Floor, (ix) two thousand two hundred ninety-five (2,295) rentable square feet on the 13 th Floor; and (b) in the 10 P.O. Square Building, thirty-seven thousand eight hundred forty (37,840) rentable square feet, consisting of the following: (i) thirteen thousand eight hundred sixty-seven (13,867) rentable square feet on the Mezzanine Level, (ii) twelve thousand six hundred twelve (12,612) rentable square feet on the 2 nd Floor, and (iii) eleven thousand three hundred sixty-one (11,361) rentable square feet on the 12 th Floor.

From and after the Third Amendment 10 th Floor Additional Premises Delivery Date, the Premises Rentable Area recited above shall be increased by three thousand four hundred thirty-four (3,434) rentable square feet consisting of the Third Amendment 10 th Floor Additional Premises, and from and after the Third Amendment 13 th Floor Additional Premises Delivery Date, the Premises Rentable Area recited above shall be increased by five thousand five hundred twenty-four (5,524) rentable square feet consisting of the Third Amendment 13 th Floor Additional Premises.

For the portion of the Term from and after the later of the Third Amendment 10 th Floor Additional Premises Delivery Date or the Third Amendment 13 th Floor Additional Premises Delivery Date: one hundred seventeen thousand two hundred fifty-nine (117,259) rentable square feet as mutually agreed by Landlord and Tenant, as follows: (a) in the Ten P.O. Square Building, seventy-nine thousand four hundred nine (79,409) rentable square feet, consisting of the following: (i) one thousand ninety-six (1,096) rentable square

 

3


feet on the Basement Level, (ii) seven thousand three hundred eight (7,308) rentable square feet on the Gallery Level, (iii) five thousand eight hundred thirty-two (5,832) rentable square feet on the Building Hall Level, (iv) thirteen thousand eight hundred twenty-nine (13,829) rentable square feet on the Mezzanine Level, (v) nineteen thousand twenty (19,020) rentable square feet on the 2 nd Floor, (vi) fourteen thousand two hundred thirteen (14,213) rentable square feet on the 3 rd Floor, (vii) three thousand four hundred thirty-four (3,434) rentable square feet on the 6 th Floor, (viii) three thousand four hundred thirty-four (3,434) rentable square feet on the 10 th Floor, (ix) three thousand four hundred thirty-four (3,434) rentable square feet on the 13 th Floor, (x) two thousand two hundred ninety-five (2,295) rentable square feet on the 13 th Floor, and (xi) five thousand five hundred twenty-four (5,524) rentable square feet on the 13 th Floor; and (b) in the 10 P.O. Square Building, thirty-seven thousand eight hundred forty (37,840) rentable square feet, consisting of the following: (i) thirteen thousand eight hundred sixty-seven (13,867) rentable square feet on the Mezzanine Level, (ii) twelve thousand six hundred twelve (12,612) rentable square feet on the 2 nd Floor, and (iii) eleven thousand three hundred sixty-one (11,361) rentable square feet on the 12 th Floor.

Landlord’s Contribution : Collectively, Landlord’s Initial Contribution, Landlord’s Additional Contribution, Landlord’s First Amendment Contribution, Landlord’s Third Amendment 10 th Floor Contribution, and Landlord’s Third Amendment 13 th Floor Contribution.

(b) by inserting at the end of the definition of Basic Rent:

For the Third Amendment 10 th Floor Additional Premises, as follows :

For and with respect to the period of time commencing on the Third Amendment 10 th Floor Additional Premises Rent Commencement Date through and including February 28, 2011 (both dates inclusive), at the rate of One Hundred Eleven Thousand Six Hundred Five and 00/100 Dollars ($111,605.00) per annum (Nine Thousand Three Hundred and 42/100 Dollars ($9,300.42) per month), calculated at the rate of Thirty Two and 50/100 Dollars ($32.50) per rentable square foot.

For and with respect to the period of time commencing on March 1, 2011 through and including February 28, 2015 (both dates inclusive), at the rate of One Hundred Twenty-Two Thousand Seven Hundred Sixty-Five and 50/100 Dollars ($122,765.50) per annum (Ten Thousand Two Hundred Thirty and 46/100 Dollars ($10,230.46) per month), calculated at the rate of Thirty-Five and 75/100 Dollars ($35.75) per rentable square foot.

For the Third Amendment 13 th Floor Additional Premises, as follows :

For and with respect to the period of time commencing on the Third Amendment 13 th Floor Additional Premises Rent Commencement Date through and including February 28, 2011 (both dates inclusive), at the rate of One

 

4


Hundred Seventy-Nine Thousand Five Hundred Thirty and 00/100 Dollars ($179,530.00) per annum (Fourteen Thousand Nine Hundred Sixty and 83/100 Dollars ($14,960.83) per month), calculated at the rate of Thirty Two and 50/100 Dollars ($32.50) per rentable square foot.

For and with respect to the period of time commencing on March 1, 2011 through and including February 28, 2015 (both dates inclusive), at the rate of One Hundred Ninety-Seven Thousand Four Hundred Eighty-Three and 00/100 Dollars ($197,483.00) per annum (Sixteen Thousand Four Hundred Fifty-Six and 92/100 Dollars ($16,456.92) per month), calculated at the rate of Thirty-Five and 75/100 Dollars ($35.75) per rentable square foot.

(c) By inserting the following new definitions:

Third Amendment Additional Premises : The Third Amendment 10 th Floor Additional Premises and the Third Amendment 13 th Floor Additional Premises.

Third Amendment 10 th Floor Additional Premises : A portion of the Premises located on the 10 th floor of the Ten P.O. Square Building, as more particularly shown on Exhibit O-1 attached hereto and agreed by Landlord and Tenant for all purposes of this Lease to contain three thousand four hundred thirty-four (3,434) rentable square feet.

Third Amendment 13 th Floor Additional Premises : A portion of the Premises located on the 13 th floor of the Ten P.O. Square Building, as more particularly shown on Exhibit O-2 attached hereto and agreed by Landlord and Tenant for all purposes of this Lease to contain five thousand five hundred twenty-four (5,524) rentable square feet.

Third Amendment 10 th Floor Additional Premises Delivery Date : The date of delivery of the Third Amendment 10 th Floor Additional Premises to Tenant, but in no event prior to November 1, 2006.

Third Amendment 13 th Floor Additional Premises Delivery Date : The date of delivery of the Third Amendment 13 th Floor Additional Premises to Tenant, but in no event prior to June 1, 2007.

Third Amendment 10 th Floor Additional Premises Rent Commencement Date : The date which is ninety (90) days after the Third Amendment 10 th Floor Additional Premises Delivery Date.

Third Amendment 13 th Floor Additional Premises Rent Commencement Date : The date which is ninety (90) days after the Third Amendment 13 th Floor Additional Premises Delivery Date.

Base Year for Third Amendment Additional Premises Operating Expenses : Calendar Year 2007.

 

5


Base Year for Third Amendment Additional Premises Taxes : The Taxes for Fiscal Year 2007 (the twelve month period beginning July 1, 2006 and ending June 30, 2007).

Tenant’s Proportionate Third Amendment 10 th Floor Additional Premises Share : one and forty-five one-hundredths percent (1.45%) (which is based on the ratio of (a) the rentable area of the Third Amendment 10 th Floor Additional Premises to (b) the Ten P.O. Square Building Rentable Area).

Tenant’s Proportionate Third Amendment 13 th Floor Additional Premises Share : two and thirty-four one-hundredths percent (2.34%) (which is based on the ratio of (a) the rentable area of the Third Amendment 13 th Floor Additional Premises to (b) the Ten P.O. Square Building Rentable Area).

Landlord’s Third Amendment 10 th Floor Contribution : One Hundred Forty-Five Thousand Nine Hundred Forty-Five and 00/100 Dollars ($145,945.00), an amount calculated as follows: Forty-Two and 50/100 Dollars ($42.50) multiplied by three thousand four hundred thirty-four (3,434) (i.e. the aggregate rentable area of the Third Amendment 10 th Floor Additional Premises).

Landlord’s Third Amendment 13 th Floor Contribution : Two Hundred Thirty-Four Thousand Seven Hundred Seventy and 00/100 Dollars ($234,770.00), an amount calculated as follows: Forty-two and 50/100 Dollars ($42.50) multiplied by five thousand five hundred twenty-four (5,524) (i.e. the aggregate rentable area of the Third Amendment 13 th Floor Additional Premises).

2. Demise of Third Amendment Additional Premises . Landlord hereby demises and leases to Tenant and Tenant hereby hires and takes from Landlord, subject to and in accordance with the terms and conditions of the Lease, (a) the Third Amendment 10 th Floor Additional Premises for a term commencing on the Third Amendment 10 th Floor Additional Premises Delivery Date and expiring on the Expiration Date, unless earlier terminated in accordance with the provisions of the Lease, and (b) the Third Amendment 13 th Floor Additional Premises for a term commencing on the Third Amendment 13 th Floor Additional Premises Delivery Date and expiring on the Expiration Date, unless earlier terminated in accordance with the provisions of the Lease. The demise and use of the Third Amendment Additional Premises shall be upon and subject to all of the terms and conditions of the Lease, except as expressly set forth in this Third Amendment.

Except as expressly set forth herein, for that portion of the Term from and after the Third Amendment 10 th Floor Additional Premises Delivery Date, (a) the Third Amendment 10 th Floor Additional Premises shall be considered to be part of the Premises in all respects, and (b) each reference contained in the Lease to the “Premises” shall be considered to be a collective reference to the Premises as defined in the Original Lease (the “ Original Premises ”), the First Amendment Additional Premises, the Third Amendment 10 th Floor Additional Premises, and if the Third Amendment 13 th Floor Additional Premises Delivery Date has occurred, the Third Amendment 13 th Floor Additional Premises. Except as expressly set forth herein, for that portion of the Term from and after the Third Amendment 13 th Floor Additional Premises Delivery Date,

 

6


(a) the Third Amendment 13 th Floor Additional Premises shall be considered to be part of the Premises in all respects, and (b) each reference contained in the Lease to the “Premises” shall be considered to be a collective reference to the Original Premises, the First Amendment Additional Premises, the Third Amendment 13 th Floor Additional Premises, and if the Third Amendment 10 th Floor Additional Premises Delivery Date has occurred, the Third Amendment 10 th Floor Additional Premises.

3. Condition of Third Amendment Additional Premises . Notwithstanding anything contained in the Lease to the contrary, the Landlord shall deliver and Tenant shall take the Third Amendment Additional Premises free of all tenants and occupants, broom-clean, and in all other respects “ as-is ”, “ where is ”, and in the condition in which the Third Amendment Additional Premises are in as of the date of this Third Amendment, without any other obligation on the part of Landlord to prepare or construct the Third Amendment Additional Premises for Tenant’s occupancy, or to construct any additional improvements therein or in the Buildings, or to provide any additional contributions or allowances in connection therewith (excepting only the Landlord’s Third Amendment 10 th Floor Contribution and Landlord’s Third Amendment 13 th Floor Contribution), and without any representation or warranty (express or implied) on the part of Landlord as to the condition of the Third Amendment Additional Premises. Promptly after delivery thereof, Tenant shall, subject to and in accordance with the provisions of the Lease (including, without limitation, Section 5.2 thereof) perform all Alterations required to prepare the Third Amendment Additional Premises for occupancy and shall install within the Third Amendment Additional Premises all Alterations, fixtures, furnishings and equipment required by Tenant, and all such Alterations shall be considered to be part of the Initial Installations for all purposes under the Lease. Notwithstanding the foregoing, Landlord shall approve the installation of a key card access system for the Third Amendment Additional Premises, provided that such key card access system is the same as that in place for the Premises as of the date of this Third Amendment. The installation of such key card access system for the Third Amendment Additional Premises shall be at the sole cost and expense of the Tenant.

Landlord shall pay to Tenant an amount not to exceed the Landlord’s Third Amendment 10 th Floor Contribution to be applied toward the costs and expenses incurred by Tenant in performing Alterations in the Third Amendment 10 th Floor Additional Premises and other costs and expenses relating to the occupancy thereof. The Landlord’s Third Amendment 10 th Floor Contribution shall be provided and disbursed in accordance with and subject to the terms and conditions of Section 4.3(a) through (d) of the Lease as were applicable to the disbursement of the Landlord’s Initial Contribution, except that Landlord’s Third Amendment 10 th Floor Contribution shall be available to Tenant only through the date which is six (6) months after the Third Amendment 10 th Floor Additional Premises Delivery Date, and if the conditions for funding the Landlord’s Third Amendment 10 th Floor Contribution have not been satisfied by such date, then one-sixth (  1 / 6 ) of any remaining balance of the Landlord’s Third Amendment 10 th Floor Contribution shall be applied against Basic Rent due on account of the Third Amendment 10 th Floor Additional Premises for each of the next six (6) months until fully applied.

Landlord shall pay to Tenant an amount not to exceed the Landlord’s Third Amendment 13 th Floor Contribution to be applied toward the costs and expenses incurred by Tenant in performing Alterations in the Third Amendment 13 th Floor Additional Premises and other costs

 

7


and expenses relating to the occupancy thereof. The Landlord’s Third Amendment 13 th Floor Contribution shall be provided and disbursed in accordance with and subject to the terms and conditions of Section 4.3(a) through (d) of the Lease as were applicable to the disbursement of the Landlord’s Initial Contribution, except that Landlord’s Third Amendment 13 th Floor Contribution shall be available to Tenant only through the date which is six (6) months after the Third Amendment 13 th Floor Additional Premises Delivery Date, and if the conditions for funding the Landlord’s Third Amendment 13 th Floor Contribution have not been satisfied by such date, then one-sixth (  1 / 6 ) of any remaining balance of the Landlord’s Third Amendment 13 th Floor Contribution shall be applied against Basic Rent due on account of the Third Amendment 13 th Floor Additional Premises for each of the next six (6) months until fully applied.

4. Delivery of Third Amendment Additional Premises . Landlord shall notify Tenant in writing when (a) the Third Amendment 10 th Floor Additional Premises have been delivered to it, and (b) the Third Amendment 13 th Floor Additional Premises have been delivered to it. Landlord intends to deliver possession of the Third Amendment 10 th Floor Additional Premises to Tenant on November 1, 2006 and the Third Amendment 13 th Floor Additional Premises to Tenant on June 1, 2007, provided, however, no failure or inability of Landlord to tender possession to Tenant of any portion of the Third Amendment 10 th Floor Additional Premises or the Third Amendment 13 th Floor Additional Premises on or before such respective dates shall impose any liability upon Landlord or detract from or otherwise affect any other obligations of Tenant hereunder.

5. Rent for Third Amendment Additional Premises . From and after the Third Amendment 10 th Floor Additional Premises Rent Commencement Date and thereafter throughout the Term of the Lease, Tenant shall pay to Landlord, without any set-off, counterclaim, abatement or deduction, (except as set forth in Section 11.4 of the Lease), of any kind, whatsoever, Basic Rent, Escalation Charges, and Additional Rent with respect to the Third Amendment 10 th Floor Additional Premises, in accordance with and subject to the terms and provisions of the Lease, as modified and amended hereby.

From and after the Third Amendment 13 th Floor Additional Premises Rent Commencement Date and thereafter throughout the Term of the Lease, Tenant shall pay to Landlord, without any set-off, counterclaim, abatement or deduction, (except as set forth in Section 11.4 of the Lease), of any kind, whatsoever, Basic Rent, Escalation Charges, and Additional Rent with respect to the Third Amendment 13 th Floor Additional Premises, in accordance with and subject to the terms and provisions of the Lease, as modified and amended hereby.

Without limiting the foregoing, Tenant shall pay Escalation Charges for the entire Premises in the same manner that such amounts are calculated and payable for the Original Premises as set forth in the Original Lease, provided that Tenant’s payment of Escalation Charges shall be calculated and payable separately for each of the Original Premises, the First Amendment Premises, the Third Amendment 10 th Floor Additional Premises, and the Third Amendment 13 th Floor Additional Premises, and further provided that (a) for purposes of determining the Escalation Charges payable by Tenant with respect to the Original Premises, the Base Year for Taxes and the Base Year for Operating Expenses shall have the meanings assigned

 

8


thereto in the Original Lease and the same shall be calculated based upon the Tenant’s Proportionate Ten P.O. Share or Tenant’s Proportionate 10 P.O. Share, as applicable, (b) for purposes of determining the Escalation Charges payable by Tenant with respect to the First Amendment Additional Premises, the Base Year for Taxes shall mean the Base Year for First Amendment Additional Premises Taxes and the Base Year for Operating Expenses shall mean Base Year for First Amendment Additional Premises Operating Expenses, each of which shall be calculated based upon the Tenant’s Proportionate First Amendment Additional Premises Share, (c) for purposes of determining the Escalation Charges payable by Tenant with respect to the Third Amendment 10 th Floor Additional Premises, the Base Year for Taxes shall mean the Base Year for Third Amendment Additional Premises Taxes and the Base Year for Operating Expenses shall mean the Base Year for Third Amendment Additional Premises Operating Expenses, each of which shall be calculated based upon the Tenant’s Proportionate Third Amendment 10 th Floor Additional Premises Share, and (d) for purposes of determining the Escalation Charges payable by Tenant with respect to the Third Amendment 13 th Floor Additional Premises, the Base Year for Taxes shall mean the Base Year for Third Amendment Additional Premises Taxes and the Base Year for Operating Expenses shall mean the Base Year for Third Amendment Additional Premises Operating Expenses, each of which shall be calculated based upon the Tenant’s Proportionate Third Amendment 13 th Floor Additional Premises Share.

6. Third Amendment Additional Premises Electricity . Landlord has installed check meters to measure consumption of electricity in each of the Third Amendment 10 th Floor Additional Premises and the Third Amendment 13 th Floor Additional Premises. Without limiting any other term or provision of the Lease relative to electricity, beginning on the Third Amendment 10 th Floor Additional Premises Delivery Date with respect to the Third Amendment 10 th Floor Additional Premises and on the Third Amendment 13 th Floor Additional Premises Delivery Date with respect to the Third Amendment 13 th Floor Additional Premises, Tenant shall pay Landlord, as Additional Rent, the costs of all electricity consumed in such portions of the Premises, based on the amounts shown on said check meters, at the times and in the manner provided in Section 7.4(c) of the Lease.

7. Exercise of ROFO Option . The Third Amendment Additional Premises have been added to the Premises in full and complete satisfaction of the rights and options granted to Tenant pursuant to Section 17.1 of the Lease. Without limiting the foregoing, all references in the Lease to the exercise of the ROFO Option as it relates to the Third Amendment Additional Premises shall be deemed to refer to the addition of the Third Amendment Additional Premises to the Premises pursuant to this Third Amendment. Tenant has exercised the ROFO Option pursuant to the provisions of Section 17.1 of the Lease, and neither Landlord nor Tenant has any further rights, claims, liabilities, duties or obligations, pursuant to Section 17.1 of the Lease with respect to the Third Amendment Additional Premises.

 

9


8. Notices . Section 15.12 of the Lease is hereby amended by deleting clauses (a) and (b) thereof and substituting in their stead the following:

“(a) if to Landlord, at Landlord’s Address,

 

with a copies to:    Broadway 10-Ten PO Fee LLC
   c/o Broadway Real Estate Partners, LLC
   375 Park Avenue, Suite 2107
   New York, New York 10152
   Attention: Jonathon K. Yormak
   Telephone No. (212) 810-4013
   Fax No. (212) 658-9393
   and
   Broadway Real Estate Services, LLC
   c/o Broadway Real Estate Partners, LLC
   375 Park Avenue, Suite 2107
   New York, New York 10152
   Attention: Rick Serrapica
   Telephone No. (212) 810-4020
   Fax No. (212) 658-9387
   and
   Seyfarth Shaw LLP
   Two Seaport Lane, Suite 300
   Boston, Massachusetts 02210
   Attention: Robert C. Zinnershine, Esq.
   Telephone No. (617) 946-4861
   Fax No. (617) 946-4801

“(b) if to Tenant, at Tenant’s Address to the attention of Joan Thayer, Corporate Real Estate,

 

with a copies to:    Trammell Crow Company
   125 High Street, 10 th Floor
   Boston, Massachusetts 02110
   Attention:    Alison Cavanaugh-Leo
      Vice President
   and
   John C. Thomson
   Attorney at Law
   9 Thoreau Circle
   Beverly, Massachusetts 01915.”

 

10


9. Brokerage . Tenant warrants and represents to Landlord, and Landlord warrants and represents to Tenant, that it has dealt with no broker or agent in connection with this Third Amendment, other than Cushman & Wakefield of Massachusetts, Inc. representing Landlord and Trammell Crow Company representing Tenant (collectively, the “ Brokers ”). Each of Tenant and Landlord shall indemnify and hold harmless the other from and against any and all loss, cost and expense (including attorneys’ fees) for any breaches of the foregoing representation and warranty, including, without limitation, involving any claims for a brokerage commission, finder’s fee or similar compensation made by any person other than the Brokers, arising out of or in connection with this Third Amendment and/or the transactions contemplated hereby. Landlord shall be responsible for payment of fees payable to Cushman & Wakefield of Massachusetts, Inc. arising out of and in connection with this Third Amendment and the transactions contemplated hereby, pursuant to a separate agreement therewith; and Cushman & Wakefield of Massachusetts, Inc. shall be responsible for payment of fees payable to Trammell Crow Company arising out of and in connection with this Third Amendment and the transactions contemplated hereby, pursuant to a separate agreement between Cushman & Wakefield of Massachusetts, Inc. and Trammell Crow Company. The provisions of this section shall survive the expiration or termination of the Lease and/or this Third Amendment.

10. Authority . Each individual executing this Third Amendment on behalf of Tenant represents and warrants to Landlord that he or she is duly authorized to so execute and deliver this Third Amendment and that all corporate actions and consents required for execution of this Third Amendment have been given, granted or obtained. Tenant shall, within ten (10) days after demand by Landlord, deliver to Landlord satisfactory evidence of the due authorization of this Third Amendment and the authority of the person executing this Third Amendment on its behalf.

11. Incorporation of Prior Agreement; Amendments . The Lease (including this Third Amendment) contains all of the agreements of the parties hereto with respect to any matter covered or mentioned therein or herein, and no prior agreement or understanding pertaining to any such matter shall be effective for any purpose. No provision of the Lease (including this Third Amendment) may be amended or added to except by an agreement in writing signed by the parties to the Lease or their respective successors in interest.

12. Lender Approval . To the extent required by any loan document or contract to which Landlord or its affiliates are a party, this Lease is expressly subject to, and conditioned upon, Landlord receipt of the approval hereto of the holder of each mortgage or other loan secured by the Buildings or Landlord’s direct or indirect interests therein. Landlord’s delivery of any portion of the Third Amendment Additional Premises to Tenant shall be deemed a representation by Landlord that such approval has been obtained to the extent required by any loan document or contract to which Landlord or its affiliates are a party.

13. Miscellaneous .

(a) Tenant hereby represents and warrants to Landlord, as of the date of this Third Amendment, as follows: (i) the execution and delivery of this Third Amendment by Tenant has been duly authorized by all requisite corporate action; (ii) neither the Lease nor the interest of the Tenant therein has been assigned, or, encumbered; (ill) to the best knowledge of the Tenant,

 

11


there are no defenses or counterclaims to the enforcement of the Lease or the liabilities and obligations of the Tenant thereunder; (iv) Tenant is not entitled to any offset, abatement or reduction of rent under the Lease, except as expressly and specifically set forth in the Lease; (v) to the best knowledge of Tenant, neither Landlord or Tenant is in breach or default of any its respective obligations under the Lease; (vi) Landlord has performed all work and constructed all improvements required pursuant to the Lease; and (vii) Landlord has made no representations or warranties, except as expressly and specifically set forth in this Third Amendment and in the Lease. The submission of drafts of this Third Amendment for examination and negotiation does not constitute an offer to lease the Third Amendment Additional Premises, or a reservation of or option for, the Third Amendment Additional Premises, and this Third Amendment shall not be binding upon Landlord or Tenant unless and until Landlord shall have executed and delivered a fully executed copy of this Third Amendment to Tenant. Except as expressly and specifically set forth herein, the Lease is hereby ratified and confirmed, and all of the terms, covenants, agreements and provisions of the Lease shall remain unaltered and unmodified and in full force and effect throughout the balance of the term of the Lease, as amended hereby. Except as expressly set forth herein, all of the covenants, representations and warranties made by the Tenant contained in the Lease arc hereby remade, reaffirmed and ratified as of the date hereof.

(b) Landlord hereby represents and warrants to Tenant that, as of the date of this Third Amendment, to the best knowledge of Landlord, neither Landlord or Tenant is in breach or default of any its respective obligations under the Lease.

[THE REMAINDER OF THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.]

 

12


EXECUTED as an instrument under seal as of the date and year first above written.

 

LANDLORD :

BROADWAY 10-TEN PO FEE, LLC, a

Delaware limited liability company

By:  

 

  Name:
  Title:
TENANT :

BOSTON PRIVATE FINANCIAL HOLDINGS, INC., a Massachusetts corporation

By:  

 

  Name:
  Title:

 

13


Exhibit O-1

Floor Plan for Third Amendment 10 th Floor Additional Premises

(see next page)

 

14


LOGO

 

15


Exhibit O-2

Floor Plan for Third Amendment 13 th Floor Additional Premises

(see next page)

 

16


LOGO

 

17

Exhibit 10.44

BOSTON PRIVATE FINANCIAL HOLDINGS, INC.

DEFERRED COMPENSATION PLAN

As Amended and Restated as of January 1, 2009


TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

          Page

INTRODUCTION

   1

ARTICLE I - DEFINITIONS

   2

1.1

   “Administrator”    2

1.2

   “Affiliated Employer”    2

1.3

   “Base Compensation”    2

1.4

   “Beneficiary” or “Beneficiaries”    2

1.5

   “Change in Control”    2

1.6

   “Code”    3

1.7

   “Commission”    3

1.8

   “Company”    4

1.9

   “Compensation”    4

1.10

   “Deferred Compensation Account” or “Account”    4

1.11

   “Deferred Compensation Agreement”    4

1.12

   “Disability” or “Disabled”    4

1.13

   “Eligible Employee”    5

1.14

   “Employee”    5

1.15

   “401(k) Plan”    5

1.16

   “Incentive Compensation”    5

1.17

   “In-Service Distribution Date”    5

1.18

   “In-Service Distribution Subaccount”    6

1.19

   “Participant”    6

1.20

   “Participating Employer”    6

1.21

   “Participating Employer Matching Contribution Subaccount”    6

1.22

   “Plan”    6

1.23

   “Plan Year”    6

1.24

   “Retirement”    6

1.25

   “Retirement Subaccount”    6

1.26

   “Separation from Service” or “Separates from Service”    6

ARTICLE II - ELIGIBILITY

   8

2.1

   Eligibility    8

2.2

   Cessation of Eligibility    8

ARTICLE III - DEFERRAL ELECTIONS

   9

3.1

   Deferred Compensation Agreement    9

3.2

   Timing of Deferred Compensation Agreement    9

3.3

   Amount of Deferrals    10

3.4

   Deferral Period    11

3.5

   Vesting of Retirement and In-Service Distribution Subaccounts    12

 

(i)


ARTICLE IV - PARTICIPATING EMPLOYER MATCHING CONTRIBUTIONS

   13

4.1

   Eligibility for Participating Employer Matching Contribution    13

4.2

   Amount of Participating Employer Matching Contribution    13

4.3

   Participating Employer Matching Contribution Subaccount    14

4.4

   Vesting of Participating Employer Matching Contribution Account    14

4.5

   Payment of Participating Employer Matching Contribution Subaccount    15

ARTICLE V - DEFERRED COMPENSATION ACCOUNT

   16

5.1

   Establishment of Deferred Compensation Accounts and Subaccounts    16

5.2

   Allocations to and Distributions From Deferred Compensation Accounts    16

5.3

   Selection of Investment Vehicle    17

5.4

   Adjustment of Deferred Compensation Account    17

ARTICLE VI - BENEFIT PAYMENTS

   18

6.1

   Payment of Retirement Subaccount    18

6.2

   Payment of In-Service Distribution Subaccount    19

6.3

   Payment of Participating Employer Matching Contribution Subaccount.    19

6.4

   Small Benefit    20

6.5

   Benefit Payments Upon Death    20

6.6

   Delay in Time of Payment    20

ARTICLE VII - ADMINISTRATION OF THE PLAN

   21

7.1

   Plan Administration    21

7.2

   General Powers of Administration    21

ARTICLE VIII - AMENDMENT OR TERMINATION

   23

8.1

   Amendment or Termination    23

8.2

   Effect of Amendment or Termination    23

ARTICLE IX - GENERAL PROVISIONS

   24

9.1

   Payment of Benefits from General Assets; Unsecured Creditor Status for Participants    24

9.2

   No Guarantee of Benefits    24

9.3

   No Enlargement of Employee Rights    24

9.4

   Spendthrift Provision    25

9.5

   Incapacity of Recipient    25

9.6

   Corporate Successors    25

9.7

   Limitations on Liability    25

9.8

   Tax Withholding and Reporting    26

9.9

   Liability for Payment    26

9.10

   Plan Expenses    27

9.11

   Applicable Law    27

ARTICLE X - CLAIMS PROCEDURES

   28

10.1

   Claims Procedures    28

 

(ii)


INTRODUCTION

This Boston Private Financial Holdings, Inc. Deferred Compensation Plan, originally effective January 1, 2001, is amended and restated effective January 1, 2009 (as so amended and restated, the “Plan”). This amendment and restatement incorporates prior amendments as well as administrative changes and provisions designed to bring the Plan into compliance with the requirements of Section 409A of the Code.

The purpose of this Plan is to provide incentive and reward to certain employees of Boston Private Financial Holdings, Inc. (the “Company”) and its affiliates who contribute to the long-term success of the Company.

The Plan shall be unfunded and maintained primarily for the purpose of providing deferred compensation for a select group of management or highly compensated employees within the meaning of Sections 210(2), 301(a)(3) and 401(a)(1) of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, as amended.

Accordingly, the Company hereby adopts the Plan pursuant to the terms and provisions set forth below.


ARTICLE I - DEFINITIONS

Whenever used herein the following terms shall have the meanings hereinafter set forth:

1.1 “Administrator” means the Compensation Committee of the Board of Directors of the Company.

1.2 “Affiliated Employer” means any corporation, trust, association, enterprise or other entity which is required to be considered, together with the Company, as one employer pursuant to the provisions of Sections 414(b), 414(c), 414(m) or 414(o) of the Code.

1.3 “Base Compensation” means a Participant’s base annual salary from a Participating Employer before any pre-tax salary reductions in a Code Section 125 or 401(k) plan.

1.4 “Beneficiary” or “Beneficiaries” means the individual or individuals last designated by the Participant on a Beneficiary Designation Form filed with the Company to receive the value of the Participant’s Deferred Compensation Account in the event of a Participant’s death prior to complete payment of benefits under the Plan.

1.5 “Change in Control” A “Change in Control” shall be deemed to have occurred in any one of the following events:

(a) any “person” (as such term is defined in Sections 13(d) and 14(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 (the “Act”)) (other than the Company, any trustee or other fiduciary holding securities under an employee benefit plan or trust of the Company, or any corporation owned, directly or indirectly, by the stockholders of the Company in substantially the same proportions as their ownership of stock of the Company) becomes a “beneficial owner” (as such term is defined in Rule 13d-3 promulgated under the Act), directly or indirect1y, of securities of the Company representing at least twenty five percent (25%) or more of the combined voting power of the Company’s then outstanding securities;

 

2


(b) persons who, as of January 1, 2001, constituted the Company’s Board (the “Incumbent Board”) cease for any reason, including without limitation, as a result of a tender offer, proxy contest, merger or similar transaction, to constitute at least a majority of the Board of Directors of the Company, provided that any person becoming a director of the Company subsequent to January 1, 2001, whose election or nomination for election was approved by at least a majority of the directors then comprising the Incumbent Board shall, for purposes of this Section 1.5, be considered a member of the Incumbent Board; or

(c) the stockholders of the Company shall approve (i) any consolidation or merger of the Company or its subsidiaries where the stockholders of the Company, immediately prior to the consolidation or merger, would not, immediately after the consolidation or merger, beneficially own (as such term is defined in Rule 13d-3 under the Act), directly or indirectly, shares representing in the aggregate 80% or more of the voting shares of the corporation issuing cash or securities in the consolidation or merger (or of its ultimate parent corporation, if any), (ii) any sale, lease, exchange or other transfer (in one transaction or a series of transactions contemplated or arranged by any party as a single plan) of all or substantially all of the assets of the Company or (iii) any plan or proposal for the liquidation or dissolution of the Company.

1.6 “Code” means the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended from time to time. Reference to a specific provision of the Code shall include such provision, any valid regulation or ruling promulgated thereunder, and any provision of future law that amends, supplements, or supersedes such provisions.

1.7 “Commission” means the amount of compensation of a Participant that is payable by a Participating Employer on account of a sale of a product or service to a customer, before any pre-tax salary reduction in a Code 125 or 401(k) plan.

 

3


1.8 “Company” means Boston Private Financial Holdings, Inc. or, to the extent provided in Section 9.6 below, any successor entity resulting from a merger or consolidation into or with the Company or a transfer or sale of substantially all of the assets of the Company.

1.9 “Compensation” means a Participant’s Base Compensation, Commissions and Incentive Compensation.

1.10 “Deferred Compensation Account” or “Account” means the bookkeeping account established in the name of a Participant pursuant to Section 5.1 of the Plan which reflects the Participant’s entire interest in the Plan, and which includes the Participant’s Participating Employer Matching Contribution Subaccount, Retirement Subaccount, and In-Service Distribution Subaccount. The Company shall maintain multiple subaccounts within each of the preceding Subaccounts to reflect different types of compensation being deferred and different years of deferral. “Pre-2005 Deferred Compensation Account” means the vested amount standing to the credit of the Participant’s Account as of December 31, 2004 and deemed investment adjustments thereon. “Post-2004 Deferred Compensation Account” means the amount credited to a Participant’s Account after December 31, 2004 and amounts credited to a Participant’s Account before January 1, 2005 but which becomes vested after December 31, 2004, and deemed investment adjustments thereon.

1.11 “Deferred Compensation Agreement” means the written compensation deferral agreement entered into by a Participant with the Company pursuant to the Plan.

1.12 “Disability” or “Disabled” with respect to the Pre-2005 Deferred Compensation Account means that the Participant is considered totally disabled under the terms of the Participating Employer’s Long Term Disability Plan or any successor plan. If no such plan is in effect, then disability means a medically determinable physical or mental impairment that has

 

4


existed for at least six months and that is likely to result in death or to be of long-continued and indefinite duration, and which prevents an individual from engaging in any substantial gainful activity, as determined by the Administrator. With respect to the Post-2004 Account of a Participant, a Participant is considered to have incurred a Disability if he or she is (i) unable to engage in any substantial gainful activity by reason of any medically determinable physical or mental impairment that can be expected to result in death or can be expected to last for a continuous period of not less than twelve (12) months, or (ii) by reason of any medically determinable physical or mental impairment which can be expected to last for a continuous period of not less than twelve (12) months, receiving income replacement benefits for a period of not less than three (3) months under an accident and health plan covering employees of the Participating Employer.

1.13 “Eligible Employee” means an Employee who meets the eligibility requirements of Section 2.1.

1.14 “Employee” means an individual who is an employee of a Participating Employer.

1.15 “401(k) Plan” means the 401(k) Plan adopted by a Participating Employer.

1.16 “Incentive Compensation” means bonuses payable under the Company’s annual bonus plan and any similar short term bonus plan of a Participating Employer before any pre-tax salary reductions in a Code Section 125 or 401(k) plan.

1.17 “In-Service Distribution Date” means the date selected by the Participant in his or her Deferred Compensation Agreement for the commencement of payment of an In-Service Distribution Subaccount.

 

5


1.18 “In-Service Distribution Subaccount” means the portion of a Participant’s Deferred Compensation Account established in accordance with Section 3.4(c) of the Plan.

1.19 “Participant” means each Eligible Employee and each individual who has an Account under the Plan but who is no longer an Eligible Employee.

1.20 “Participating Employer” means the Company and any Affiliated Employer that adopts the Plan with the permission of the Company.

1.21 “Participating Employer Matching Contribution Subaccount” means the portion of a Participant’s Deferred Compensation Account established in accordance with Section 4.3 of the Plan.

1.22 “Plan” means this Boston Private Bank Financial Holdings, Inc. Deferred Compensation Plan.

1.23 “Plan Year” means the calendar year.

1.24 “Retirement” means that the Participant has a Separation from Service on or after age sixty-five (65).

1.25 “Retirement Subaccount” means the portion of a Participant’s Deferred Compensation Account established in accordance with Section 3.4(b) of the Plan.

1.26 “Separation from Service” or “Separates from Service” is deemed to occur when the Participating Employers and the Participant reasonably anticipate that no further services would be performed by the Participant for the Participating Employers (and all Affiliated Employers) after a certain date or that the level of bona fide services the Participant would perform for the Participating Employers (and all Affiliated Employers) after such date (whether as an employee, a self-employed individual or an independent contractor) would permanently decrease to no more than 20 percent of the average level of bona fide services performed for the Participating Employer (and all Affiliated Employers) over the immediately preceding 36-month period (or the full period of service to the Participating Employer if the Participant has less than 36 months of service).

 

6


Words in the masculine gender shall include the feminine and the singular shall include the plural, and vice versa, unless qualified by the context. Any headings used herein are included for ease of reference only, and are not to be construed so as to alter the terms hereof.

 

7


ARTICLE II - ELIGIBILITY

2.1 Eligibility . An individual is eligible to participate in the Plan if he or she:

(a) is an Employee;

(b) is a member of the senior management team of the Participating Employer; and

(c) is approved by the Participating Employer to participate in this Plan.

2.2 Cessation of Eligibility . An Eligible Employee shall become ineligible to participate on the date such individual no longer satisfies the requirements of Section 2.1. An Employee’s eligibility to participate in the Plan with respect to any particular Plan Year does not guarantee continued eligibility to participate in any future Plan Year.

In the event an individual’s status changes from Eligible Employee to ineligible Employee during a Plan Year, or if an Eligible Employee ceases to be an Employee in connection with a restructuring or reorganization of a Participating Employer that results in such individual becoming a self-employed individual performing personal services for a Participating Employer, deferrals under the Plan, if any, shall continue for the balance of such Plan Year in accordance with such individual’s Deferred Compensation Agreement to the extent the Participant continues to receive Compensation or earned income from self-employment from a Participating Employer in such Plan Year.

 

8


ARTICLE III - DEFERRAL ELECTIONS

3.1 Deferred Compensation Agreement . An Eligible Employee may elect to defer a portion of his or her Compensation by entering into a Deferred Compensation Agreement with a Participating Employer pursuant to the rules set forth in this Article III. The Deferred Compensation Agreement shall be made on a form supplied by the Company and shall be filed with the Company’s Human Resources Department (or its designee) in accordance with procedures established by the Company. A Deferred Compensation Agreement shall become effective only if the Company determines that such Agreement complies with the rules of the Plan and the Company accepts and approves the Agreement.

The foregoing notwithstanding, a Participant’s deferrals of Compensation under the Plan shall be suspended for any period of time required by regulations promulgated under Section 401(k) of the Code in the event the Participant receives a hardship distribution from the 401(k) Plan.

3.2 Timing of Deferred Compensation Agreement .

(a) Deferrals of Base Compensation . An Eligible Employee may enter into a Deferred Compensation Agreement with respect to his or her Base Compensation prior to January 1 of each Plan Year. The Deferred Compensation Agreement shall apply to Base Compensation earned in the immediately following Plan Year, and shall be irrevocable.

(b) Deferrals of Commissions . An Eligible Employee may enter into a Deferred Compensation Agreement with respect to his or her Commissions prior to January 1 of each Plan Year. The Deferred Compensation Agreement shall apply to Commissions earned in the immediately following Plan Year, and shall be irrevocable.

(c) Deferrals of Incentive Compensation . An Eligible Employee may enter into a Deferred Compensation Agreement with respect to Incentive Compensation prior to the beginning of the Plan Year in which the Participant performs the services relating to such Incentive Compensation. Such deferral election shall be irrevocable.

 

9


(d) Rules for Newly Eligible Employees . Notwithstanding (a), (b) and (c) above, an Employee who first becomes an Eligible Employee after the annual enrollment period for a Plan Year may enter into a Deferred Compensation Agreement no later than 30 days after he or she becomes eligible. For the Plan Year in which such Employee first becomes eligible, the Deferred Compensation Agreement (i) shall apply with respect to Base Compensation and Commissions earned after the pay period that the Deferred Compensation Agreement is executed and (ii) shall not apply to Incentive Compensation earned in such Plan Year. For Plan Years beginning after the Employee first becomes eligible, the rules set forth in (a), (b) and (c) above shall apply.

3.3 Amount of Deferrals .

(a) From Base Compensation . An Eligible Employee may elect to defer up to 25% of his or her Base Compensation, in increments of 1%.

(b) From Commissions . An Eligible Employee may elect to defer up to 100% of his or her Commissions, in increments of 5%.

(c) From Incentive Compensation . An Eligible Employee may elect to defer up to 100% of his or her Incentive Compensation, in increments of 5%.

A Deferral Election shall be automatically reduced if the Company determines that such action is necessary to meet Social Security and Medicare tax withholding obligations.

 

10


3.4 Deferral Period .

(a) General . At the time an Eligible Employee defers Compensation pursuant to a Deferred Compensation Agreement for a Plan Year, the individual must specify a distribution date applicable to such deferrals. The Eligible Employee may elect to defer Compensation for a Plan Year to Separation from Service, as set forth in Section 3.4(b) below, and/or to an In-Service Distribution Date, as set forth in Section 3.4(c) below. A Participant may make separate elections with respect to deferrals of Base Compensation described in Section 3.2(a) of the Plan, deferrals of Commissions described in Section 3.2(b) of the Plan and deferrals of Incentive Compensation described in Section 3.2(c) of the Plan.

(b) Deferrals to Separation from Service . An Eligible Employee may irrevocably elect in his or her Deferred Compensation Agreement for a Plan Year to defer Compensation to Separation from Service. The Company shall establish a Retirement Subaccount on behalf of each Eligible Employee representing Compensation deferred to Separation from Service, and earnings thereon. Payments from Retirement Subaccounts shall be made at such time and in such manner as provided in Section 6.1.

(c) Deferrals to an In-Service Distribution Date . An Eligible Employee may irrevocably elect in his or her Deferred Compensation Agreement for a Plan Year to defer Compensation to an In-Service Distribution Date. Deferrals to an In-Service Distribution Date shall be subject to the following requirements:

(i) In-Service Distribution Date. The In-Service Distribution Date must be a date at least two full calendar years after the date of such Deferred Compensation Agreement.

(ii) In-Service Distribution Subaccount . The Company shall establish an In-Service Distribution Subaccount within the Eligible Employee’s Deferred Compensation Account to which deferrals relating to a particular In-Service Distribution Date, and earnings thereon, shall be credited. Once an In-Service Distribution

 

11


Subaccount is established a Participant may elect in subsequent Deferred Compensation Agreements to defer additional Compensation to such Subaccount, up to and including the third calendar year prior to the calendar year containing the In-Service Distribution Date.

(iii) Payments . Payments from In-Service Distribution Subaccounts shall be made at such time and in such manner as provided in Section 6.1.

3.5 Vesting of Retirement and In-Service Distribution Subaccounts . Participants are fully vested in their Retirement Subaccount and In-Service Distribution Subaccount(s).

 

12


ARTICLE IV - PARTICIPATING EMPLOYER MATCHING CONTRIBUTIONS

4.1 Eligibility for Participating Employer Matching Contribution . An individual shall be eligible for a Participating Employer Matching Contribution, if any, under this Article IV for a Plan Year only if such individual has made the maximum elective deferrals to the 401(k) Plan permitted under Section 402(g) of the Code for such Plan Year, or has made the maximum elective deferral permitted under the terms of the 401(k) Plan for such Plan Year, or such individual’s compensation taken into account under the 401(k) Plan was limited by Code Section 401(a)(17) for such Plan Year, or such individual’s contributions to the 401(k) Plan were limited by Code Section 415 for such Plan Year.

4.2 Amount of Participating Employer Matching Contribution .

(a) General . Each Participating Employer shall determine, in its sole discretion, whether to make Participating Employer Matching Contributions for a Plan Year on behalf of eligible Participants employed by such Participating Employer.

(b) Amount . A Participant’s Participating Employer Matching Contribution for such Plan Year, if any, shall be determined in accordance with the following procedure:

Step One : Determine the Participant’s Base Compensation for such Plan Year.

Step Two : Determine the maximum percentage of a Participant’s compensation which is eligible for employer matching contributions under the 401(k) Plan for such Plan Year.*

Step Three : Multiply Step One by Step Two.

Step Four : Determine the Participant’s total deferrals of Base Compensation to the 401(k) Plan in such Plan Year.

Step Five : Determine the Participant’s total deferrals of Base Compensation pursuant to Section 3.3 of this Plan for the Plan Year.

Step Six : Add Step Four and Step Five.

 

13


Step Seven : Determine the lesser of Step Three and Step Six.

Step Eight : Multiple Step Seven by the rate of employer matching contributions under the 401(k) Plan for such Plan Year determined as of the last day of such Plan Year. *

Step Nine : Determine the employer matching contributions allocated to the Participant’s 401(k) Plan account for such Plan Year.

Step Ten : Subtract Step Nine from Step Eight.

 

*For example, if a 401(k) plan matches employee contributions up to 6% of compensation on a dollar for dollar basis, 6% would be used in Step Five and 100% would be used in Step Eight.

(c) Additional Matching Contribution . Each Participating Employer shall have the discretion to make an additional Participating Employer Matching Contribution on behalf of an eligible Participant in any Plan Year to the extent such Participating Employer deems such contribution necessary to satisfy the intent of the Plan.

(d) Nonduplication of Match . It is intended that that there be no duplication of Participating Employer Matching Contributions under this Plan and the 401(k) Plan. The Company shall have the absolute discretion to reduce a Participating Employer Matching Contribution under this Plan in order to effectuate this intent.

4.3 Participating Employer Matching Contribution Subaccount . The Company shall establish a Participating Employer Matching Contribution Subaccount on behalf of each Eligible Employee to which Participating Employer Matching Contributions, and earnings thereon, shall be allocated.

4.4 Vesting of Participating Employer Matching Contribution Account . A Participant shall vest in his or her Participating Employer Matching Contribution Account at the same time and at the same rate as his or her matching contributions under the Boston Private Financial Holdings, Inc. 401(k) Profit Sharing Plan. The foregoing notwithstanding, a Participant’s Participating Employer Matching Contribution Subaccount shall be fully vested upon the earliest to occur of the following: (a) the Participant’s death or Retirement, (b) a Change in Control, and (3) termination of the Plan in accordance with Section 8.1.

 

14


4.5 Payment of Participating Employer Matching Contribution Subaccount . Vested Participating Employer Matching Contribution Subaccounts shall be paid at such time and in such manner as provided in Section 6.3.

 

15


ARTICLE V - DEFERRED COMPENSATION ACCOUNT

5.1 Establishment of Deferred Compensation Accounts and Subaccounts . The Company shall establish and maintain for each Participant a hypothetical (bookkeeping) account called the Deferred Compensation Account. Such Account shall be segregated from the other accounts on the books and records of the Company as an unfunded and unsecured liability of the Company to the Participant. Subaccounts shall be maintained as determined necessary by the Company. Accounts and subaccounts are maintained strictly for accounting purposes and do not represent separate funding of the benefits under the Plan. Any reference to “contributions to” or “payments from” Participant Accounts, or similar phrases, are for convenience only and do not reflect any separate funding of the benefits under the Plan.

5.2 Allocations to and Distributions From Deferred Compensation Accounts . The Company shall credit to each Participant’s Account an amount equal to the percentage of such Participant’s Base Compensation, Commissions and Incentive Compensation which he or she has elected to defer on a timely-filed Deferred Compensation Agreement. Such deferrals shall be credited as of the date the Participant would have received such amount if not for the Participant’s deferral election.

The Company shall credit to a Participant’s Account an amount equal to the Participating Employer Matching Contribution to which he or she is entitled under Article IV of the Plan. Participating Employer Matching Contributions will be credited to the Participant’s Account as soon as administratively practicable after the end of each Plan Year.

Any distribution with respect to a Deferred Compensation Account shall be charged to such Account as of the date the distribution is made by the Participating Employer or the trustee of any Rabbi Trust established for the Plan.

 

16


5.3 Selection of Investment Vehicle . Each Participant shall specify, in such manner as prescribed by the Company, the allocation of his or her Account among investment indices available under the Plan. To the extent permitted by the Company, a Participant may make separate investment allocations with respect to his or her Retirement and In-Service Distribution Subaccounts. The Participant’s investment allocation with respect to his or her Retirement Subaccount (or In-Service Distribution Subaccount if the Participant does not have a Retirement Subaccount) shall also apply to the Participant’s Participating Employer Matching Contribution Subaccount.

An individual’s selection of an investment index will have no bearing on the actual investment or segregation of Company assets, but will be used as the basis for making adjustments to the such individual’s Account as described below in Section 5.4 of the Plan. A Participant can change his or her investment index or indices at such time, and in such manner, as determined by the Company. The Company may change the investment indices available under the Plan at any time in its absolute discretion.

5.4 Adjustment of Deferred Compensation Account . As of the last day of each calendar month, and at such other times as determined in the sole discretion of the Company, a Participant’s Deferred Compensation Account shall be credited with deemed net income, gain and loss, including deemed net unrealized gain and loss, based on the hypothetical investment directions made by the Participant in accordance with section 5.3. Such earnings and losses will continue to accrue during any period in which installments are paid pursuant to Article VI.

 

17


ARTICLE VI - BENEFIT PAYMENTS

6.1 Payment of Retirement Subaccount .

(a) Payment upon Retirement or Disability . Subject to Section 6.6, payment from each of a Participant’s Retirement Subaccounts shall be made, or shall commence, within 60 days after the Participant’s Retirement or Disability in the form elected by the Participant in each of his or her Deferred Compensation Agreements. The available forms of payment at Retirement and Disability are as follows:

(i) Lump Sum . A single lump sum payment.

(ii) Installment Payments . Payments of ten (10) to twenty (20) years. Installment payments are re-amortized over the remaining payout period as of December 31 of each Plan Year for the following Plan Year. Installment payments for a year may be made quarterly or at such other frequency as determined by the Company in its sole discretion, provided that installments due to be paid in a Plan Year shall be paid during the Plan Year.

(b) A Participant may change his or her election regarding the form of payment at Retirement or Disability with respect to his or her Pre-2005 Deferred Compensation Account provided the change is received by the Company, on a form prescribed by the Company, at least 13 months prior to the Participant’s Retirement or Disability. A Participant may modify the form or timing of benefit payment at Retirement or Disability with respect to his or her Post-2004 Deferred Compensation Account so long as such modification is made at least 12 months prior to the original payment date, the new payment date is at least five years from the original payment date and the modification does not take effect for at least 12 months after the modification date. The foregoing restrictions do not apply to modifications made in 2005, 2006, 2007 or 2008 to the extent permitted by Section 409A of the Code and the guidance promulgated thereunder.

 

18


(c) Payment upon Separation from Service . Subject to Section 6.6, in the event of Separation from Service prior to Retirement, a Participant’s Retirement Subaccount shall be paid in a single lump sum. Subject to Section 6.6, payments shall be made within 60 days after the Participant’s Separation from Service.

6.2 Payment of In-Service Distribution Subaccount . A Participant’s In-Service Distribution Subaccount shall be paid in a single lump sum. Payment shall be made after the earlier of (a) the Participant’s In-Service Distribution Date, or (b) the date the Participant Separates from Service for any reason other than Retirement. If payment of a Participant’s Subaccount is on account of Separation from Service, subject to Section 6.6, payments shall be made within 60 days after the Participant’s Separation from Service.

The foregoing notwithstanding, if a Participant’s Retirement or Disability occurs prior to the Participant’s In-Service Distribution Date with respect to an In-Service Withdrawal Subaccount, the balance of such Subaccount shall be paid in a lump sum or in installments as elected by the Participant for distribution of his or her Retirement Subaccount in accordance with the provisions of Section 6.1.

6.3 Payment of Participating Employer Matching Contribution Subaccount .

(a) Payment upon Separation from Service Prior to Retirement . In the event of Separation from Service prior to Retirement, the vested portion of the Participant’s Participating Employer Matching Contribution Subaccount shall be paid in a single lump sum and the nonvested portion shall be forfeited. Subject to Section 6.6, payment shall be made within 60 days after the Participant’s Separation from Service.

 

19


(b) Payment upon Retirement or Disability . Upon a Participant’s Retirement or Disability, his or her Participating Employer Matching Contribution Subaccount shall be paid at the same time, and in the same form, as the Participant’s Retirement Subaccount, as elected by the Participant pursuant to Section 6.1(a) of the Plan.

6.4 Small Benefit . Notwithstanding any election made by the Participant, if upon a Participant’s Separation from Service, the vested amount in all his or her Deferred Compensation is less than $100,000, it shall be paid out in a lump sum.

6.5 Benefit Payments Upon Death . In the event of the death of a Participant, benefits being paid in the form of installments shall cease, and a death benefit shall be paid to the Participant’s Beneficiary(ies). The benefit payable to the Participant’s Beneficiary(ies) shall be one-hundred percent (100%) of the vested balance of such Participant’s Deferred Compensation Account. The benefit shall be paid in a single lump sum within 60 days after the Participant’s date of death. If a Participant has not designated a Beneficiary, or if no designated Beneficiary is living on the date of death, the death benefit shall be paid to the Participant’s spouse. If such individual’s spouse is not then living or the Participant is unmarried at the time of death, then the death benefit shall be paid to the Participant’s estate.

6.6 Time of Payment for Post-2004 Deferred Compensation Accounts . No payment of any Post-2004 Deferred Compensation Accounts may be made under this Plan if such payment is to be made as a result of such Participant’s Separation from Service until at least six months and one day after the Participant’s Separation from Service. Any payments that would have been made to the Participant during the six-month delay period but for the operation of this paragraph shall (i) be made in a lump sum to the Participant in the seventh month after the Participant’s Separation from Service, and (ii) be credited with earnings in accordance with Section 5.4 during the six-month delay.

 

20


ARTICLE VII - ADMINISTRATION OF THE PLAN

7.1 Plan Administration . The Plan shall be administered by the Administrator. The Administrator shall have the right to make such rules and regulations as it deems appropriate for the efficient administration of the Plan, to construe and interpret the Plan, including any uncertain Plan terms, to make factual determinations to decide all questions of eligibility, and to determine the amount and time of payment of awards hereunder to the fullest extent provided by law and in its sole discretion; any interpretations or decisions so made will be conclusive and binding on all persons having any interest in the Plan.

7.2 General Powers of Administration . The Administrator shall be entitled to rely conclusively upon all tables, valuations, certificates, opinions and reports furnished by any actuary, accountant, controller, counsel or other person employed or engaged by the Company with respect to the Plan. The Administrator will have full power to administer the Plan in all of its details, subject to applicable requirements of law. For this purpose, the Administrator’s powers will include, but will not be limited to, the following authority, in addition to all other powers provided by this Plan:

(a) To make and enforce such rules and regulations as it deems necessary or proper for the efficient administration of the Plan, including the establishment of any claims procedures that may be required by applicable provisions of law;

(b) To interpret the Plan, its interpretation thereof in good faith to be final and conclusive on all persons claiming benefits under the Plan;

(c) To decide all questions concerning the Plan and the eligibility of any person to participate in the Plan;

(d) To appoint such agents, counsel, accountants, consultants and other persons as may be required to assist in administering the Plan; and

 

21


(e) To allocate and delegate its responsibilities under the Plan and to designate other persons to carry out any of its responsibilities under the Plan, any such allocation, delegation or designation to be in writing.

 

22


ARTICLE VIII - AMENDMENT OR TERMINATION

8.1 Amendment or Termination . The Company reserves the right to amend or terminate the Plan when, in the sole opinion of the Company, such amendment or termination is advisable.

The Company (or a Participating Employer with respect to its Participants) may partially terminate the Plan by refusing to accept any additional Deferred Compensation Agreements. The Plan shall otherwise continue to operate in accordance with its terms.

The Company (or a Participating Employer with respect to its Participants) may completely terminate the Plan. Notwithstanding any provision of this Plan to the contrary, in the event of complete termination, the Plan (or the portion of the Plan applicable to a withdrawing Participating Employer) shall cease to operate, and the Company shall pay out to each Participant (or the Beneficiary of a deceased Participant) his or her Pre-2005 Deferred Compensation Account balance in quarterly installments over a three (3)-year period, as if the Participant had retired as of the effective date of the complete termination. In the Company’s sole discretion, the Company may instead pay each Participant and Beneficiary his or her Account balance in a lump sum. With respect to the Participants’ Post-2004 Deferred Compensation Accounts, the Company may accelerate distribution only to the extent permitted by Section 409A of the Code and the regulations promulgated thereunder.

8.2 Effect of Amendment or Termination . No amendment or termination of the Plan shall directly or indirectly reduce the balance of any Deferred Compensation Account held hereunder as of the effective date of such amendment or termination or reduce the deferrals in the year of amendment or termination.

 

23


ARTICLE IX - GENERAL PROVISIONS

9.1 Payment of Benefits from General Assets; Unsecured Creditor Status for Participants . All benefits payable under this Plan to or on behalf of Participants shall be paid from the general assets of the Company or of a Participating Employer. A Participating Employer shall not be required to set aside any funds to discharge its obligations hereunder, but such Participating Employer may set aside such funds if it chooses to do so. Any setting aside of amounts, or acquisition of any insurance policy or any other asset, by the Company (or other Participating Employer) with which to discharge its obligations hereunder in trust or otherwise, shall not be deemed to create any beneficial ownership interest in any Employee, Participant, or Beneficiary, and legal and equitable title to any funds so set aside shall remain in the Company (or the other Participating Employer), and any recipient of benefits hereunder shall have no security or other interest in such funds. The rights of the Participant and his Beneficiary(ies) under this Plan shall be no greater than the rights of a general unsecured creditor of the Participating Employers. Any and all funds so set aside shall remain subject to the claims of the general creditors of the Participating Employers, present and future. Any Deferred Compensation Account established for a Participant under this Plan shall be hypothetical in nature and shall be maintained for recordkeeping purposes only.

9.2 No Guarantee of Benefits . Nothing contained in the Plan shall constitute a guaranty by the Company, Participating Employer, or any other person or entity that the assets of the Company will be sufficient to pay any benefits hereunder.

9.3 No Enlargement of Employee Rights . No Participant shall have any right to receive a benefit payment under the Plan except in accordance with the terms of the Plan. Establishment of the Plan shall not be construed to give any Participant the right to be retained in the service of the Company or other Participating Employer.

 

24


9.4 Spendthrift Provision . No interest of any Participant in the Plan shall be subject in any manner to sale, transfer, assignment, pledge, attachment, garnishment, or other alienation or encumbrance of any kind; nor may such interest or right to receive a benefit payment be taken, either voluntarily or involuntarily for the satisfaction of the debts of, or other obligations or claims against, such Participant. Notwithstanding the foregoing, payment may be made from the Plan to an individual other than the Participant to the extent required in a domestic relations order.

9.5 Incapacity of Recipient . If any person entitled to a benefit payment under the Plan is deemed by the Company to be incapable of personally receiving and giving a valid receipt for such payment, then, unless and until claim therefor shall have been made by a duly appointed guardian or other legal representative of such person, the Company may provide for such payment or any part thereof to be made to any other person or institution then contributing toward or providing for the care and maintenance of such person. Any such payment shall be a payment for the account of such person and a complete discharge of any liability of the Company and the Plan therefor.

9.6 Corporate Successors . The Plan shall not be automatically terminated by a transfer or sale of assets of the Company or by the merger or consolidation of the Company into or with any other entity, but the Plan shall be continued after such sale, merger or consolidation only if and to the extent that the transferee, purchaser or successor entity agrees to continue the Plan. In the event that the Plan is not continued by the transferee, purchaser or successor entity, then the Plan shall terminate subject to the provisions of Article VIII.

9.7 Limitations on Liability . Notwithstanding any of the preceding provisions of the Plan, neither the Participating Employers, nor any individual acting as employee or agent of the Participating Employers, shall be liable to any Participant or other person for any claim, loss, liability or expense incurred in connection with the Plan.

 

25


The Participating Employers do not in any way guarantee any Participant’s Deferred Compensation Account against loss or depreciation, whether caused by poor investment performance, insolvency of a deemed investment or by any other event or occurrence. In no event shall the employees, officers, directors, or stockholders of the Participating Employers be liable to any individual or entity on account of any claim arising by reason of the Plan provisions or any instrument or instruments implementing its provisions, or for the failure of any Participant, Beneficiary or other individual or entity to be entitled to any particular tax consequences with respect to the Plan or any credit or payment hereunder.

Any payment made in good faith in accordance with provisions of the Plan shall be a complete discharge of any liability for the making of such payment under the provisions of this Plan.

9.8 Tax Withholding and Reporting . The Company shall have the right to deduct any required withholding taxes from any payment made under the Plan. The Participating Employers shall not be obligated to pay, or reimburse the Participant or Beneficiary for, any income or other taxes or penalties that may be imposed on the Participant or Beneficiary as a result of this Plan by the Internal Revenue Service or any state or other taxing authority.

9.9 Liability for Payment . Anything in the Plan to the contrary notwithstanding, each Participating Employer shall be liable for payments due under this Plan which are based upon its Employees’ participation in the Plan. In the event that is payment due hereunder is based upon participation in the Plan during employment with two or more participating Employers, each such Participating Employer’s share of the liability will be based on amounts credited and

 

26


earnings accrued while the Participant was employed with each such participating Employer. In the event a payment is made under this Plan by the Company on behalf of another Participating Employer’s employee, the Company shall be entitled to reimbursement from such Participating Employer.

9.10 Plan Expenses . The Company shall have the option to require the Plan to bear the costs incident to the Plan’s operation. If the Company requires that the Plan bear any such costs, each Participant’s Account shall be debited its proportionate share of such costs, in accordance with rules adopted by the Company and uniformly applied to all Participants. To the extent the Company does not exercise the option to require the Plan to bear the costs incident to the Plan’s operation, each Participating Employer shall pay a pro-rata portion of such costs, in the manner prescribed by the Company.

9.11 Applicable Law . The Plan shall be construed and administered under the laws of the Commonwealth of Massachusetts.

 

27


ARTICLE X - CLAIMS PROCEDURES

10.1 Claims Procedures .

(a) If a Participant, beneficiary or their authorized representative (hereinafter the “Claimant”) asserts a right to a benefit under the Plan which has not been received, the Claimant must file a claim for such benefit with the Administrator. The Administrator shall render its decision on the claim within 90 days (45 days for claims made due to Disability) after its receipt of the claim.

If special circumstances apply, the 90-day period (or 45-day period in the case of Disability) may be extended by an additional 90 days (30 days in the case of Disability, with an additional 30-day extension if needed), provided that written notice of the extension is provided to the Claimant during the applicable period and such notice indicates the special circumstances requiring an extension of time and the date by which the Administrator expects to render its decision on the claim. In addition for claims due to Disability, the notice of extension shall also describe the standards for benefit entitlement, unresolved issues and additional information needed to resolve such issues. The Participant will have 45 days to provide such information and the period for making the benefit determination shall be tolled until the end of such 45-day period or until the information is provided by the Participant, whichever occurs first.

(b) If the Administrator wholly or partially denies the claim, the Administrator shall provide written notice to the Claimant within the time limitations of the immediately preceding paragraph. Such notice shall set forth:

(i) the specific reasons for the denial of the claim;

(ii) specific reference to pertinent provisions of the Plan on which the denial is based;

 

28


(iii) a description of any additional material or information necessary to perfect the claim and an explanation of why such material or information is necessary;

(iv) a description of the Plan’s claims review procedures, and the time limitations applicable to such procedures;

(v) a statement of the Claimant’s right to bring a civil action under Section 502(a) of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, as amended (“ERISA”) if the claim denial is appealed to the Administrator and the Administrator fully or partially denies the claim; and

(vi) solely with respect to claims made due to Disability, (1) any internal rules, guideline, protocol or other similar criterion if relied upon in making the adverse benefits decision, or (2) if the decision was based on medical necessity, experimental treatment or similar exclusion or limit either an explanation of the scientific or clinical judgment for the determination, applying the terms of the Plan to the claimant’s medical circumstances, or a statement that such an explanation will be provided free of charge upon request.

(c) A Claimant whose application for benefits is denied may request a full and fair review of the decision denying the claim by filing, in accordance with such procedures as the Administrator may establish, a written appeal which sets forth the documents, records and other information relating to the claim within 60 days (180 days for claims made due to Disability) after receipt of the notice of the denial from the Administrator. In connection with such appeal and upon request by the Claimant, a Claimant may review (or receive free copies of) all documents, records or other information relevant to the Claimant’s claim for benefit, all in accordance with such procedures as the Administrator may establish. If a Claimant fails to file an appeal within such period, he or she shall have no further right to appeal.

 

29


(d) A decision on the appeal by the Administrator shall include a review by the Administrator that takes into account all comments, documents, records and other information submitted by the Claimant relating to the claim, without regard to whether such information was submitted or considered in the initial claim determination. The Administrator shall render its decision on the appeal not later than 60 days (45 days for claims due to Disability) after the receipt by the Administrator of the appeal. If special circumstances apply, the 60-day period may be extended by an additional 60 days (and the 45-day period may be extended by an additional 45 days), provided that written notice of the extension is provided to the Claimant during the initial period and such notice indicates the special circumstances requiring an extension of time and the date by which the Administrator expects to render its decision on the claim on appeal.

If the Administrator wholly or partly denies the claim on appeal, the Administrator shall provide written notice to the Claimant within the time limitations of the immediately preceding paragraph. Such notice shall set forth:

(i) the specific reasons for the denial of the claim;

(ii) specific reference to pertinent provisions of the Plan on which the denial is based;

(iii) a statement of the Claimant’s right to receive, upon request and free of charge, reasonable access to, and copies of, all documents, records, and other information relevant to the Claimant’s claim for benefits;

 

30


(iv) a statement of the Claimant’s right to bring a civil action under Section 502(a) of ERISA;

(v) solely with respect to claims made due to Disability, (1) any internal rules, guideline, protocol or other similar criterion if relied upon in making the adverse benefits decision, or (2) if the decision was based on medical necessity, experimental treatment or similar exclusion or limit either an explanation of the scientific or clinical judgment for the determination, applying the terms of the Plan to the claimant’s medical circumstances, or a statement that such an explanation will be provided free of charge upon request; and

(vi) solely with respect to claims made due to Disability, the statement required by Department of Labor Regulations 2560-503-1(j)(5)(iii).

The claims procedures described above shall be administered in accordance with Section 503 of ERISA and regulations promulgated thereunder. Any written notice required to be given to the Claimant may, at the option of the Administrator and in accordance with guidance issued under Section 503 of ERISA, be provided electronically.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, Boston Private Financial Holdings, Inc. has caused this instrument to be executed by its duly authorized officer this 24th day of November, 2008.

 

BOSTON PRIVATE FINANCIAL HOLDINGS, INC.
By:   /s/ Gerald Raphel
Name:   Gerald Raphel
Title:   Senior Vice President

 

31

Exhibit 21.1

LIST OF SUBSIDIARIES OF

BOSTON PRIVATE FINANCIAL HOLDINGS, INC.

Consolidated subsidiaries of the Registrant:

Borel Private Bank & Trust Company, a California corporation

Boston Private Bank & Trust Company, a Massachusetts state chartered trust company

Charter Bank, a Washington State corporation

First Private Bank & Trust, a California corporation

Anchor Capital Holdings, LLC, a Delaware limited liability company

Bingham, Osborn, & Scarborough, LLC, a California limited liability company

Dalton, Greiner, Hartman, Maher & Co. LLC, a Delaware limited liability company

KLS Professional Advisors Group, LLC, a Delaware limited liability company

Davidson Trust Company, LLC, a Pennsylvania limited liability company

Equity method investments of the Registrant:

Coldstream Holdings, Inc., an Oregon corporation

Exhibit 23.1

Consent of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm

The Board of Directors

Boston Private Financial Holdings, Inc.:

We consent to the incorporation by reference in the Registration Statements on Forms S-8 (No. 333-116511, 333-128764, 333-134685, 333-134686, and 333-159245 ); and Forms S-3 (No. 333-156356 and 333-158675) of Boston Private Financial Holdings, Inc. (the “Company”) of our reports dated March 12, 2010, with respect to the consolidated balance sheets of Boston Private Financial Holdings, Inc., as of December 31, 2009 and 2008, and the related consolidated statements of operations, changes in stockholders’ equity and cash flows for each of the years in the three-year period ended December 31, 2009, and the effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2009, which reports appear in the December 31, 2009 Annual Report on Form 10-K of the Company.

Our report dated March 12, 2010 on the consolidated financial statements, contains an explanatory paragraph that states the Company has changed its method of accounting for noncontrolling interests in 2009 to comply with new accounting requirements issued by the Financial Accounting Standards Board.

/s/    KPMG LLP

Boston, Massachusetts

March 12, 2010

Exhibit 23.2

Consent of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm

The Board of Directors

Boston Private Financial Holdings, Inc.:

We consent to the incorporation by reference in the Registration Statements on Form S-8 (No. 333-116511, 333-128764, 333-134685, 333-134686 and 333-159245); and Form S-3 (No. 333-156356 and 333-158675) of Boston Private Financial Holdings, Inc. (the “Company”) of our report dated February 26, 2008 with respect to the consolidated financial statements of Gibraltar Private Bank & Trust Company which appears in the December 31, 2007 annual report on Form 10-K of the Company and to the reliance by KPMG LLP upon such report in its March 12, 2008 report which appears in the December 31, 2007 annual report on Form 10-K of the Company.

/s/ Hacker, Johnson & Smith PA

Fort Lauderdale, Florida

March 12, 2010

Exhibit 31.1

CERTIFICATION OF THE CHIEF EXECUTIVE OFFICER

I, Timothy L. Vaill, certify that:

1. I have reviewed this annual report on Form 10-K of Boston Private Financial Holdings, Inc. (the “registrant”);

2. Based on my knowledge, this report does not contain any untrue statement of a material fact or omit to state a material fact necessary to make the statements made, in light of the circumstances under which such statements were made, not misleading with respect to the period covered by this report;

3. Based on my knowledge, the financial statements, and other financial information included in this report, fairly present in all material respects the financial condition, results of operations and cash flows of the registrant as of, and for, the periods presented in this report;

4. The registrant’s other certifying officer and I are responsible for establishing and maintaining disclosure controls and procedures (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(e) and 15d-15(e)) and internal control over financial reporting (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(f) and 15d-15(f)) for the registrant and have:

(a) Designed such disclosure controls and procedures, or caused such disclosure controls and procedures to be designed under our supervision, to ensure that material information relating to the registrant, including its consolidated subsidiaries, is made known to us by others within those entities, particularly during the period in which this report is being prepared;

(b) Designed such internal control over financial reporting, or caused such internal control over financial reporting to be designed under our supervision, to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles;

(c) Evaluated the effectiveness of the registrant’s disclosure controls and procedures and presented in this report our conclusions about the effectiveness of the disclosure controls and procedures, as of the end of the period covered by this report based on such evaluation; and

(d) Disclosed in this report any change in the registrant’s internal control over financial reporting that occurred during the registrant’s most recent fiscal quarter (the registrant’s fourth fiscal quarter in the case of an annual report) that has materially affected, or is reasonably likely to materially affect, the registrant’s internal control over financial reporting; and

5. The registrant’s other certifying officer and I have disclosed, based on our most recent evaluation of internal control over financial reporting, to the registrant’s auditors and the audit committee of the registrant’s board of directors (or persons performing the equivalent functions):

(a) All significant deficiencies and material weaknesses in the design or operation of internal control over financial reporting which are reasonably likely to adversely affect the registrant’s ability to record, process, summarize and report financial information; and

(b) Any fraud, whether or not material, that involves management or other employees who have a significant role in the registrant’s internal control over financial reporting.

 

 

/s/    T IMOTHY L. V AILL        

Date: March 12, 2010  

Timothy L. Vaill

Chief Executive Officer

 

Exhibit 31.2

CERTIFICATION OF THE CHIEF FINANCIAL OFFICER

I, David J. Kaye, certify that:

1. I have reviewed this annual report on Form 10-K of Boston Private Financial Holdings, Inc. (the “registrant”);

2. Based on my knowledge, this report does not contain any untrue statement of a material fact or omit to state a material fact necessary to make the statements made, in light of the circumstances under which such statements were made, not misleading with respect to the period covered by this report;

3. Based on my knowledge, the financial statements, and other financial information included in this report, fairly present in all material respects the financial condition, results of operations and cash flows of the registrant as of, and for, the periods presented in this report;

4. The registrant’s other certifying officer and I are responsible for establishing and maintaining disclosure controls and procedures (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(e) and 15d-15(e)) and internal control over financial reporting (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(f) and 15d-15(f)) for the registrant and have:

(a) Designed such disclosure controls and procedures, or caused such disclosure controls and procedures to be designed under our supervision, to ensure that material information relating to the registrant, including its consolidated subsidiaries, is made known to us by others within those entities, particularly during the period in which this report is being prepared;

(b) Designed such internal control over financial reporting, or caused such internal control over financial reporting to be designed under our supervision, to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles;

(c) Evaluated the effectiveness of the registrant’s disclosure controls and procedures and presented in this report our conclusions about the effectiveness of the disclosure controls and procedures, as of the end of the period covered by this report based on such evaluation; and

(d) Disclosed in this report any change in the registrant’s internal control over financial reporting that occurred during the registrant’s most recent fiscal quarter (the registrant’s fourth fiscal quarter in the case of an annual report) that has materially affected, or is reasonably likely to materially affect, the registrant’s internal control over financial reporting; and

5. The registrant’s other certifying officer and I have disclosed, based on our most recent evaluation of internal control over financial reporting, to the registrant’s auditors and the audit committee of the registrant’s board of directors (or persons performing the equivalent functions):

(a) All significant deficiencies and material weaknesses in the design or operation of internal control over financial reporting which are reasonably likely to adversely affect the registrant’s ability to record, process, summarize and report financial information; and

(b) Any fraud, whether or not material, that involves management or other employees who have a significant role in the registrant’s internal control over financial reporting.

 

  

/s/    D AVID J. K AYE        

Date: March 12, 2010   

David J. Kaye

Chief Financial Officer

  

Exhibit 32.1*

CERTIFICATION PURSUANT TO

18 U.S.C. § 1350

AS ADOPTED PURSUANT TO

SECTION 906 OF THE SARBANES-OXLEY ACT OF 2002

The undersigned Chief Executive Officer of Boston Private Financial Holdings, Inc. (the “Company”) hereby certifies that the Company’s Annual Report on Form 10-K for the year ended December 31, 2009 (the “Report”), as filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on the date hereof, fully complies with the requirements of Section 13(a) or 15(d), as applicable, of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended, and that the information contained in the Report fairly presents, in all material respects, the financial condition and results of operations of the Company.

 

      Sincerely,
      / S /    T IMOTHY L. V AILL    
      Timothy L. Vaill

Date: March 12, 2010

      Chief Executive Officer

 

* This certification shall not be deemed filed for purposes of Section 18 of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, or otherwise subject to the liability of that section, nor shall it be deemed to be incorporated by reference into any filing under the Securities Act of 1933 or the Securities Exchange Act of 1934.

Exhibit 32.2*

CERTIFICATION PURSUANT TO

18 U.S.C. § 1350

AS ADOPTED PURSUANT TO

SECTION 906 OF THE SARBANES-OXLEY ACT OF 2002

The undersigned Chief Financial Officer of Boston Private Financial Holdings, Inc. (the “Company”) hereby certifies that the Company’s Annual Report on Form 10-K for the year ended December 31, 2009 (the “Report”), as filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on the date hereof, fully complies with the requirements of Section 13(a) or 15(d), as applicable, of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended, and that the information contained in the Report fairly presents, in all material respects, the financial condition and results of operations of the Company.

 

      Sincerely,
      / S /    D AVID J. K AYE    
      David J. Kaye

Date: March 12, 2010

      Chief Financial Officer

 

* This certification shall not be deemed filed for purposes of Section 18 of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, or otherwise subject to the liability of that section, nor shall it be deemed to be incorporated by reference into any filing under the Securities Act of 1933 or the Securities Exchange Act of 1934.

Exhibit 99.1

Certification Required by Section 111(b)(4) of the

Emergency Economic Stabilization Act of 2008 (“EESA”)

We, Timothy L. Vaill, Chief Executive Officer, and David J. Kaye, Chief Financial Officer, of Boston Private Financial Holdings, Inc. (“BPFH”), certify, based on our knowledge, that:

 

(i) The compensation committee of BPFH has discussed, reviewed and evaluated with senior risk officers at least every six months during the period beginning on September 14, 2009 and ending with the last day of BPFH’s fiscal year containing that date (the “Applicable Period”), senior executive officer (SEO) compensation plans and employee compensation plans and the risks these plans pose to BPFH;

 

(ii) The compensation committee of BPFH has identified and limited during the Applicable Period, the features in the SEO compensation plans that could lead SEOs to take unnecessary and excessive risks that could threaten the value of BPFH and during that same Applicable Period has identified any features of the employee compensation plans that pose risks to BPFH and limited those features to ensure that BPFH is not unnecessarily exposed to risks;

 

(iii) The compensation committee has reviewed at least every six months during the Applicable Period, the terms of each employee compensation plan and identified any features of the plan that could encourage the manipulation of reported earnings of BPFH to enhance the compensation of an employee and has limited those features;

 

(iv) The compensation committee of BPFH will certify to the reviews of the SEO compensation plans and employee compensation plans required under (i) and (iii) above;

 

(v) The compensation committee of BPFH will provide a narrative description of how it limited during any part of the most recently completed fiscal year that included a TARP period the features in

 

  (A) SEO compensation plans that could lead SEOs to take unnecessary and excessive risks that could threaten the value of BPFH;

 

  (B) Employee compensation plans that unnecessarily expose BPFH to risks; and

 

  (C) Employee compensation plans that could encourage the manipulation of reported earnings of BPFH to enhance the compensation of an employee;

 

(vi) BPFH has required that bonus payments, as defined in the regulations and guidance established under Section 111 of EESA (bonus payments), of the SEOs and 20 next most highly compensated employees be subject to a recovery or “clawback” provision during any part of the most recently completed fiscal year that was a TARP period if the bonus payments were based on materially inaccurate financial statements or any other materially inaccurate performance metric criteria;


(vii) BPFH has prohibited any golden parachute payment, as defined in the regulations and guidance established under Section 111 of EESA, to an SEO or any of the next five most highly compensated employees during the period beginning on June 15, 2009 and ending with the last day of BPFH’s fiscal year containing that date;

 

(viii) BPFH has limited bonus payments to its applicable employees in accordance with Section 111 of EESA and the regulations and guidance established thereunder during the period beginning on June 15, 2009 and ending with the last day of BPFH’s fiscal year containing that date;

 

(ix) The board of directors of BPFH has established an excessive or luxury expenditures policy, as defined in the regulations and guidance established under Section 111 of EESA by September 14, 2009; this policy has been provided to Treasury and its primary regulatory agency; and BPFH and its employees have complied with this policy during the Applicable Period, and any expenses that, pursuant to this policy, require approval of the board of directors, a committee of the board of directors, an SEO or an executive officer with a similar level of responsibility were properly approved;

 

(x) BPFH will permit a non-binding shareholder resolution in compliance with any applicable federal securities rules and regulations on the disclosures provided under the federal securities laws related to SEO compensation paid or accrued during the period beginning on June 15, 2009 and ending with the last day of BPFH’s fiscal year containing that date;

 

(xi) BPFH will disclose the amount, nature, and justification for the offering during the period beginning on June 15, 2009 and ending with the last day of BPFH’s fiscal year containing that date of any perquisites, as defined in the regulations and guidance established under Section 111 of EESA, whose total value exceeds $25,000 for any employee who is subject to the bonus payment limitations identified in paragraph (viii);

 

(xii) BPFH will disclose whether BPFH, the Board of Directors of BPFH or the compensation committee of BPFH has engaged during the period beginning on June 15, 2009 and ending with the last day of BPFH’s fiscal year containing that date, a compensation consultant; and the services the compensation consultant or any affiliate of the compensation consultant provided during this period;

 

(xiii) BPFH has prohibited the payment of any gross-ups, as defined in the regulations and guidance established under Section 111 of EESA, to the SEOs and the next 20 most highly compensated employees during the period beginning on June 15, 2009 and ending with the last day of BPFH’s fiscal year containing that date;

 

(xiv) BPFH has substantially complied with all other requirements related to employee compensation that are provided in the agreement between BPFH and Treasury, including any amendments;

 

(xv) BPFH has submitted to Treasury a complete and accurate list of the SEOs and the 20 next most highly compensated employees for the current fiscal year and the most recently completed fiscal year, with the non-SEOs ranked in descending order of level of annual compensation and with the name, title, and employer of each SEO and most highly compensated employee identified; and

 

2


(xvi) We understand that a knowing and willful false or fraudulent statement made in connection with this certification may be punished by fine, imprisonment or both. (See, for example, 18 USC 1001).

Executed this 12 th day of March, 2010.

/s/ Timothy L. Vaill

Timothy L. Vaill

Chairman and Chief Executive Officer

Boston Private Financial Holdings, Inc.

/s/ David J. Kaye

David J. Kaye

Executive Vice President, Chief Financial Officer

Boston Private Financial Holdings, Inc.

 

3